Avatar: Rites of Passage

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 1: Roku

*****

The warmth from the yellow sun trickled down onto the courtyard, tickling the grass and trees as the wind danced gently across. There I stood, on the front steps of my residence, enjoying such a fine day. I could hear the sounds of the wind sailing through the leaves, birds chirping from above, and the voice of my friend calling out to me, "Come on, Roku, are you ready? Don't just be standing there all day!"

I turned my head to the source of the voice, and there he was. Sozin, crown prince to the Fire Nation and my lifelong friend, standing there waiting for me. He half-posed in the courtyard, already with his shirt stripped off. His developing muscles shined as brightly and clearly as the day. "Come on, we'll see who wins the game this time," he stated, brushing a few strands of his neatly trimmed hair away from his eyes. Like the rest of the Fire Nation's inhabitants, Prince Sozin tied back a bit of the hair on the back of his head, except the pin to keep it together was an official royal crest.

I shrugged. "If you insist," I replied, removing my outermost layer and my shoes. Unlike Sozin, I wasn't one to show off like that. I might be from an aristocratic family, but Sozin was royalty. While we were best friends and treated each other like brothers, I still had utmost respect for the one who would soon preside over me. I loosened my red shirt, leaving the top undone, and rolled up my dark brown pant legs. "So, same rules apply as before, yes?" I asked, getting into position across from Sozin.

Sozin nodded, getting into a wider, crouched stance. "Only weapon allowed is fire and first person goes down loses," he explained, his golden orange eyes flashing at me.

I got down into my posture as well. It was a game that most Fire Nation children were aware of: fire wrestling. Instead of using fists and feet, we used our fire bending to attack each other. It was meant to strengthen our fire manipulation abilities and general movements. The first person to lose their balance would lose the game. Throughout our battles, Sozin and I were relatively evenly matched. But given that Sozin often had some trick up his sleeve, predicting his moves was not easy at all.

As soon as that thought left my mind, a hail of fireballs rained down on me. I dodged and leapt as quickly as I could, hoping to avoid them. My eyes alternated from the fire storm to Sozin, whose body moved gracefully through the air, his arms and legs whipping out in rhythm as orange hues shot out his hands and feet. In fire bending, we were taught that offence was the key strategy, and one's strength was in how relentless one was in pursuing their foes. Seeing Sozin in this game alone, I could tell not only was he a master at it, but relied heavily on it to achieve his victory over me.

But wait, Sozin, you forgot one thing. I could fire bend too, and it was fine time that I matched your ferocity. Twisting around, I let another hail of fire go past me, the heat nearly lighting up my skin and almost scorching my clothing. But as I regained balance, I turned to Sozin and unleashed my own barrage of fire. I adhered to the basic steps taught by our mentors, calmly repeating every technique I learned throughout the years as I felt the fire rush through my arms and into the air. An orange wall of projectiles zoomed towards the Fire prince. While I wasn't nearly as competitive as Sozin, I didn't want to ease up either. We were always taught that giving our best effort was the best way to show respect, so for sure I unleashed everything for my best friend.

The flurry of activity continued as we switched positions. While I used to be the one near the steps, it was Sozin who backed towards the building, and I was now in the middle of the courtyard. We were still throwing fire at each other through our punches and kicks. I sent a few larger shots, but Sozin dodged them all with ease, even going so far as playing acrobatics and let one slide past his bare back and into the air. "What else was he up to?" I muttered, urgency churning inside me as my urge to win built up.

As he got back on balance, Sozin kicked out his right leg, letting another large fire ball at me. I was caught slightly off guard, barely dodging the shot as I whipped one arm up to direct the blast away while taking a hop back. There was a tree just behind and slightly to the left of me, so I had to alter my landing a bit. I ended up doing a one-legged stand, barely saving my game. Along with fire bending, we were taught martial arts too, and both Sozin and I had enough skills to balance ourselves in almost any situation. So even though it was an improvised move, it wasn't anything I couldn't handle, right?

But something in Sozin's expression told me he was onto me, as that twinkle in his eye and his mischievous grin made things a bit uncomfortable. I scrambled to get back into position, but it was too late. Sozin did a double spin kick, aiming two fire balls straight at my head. As I tried to dodge, I could feel my balance slipping from me as I tumbled backwards. My bare heel bumped into a tree root and my arms flailed in the air. The only thing I could see as my back tilted was my friend rushing up to me.

But my back never met the ground, as something lodge into my leg, right at the joint behind my knee. I craned my neck to see Sozin standing there, one fist balled up ready to send flames into my face. Dang it, he got me, I thought. But as unpredictable as the shot was, the game ended just as surprisingly when Sozin released his grip and let me crumple to the ground. My body seemed lifeless as it flopped onto the soft green bed below. I lifted my head just in time to see Sozin straighten his body, dropping his arms to the side as he smugly announced, "Looks like I win again, Roku."

I shook my head, my eyes set into the blue above me. Sozin, always the crafty one, made me fall for another one of his tricks again. I knew him my entire life, and still I could never guess where some of his tricks came from. But I couldn't let him get all the credit, right? "Are you kidding? The tree root did all the work!"I retorted, lifting my head and signalling to the brown object embedded into the ground near my foot.

Nonetheless, Sozin held his hand before me. I grabbed it, feeling his strong grip as I was hoisted back to my feet. Today, I genuinely thought the game would be in my favour, but once again I underestimated the brain of my best friend. "Nice one, Sozin," I congratulated him, patting him on the back. Together, we strolled out of the courtyard. It was just another typical day in my life with the Fire Prince, my closest peer throughout my childhood. For us both, we knew this friendship was one that would last forever.

*****

"Why aren't you packed yet, all powerful Avatar? Come on, show me how it's done using all four kinds of bending?" the only voice echoing through my room was that of my best friend. Sozin took a step through the doorframe and suddenly broke out a bunch of random moves, supposedly representing the four elements.

But I didn't really have the energy to look up, as the Fire Sages' announcement was still fresh in my mind. The small candles at the corners of my room wavered slightly as I replayed the scene again and again. It was my sixteenth birthday a few days ago, and all my family and close friends joined me in celebrating. Being a member of nobility meant I had extravagant balls for important dates like this, and Sozin was invited to join. It didn't hurt that we were born on the same day, so the royal family also chipped in with the event. We had just exited the house and into the courtyard, and immediately my eyes scanned the crowd for that girl I had always fancied. She was positioned a few rows back to my right, and upon seeing me she turned away, a crimson hue spreading onto her face. I tried to smile back, and nearly fell down the steps in the process. Had it not been for Sozin's quick reflexes, my main birthday present would be a series of cuts and bruises.

Yet the second my head was levelled, the Fire Sages showed up. They were the religious authority in the Fire Nation, and usually conducted wedding or funeral proceedings. I heard they were also in charge of coronation ceremonies, and in advising and assisting the royal family. The five marched in formation, striding in wearing their traditional red robes and caps. Upon seeing their presence, Sozin became quite worried. "Did something happen to my father?" I recalled him asking. The Fire Lord had fallen ill just recently, and while his conditions weren't serious, there was cause for concern.

But the Fire Sages soon dismissed Sozin, waving him off as they informed the crowd that the identity of the next Avatar was about to be unveiled. That got everyone talking, as a wave of chattering and whispering perked from each corner. But the biggest surprise came when they turned to me, looking me in the eye and stated, "It is our honour to serve you, Avatar Roku." With that, they all dropped down to their knees, hunched their backs, touched their foreheads to the ground, and not moving a muscle.

I was shocked into silence. It was like lightning had struck, and I froze completely while my jaw dropped to the ground. Immediately, every member of the crowd followed suit and kowtowed to me as well. I could see Sozin from the corner of my left eye. He stood in surprise for a moment, not knowing what to believe as his best friend had just been announced as the guardian of the entire world. It had been sixteen years or so since the last Avatar, a very powerful woman from the Earth Kingdom named Kyoshi, had passed away. And now, I was asked to fill her shoes, a massive responsibility given the achievements that Avatar had. Nonetheless, Sozin conformed to the group as well and got to his knees. There was complete silence as my body felt faint, too stunned to even react. Around me, the world spun as every element seemed to rush at me. I could feel the blood rushing in and out of my head, not knowing what to do with this information.

The past few days had been a daze for me, as I received various congratulations from friends and family, but mostly the Fire Sages kept them at bay. After a quick test of my fire bending, they realized that I was advanced enough to go directly to the next element. They told me to pack my essentials while they contacted the closest Air Temple to arrange for my air bending lessons. But when they said only the essentials, they were not straying far from the meaning of that phrase. No valuables were to be taken, nothing that indicated my status in the Fire Nation, and as little family relics as possible.

And now, with Sozin peering over me, I truly had nothing left to do. "I started packing, but then the Fire Sages said I won't need any worldly possessions anymore." I told my friend as he continued holding that awkward pose in front of me.

Sozin's enthusiastic attitude drooped after my comment. Taking a seat next to me on my bed, I could feel him gauging me. I had been downcast and alone in my room for the last few hours already, knowing that this was to be my last day in the Fire Nation. "It happened so fast," I continued, "Everything is going to be different now."

Then suddenly, Sozin did the unthinkable, even to his best friend. His hands reached for the top of his head, and in one smooth motion, pulled out the pin fastening the royal head piece. He lifted the ornament off his hair and handed it to me. "Here, I hope at least you're allowed to have this," the Fire Prince handed me the horn-like object.

I turned my eyes to his palm, and was in disbelief. "But this is a royal artefact," I sputtered, "It's supposed to be worn by the Crown Prince." Everyone knew how Sozin, being the oldest son of the Fire Lord, never left home without this head piece. Its circular mould with two horn-like protrusions on each side signified royal-in-waiting, and only members of royalty were allowed to parade publicly with it. So for Sozin to gladly give the piece away to me, I wasn't sure if I should even accept it.

But Sozin persisted, shoving the piece into my hand. "I want you to have it," he insisted, his tone filled with sincerity. I looked into his eyes and saw that he meant what he said. Given that it might be years before I returned, he wanted to offer something to signify our lifelong friendship. And if it meant sacrificing the head piece, then so be it.

After giving it some thought, I finally plucked it from his hands. The cool metallic feel resonated through me, rejuvenating me as I wrapped my fingers around it. I had always wondered what it would be like to see Sozin's coronation ceremony, but it was almost like Sozin had wanted to crown me himself. Instead of a royal ceremony, the Fire Prince had just dubbed me: Avatar Roku. Nodding, I lifted the piece to the top of my head, feeling for where my hair had been tied and slipping it on. I fastened it with the long red pin, and it was finally complete. Thank you, Sozin, I thought to myself.

Then, we both got up and faced each other. We each formed a fist with our right hands and pressed it into the palm of our left hands. We took a deep bow, signifying the beginning of this long journey of my realization as my world's keeper.

*****

"Sozin, or should I say, Fire Lord?" I greeted my friend as I entered through the main doors of the throne room. I had been gone for a dozen years, and my journey took me to places that I had never imagined before. My training had been intense, learning all the necessary moves of each bending style, while exposing myself to traditions and other customs of cultures I had never seen firsthand before. It was bitter work, but the results were worth it. I now mastered all the elements, and was ready to settle into my role.

I stared up onto the throne, and there was my friend. Just like me, he was no longer the goofy teenager I knew when we last saw each other. He had his red royal robes on, his posture straight and tall while his eyes gazed over the hall. And like me, he had also grown a beard, the hair lining the side of his jaw before ending in a tip under his chin. "Customarily my subjects bow before greeting me," he stated monotonously, casting a somewhat unimpressed eye at me. I was surprised at this, as he was never this formal or serious before. Had he changed that much after my departure? My mouth dropped slightly as the muscular man stepped down from his throne and marched to me.

We were at level as he stared his orange eyes into mine. Despite being a bit taller than Sozin, I could tell he was the authority figure here, and he didn't hesitate in exerting his power. I pondered what that tight, almost cold face represented when the Fire Lord suddenly relaxed his entire pose. "But you're the exception," he concluded. With that, he parted his arms and pulled me into a tight embrace. Sensing that he still saw me as his friend, even with the changes in our statuses, I couldn't help but return the hug.

When we finally released each other, Sozin got a good look at me, seeing a face he had not seen in over a decade. "I heard you entered the capital yesterday, and would be visiting the palace today. That's why I didn't hesitate in asking our chefs to cook the most luxurious meal we'll have since my coronation. It'll include most of the favourites we had when we were younger," he described, "We got all sorts of questions for you on your journey, but I guess we can talk on the way to the dining hall." Sozin lifted an arm, gesturing at the door while nudging my shoulder. "Shall we?"

We strolled happily out the throne room. In the hallway, Sozin barraged me with questions on my first stop. "I heard this from the Fire Sages a few days after you left. They told me you went to the Southern Air Temple," he recalled, "the Air Nomads were quite spiritual, aren't they? So what was their approach to bending?"

I smiled. The Air Nomads were among the most interesting people I had ever met, and it didn't hurt that I seemed to have left quite an impression on one young air bender during my stay there. "The Air Nomads favour a harmonious approach. When we were still training on our fire bending, our mentors told us that fire is explosive, and that the strength of each blow must match our inner aggression. But for air bending, it's the exact opposite. When one air bends, one must be in perfect harmony with one's mind, so much so that all the energy in one's body is focused." I explained.

Sozin nodded, trying to absorb this new-found knowledge. Although I was sure he might have trouble understanding the different culture, I was genuinely impressed at the new curiosity he showed. I guessed that by being the Fire Lord, it was important for him to know the other cultures, in case he ever had to interact with them, or so I believed. "So what else did you experience there?" he asked, "Did you meet any new people?"

I couldn't help but throw my head back and recall the first air bender I met. He was one of a kind, and truly amazed me with both his enthusiasm and skill. "Oh yes, there was this one air bender, and I truly bonded quite well with him..."

Learning basic air techniques was the hardest thing for me. I had to understand this new culture's every way of doing things before I could start the new element. For example, it took me a week just to breathe correctly, as the monks told me that one could not manipulate air outside of the body if one could not even control the air within. It was quite difficult, as the Fire Nation taught us to feel the energy churning and use it with force, while the Air Nomads saw breathing as a way to calm the energy. Given that they were a pacifist culture, they preferred avoiding conflict with anyone. Thus, their bending directed force away rather than focused it, which was very different from fire.

But after another few weeks of learning basic steps such as body positioning and air release, my mentors finally decided that I was ready to do something more advanced. So, grouping me with a bunch of young air benders, many of whom years younger than me, we each picked up a glider staff and headed for the skies. My partner for the day was a young, taller than average air bender who had become quite close to me. Like all of his classmates, he had on the traditional orange and yellow air bender robes, his head shaved bald, and was a strict vegetarian, as not to harm animal life. His name: Gyatso.

As we spread our wings and took to the sky, I got a new feeling of the air. It was not the first time I flew before, having done so for a few years already on my pet dragon Fang, but it was the first time I did it without his help. As the air breezed around me, throwing about my long hair and whipping at my set of air bender clothing, I could feel the freedom that most monks spoke of when air gliding. The Fire Sages once told me the Air Nomads were a relatively carefree people, tending to blend harmoniously with nature rather than going with strict rules and guidelines. And seeing how happy my classmates were as their gliders sailed past me and into the clouds, I could truly understand why.

Taking a gander in front of me, just in the right side of my vision, I could see Gyatso flying at a steady pace. For someone younger than me, Gyatso was a true expert at the element, completing many of the techniques needed to elevate to the position of an air bending master. The monks told me that to achieve the master status one must have completed thirty-six main air bending skills, as evaluated by the senior council. Should the council deem the techniques satisfactory, the status would be bestowed upon one by having one remove their clothing and etching on the famous blue arrow tattoos.

But seeing my new friend fly so freely, my mischievous side took over, and I decided to show off a little to him. "Hey Gyatso, you want to see a new glider trick?" I called. And as he turned his head, I pulled the glider up and made a wide arc, doing two perfect back flip before returning to a level flying position.

Not to be outdone, Gyatso came up with a trick of his own. "Check this out!" He replied, flipping the glider around so that he was now on top. With some nifty acrobatics, he jumped onto the back staff and crouched down, teetering on the glider while taking the flight's control with his feet. This new air-surfing technique, one nobody had seen before, really amazed me as my friend handled the difficult manoeuvre with ease. Even before I joined his class, many others said Gyatso was a bit of an oddball, tending to do things in an unorthodox way. In fact, he developed new versions of basic techniques we learned, showing a sense of risk taking that was unique even among the freewheeling Air Nomads.

But the wind was a factor in these high-altitude places, as the expert air bender soon lost his balance and teetered off the staff. Seeing his flailing, I had to intervene before he fell to his doom. Curving the glider hard downward, I made an emergency descend and swooped below Gyatso. Luckily, I managed to catch him as he landed with a thud above me. The heavier weight of the glider made it difficult to handle, but I did everything possible to get to the landing site, which was a lower ledge of the temple just ahead of me. Gritting my teeth, I struggled for control, hoping to make it intact.

But the extra body on top was too great, and it forced a situation where the air currents could no longer flow by effectively. I could feel the glider slow down as we lost altitude. Wobbling involuntarily, we could see the ledge come closer and closer. There were still people getting off their gliders there, and we could only hope that they could get out of our way as Gyatso and I braced for a crash-landing.

"You crashed in front of all your classmates? What did the monks say?" Sozin chortled, trying hard to stifle his laughter. Not even when we were kids did this type of catastrophe happen, so upon hearing that story, he couldn't help but ask for more.

I smiled. "I think they truly found us an odd couple. He was a daredevil type, always trying to do something dangerous. I was the Avatar-in-training, and everyone expected me to take my lessons seriously. So to see us play around like that, I think it surprised them," I replied, shrugging, "But you know what? I'm glad I met Gyatso, and I think he'll be a great friend. Should I ever collaborate with the Air Nomads, I hope he can get involved, as he'll be really helpful for any future situations."

Sozin nodded astutely. I tried to glance over, but didn't manage to read any expressions. While Gyatso had indeed become a part of my Avatar training experience, I was never going to replace Sozin with Gyatso. After a dozen years, Sozin was still my best friend, and nothing was going to change that. Lifting his head, Sozin turned to me again and asked for my next destination. "I believe if we go according to the Avatar cycle, your next element would be water. What was it like with the Water Tribes?"

*****

The ferocious fires of an Avatar's fury blasted through the open skies as I rode Fang all the way into the Fire Palace. As Avatar, part of my responsibility was to go around the world and check on the citizens of as many areas as possible. Sometimes, it might involve visiting places I had been to before, like the Southern Air Temple where my friend Gyatso was now a recognized master and mentor to younger air benders. But I must also go to lesser-known places like smaller towns in the Earth Kingdom. I had just finished a tour of the Northern Water Tribe, where I had spent the most of my time in training. Given that water was the polar opposite of my natural element of fire, learning water bending was extremely difficult for me. But during my final few months there, I had not only matched, but surpassed many of the experienced water bending masters there, to the point where I could create waves that could reach the top of their buildings.

But the happy memories of water bending stories came to a crashing end as I left the tribe and headed south. I flew past a few Earth Kingdom towns near the border with the Fire Nation, and I couldn't believe my eyes. Most Earth Kingdom towns usually had a front gate, and this one was no exception. But draped over this gate was a huge red flag with a black flame insignia in the middle. For some reason, this Earth Kingdom town, which was only a day's walk from the border, was claimed by the Fire Nation. "No, how can this be?" I muttered, signalling to Fang to descend, "Was Sozin truly serious?"

I strolled in, trying to remain as calm as possible. Being the Avatar meant security forces in each respective country allowed me to enter without further question, and it was no different in this town. The Fire Nation soldiers all stood on guard as I marched in, my face twisting in concern. The wind had suddenly died down, and even the birds in the surrounding area were silenced as I recalled Sozin's words from over a decade back. It was during my wedding party, when I proposed to Ta Min, the girl I had a crush on since I was a teenager. When she accepted, I was overjoyed, and immediately made plans for the ceremony. As expected, my best friend was invited to be the best man. But shortly after we had taken our vows, Sozin pulled me aside and made a proposal of his own.

"Right from the start, I was destined to be Fire Lord. And although we didn't always know it, you were destined to be the Avatar," Sozin described as we strolled on a balcony of the wedding hall. It was evening, and the bright sun was edging near the horizon. Orange and yellow splashed across the skies as wedding guests grabbed food and drinks while laughing merrily with each other below us. I was with Ta Min still receiving well-wishes from people when Sozin insisted that he needed to speak to me. Ta Min reluctantly agreed, and that was where I found myself. "It's an amazing stroke of fate we know each other so well, isn't it? Together, we can do anything." Sozin beamed, that mischievous twinkle I saw so often when we were young returning to his eye.

"Our nation is enjoying an unprecedented time of peace and wealth. Our people are happy, and we're so fortunate in so many ways," Sozin continued, moving closer to the edge of the balcony. From behind, I stared at him in suspicion, as I was unsure of where he wanted to go with the argument. Sozin's body blocked the sun's rays, engulfing him into a silhouette as he made his suggestion, "I've been thinking, we should share our prosperity with the rest of the world. In our hands is the most successful empire in history, and it's time we expanded it!" he finished with a flourish. He tilted his head back to me, letting in just enough light to catch his excited and determined expression.

I gasped. Surely Sozin was joking, right? What would happen to the balance of the world should this plan succeed? Moreover, what would happen to the people and their cultures should we force our Fire Nation ways upon them? Immediately, I protested his decision. "The four nations were meant to be just that: four!" I insisted.

Sozin refused to believe me, claiming there were other possibilities to consider. But I reaffirmed my stance. "There are no possibilities," I reiterated firmly, my brows creasing in anger and disgust, "this is the last I want to hear about this."

But it wasn't the last that I would hear about it, as Sozin had proceeded with his plans anyway. I strolled through the village, as it was as quiet as the Fire Nation royal burial sites, the Dragon Bone Catacombs. Not a soul was on the streets as Fire Nation soldiers marched through, peering through doors and barking orders to the civilians. As dust and sand swirled around me, I figured out what went on. Not saying another word, I immediately charged out of the town. I hopped back onto Fang and headed straight for the Fire Palace.

I could feel my blood rush through my body, my heart pounding from my chest as I shot through the halls. Not even bothering to greet the guards standing outside the throne room, I shoved the doors open and stomped up to my friend. "I've seen the colonies, Sozin. How dare you occupy Earth Kingdom territory?" I demanded, seething with anger as the smoke barely cleared from the force I exerted onto the doors.

But Sozin remained undeterred, his voice cold and defiant as he retorted, "How dare you, a citizen of the Fire Nation, address your Fire Lord this way? Your loyalty is to our nation first and anything less makes you a traitor." The flames lining the centre aisle flickered and waved, in fear of Sozin's words as he glared at me.

Realizing that two powerhouses were about to collide, I had to do everything in my power to ease the tension. While my duty as the Avatar was the preserve the balance of the world, I must also do it in ways that caused the least harm. "Don't do this, Sozin. Don't challenge me, it will only end badly," I warned, my tone lowering and darkening just as quickly as I flashed my deathly serious eyes back at him, "It's over."

Instantly, I turned around to leave. I still had to go back to that Earth Kingdom town to convince the inhabitants there that I would help them out of the situation. But as I neared the door, I could feel a tremendous amount of heat roaring from behind me. Darn it, I thought, Sozin's on the attack. Thinking fast, I drilled myself into the ground, using earth bending to travel underground while escaping Sozin's raging flames. Feeling my way underneath, I managed to sneak up from right behind Sozin and reappeared onto the surface. Catching him off guard, I blindsided him with a vicious air blast.

"Oof!" Sozin yelled as he was slammed back-first onto the front doors, before crumpling to the ground. Taking advantage of his weak state, I stomped hard on the ground, forcing up a gigantic rock pillar which hooked Sozin up by his robes and pinned him to the ceiling.

Then it was sheer pandemonium as I reached deep into my Avatar training. Clasping my hands together, I concentrated hard as I activated the most powerful aspect of the Avatar's arsenal: the Avatar State. After returning to the Fire Nation, I didn't head straight for the capital city; rather, the Fire Sages pulled me into one of their temples on Crescent Island and trained me on this very important technique. I had minimal progress even with months of training, but I chose to employ a shortcut by using the solstice sun to boost my powers. The trick worked alright, but I had no control over it. My body seemed lifeless as it floated in midair, all the while the temple exploded, with the roof blasted off and debris everywhere. Luckily, one of the sages freed me with a mirror and chastised me for my lack of patience. Otherwise, even greater damage would be done to the area.

But no such lack of control here as I let the Avatar State take over, showing off its power as the throne room exploded, blasting the roof off the same way it did on Crescent Island. Sozin was nothing but a lifeless rag doll as the winds whipped about and threw him around. Luckily, the rock pillar was strong enough to keep him up, or the Fire Lord would surely fall to his doom. As the debris settled, I formed a minor tornado and used it to propel myself to his level. I hovered before him, staring him straight in the eye. He was no longer defiant, and trembled slightly, perhaps in fear as I shot daggers into him. "I'm sparing you, Sozin. I'm letting you go in the name of our past friendship," I explained, spitting out each word clearly and concisely, ""But I warn you, even a single step out of line will result in your permanent end!" I declared, drilling the message into him.

Sozin's face twitched a couple of times, not knowing what to say or even how to react. Never had a Fire Lord been placed in such a situation, and part of me did realize the scarring Sozin must have received when I showed him I meant business. Nonetheless, I turned around and left him alone, returning to my duties and letting him deal with this dilemma. Despite telling him that our friendship was still intact, and that I would spare him because of it, deep down I knew that things would never be the same again.

*****

"Everyone, evacuate immediately, please!" I heard Ta Min shout to the denizens of our island as the mountain above us displayed its full fury. It was just another peaceful night when the volcano that towered over our homes suddenly rumbled. Within minutes, rocks and ash raced down the hillside, smothering the streets and threatened to destroy our homes. Ta Min and I managed to get out to the pier, where I instructed her to start loading the boats to get everyone to safety while I stayed back and protect our homes as much as I could. Facing the fiery menace, I created a huge air ball around me, redirecting much of the dust and soot away from the town as I prepared my battle.

Taking a crouched stance, I summoned a huge slab of rock, riding it like a wave as I met the incoming lava. The orange glowing liquid poured its way down the cliff, but I was intent on using this earth to block its path, or at least direct it away from our town. It became increasingly difficult to see or breathe properly as particulates filled the air, the contamination starting to choke my lungs. Meanwhile, the thick stream of lava closed in on my position, trapping me like a rodent. Thinking quickly, I split my arms to the sides, using earth bending to create two long trenches to take the lava into the water. Hopefully, it would buy me more time while diverting it from the town site.

But the earthen trenches and dykes would not last as another large slab of rock gave way. The volcano shot more orange liquid into the air, this time reaching nearly the clouds as it raced down the sides. Sensing the larger threat looming, I raced up whatever little ground that was left before leaping into the air. Going deep into my Avatar abilities, I took in a huge breath, sucking in the cool air from higher altitudes before aiming it right at the lava. In one swift motion, I blew it all out, sending a chill down to the lava before solidifying it completely. It created a second dyke while I tried to find another way to stop them. The volcano was not letting back now as toxic fumes sprayed from various cracks on the ground. From above, I could hear Fang squealing as the gases sprayed up to his position. "It's alright Fang, get out of here!" I shouted, covering my face as I coughed into my left arm while air bending the toxins away with my right, "I'm fine!"

But the smoke, lava, debris and toxins all came at once, making any chance for survival unlikely. Swinging around once more, I activated the Avatar State, the power of my past souls coursing through my body as I slammed my fist into the ground, shooting a line of rocks through the crater of the volcano and into the other side. With two exits for the lava, it should create for an easier flow, and hopefully less damage. I was about to relax when suddenly, the second crater on the other side of the island also gave way, letting another stream of lava into the air. Helplessness descended upon me as I realized the island was doomed. With the amount of destruction this could cause, I realized that all hope was lost, as I could not handle two volcanic eruptions by myself.

Just then, a large shadow loomed over me. "Need a hand, old friend?" a familiar voice called. I turned my head just as the smoke cleared, showing a face I thought I would never see again. Riding before me on his own dragon was Fire Lord Sozin, my former best friend. "There's not a moment to waste." He stated seriously.

Instantly, he pulled me onto his dragon and together, we rode to the second site. I was truly surprised by this gesture, as I had not spoken to him for twenty-five years since our battle. During this time, Sozin had conceded some territory, returning a few to where they originated from, and kept the military activities to a minimum. But because of the huge mistrust we had, we refused to even address each other. Even in meetings with high ranking Fire Nation officials that involved the Avatar's advice, Sozin would usually show up but depart after a few minutes, leaving most of the negotiation and agreement signings to his assistants and ministers. So, to see him actively assist my island during this disaster, I couldn't help but be relieved. "How did you know about this?" I asked him.

The dragon halted just over the edge of the second crater. Sozin signalled us to dismount as he described, "This eruption is nothing I've ever seen. Never in my life have I witnessed a volcano display this much fury. The Fire Palace may be a hundred miles away, but I could feel the tremors all the way in my bedroom. As the Fire Lord, I can't possibly sit idly while it destroyed the land, especially when it's your home."

I nodded and hurried into position. I took a deep breath, mustering all the strength inside me before pressing my hands down to the dirt. Sensing the liquids inside the lava, I used water bending to press it back to a level position. Beside me, Sozin used a modified version of fire bending to suck in the heat given off by the orange liquid. He brought the steam into him while pointing his other arm into the air, diverting the heat and cooling the lava instantly. The result was new rocks being formed, further blocking the lava from doing damage while decreasing the amount from inside the volcano from rushing out.

For a few minutes, there was significant success, as one side of the second crater was already under control. Even when Sozin accidently slipped off the crater, there was no worry between us, as I stomped hard onto the rocks, creating a horizontal pillar for him to balance on as we continued our work. "Don't breathe the toxic gas," I warned him as we rushed to stop the lava on the other side while air bending the toxins away from us.

But in my attempts to rush us both through, I miscalculated the unpredictability of a volcanic eruption. I ended up stepping right into a blast of toxin fumes, smothering my face with grey and spraying straight into my nostrils. Right then, I knew my time was up, as there was no way I could save the island and get out in time for treatment. My knees buckled as everything before me became a blur. "It's too much," I stuttered. Knowing that the fumes had already begun their infection into my lungs, the only way I could get out in time was with Sozin. "Please," I pleaded, reaching for him while gasping for air.

But Sozin stood there, not making a single move. Although I couldn't see his face clearly, I must have imagined his expression as he told me in a cruel, monotonous tone, "Without you, all my plans are suddenly possible. I have a vision for the future, Roku."
Just then, he signalled in his dragon, which slid in neatly beside him. Sozin climbed on board, glaring at me one last time. His eyes were cold and emotionless, not showing any mercy as he left me to die on that volcano. My coughs turned into wheezes as the dark dragon sped off, exiting the volcanic cloud and into the night sky. The only things I could hear as my eyes dimmed were the volcanic debris rushing down, and the final shrieks of my dragon. Fang dashed in, engulfing me in his body as the hot material rumbled down to us. Soon, we would be buried, our lives in this world gone.

Avatar Kyoshi, my predecessor, had been a fantastic advisor to me throughout my time here, but it was time to meet her on the other side. As my final seconds ticked down, my entire life flashed before me. All my childhood memories with Sozin, all my training in each element, all the new friends I met, like Gyatso, all my times throughout the world and how I interacted with the people, and above all my lovely wife Ta Min, who I could only hope had reached safety by now. My former best friend had changed into a person I could not longer accept. He had never been cold and ruthless before, and I could only imagine what the world would be like when the Fire Nation ruled everything. If only I had acted sooner, then maybe I could have stopped this disaster, I thought as darkness filled me. In my last bit of energy, only one more thought crossed my mind.

My name is Avatar Roku. That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Rightest Rachel]

The detail was great. It went throw things and thought process. It was very fast but very detailed. You made a good impression of manipulating time and detail. I understood most things, as you explained everything well.

[Samantha the Lesbian]

I never have seen many stories about Roku-sama, so I must say, kudos to you for going off on a different angle from everyone else! Keep up the awesome writing!

[Gifted]

I don't know this series though I have heard of it. Even though I was basically clueless about everything, it was a very good story and was extremely fascinating. You put in enough detail that I was able to follow along without any prior knowledge.

[Rightest Rachel]

Okay, here is the second chapter from CanadaCowboys story
Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 2: Hakoda

*****

The entire Water Tribe froze and stared skyward as the grey clouds and small snowflakes were contaminated with black ash and soot. The dark flakes intermingled with the snow already on the ground as complete silence descended onto the land. A bunch of Water Tribe warriors, clad in their traditional blue parkas and dark boots, all gathered at the forefront as several dark objects grew nearer. “Hakoda, this could be an invasion. Should we get into defensive position?” one man turned to ask me.

“Yes, we must get ready,” I responded, pointing at various directions and directed my people to each place. It wasn’t easy being the leader of the Southern Water Tribe in these times of war. The Fire Nation had waged this battle against the world for nearly a century now, and we were amongst the last people not to be entirely conquered by their vicious army. As a result of this, the Fire Nation often sent in troops to raid our tribe, depleting us of our resources, and taking many of our best water benders prisoners. Their cruelty and ruthlessness were so great that suspicion of the Fire Nation ran deep in our tribe, so much so that many older warriors willingly volunteered to defend us, even as their fighting abilities were limited and would most likely become victims themselves.

And this raid was no exception as the Fire Nation boats slammed into our snow and ice-covered land. The familiar red triangular flags, with the sea raven design in the middle, signified one of the most terrifying naval units of the Fire Nation: the Southern Raiders. “Get everyone to safety, take the children inside,” I shouted to the women as blurs of blue rushed past, “Frontline fighters come with me and gather at the waterfront, while backline defenders hold the line at the gates,” I pointed at several snow pits, one of which contained my children Sokka and Katara. Their fun snowball fight was interrupted as the raid began, and I could see Katara race off deeper into our village. She went in the direction of our home, where my wife Kya was at the moment. “Stay safe, alright?” I murmured, taking one last look back before I took off for the water.

Before our team could even line up into formation, the Fire Nation troops charged forward. Bright orange pumped out their fists, contrasting against their dark uniforms and the snowy ground as they roared in fury. The darkly-dressed, masked figures raced our way just as the descending soot thickened, the ocean winds suddenly dying down as we had the battle of our lives at hand. Letting out our own battle cry, our warriors, armed with bladed clubs and spears, advanced to meet our foe, ready to protect our homes.

Fire balls zinged through the polluted air as the Raiders bombarded us, forcing us to change tactics and breaking up our group. Lucky for us, most of our warriors were also trained in hand-to-hand combat. Should their initial long-range fire projectiles miss, we would have a chance to get closer to each Raider, and employed our own set of weapons on them. “They outnumber us, so be careful!” I heard one of my fellow tribesman shout.

Gritting my teeth, I could feel my body’s every muscle tensing. With only the thoughts of my wife and children in my mind, I met my assailant head-on. The impurities in the air made it difficult to see very clearly, but the black helmet and red face protector could not be more evident. The bright flames wavering at his right fist grew hotter and brighter as he swung it towards me. I could feel my surroundings heat up, the snowflakes falling by my head melting instantly as the fire punch came right at my face. Thinking fast, I had to do something to divert that shot.

Using the oldest water bending technique, I turned my defensive manoeuvre into an offensive one as I observed the motion of the soldier’s flaming arm. Despite having no water bending abilities of my own, I was very much aware of my tribe’s water bending training, and constantly incorporated some of their techniques into my battle style. Just as the punch came up, I guided it away by slipping my left hand near the attacker’s elbow and pushed upward. The fire sailed into the air, scorching harmlessly through the cold.

The opened position of the Southern Raider I faced made it perfect for my attack. Ramming my right shoulder into his midsection, I channelled all the energy he had from his attack back against him. The armoured plates clanged as I hoisted him up and hurled him over my shoulder, causing him to sail across the battlefield. I tilted my head around just in time to see the assailant fly head-first into a snow barrier, slumping to the ground as my son pelted him with a snowball. Sokka, always the goofball, I thought.

But the appearance of another Fire Nation soldier brought my attention back onto the battlefield, as double barrel flame shooting sliced through the air and nearly scorched me. I ducked and dodged both shots, the embers trickling to my face and nearly burning my goatee. That only brought the assailant on the offensive as he continued rumbling at me, quickly pushing me near a snow bank. “This isn’t good,” I murmured to myself.

Yet, the white, crunchy material behind me also gave me an idea. What if I used that to disable the fire bender? Getting back into my fighter stance, I waited for his fire attack. Knowing that fire benders usually had a pattern, I could predict what they might employ for their finishing moves. I kept a hawk’s eyes on the attacker, who swung his flaming arms around, repositioning himself before charging at me again.

This time, no such luck for him as I timed the punch perfectly. I stepped in to the flameless side and, using the same trick I did on the first assailant, diverted the fireball into the air. Again I aimed for the defenceless midsection, flipping the Southern Raider over my shoulder and away from me. But this time, I added a little extra to the attack, as I grabbed the soldier by the armour and shoved him head-first into the snow bank. Only a muffled groan could be heard from within as white fluff tumbled further down, burying his head completely and nullifying the threat. Not bad for an improvised move, I thought.

But the one voice I never expected on the battlefield called for me from above. “Dad, Dad! Please, I think Mom’s in trouble!” My eyes shot up just in time to see Katara run up, her hair braids waving as she screeched to a halt on the top of the snow bank, “There’s a man in our house!” She reported, her voice filled with fear and desperation.

My face froze, the sounds of the battlefield nothing but slurs as I focused in on the little girl before me. Earlier, we knew the Southern Raiders outnumbered our warriors by a fair margin, but we handled ourselves surprisingly well. Even without all of our fighters, we managed to keep them in check; it was as if we had an even number of combatants on the battlefield. But my daughter’s message made me realize why, as the Southern Raiders merely split into two groups. One group would battle us to create a distraction while the other entered our village. “Kya!” I managed to eke out the name of my wife, before hurrying back with my daughter. In my mind, only the worst scenarios played themselves out as I wondered what atrocities they had in plan for her.

Everything blew past like a winter storm as I followed my daughter through the village and into our home. My mind was so flustered that I didn’t have time to check if any Fire Nation soldiers marched by. But smoke billowed ominously from a few houses, and I knew they must have gone through here. “Kya, hang on, I’m coming!” I muttered.

But when Katara and I burst through the entrance, the mysterious Fire Nation soldier that Katara mentioned was no longer there. In fact, there was complete silence as my eyes gazed through the darkness. There were only two weak flames lighting the entire chamber, but they were enough to illuminate a body on the floor. “Kya?” I called, gently edging forward and squinting into the room. The body was motionless, but from the dim lighting I could make out a blue parka riddled with scorch marks.

“No, Kya!” I whispered. I charged in and gripped the body, flipping it around and getting a good look at the face. The smell of burnt skin penetrated my nose as dark red and brown patches disfigured the face. The front of the parka was in even worse shape than the back, as fibres and strings tore apart on impact. I took a look under the outermost layer, and saw that she had been burned through and through. “Kya, speak to me. Are you alright?” I asked, slightly shaking the body and slipping a finger under her nose.

There was no response as I could not feel any air exit her nostrils. My arms shook involuntarily as I felt real fear for the first time in my life. Throughout my training with the other Water Tribe warriors, I was told to never be afraid of death. Given that the war had been going on for nearly a century, we were to expect battles with the Fire Nation on a regular basis. I knew all my life that I was to defend my homeland and loved ones, and that carried with me even as I was named tribal chief. But now, seeing the one I loved and cherished the most becoming the latest victim, I was truly devastated.

“Dad? Will Mom be okay?” Katara’s meek voice snapped me out of my trance. I turned to face my daughter, who half-huddled near the entrance, her body split evenly between shadow and light. Her eyes were watery, and there was a slight shiver from her shoulders as Katara’s gloved hands rubbed each other nervously. My mother always said that children were extra sensitive to traumatizing events, and they had a way of knowing even without being told what happened. Seeing the way Katara acted right now, I knew her suspicions were there, and I must do something to diffuse the situation.

“Go get your grandmother, Katara,” I told her, trying to mask my shaky tone with a calm voice, “tell her we need anyone who can heal to come here immediately.” I could only stare on as my daughter left the hut. I could hear the sounds of battle ease as Fire Nation troops withdrew from their raid. This might be a regular, expected battle, but the results were anything but. We might have won the fight, but I lost my greatest treasure.

*****

“Hakoda, here’s what I think will work best in our defence of Chameleon Bay,” I watched my lifelong friend Bato move some boat figurines around, trying to picture our latest attack plan against the Fire Nation navy in my head. This was a strategic location just outside Ba Sing Se, the capital of the Earth Kingdom. So far, the walled city held its own against the Fire Nation’s attacks, including one led by General Iroh, the infamous Dragon of the West. But now, knowing the Fire Nation was on the offensive again, it was only a matter of time before the final Earth kingdom stronghold fell.

I cupped my chin with my left hand, imagining how the ships would handle each location. Everything was just a blur to me, my fellow Water Tribe warriors all blocked out of my vision as I focused on the large map on the ground. Being a Water Tribe chief, I had expertise in not just naval manoeuvres, but also naval interception and combat. In our hands was the largest naval invasion by the Fire Nation navy. We had to do all we could to prevent them from fulfilling their goal before their reinforcements arrived.

Suddenly, Bato, who was to my right, gently nudged my shoulder with his elbow. It snapped me out of my train of thought, just in the midst of complete silence in our tent as I looked up. There was a sight I hadn’t seen in two years. “Sokka!” I greeted my son.

Instinctively, I got to my feet, my knees shaky like gelatine as I took a long glance at the figure standing at the tent’s opening. Even though the entrance was drawn closed, I could still make out the features: dark brown hair tied to a ponytail, blue sleeveless shirt with dark fingerless gloves, dark leggings and brown boots. Add the tan, round face to the mix and it reminded me of my obligation other than a chief and war general: father.

As I approached, I could see Sokka’s determined face weaken, the muscles all relaxing as his emotions took over. “Hi, Dad,” he squeaked out, trying hard to contain himself. Immediately, we pulled each other into a tight embrace. It was two years ago since I left him, telling him that, as the oldest male left, he would have to defend our tribe. He was so young, barely into his teens, but now, he had all grown up. Taller and leaner than the short stubby boy he was when I left, he was ready to fight our foes.

We finally released each other as I took another long look at my son. Although we were still in an important meeting rght now, I didn’t hesitate in bringing him in with us. If he were to succeed me as tribal chief one day, then at least he had to know the ways of battle. “We were just going over some plans to repel the Fire Nation navy,” I told Sokka, “care to stick around and let us finish before I show you some of our equipment?”

Sokka nodded, barely eking out a word as I escorted him to the group currently gathered around the centre map. Despite not saying anything, I was very proud of the progress Sokka had made. In the beginning, he was a determined warrior with limited skills. When I first decided to leave the tribe to fight in the war, Sokka was so intent on coming along that it would meant there would be no more men at the tribe. But I told him that the most important mission for him was to do the best he could to accomplish his mission. “Being a man is knowing where you’re needed the most, and for you right now, that’s here, protecting your sister,” I recalled saying to him.

But there wouldn’t be any worries of protecting the village. Not only did Sokka and Katara do everything in their power to defend themselves, but they also travelled the world helping those affected by the war. Even as the Water Tribe strategists went over the details, my mind was only partially on the planning. My eyes were on my teenage son standing before me, his poise and posture resembling very much the warrior-in-making that he was. One day you’ll be a leader Sokka, I thought, one day.

As the planners finished their explanation, I proceeded to adjourning the meeting and bringing my son outside. “There are some new inventions that I’ve wanted to show you,” I described, taking him away from the war tent and into the open area. The golden sand crunched under our feet as more sea breezes brushed against our skin. The climate at Ba Sing Se was much more moderate than our home in the Southern Water Tribe, meaning most warriors were in shorts sleeves as they worked on the beach. “Take a look at this,” I said, pointing to some large balls.

Sokka’s eyes narrowed as he suspiciously glanced at the dark and round objects. “What the…ugh,” he cried, wrinkling his nose after taking a couple of sniffs, “What’s that smell?” he demanded, his hands shooting up to cover his face.

I chuckled as I dropped to my knees, signaling Sokka to do the same. I pointed to the other side, opposite to the direction where we came from as Bato marched up holding a series of materials. “This bay leads directly to the outskirts of Ba Sing Se, and we’ve been using these tangle mines to stop Fire Nation ships from getting through,” I reached to the top of the container and unscrewed it, opening the drum and letting Sokka get a peek inside. Sokka cocked an eyebrow as he reared his head towards the opening, still unsure of what to expect from its stinky interior as he squinted into the darkness below.

Before the stench swept over Sokka’s body, Bato edged forward and poured in the secret formula for the mine. “Your father invented tangle mines himself,” he mentioned as the thick liquid with various chunks clunked its way to the bottom.

Bato moved on to fill another mine once the one we were at was full. Sokka, seemingly understanding the purpose behind this invention, dipped his head forward again. “Destructive, buoyant, and…” he listed off, taking another glimpse, “Ah, argh, terrible smelling.” He concluded as another wave of the nasty odor shot into his face.

I smiled and nodded. “Very perceptive,” I responded as I screwed the cap back on, “the mines are filled with skunk fish and seaweed. When a ship detonates the mine, the seaweed tangles up the propeller, and the foul smell forces people to abandon the ship,” I took out my short sword and scooped away the solution that overflowed from the cap being squeezed on, scraping it off the sides and flicking it to the sand, “I call it, the stink and sink.” I concluded, beaming proudly at my son.

Upon hearing that, Sokka burst into giggles, clutching his stomach and pointing at the tangle mine as he complemented the joke. From the other mine, I could hear Bato remark, “You’re definitely your father’s son.” I looked on at Sokka as I pondered all the things that happened in the past years. Sokka was born, raised, and lived in a state of fear thanks to the Fire Nation raids on our village. Even simple pleasures like having a family to enjoy time with were rare due to the constant state of emergency preparedness I had to get the village into. But now, to see my son and I laugh to the same jokes, it truly brought me a renewed sense of pride, reminding me how important my role as a family man was.

But our joy was short-lived as one of the lookout warriors rushed to me. “Hakoda, our scouts have spotted four Fire Nation ships.” He reported. That got the attention of everyone as the men around me all got to their feet, waiting for the next set of orders.

I stared around me, doing a quick count of the people while strategizing more in my head. Slipping my blade back onto my waist, I turned to my best friend. “Bato, get these mines loaded up,” I instructed him, knowing that the mines were crucial to our success. Turning to everyone else, I declared, “The rest of you men, prepare for battle!”

As the warriors rushed off, my gaze was on the horizon. If the Fire Nation was intent on making their final assault, then we were intent to make things very difficult for them. But before I could take another step, Sokka asked, “What should I do, Dad?”

My gaze dipped downward at the figure still kneeling on the sand. His face was droopy and his back slightly hunched. It was a scene I had seen from the day I left our village to fight in the war. Sokka was determined to tag along, but I told him to stay at the village. He was so disappointed at first that his entire body pretty much deflated. And now, knowing that there was another battle, he probably felt he would be rejected again.

But I made sure that didn’t happen as I stared right into his eyes. In a clear voice, I told him, “Aren’t you listening? I said the rest of you men get ready for battle.” Just to make my point extra clear, I tilted my head slightly to the direction of the water.

Immediately, I could see Sokka’s face light up as he heard my orders. Nodding enthusiastically, he bounded off to the waterfront, intermingling with the other warriors as we waited for the Fire Nation fleet. It felt so awkward that my first bonding experience in years with Sokka had to be in a battle, but it felt so right at the same time. He would be our chief one day, and it was only right that I observed his skills. I must also test out his progress, just to see where he was at. As I saw him set the boats with the others, I knew this was his time to shine. “If peace were to be restored in the world, it would be up to my children and the Avatar,” I decided, “they are the new blood, and they are the new hope.”

Our preparation went throughout the afternoon and into the evening, just in time for the Fire Nation navy to arrive. Our watchmen announced that the naval force was at the edge of the horizon, creeping that much closer to the bay. Receiving the message, I trotted back down the beach to find my son Sokka. Even with the limited light at dusk, I could make out the figure of my son grabbing his final equipment. “Ready to go knock some Fire Nation heads?” I asked as Sokka picked up his blade and club.

“You don’t know how much this means to me, Dad,” Sokka replied, standing up straight and staring right into my eyes. Even with his determined tone, I could sense some hesitance in his voice, almost like he was afraid he might not live up to expectations, “I’ll make you proud, and I’ll finally prove to you what a great warrior I am.”

Hearing that, I placed a hand on his shoulder. “Sokka, you don’t have to prove anything to me. I’m already proud of you, and I’ve always known that you’re a great warrior,” I assured him. It was the least a father could do to show his pride, especially one who had been absent from his children’s lives for years. I could feel a few hiccups coming as I fought back tears of joy. “Why do you think I trusted you to look after our tribe when I left?” Wrapping an arm around his shoulder, I guided Sokka to our boat.

But before we could board, a low grunt echoed from behind us. We turned just in time to see a white, furry, six-legged animal land onto the beach. On the back of the large mammal was Avatar Aang, showing us a look of fear that sent shivers up our spines. My son edged forward gingerly, looking up at him before saying, “This can’t be good news.”

The Avatar didn’t speak as he beckoned Sokka to get on. My son paused for a moment, his eyes alternating between the Sky Bison and the boat. I stood on the plank and stared back, my face relaxing as my eyes remained neutral. “You have to do what you have to do to save the world,” I announced, “in times like these, you must prioritize.”

Sokka nodded gravely. Much as he would like to go on this attack with us, both he and I knew that whatever was happening at Ba Sing Se must be of utmost importance. I could only look on as Sokka boarded the bison and took off with Aang. My eyes never left them even as they sailed into the night sky, knowing that my son now had his own responsibilities. He’s really growing up, I thought, he’s really growing up.

*****

“We’ve been working on a modified version of the invasion plan,” I explained as my children were gathered on the deck of our ship. During our attack on the Fire Nation navy, we managed to capture one of their ships to be used as our own. Because of the way their navy was positioned in the bay, it was increasingly difficult for us to go out freely. So for us to capture one ship to be used as a disguise, it was a real blessing for us.

I kept my eyes on the Avatar, who I heard had been seriously wounded in an attack by the Fire Nation. Their fighters were craftier than I anticipated, as both the Fire Prince and Princess sneaked into Ba Sing Se undercover to weaken the Earth Kingdom capital’s defenses from within. I was about to continue when my daughter interrupted me. “It’s Sokka’s invasion plan,” she stated, shooting me a dark look. Apparently, she seemed upset by something, and I made a mental note to myself to find out more later on.

“Yes, Sokka’s plan,” I acknowledged meekly, trying to diffuse a potentially explosive situation. Refocusing on the task at hand, I described, “We won’t be able to mount a massive invasion without the Earth King’s armies, but the solar eclipse will still leave the Fire Nation vulnerable.” Recalling the dates that Sokka retrieved from a hidden underground library, I knew the timing had to be perfect for our attack.

To my right, the seated Sokka nodded enthusiastically. “So we’re planning a smaller invasion, a ragtag team of our friends and allies from around the Earth Kingdom. We already ran into Pipsqueak and The Duke,” he gestured to his right, signaling to the heavyset man wolfing down his meal and the little boy sitting on his shoulders, both of whom greeted the young Avatar. “And the best part is: the eclipse isn’t even our biggest advantage. We have a secret: you!” he whispered excitedly with a hand over his mouth.

Aang seemed confused by that statement, but that soon became complete and total shock as Sokka unloaded a bomb. “The whole world thinks you’re dead. Isn’t that great?” he declared, shooting out from his seat and pumping his fists in the air.

Aang could only rant incoherently and paced up and down the ship, wrapping his hands on his now hairy head as he berated everyone for letting this rumor be spread. I could only look on and wondered what this young man was going through, imagining the ultimate responsibility of balancing the world on his shoulders. I was an adult, and even I had difficulty still in handling large priorities. Now, to set this onto a preteen, who barely survived with his life, still nursing his injuries, and knowing that his failure in Ba Sing Se led to our group being hunted like fugitives? It was simply too much for him.

My train of thought was shattered as a Fire Nation patrol ship crossed our path. As usual, their sailors boarded us and demanded why we were at our current location, as all Fire Nation ships were expected to be at Ba Sing Se supporting the occupation. Bato and I tried to lie, telling them that we were making deliveries. “Next time we’ll send two hawks to be sure you get the message,” I stated with a smile, assuring the Fire Nation admiral of our objectives and that our presence was merely due to a miscommunication.

Fortunately, our blind earth bender Toph, whose other senses were enhanced due to her disability, overheard the Fire Nation admiral instructing his troops to sink us. Toph burst from her hiding spot and, using metal bending, the ultimate form of earth bending, crushed the plank connecting the two ships. Katara then took over, water bending a huge wave to push their ship away from us. The tidal wave slammed into the side of the enemy boat, tilting them away like a broken plank as we pressed full steam ahead.

But our troubles weren’t over yet as the enemies pursued us, launching flaming projectiles at us in their attempt to send us to the bottom of Serpent’s Pass. The crew and I could only focus on piloting, employing all the seamanship we learned from our past days. All male Water Tribe warriors participated in a maturation ritual known as ice dodging, where we were to navigate a ship across an iceberg-filled body of water with the help of two friends. As usual, I chose Bato as one of my assistants when I went through the ritual, and Bato, of course, chose me. But right now, those skills could not be handier as we tried to avoid the relentless attacks from the Fire Nation ship behind us. “Let’s try and go faster,” I muttered, tilting my head just in time to see Toph earth bend a large rock up, sending it crashing into a projectile and exploding safely in the air.

But even with the increased speed, and Katara using a modified water bending move to create steam to distract the Fire Nation crew, it was getting fruitless. The Fire Nation boat almost pulled even with us, nearly scrapping our port side and landing some good hits on us. Had it not been one of the projectiles hitting the Serpent that lived in these waters, we might not have made our escape. The long and green denizen of these waters was slammed in the face with one of the Fire Nation attacks, squealing angrily and in pain. That ended up providing enough of a distraction for us to escape, scurrying into a nearby port to pick up supplies while said Serpent coiled itself around the enemy boat. “Make sure we have everything we need for the next part of our journey,” I ordered my group, “food, water, repair equipment, you name it. If it’s useful, buy it up.”

My Water Tribe warriors all departed, leaving Bato and I to inspect the damage on our ship. Sokka, Toph, and the others all left to get food, leaving Katara at the bottom deck healing up a still-injured Aang. “Let’s make sure everything’s alright,” I told Bato.

By the time we were finished our work, darkness had already descended upon us. Bato and I strolled back to the main deck, still mulling over our next move when Katara burst from below and raced up to me. Sensing her emotional state, with her body shaking and breathing rate increased, Bato offered to leave us alone. Nodding, I turned to my daughter, who stared at me with helpless eyes. Even in the darkness, I could always sense the feelings portrayed by those blue pools. “What’s wrong, Katara?” I asked gently.

“He left. Aang, he just took his glider and disappeared,” she replied, squeezing her eyes shut and refusing to look directly at me, “He has this ridiculous notion that he has to save the world alone, and that it’s all his responsibility.” The wind swirling around us didn’t diminish the anger and frustration that carried from Katara’s voice.

I glanced at Katara glumly. I heard from Sokka that she truly cared for Aang, as she was the first person he saw since being broken out of that iceberg he was trapped in for a century. Knowing she treated Aang like a loved one, I had to calm Katara down. Trying to ease her out of the situation, I told her, “Maybe it was his way of being brave.”

But that only backfired as Katara erupted into an all-out rant. “It’s not brave. It’s selfish, and stupid!” She roared, the floor resonating as she took a big stomp forward. “We could be helping him, and I know the world needs him, but doesn’t he know how much that we need him too? How can he just leave us behind?” She concluded, the wind howling past again as I rebalanced myself from the verbal onslaught.

After taking every word to the face, I reconsidered her position. The one she cared for the most just left her, making not only Katara, but everyone else, feel helpless. It was eerily similar to another situation, of another loved one who left Katara a few years back. “You’re talking about me too, aren’t you?” I responded, only returning a side glance.

“How could you leave us, Dad?” She demanded, her voice laced with hiccups as droplets spilled from her eyes, reflecting the moonlight from her cheeks, “I know we had Gran Gran, and she loved us, but we were just so lost without you.” Katara angrily wiped a tear away as she thought about her grandmother, my mother, who took over parental duties for me when I left. I approached gingerly and wrapped an arm on her shoulder. When there was no negative response from Katara, I officially apologized to her.

Immediately, she collapsed into me, letting it all out as I embraced her. “I understand why you left, I really do,” she sobbed, lifting her head slightly to stare at me, “I know that you had to go, so why do I still feel this way? I’m so sad, angry, and hurt.”

Upon hearing this, I could feel my emotions crawling up from my stomach, threatening to spill out as well. “I love you more than anything. You and your brother are my entire world,” I replied just as moisture crept through my eyelids. Shutting my eyes as the wind slammed into my back, I soothed my daughter, rubbing her back gently as I told her, “I thought about you every day I was gone. And every night, when I went to sleep, I would lie awake missing you so much that it would ache.”

And the two of us would continue standing there, drinking in the love that was so absent for the last few years. It was right there that I realized I had to do something more for my family. Winning the war was one thing, but what I would give to win back the trust and respect of my children. Swallowing hard, I was determined to make it happen.

*****

“Let me just clarify a few points for everyone,” I announced, relieving my son of the war plan explanation duties. Being one of the chief planners of the invasion plan, it was only right that Sokka would be the one to describe our idea to all our allies. Indeed, after my children and Toph found Aang again, they decided to go off on their own for a while, scouting the Fire Nation lands before meeting up again for the invasion. During this time, my group went around the world collecting all of our former allies. Most of them were known to Sokka and Katara, and they were anxious for the main event.

But Sokka ended up stumbling badly in his explanation, almost like he was overwhelmed by the large crowd. He dropped all the maps as he was about to reveal them, and several times he flipped to the wrong one. He tried to calm himself down by going back to the beginning, and ended up going off on a tangent. To prevent further humiliation, I had to relieve him. “Today is the Day of Black Sun, and I want to thank you all for your self-sacrifice, and your courage,” I proclaimed, scanning the faces of the Earth Kingdom and both Water Tribes. This was truly a world effort, as everyone had to play their part for peace. After a century of battles, it was something we all longed for.

Turning back to the map, I continued, “There are two steps to the invasion: a naval stage, and a land stage.” I described how we had to go through the Fire Nation naval blockade defending the Great Gates of Azulon, and stormed the beach leading to the entrance of the Fire Nation capital. “The eclipse only lasts eight minutes, not enough time for the whole invasion. And the Royal Palace is heavily guarded by fire benders, so that’s where we’ll need the eclipse’s advantage the most. When this is finished, the Avatar would have defeated the Fire Lord. We will have control of the Fire Nation capital and this war will be over!” I finished in a flourish, raising a fist in victory.

That got the crowd all riled up as they cheered and hollered. My eyes scanned the group as they all got into battle positions, but the corner of my eye caught onto one figure that seemed down about all this. Sokka’s head hung low, his face almost in tears as he refused to even look up. Realizing the problem, I made a mental note to speak to him on this issue after the invasion. You might be a bad speaker, but you’re a fine warrior, son.

But my main thoughts were with executing our plans as our fleet of five ships set sail for the Great Gates of Azulon. In my lead ship, I asked Katara and her friends from the swamp to whip up cloud and fog, encasing us and giving us the cover we needed. Just as the moisture condensed onto our skins, a shrill alarm sliced through the air. We shot our eyes to the front as a net was raised on either side of the statue of Azulon, father of the current Fire Lord Ozai. It reached across the ocean and onto two dragon statues at the edge of the bay. Flames shot through the netting, creating a wall of fire and blocking us. I promptly ordered everyone below deck. “Let’s hope your invention works,” I told Sokka.

The Fire Nation navy did not know it, but at the bottom of each of our ships was a new invention designed by Sokka, dubbed the submarine. By creating a container that let us travel underwater and be propelled via water bending, we found the perfect way to get past the guards, as the netting from the Azulon statue did not reach the sea bottom. From inside the submarine, I beamed with pride, “You’ve really outdone yourself this time.”

Amidst Toph’s moans about how this type of travel was terrible, Sokka refused to take full credit, stating it was our Mechanist friend who currently lived at the Northern Air Temple who created it. But still, the Mechanist and I both agreed that had Sokka not came up with the plan, we would never succeed. “There is one problem I couldn’t fix,” the Mechanist explained, unfurling Sokka’s original design sheet, “The subs have a limited air supply, and before we land on the beaches, we’ll need to resurface.”

After a quick break on the surface, we reentered the water, this time going nonstop for the beaches. From the lead sub, I had my eye glued to the periscope, waiting for the gates to come into sight. My heart pounded as I scanned around, my muscles tightening as I pondered over the fight of my life. This was the moment we had all been waiting for, wasn’t it? Should we win this, the war would be over and we could finally go home again, knowing that the Fire Nation would no longer attack or raid us.

Just as I pondered my life after, the entrance was right in sight. There was a large fort-like pier with two large silver walls lining each side. Each wall had a red and white watch tower on top, with guards at the ready to intercept any intruders. “Everyone into positions; earth benders, into your tanks,” I barked, turning around to face the green-capped fighters behind me, “This is going to be a rough ride.”

Instantly, harpoons were launched from above, trying to hook onto our subs and drag us out. Our water benders dodged and weaved around the attacking machines, plowing straight for the gates as I ordered torpedoes to be launched. They were frozen spears with explosives in them that could explode upon contact, and could be shot out from our subs by earth benders who could manipulate the earthen elements within them. A couple shots from each ship soon made quick work of the gates as we set sail for the actual land, the water benders steering the subs hard onto the surface as the front gates of each opened. With the earth bending tanks at the ready, the invasion was about to begin.

It was sheer pandemonium as we raced towards the gate, our tanks coming under a deluge of fire. I was among the group of foot soldiers in the middle of the formation, and even though the tanks protected us from the attacks, we were still in danger. I could see our supply team drop off boulders at strategic locations, just in time for our earth benders to launch them at the watch towers. But just as the towers were disabled, in came the Fire Nation tanks, blasting their hot flames at us as the cavalry of Komodo Rhinos followed. I could see Sokka charge at one, scaling it by the horns and unseating the rider.

But I barely got enough time to admire my son’s valiant effort as two Fire Nation foot soldiers charged at me. The double attack knocked my shield away, but I recovered just in time. With a quick spin move, I whipped my opponent’s spear into my hands, and brandished two weapons around as I created a circular area of defense. I disarmed a few more soldiers before hopping onto Sokka’s animal, observing the scene along the way. Our troops were under heavy fire as at least one tank and the supply trunk driven by the Mechanist were blown apart. “Sokka, we’ve got to take out those battlements.” I said.

But Sokka was one step ahead of me as he flagged down Katara, who had already begun an aerial assault on the watch towers. Aang chose to fly onto the capital on his new glider only, leaving the Sky Bison, now sporting a new coat of armor, for our use. Sokka and I climbed onto the large animal as we took to the skies, slashing off all the shooting mechanisms in the towers with my spear, Sokka’s new black sword, and Katara’s mighty water bending skills. By the time we landed onto the mountain ledge, there were only two left, one to either side of us. “You two take out that battlement,” I told my kids, pointing to the one at our right, “I got this one. Watch each other’s backs.” I warned, hurrying off.

I scaled the side of the tower, climbing in from the roof and ambushing the men inside. They tried to put up a fight, but my bladed club did its quick work, slashing at their bodies and throwing them to the side. But I would soon regret that move as one body landed on the explosives they were launching. The entire tower erupted into flames, with shrapnel and other debris shooting into me. Although I couldn’t see it, I knew I had been cut and burned, my entire right side numb as I staggered out of the station. Opening the door, I could feel my vision blurring as the sounds of battle faded. My children rushed up to me, but my legs just gave way as my body collapsed onto the grass.

I could feel Katara and Sokka rush me onto Appa and fly me to ground level. They landed onto a quieter part of the battlefield and laid me on the ground. Katara then whipped out some water, using healing abilities to apply the fluid onto the wound. I could feel the right side of my ribcage sting as she pressed her hands onto me. “You’re hurt badly,” I heard my daughter report to me, “you can’t fight anymore.”

I tried to protest, but to no avail. The pain had overtaken me as I could barely move by myself. Even with blurred vision, I could hear Sokka and Katara arguing about what needed to be done. Katara assured him that she was doing all she could, but then Sokka dropped his own bombshell. “I’ll lead the invasion force,” he declared as he got up, “the eclipse is about to start and we need to be up that volcano by the time it does.”

Hearing this, I had to say something to ensure he succeeded. “You can do this,” I muttered, fighting through the cuts on my side, “I’m proud of you, son.” I could only look on as Sokka climbed aboard Appa and flew off while Katara healed me. My eyes wandered to the skies above me, wondering what things would be like once we got home. My two children were now capable people in their own right; one was a warrior who could lead any army into battle, while the other was a healer who could mend the wounded. As your father, I’m proud of you, I thought, both of you.

By the time the pain subsided enough for me to at least trudge along with Katara’s help, we had already made it past the final gate and onto the road heading to the volcano. It was then that the Avatar returned, informing us the palace city was empty, indicating that they had known about the invasion. Nonetheless, Aang was intent on finding the Fire Lord, even with the limited amount of time left. Even though there were some doubts on the results, I assured everyone the mission would go ahead regardless. “Everyone who’s here today came prepared to risk everything for this mission.” I stated.

It was decided that Aang would get Appa back, and fly himself, along with Sokka and Toph to the Fire Lord. Meanwhile, Katara and I continued lumbering up the hill. In my weakened state, I couldn’t fight, but every fiber in my body told me to edge forward. We were so close to success, and I wanted to be there to enjoy it. As time ticked past, the shadow of our moon slowly draped over the sun, creating a darkened landscape where we could barely see the person before us. “The eclipse is starting,” shouted the Mechanist, who survived the bombing of his truck, “everyone put on your eclipse glasses.”

Katara and I paused, slipping a hand into our clothing and pulling out a pair of dark shades. Placing them over our eyes, we turned to gaze at the sun, which was covered by a dark circle in the middle. The troops around us all clopped up the mountain, going over the crater and charging below. As Katara and I reached the edge, we glanced at the city before us. There were regular residential units and commercial shops around, but the only thing that caught my eye was the large castle with the red towers in the middle. “The Fire Nation royal palace,” I commented with pride and joy, “we’ve come so far.”

But even with the peaceful parade through town, some of our fighters were unsure of the situation. The eclipse was already halfway finished, but there were still no signs of the Avatar. Just as Katara leaned me against a tank, Bato hustled up to me. “Shouldn’t something have happened by now?” he asked, his voice filled with concern.

Just as I replied, a series of Fire Nation airships took to the skies. The gargantuan dark ovals loomed ominously above us, overshadowing whatever little light the sun could give off. Nobody moved a muscle as we felt like prey being cornered by a large predator. The silence was only broken as Appa returned, with Sokka jumping off and telling us all to return to the subs while Aang and Katara provided distractions for the air fleet.

We hurried down the mountain as quickly as we could, with Bato being my crutch this time as Sokka led us out. Above us, the dark airships blocked out the lights as the earth benders kicked out chunks of rock for shelter from the aerial bombing. Soon, rock, dirt, and other debris shot through the covers as the airships bombarded us. While the rocky roof rumbled and shook, they held somewhat steady. We only exited from under them as the airships hovered past, dusting ourselves off as the airships headed straight for our submarines. Just then, it hit us all: our only hope of getting out safely was all but lost.

Just then, I made the biggest decision of my life. “You kids have to leave,” I told my children and the other young ones, unhooking Bato’s hold of me, “you have to escape on Appa together. You’re our only chance in the long run.” I knew this was one sacrifice I had to make. If it meant ensuring my children’s survival, plus the ensuring the hopes of the world in the Avatar remained, then I was willing to be a Fire Nation prisoner.

As we boarded our children onto Appa, the Fire Nation bombs slammed into our submarines, turning the fruits of our labour into rubble. “We’ve lost today, but we’ve never been this close,” I told my children, kneeling down to stare them in the eyes as the winds slowly returned, “we tasted victory, and that counts for something.”

There wasn’t a single person without teary eyes as Katara and Sokka boarded the Sky Bison. Aang turned to us one last time, thanking our support and promising to make it up to us. As the large animal took off, we could only look back at the mountains. The Fire Nation troops would be down here any minute, ready to take us into their cells. I swallowed hard, realizing for better or for worse, the world was no longer in my hands.

*****

“It’s good to see you again, Hakoda,” my friend Bato greeted me with a hug as we waited in the courtyard for the main event. We received news that the war was finally over, as the Avatar Aang managed to defeat Fire Lord Ozai in a fierce battle. Knowing that the new Fire Lord, the former Prince Zuko, was intent on reconciliation with the other nations by releasing all the prisoners of war, I half-expected Bato to show up.

“So did they let you out of the Boiling Rock?” Bato asked as we released each other, “I heard it’s inescapable, so you must be released somehow, right?”

A coy grin crawled up the edges of my lips. “That depends on the definition of ‘letting you out’ of the prison,” I replied, “the warden was with me when I left, but then again, my son Sokka was there as well…”

“So where’s Bato? Where’s everyone else from the invasion?” Sokka asked me, his eyes scanning back and forth through the peephole in my cell. It was truly a surprise to see my son at the Fire Nation’s supposedly impenetrable prison, the Boiling Rock, but knowing Sokka, he would have a plan to break me out of here.

“The others are being held at a prison near the Fire Nation palace,” I replied from my seated position on the hard ground. My cell had four dark walls and was only illuminated by a single fire lamp. “They singled me out as their leader and sent me here. But before I left I met some young women who said they knew you.”

I tried recalling their name, but ended up butchering it entirely, causing a grin from Sokka as he corrected me. “Kyoshi Warriors. Their leader Suki is here,” my son explained, taking a seat next to me, “and she’s going to escape with us. And do you know Prince Zuko? He’s here too, and he’s on our side now.” Sokka concluded with a grin.

I could only cock an eyebrow at Sokka. How could the son of the Fire Lord, heir to the throne be friends with my son, who led the very invasion to destroy his palace? But Sokka put all that to rest as he told me Zuko’s story. “He’s really proven himself, and I never would have found you without his help.” But as he finished this, Sokka’s head dipped to his knees, his eyes in the same position as when he failed his first major speech. “I don’t know if there’s another way off this island,” he said, recalling his first attempt to get out, and how it failed because some other prisoners got involved.

Knowing my son and I had to work together again, I immediately patted him on the shoulder. “Sokka, there’s no prison in the world that can hold two Water Tribe geniuses.” I boldly declared, causing us both to burst into chuckles.

After some careful consideration and long discussion, it was decided that we were to escape on the gondola, the same one that the Fire Nation used to bring me into here. A distraction in the form of a prison riot would be used to take the guards’ attention away from the gondola. As extra insurance, we would take the warden of the Boiling Rock as our hostage onto the gondola, ensuring that the guards would not cut the line on us. “I’ll have to get them to open the gates first,” Sokka described, putting his Fire Nation helmet back on, “they’re in lockdown mode right now, so wait until the doors are opened.”

What seemed like an eternity passed as the doors opened again, letting me out of my cell for the last time. I wandered to the open area with the rest of the prisoners, still waiting for the so-called distraction. Sokka, who met up with and brought Suki over to me, insisted that the riot must start now. Turning around, I targeted the tallest and most likely strongest man in my corner. “I’ll show you,” I stated. Rushing up to him like a komodo rhino, I shot out my hands and shoved him into a crowd.

But for some reason, that prisoner remained calm, claiming that he had to control his anger and refused to fight. Embarrassed, I saw a new prisoner approached Sokka. I couldn’t hear what they said, but it was becoming clear that this new man with flattop hair and a goatee would provide our distraction. Picking up an older prisoner with grey hair, he yelled at the others to riot. Within seconds, fire balls shot through the air, causing the pandemonium that we hoped for. “Impressive,” I commented monotonously.

As bodies flew past, we sneaked behind a wall, observing the way to kidnap the warden. Zuko, who we were told had been taken to an interrogation room, managed to escape and catch up to us. Upon hearing that Sokka had no plan to grab the warden, the Fire Prince immediately berated him. “I thought you thought this through,” he scolded.

Upon hearing that, Sokka’s reaction was more volcanic than the boiling crater. “I thought you told me it was okay not to think everything through!” Sokka wailed, his eyes bulging out and throwing his arms about at the Fire Prince. Their argument would last for a bit more until Chit Sang, the prisoner Sokka recruited, pointed at Suki, who was already on her way up the tower. Her body was a blur, her stealth and balance, the result of years of training in the Kyoshi fighting style, allowed her to scale it with ease.

After tying the warden’s hands and gagging his mouth, we hurried onto the tower where the gondola station was. Most of the guards didn’t dare to attack us as their own supervisor was in our hands. Zuko told us to board the gondola as he worked the controls on the ground, trying to get the machine started. From my position on the side closer to the station, I could see Zuko kicking the handlebar until it snapped, letting the metallic wire uncoil freely and letting us off the prison. He finally got on himself when he made sure no one would follow, boarding the ride with a gravity-defying leap. As Sokka helped him on, the Fire Prince justified his actions. “I’m making it so they can’t stop us.”

I could hear Sokka commenting on Zuko’s ability to think ahead. A small smile curled up onto my face at that remark. While my son was an able warrior with a brain to match, the Fire Prince won the battle of getting results from a plan. You still have much to learn, I thought as I turned back to observe the exterior. I could see the guards all get to their knees and bowed to a young woman in a black and dark red, modified version of the Fire Nation military uniform “Wait, who’s that?” I demanded, pointing at her.

Zuko took a gander, and instantly identified them as his sister and her friend. In seconds, the smaller girl in a pink belly shirt scaled the top wire and charged at us. The Fire Princess, on the other hand, grabbed a set of handcuffs from the closest guard and propelled onto the bottom wire. Using blue flames jetting from her feet, she hooked the cuffs onto the wire and used it to shoot herself towards us. I could only stare in awe at the mighty power of the fire benders. No wonder we had so much difficulty against them.

Zuko and Suki climbed out of our cab and onto the roof. Sokka soon followed, telling Chit Sang and I to keep an eye on the warden. Chit Sang and I raced to the gondola’s either side, trying to get an upward view. There was no wind to speak of, as the volcano’s thick steam smothered the outside air. It meant all the sounds of battle could be heard; the sounds of swords swishing, the whoosh of fire, and the stomping of feet trying to stay balanced. The whole cab shook and rumbled during the fight, causing Chit Sang and I to hold the bars, neither one paying attention to the warden standing between us.

That proved to be costly as the cruel old man managed to wriggle free from his binds. Ripping the gag on his mouth, he stuck his head out the side and ordered his men on the station to cut the line. Chit Sang finally caught on and grabbed the warden while I tried to tie him back up again, but it was too late. I could feel the gondola screeching to a halt, our momentum grinding down as we were thrown off balance. Amidst the sounds of scratches coming from the station, I could see the two Fire Nation girls hop onto a cab coming from the other side. “I hope this thing floats,” I said to the kids as they returned.

But as sudden as the halting of the gondola was, it unexpectedly started up again. Zuko was the first to charge to the opening, staring out in shock as he reported on the progress. “It’s Mai,” he gasped. I got over just in time to see a dark-haired young lady in a dark red robe disabling the guards with sharp projectiles. We watched this all the way to the top, our gondola entering the outside station as we reached our safety.

We hurried out of the cab, rushing as far away from the station as possible. I signaled to Chit Sang to toss the warden back into the gondola. Glancing at the nasty, arrogant individual who taunted me when I first arrived, I made sure to take a shot at his so-called perfect record. The old man claimed nobody had escaped from the Boiling Rock under his watch. “Sorry warden, your record is officially broken.” I told him.

Bato chuckled over the story, marveling at the ingenuity Sokka and I showed. I also beamed, basking in the warm sun as I realized my freedom had been achieved all thanks to our hard work. But just then, two teenage voices interrupted my thought. I turned just in time to see my children rush up to me. Katara seemed healthy and in good shape, but Sokka hobbled over with a crutch. Seeing my pride and joy advance forward to me, I couldn’t help but pull them into an embrace as well. “I heard what you two did,” I told them, “I am the proudest father in the world, and your mother would be proud too.”

A large gong banged to signal the entrance of the Fire Lord, its sounds echoing through the members of different nations as we cheered the scarred young man. Zuko took centre stage, acknowledging the crowd before giving way to Aang, who he dubbed the real hero. “A hundred years of fighting has left the world scarred and divided, but with the Avatar’s help, we can get it back on the right path.” Zuko announced.

We looked on as the final headpiece was placed onto Zuko’s head, officially making him Fire Lord Zuko. Applause erupted as Zuko embarked on this new journey to reunite the world. For me, this coincided with my own reunification, one with my own family. After so many years, I finally realized what it truly meant to be a father. Not only did I see my own children grow up, they also surpassed me in their abilities and spirit. It was perhaps the right time for me to let go, and let them take the lead in rekindling our Southern Water Tribe with the other nations. After all, with these young ones, there was no shortage of ideas, and the world was truly in their hands. As my eyes alternated from my children to Aang and Zuko stepping towards us, I had only one thing in my mind.

My name is Hakoda. That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 3: Yue

*****

Large drums sounded off into the night, the low-pitched bangs echoing off the snow-covered walls of our banquet area. Above, only the moon illuminated the dark night sky, signifying a sense of mystery, but also harmony as people clad in blue sat around a large fountain. Behind it, walls of water and several stone pillars stood on guard as a variety of food was brought to the centre for everyone to see.

Finally, a man wearing a large blue parka stood up to address our people. There was a necklace made of various stones and animal teeth around his neck, emphasizing his authority at the chief of the Northern Water Tribe. In a wise but husky voice, Arnook announced, "Tonight, we celebrate the arrival of our brother and sister from the southern tribe," he gesture to his left. At the end of the front table were two teenage figures, one male and one female, also wearing the traditional blue parkas of the Water Tribes. They smiled nervously at the guests, somewhat hesitant in meeting their fellow water benders from the other side of the world. Given that water benders either lived in the North Pole or the South Pole, the two tribes rarely interacted thanks to the sheer distance between us.

Arnook beamed as he turned to the people again. "And they have brought with them someone very special, someone whom many of us believed disappeared from the world until now: the Avatar." He gestured to the young boy sitting directly to his left. He was bald, had a blue arrow tattooed up his skull, and had a childish grin. Despite his great duty to the world, I could tell that his was still very much a fun-loving boy.

Arnook signalled for the crowd to simmer as they erupted into cheers for Avatar Aang. As the noise died down, he made one final declaration. "We also celebrate my daughter's sixteenth birthday." With that, he stepped slightly to the side as the two ladies-in-waiting escorted me into the foreground. "Princess Yue is now of marrying age!"

"Thank you, father," I nodded, smiling at the man who helped raise me all these years. Facing the audience, I proclaimed, "May the great Ocean and Moon spirits watch over us during these troubled times." Those two spirits were of utmost importance to our tribe, and rarely did we begin any celebration without giving thanks to them.

As my father brought the crowd's attention to a performance giving by Master Pakku, the lead water bending instructor in our tribe, I took a seat to the far left of the front table. My mind wasn't on the performance as Pakku and two of his students took the water from three containers and did all sorts of amazing and beautiful tricks with them. There were still some issues on my mind regarding this coming of age ritual, and I was intent on thinking a few things through after this quiet dinner with the Avatar.

However, my peace and quiet was interrupted by the teenage male Southern Water Tribe member, who was swallowing when I seated myself next to him. Glancing sideways at me, he immediately took a nonchalant pose. "Hi there, Sokka, Southern Water Tribe," he greeted, forced calmness and informality covering his anxious interior.

I accepted his greeting, telling him that it was a pleasure to meet him. He paused for a minute, his eyes wandering a bit, almost like he was fumbling with his thoughts. Maybe it was because he had never seen someone resembling my appearance before. Not every water tribe teenager had snow white hair and light-coloured eyes, so did my face surprise him? "So, uh, you're a princess, huh?" he stuttered, gesturing melodramatically at his every word, "you know, back in my tribe, I'm kind of like a prince myself."

Immediately, his sister jumped on him, challenging his prince-like authority. Sokka immediately shot her down, trying to stay on topic with me. As Katara bowed to him sarcastically, I could imagine the fun times they must have had when they were younger. The Southern Water Tribe, on first impression, seemed to be looser in their people's everyday relations with each other. Unfortunately, that wasn't the case here, as being the princess meant formality every day. Not to mention with a certain condition that I had and I simply did not have the luxury to enjoy myself like this. Part of me told me to stay on course, remain formal and behave well before my people like any good princess should, but another part of me envied my counterparts' informal ways, and urged me to drop the formalities and join in on the fun with them.

Turning back to me, Sokka glanced at me with a slightly mischievous look in his eye. "It looks like I'm going to be in town for a while. I'm thinking maybe we could, do an activity together?" he asked, both anticipating and fretting my response.

That actually got a laugh out of me, as Sokka's nervous insides spilled out into the open. "Do an activity?" I parroted, cocking an eyebrow at him. That got him noticing the awkwardness of his phrase, as he turned back to the table and gobbled up more food. He no longer looked at me, hoping to avoid further embarrassment while Katara took another side-swipe at him. Chuckling and shaking my head, I turned to begin my meal as well. It might only be a few minutes, but I felt I was truly going to enjoy Sokka's presence.

*****

"Don't worry, I'm not going to hurt you," I could hear Pakku say in a somewhat sarcastic voice as he manipulated water from nearby. His arms flowed gracefully through the air, almost like the waves flowed with his movement as he created a large vortex of water surrounding himself and his opponent. Knowing how seriously Pakku took water bending, we knew that it was a battle where his world-class skills would be showcased.

But to my surprise, the battle wasn't against an enemy fighter, nor was he trying to discipline a disobedient student. In fact, I could not believe my ears when Sokka told me who was fighting. "Katara is with him inside that thing," he mumbled.

By now, a number of people had gathered on the stairway leading to Pakku's training grounds. Along with Aang and Sokka, there were a few elderly men curious to see who was challenging the master. There were also some ladies who paused their chores to get a look, and some young ones eager for action trotted up as well. "Master Pakku ticked off my sister when he refused to teach water bending to her, and because Aang tried to teach it behind his back, the master now banished Aang from his lessons as well," Sokka explained, hugging Katara's parka tightly against his chest. Small beads of sweat formed from his temple, his body slightly shivering not so much out of cold but of nervousness as he continued, "and now Katara insists on showing her skill with a duel."

Katara shot one arm sideways, flinging the circling water to the side. I dodged just in time to avoid the hit, but Sokka the clueless one got it in the face as the cool liquid splashed into him. The force of the impact was so great that he was sent a few steps up the stairs. Sensing the danger, I quickly ushered the people away while the water froze, allowing Katara to slide up and balance herself onto a pillar on the bottom of the stairs.

Master Pakku would not let up as he sent another wave at Katara, who retaliated by freezing her feet onto the pillar and holding her ground. "I guess I should apologize for not telling you earlier," I told Sokka as we took a few steps higher, "we have rather strict guidelines for who can learn what types of water bending. Fighting styles were for the men only, while women did water healing arts. And because of my situation, I have no training in water bending, so my knowledge on these techniques is very limited."

A quick squeezing motion from Katara's arms caused the water around her to stop and drop to the snowy ground. Just as Katara defiantly told Pakku that she would not be knocked down, Sokka turned back to me. I could feel his sturdy gaze observe me, all the cheers for Katara from the people around us becoming slurs as he asked, "It's about last night, isn't it? Are you still uncomfortable with that?"

I turned away from Sokka, refusing to look at him as Katara was dumped head-first into a large water pool. I still had regrets about the way I handled the issue when Sokka insisted that we got to know each other better. Last night, Sokka met me on one of the bridges overlooking our canals, as I requested him to. He even brought a wooden carving of a fish, which I thought more resembled a bear. But while I knew he meant well, I realized the meeting was no longer appropriate, and I left him immediately. I knew I caused him a lot of embarrassment and frustration, but there was no way I could explain to him without hurting him even more. Sighing, I lifted my head back up, just in time for Katara to form an ice pillar. The crowd's chants were deafening as she made thin slices, their edges sharper than any blade as she flung them at Pakku with alarming accuracy.

Despite putting Pakku on edge for a while, the experience factor soon reared its head as the old master regained the upper hand. Twice Katara tried to advance on Pakku, and twice the older man blew her back; first with a vicious wave, and the next time with a sliding snowdrift that cut Katara's legs from under her. I winced each time this teenager, similar to me in age and position, get thrown about like a lone canoe in a winter storm. Given that she was Chief Hakoda's daughter, it would mean she was like a princess of sorts, and Sokka a prince. So Sokka wasn't exactly lying when we first met, I thought, he is an heir since he will become a chief should his father pass away.

But Princess Katara was not in the best of shape, as the collision was so great that her body was flipped into the air before landing hard onto the snow. The landing was so violent that her hair became undone, and a small blue necklace fell from her neck. I could only gasp as Katara struggled to her feet with great difficulty. We might be similar in so many ways, but we were also very different. Here in the north, the very thought of having a female learn to battle with, let alone use water bending in a war was taboo. There were strict roles in our society, and nobody dared to challenge these customs. But to see our two southern counterparts be so defiant, not only rebelling against the traditions, but were intent on using them to save the world? It was something completely new to me. Even as princess, my expectations were nothing more than to help my future husband, and likely new chief, with running our tribe. But now, seeing Katara show us that she was intent on actively making a difference in this war, it really made me rethink what I could offer.

The battle finally ended when Pakku created several icicles and hurled them in Katara's direction, trapping her body completely and not allowing her to move. As water was dynamic, the crux of water bending was based on movement. Without it, Katara was no longer a threat. As Pakku strolled off, his eyes fell on the necklace Katara dropped. "I made this sixty years ago," he said, his tone becoming softer, "for the love of my life."

The only sounds from the training grounds were the gentle splashes of the nearby waters as Katara identified her grandmother Kanna as the original owner, and that Katara inherited it from her. "I carved this necklace for your grandmother when we got engaged. I thought we would have a long, happy life together. I loved her." Pakku reminisced.

"But she didn't love you, did she?" Katara responded, no longer trapped in icicles and no longer showing animosity towards Pakku, "it was an arranged marriage. Gran Gran wouldn't let your tribe's stupid customs run her life, that's why she left."

I could feel warm tears ready to burst through my eyes upon hearing this. It truly showed the courage Katara and Sokka had to face the world like this, but it also showed my own cowardice. Arranged marriage was a common thing at the Northern Water Tribe and almost all young adults married this way. It didn't matter that one loved another, for as long as both families agreed to have their children married off, then the children would not get a say. How could I, a princess, claimed to help lead my tribe when I couldn't even match Katara? Sobbing hard, I hurried off, hoping no one could catch up.

I ran as quickly as I could, our snowy town nothing but a blur to me as my heart pounded on my ribs. I didn't stop until I reached the bridge that Sokka and I met the night before. Gripping the railing, I took deep breaths, the cold air entering me and presented a soothing feeling which calmed me down. I had a flurry of thoughts go through my mind, and it only crossed my boundaries even more as I weighed my personal feelings against the duties I had to my tribe. Of all the times to be mixed up, why must it be now? I could feel some tears edging down my cheeks, the moisture cooling upon contact and mixing into the two white hair braids dangling from either side of my face.

I soon lost track of the time as nightfall dawned on our town. Darkness soon crept around me as the streets and canal became quieter. The silence allowed me to hear the shuffling of snow boots coming up to me, and immediately I recognized it was Sokka. "What do you want from me?" I demanded, my emotions threatening to shoot through.

Sokka assured me that he meant no harm, and that he understood the situation. "You're a princess, and I'm just a southern peasant,"he stated, his tone neither angry nor eager, "it's okay, you dont have to say anything. I'll see you around, okay?"

But before he could leave, I grabbed him and spun him around. Getting a good look at those beautiful blue eyes of his, I locked my lips onto his, drinking in his warm breath as we savoured the kiss under the nearly full moon. By the time I released him, I could see the confused but slightly happy expression on his face. "I do like you a lot, but we can't be together, and not for the reason you think," I clarified for him.

Sokka cocked an eyebrow, still unsure of what happened. That was when I decided to show the secret to him, the one that had caused me all this guilt. "It's because I'm engaged." I pulled down my collar to show him my own betrothal necklace. It was the symbol between two individuals marrying each other, as identical necklaces would be made for the couple to wear. "I'm sorry." I hiccupped one last time before racing off.

*****

"You hanging on tight?" Sokka asked me in a mischievous tone. Like the last few mornings, I had been seeing my friend from the south. We talked about the experiences we had while growing up in our different tribes, and it was through this that I found out about the huge differences in culture. While the Northern Water Tribe was filled with rich history and culture, the Southern Water Tribe was very different. Its establishments were very scattered, and thanks to constant attacks from the Fire Nation, its buildings were not exactly in the best of shape. Given that they were in constant need of help, there was a part of my mind telling me to request my father to send over some of our people.

But that's where my positive thoughts of the day ended, as I kept thinking how wrong it was for me to see Sokka even though I was engaged. He was such a gentleman, only caring if I was happy or had a good time. It was like the fiance wasn't even a factor to him. And to further prove to me that he cared, he invited me to ride on Aang's large Sky Bison. He glanced at me with that half-grin and that distinctive twinkle in his eye as he grabbed the reins, waiting anxiously for my answer.

Taking a deep breath, I finally nodded. Turning to face the front again, Sokka commanded Appa in a suspenseful voice, "Yip, yip!"
With a low groan, the bison took to the skies, speeding away from the palace as we gained altitude in a hurry. My stomach churned in nervousness, but also in excitement as I experienced flight for the first time in my entire life.

The view was magnificent as our snow-covered buildings glistened against the sun, white walls and houses whipping past as nothing but ocean lied before us. In the sky, it was like Sokka and I were truly free from all the troublesome expectations of our lives. "Wow, I can't believe you do this everyday," I marvelled, looking down to see our hunters and fishermen navigate around the icebergs in the water, "Is it always this cold in the sky?" I asked, leaning into Sokka.

Sokka didn't reply, but I could see from the side of his face that he was just as confused as me. I felt deep down that Sokka realized the consequences of our current situation, but he was trying hard to keep his emotions bottled in too. There was no sound, not even from the wind as he slowly tilted his head back towards me. "Not when you're with someone," he replied, leaning closer and letting me see those beautiful blue eyes.

Suddenly, I couldn't feel the cold anymore. Heck, I couldn't even observe my surroundings as Sokka was the only thing in my vision. It was beautiful up here, and it wasn't just due to the sights. It was like the spirits took over as we feel ourselves drift closer to each other, our lips slightly parting as that deja vu moment returned again.

But we snapped away from each other's eyes just in time to notice the scenario. Pulling away, Sokka quickly changed the subject, avoiding what would have been a total disaster had anyone found out. "Food times, good times,"he muttered, grabbing onto the reins again to control Appa's movements. Beside him, I could only sigh. Were we going to be a couple that could never be together due to our different customs?

The thought was quickly erased from my mind as Appa flew into a cloud of dark particulates. The entire air reeked of a burnt smell as we looked around to see if there was a fire. "Oh no," Sokka mumbled, pointing to the front, "we have to warn everybody."

Immediately he yanked on the reins, turning Appa around and going full speed ahead for the palace again. I kept glancing over my shoulder as ominous black shapes had begun to make their way past the horizon and into view. I stayed silent as I looked at Sokka, who had a determined expression on his face as he steered Appa back onto the land. Dismounting quickly, he picked up a nearby clump of snow, now contaminated with the dark materials. "I've seen it before, right before my village was attacked. It's soot mixed with snow," he explained, his voice monotonous and serious, "It's the Fire Nation. They've closed in on the North Pole, and from the looks of this stuff, I'd say there's a lot of them." He gestured to the sky, which was now pitch-black.

We quickly flew Appa back into the animal pens and raced to the central palace. The war drums had already sounded, signalling that my father Arnook demanded for an emergency meeting with the most capable warriors and war planners to deal with the incoming threat. Sokka and I were halfway up the stairs when I had to break it to him. "I can't see you anymore," I told him, halting our ascending, "not at all."

"What? We're just friends!" Sokka exclaimed, waving his arms in frustration. As he did that, it only made me feel guiltier, as I realized that my feelings were not like the way he described: friends. No, somewhere, deep inside, I felt something more.

I turned my head to the side, trying to avoid those blue orbs, which now zeroed in on me. From my lower position on the staircase, it was almost like I shrunk to the size of a rodent. "I wish we could just be friends, but I like you too much, and it’s too confusing to be around you," I revealed the truth to him. The past few days, I had truly enjoyed his company, as he treated me not for my status as princess but for who I really was. Turning around completely, I reiterated to him, "I'm marrying someone else!"

But even without facing Sokka, I could imagine the look on his face when he retorted in a disappointed tone, "You don't love him, do you?"

"But I do love my people," I responded, lifting my head. The incoming black cloud now covered the entire horizon, and the Fire Nation navy wouldn't be far away. "I have duties to my father and tribe," I finally faced him, tilting up to see his face entirely. The glum look pained me so much, but I must push on. "I have to do this. Goodbye!" With that, I raced off, charging up the rest of the stairs and leaving Sokka in his wake.

*****

"The legends say the moon was the first water bender. Our ancestors saw how it pushed and pulled the tides and learned how to do it themselves," I explained as we gazed over the ocean from the safety of the water palace. The Fire Nation, as expected, launched their initial attack on us, sending several flaming boulders through our walls and damaging various parts of our town. Thanks to the Avatar, who managed to disable some of their ships, it bought us some time to regroup and re-strategize.

Right now, the Fire Nation navy, led by Admiral Zhao, laid siege to our tribe, and although the attacks paused for the night, it was bound to continue as the sun rose again. "Our strength comes from the spirit of the moon, while our life comes from the spirit of the ocean. They work together to keep balance." I told Aang and Katara, who watched the temporarily tranquil scene before me. Even with the Avatar, it was of no use, as the Fire Nation ships were too strong, and there were too many of them. We knew that unless there was some assistance from somewhere, the Fire Nation would launch their assault again in the morning. While water benders received strength from the moon, fire benders relied on the sun, and by morning, we could expect the ferocity of their attack to increase.

But right now, the main thing that we needed was to get Aang some guidance, hopefully to restore his lost confidence and allowed him to fight against the Fire Nation again. I leaned on the railing, mulling through the possibilities when the bald boy shot up suddenly. "Maybe I can find them and get their help?" he suggested.

Katara stepped up, explaining that the Avatar was the bridge between the real world and the spirit world. "The only problem is, last time you got to the spirit world by accident. How are you going to get there this time?" she asked.

Immediately, I had an idea. Leading Aang and Katara out the back of the palace, I took them to a small garden. There, a small wooden door, hidden away from the central area, awaited them. I told them it was the most spiritual place in the North Pole, and that it might help Aang reach the spirit world. Unlocking the gate, I pulled it open with a creak. I let Aang and Katara enter first before I entered, closing the door behind me.

Aang charged forward excitedly as the sound of a waterfall greeted us. It flowed right behind a small gazebo, which was surrounded by green grass and shrubs. And right in front of the small structure, a pond with unfrozen water beckoned us, the climate there resembling spring more than the frozen ice fields we were used to. As Aang rolled happily in the grass, Katara commented how warm it was there.

"It is the centre of all spiritual energy in our land," I replied as Katara removed her parka, leaving her in her usual blue tunic. I was about to say more when I saw Momo, the lemur that traveled with Aang and his friends, dipping a paw into the pond and stirred the water. Immediately, I charged up and glared at it, not impressed by that move. I never revealed it to the Avatar and his friends yet, but the spiritual energy of the Northern Water Tribe came from this very pond. And given my personal history, it had particular importance to me as well, so the last thing we needed was Momo disturbing the peace.

By the time we got the lemur away, Aang already sat himself before the pond. Closing his eyes, he formed fists and pressed his knuckles together, forming a perfect meditation pose before the pond. We gently tread around the pond, my eyes glancing into the tranquil water, just in time to see two shadows arriving to the centre and circling each other. This was the symbol of balance, as the white fish, the mortal form of the Moon Spirit, would follow the black fish, the mortal form of the Ocean Spirit, and vice versa. Hopefully, with this spirituality, the Avatar could get the help he sought.

But nothing seemed to be happening as Aang sat there, unmoving and silent. I glanced around nervously, trying to listen to any strange sounds from around us as Aang continued his attempt to enter the spirit world. We wanted Aang to have as much time as he needed, but also had to watch out for any disturbances, just to keep him safe. "He's meditating, trying to cross over into the spirit world," Katara described as we positioned ourselves behind him, trying to stay as quiet as possible. "It takes all his concentration."

From the moonlight, I could see the Avatar twitch a little. Sensing his great difficulty, I turned to Katara and ask, "Is there any way we can help?"

That only got Aang even more frustrated as he erupted on us, demanding that we remained silent. "Come on, guys! I can hear every word you're saying!" he shouted, whipping his head around as his grey eyes flashed with anger.

By the times things calmed down again, Aang's head tilted towards the centre of the pool. The two fish circling around suddenly got the Avatar's attention, and within minutes the blue arrow tattoos glowed brilliantly. That was when Katara told me that it was working, and that we did not move his body during this time. "That's his way back to the physical world," she told me, adding that she would protect him until he returned.

But not another word was uttered when we got interrupted, by the one person Katara had no intention of seeing again. Dressed in a light red runic and sporting a large scar over one eye, it was Prince Zuko of the Fire Nation. "Hand him over, and I won't have to hurt you," he threatened, both his normal and scarred eyes narrowing to darts.

Katara signalled me to go seek help while she fended Zuko off. In my mind, I could only think of reaching our warriors, maybe even Sokka, as sounds of battle raged behind me. I forced the outside cold air into my lungs, causing some pain in my chest as I went from warm paradise to icy battleground. My heart pounded like the war drums that sounded off this morning as I could hear Katara doing everything she could to prevent Aang from being taken. Fire lit up the night sky, only to be smothered by water, creating a huge smokescreen that hovered above the holy site. Forcing my legs to move faster, I churned to the village, with thoughts of uncertainty swirling in my mind. Using the moon as my guide, I could only hope that the Fire Nation did not disturb our spirits in that pond, as I shuddered to think what might happen should Tui and La be harmed.

*****

"We need to get to the oasis. The spirits are in trouble!" Aang declared as we freed him from the binds on his body. By the time I returned to Katara with Sokka on Appa after Zuko attacked, we found out that the Fire Prince kidnapped Aang from the pond while he was still in meditation. Katara told us that the rising sun empowered the fire bending techniques, which overwhelmed her and left Aang unattended.

But thanks to a freak blizzard, we believed that Zuko couldn't have gotten far, and Sokka decided to use Appa on an aerial search for Aang. The location was revealed to us when Aang, on his return from the spirit world, shot his spirit through the dark sky and back into his body, pinpointing his exact location. When we landed, Aang had already been awoken, and Katara made quick work of Zuko thanks to the moon's presence and the abundance of snow. But despite untying Aang, the young Avatar refused to leave with Zuko. "If we leave him, he'll die," Aang insisted, pulling the Fire Prince onto Appa.

We could only look on as Aang steered Appa back to the village, all the while we kept our eyes on Zuko. I truly wondered what the Avatar was thinking with this move. Why would he so willingly rescue the very person who tried to kill him? My eyes did not leave the bald boy sitting in the front as I tried to make sense of it all. He had a duty to the world, and that meant caring for everyone, even those from the Fire Nation. "It's kind of like my duty to my people, I guess," I murmured, hoping nobody heard me.

But my personal thoughts soon became interrupted as my mind was overtaken by dizziness. The skies around me were a blur, but I could make out the colour of the moon. Instead of being bright and clear, an ominous red hue glazed over it. "I feel faint," I told Sokka, gripping my head as he checked on me. The dimming moonlight probably prevented Sokka from seeing at least a dozen creases spread across my usually smooth face as my inside energy churned maliciously, threatening to sap my consciousness away.

The Avatar agreed, stating that he believed the Moon spirit was in trouble. " owe the Moon Spirit my life," I explained, finally revealing to the one I loved my personal history, "when I was born, I was very sick, and very weak. Most babies cry when they were born, but I was born as if I were asleep. My eyes were closed."

There was complete silence on the Sky Bison as several pairs of eyes descended on me. Taking a deep breath, I continued, "Our healers did everything they could. They told my mother and my father I was going to die. My father pleaded with the spirits to save me," I paused, moistening my lips as I reached the most important part: the oasis' significance to me. "That night, underneath the full moon, they brought me to the oasis and placed me in the pond. My dark hair turned white, I opened my eyes and began to cry, and they knew I would live. That's why my mother named my Yue, for the moon."

I could feel the stares of curiosity turn into sombreness as they understood my past. Given that I was the princess of the Northern Water Tribe, and that I received my first breath of life from the spirits, they understood why my duties were so important to me, to the point where I was willing to sacrifice my personal wants for them. Sensing the importance of the battle, they assured me they would do all they could to help me.

But by the time we landed back at the oasis, it was surrounded by Fire Nation soldiers. And in the centre of the group was the commander Sokka identified: Admiral Zhao. There was a dark bag in one hand, the objects it contained tossing and writhing as Zhao gloated of his achievement as being the first man ever to blacken the moon. When he heard us land behind him, each person (except for the unconscious Zuko) charging out ready to attack, he grimaced. "Don't bother," he snarled, holding a fist to the bag.

Immediately, we eased up, with Aang pleading to Zhao. But it was to no avail, as the fiery and arrogant man refused to back down. "It's my destiny to destroy the moon and the water tribe," he uttered, venom dripping from his every word.

Aang, realizing the precarious situation, tried to reason with him some more. "Destroying the moon won't just hurt the water tribe. It will hurt everyone, including you," he explained calmly, "without the moon, everything would fall out of balance. You have no idea what kind of chaos that would unleash on the world."

Just then, an older man, also of the Fire Nation, stepped out from the background. Zhao identified the older man as General Iroh, and accused him of being a traitor. But in a sagely voice, Iroh agreed with Aang, stating that the Fire Nation needed the moon too. "Whatever you do to that spirit, I'll unleash on you tenfold. Let it go now!" Iroh roared.

After what seemed like an eternity, Zhao finally relented and released the two fish Tui and La back into the pond. Those few minutes were the most intense of my entire life as my heart nearly shattered my sternum and shot out of my chest. Zhao crouched before the pond as the two fish swam back into position, but his body shook involuntarily, like something had taken over him. Suddenly, his arm glowed with fire as Zhao's infamous anger took over. In one swift motion, his flame blade sliced across the pond and into the water. I tried to call out, reaching forward in whatever futile attempt to stop him, but it was to no avail. Every seemed to slow down as we could see the white-coloured fish, Tui, taking the brunt of the hit. As the fire dissipated, that one fish was no longer moving.

Instantly, General Iroh unleashed his own barrage of fire, fighting off the Fire Nation soldiers blocking his way as Zhao sneaked out of the oasis. Amidst the confusion, we charged to the pond, our eyes never leaving the floating body of Tui. My lips quivered non-stop as we hoped every second that it wasn't as bad as it seemed, and that the fish would pop back to normal and start swimming in a circle with La again. The Fire Nation soldiers were already on the retreat, after facing that ferocious attack from the old man.

Iroh finally approached us and plucked the fish out of the water. Holding it in both his hands, he showed us the grim picture. There wasn't a single bit of life left in the spirit as it laid motionless in the Fire general's palms. Choking with emotion, I could only stutter, "There's no hope now. It's over!" With that, I collapsed into Sokka's arms, letting my tears flow freely as Sokka held me in a supportive embrace.

Suddenly, Aang's tattoos glowed again. In a strange voice that sounded like many people were speaking at once, he insisted that it was not over. We froze in horror as Aang stepped into the pond, standing directly before La and posing in meditation again. Katara tried to flag him down, only to be stopped by General Iroh. Because Tui, who represented the moon, was killed, there was no longer any moonlight. But the area was anything but pitch-black as Aang's Avatar State illuminated the entire pond, lighting up the water and the fish in it. It was truly the most unusual thing I had ever seen.

Then, it happened. In one swift motion, Aang was sucked into the water, making the liquid glow brighter than ever as the lights reflected off every wall and pillar of our palace below. It was nearly as bright as day as the strange coloured water flowed from the oasis and into our canals, leading straight into our ocean. Our mouths dropped and our eyes widened in fascination, not even blinking once as a large figure was formed from the water. It had the face of a koi, but the body of a human; and in the centre of this was Aang, possessed by La. Then, it hit me: it was the true from of the Ocean Spirit, and after seeing the death of its companion, it was intent on driving out the Fire Nation.

*****

Even as the sounds of battle raged on, there was relative silence at the oasis. We knew that La's true form, with the control of the Avatar, was battling the Fire Nation outside. Splashes and rumbles of violent waves echoed through the tribe as the spirit tore through the Fire Nation navy, but to us, no matter how great our victory over the Fire Nation would be, it was meaningless. Nobody spoke as Iroh placed the lifeless body of Tui back into the water. "It's too late," Katara stated, "it's dead."

Iroh pursed his lips, almost like guilt was overwhelming him as he pondered what his own countrymen did. But Iroh's thoughts were the least on my concern, as I weighed my options in my mind. While it was true that the Moon Spirit had died, but it wasn't the case that there was no life left in the moon. Part of the moon's life force was in me, when it granted me my first breath. So maybe it was only right that I took action here. It was the least I could do, as a princess, to serve my people, and to an extent, save the world.

This fact was not unnoticed by the ever observant and wise former Fire Nation general. "You have been touched by the Moon Spirit," Iroh commented, "some of its life is in you." And as he said this, three pairs of eyes descended onto me, each with different emotion. Iroh's steady gaze remained thoughtful and curious, Katara's eyes anxiously flickered a bit, while Sokka seemed almost fearful of what was about to transpire.

"Yes, you're right. It gave me life," I nodded, agreeing with Iroh. Swallowing hard, I made the most difficult decision for the world, "maybe I could give it back." I concluded, my eyelids closing as tears threatened to spill out. Not a sound was heard as I made my announcement, as everyone realized one person would not survive this war.

Sokka's eyes increased to the size of the darkened moon. "No, you don't have to do that!" he exclaimed, grabbing my arm just as I reached for the fish. The tense tug on my sleeve was enough to halt my progress as I could feel Sokka's gaze bore into me. He truly cared for me, even as we neared the end. Part of me did wish to stay, and return the kind gestures he did for me. After all that he did, how could I hurt him like this?

But I could not just stand by idly and watch the Fire Nation destroy the balance of the world, and let La continue its destructive path. "It's my duty, Sokka," I replied, my head turned away from him as the tears threatened to explode out the same way water in our canals did when the Fire Nation destroyed our dykes, I have to do this."

Amidst Sokka's cries that he had an obligation to my father that he would protect me, I asked General Iroh to pull Tui out of the water again. I could feel Sokka's gloved hand ease out of mine as I reached for the Moon Spirit. Every memory of my life, from my sickness-plagued infancy, to my childhood as a princess, now to my maturing years as a nearly-grown woman, shot through my mind. My father, being a tribal chief, always told me the responsibilities I had to serve my people, and sometimes it meant making a few sacrifices. But for the sake of the Water Tribes, and the entire world, I was about to sacrifice the one most important thing; I was about to give them my life.

The raging sounds of battle were slurs, the scenery around me a blur, and the smells of nature in this oasis irrelevant as I placed my hands on the white koi. My eyes were peeled for any signs of life as a bright glow transmitted from my hands onto the wet, scaly skin. As this occurred, I felt fainter and weaker, every muscle in my body about to give way. But I pressed on nonetheless, my mind only on reviving the dead fish. Without minutes, the deed was done, as Tui's muscles twitched under my fingers. With a soft sigh, my legs finally collapsed and my eyes closed, the world becoming pitch black.

But light re-emerged into my vision again as I could feel General Iroh place Tui back into the pond. The fish swam in a lively way as my spirit ascended from the water, my body now becoming part of the moon spirit. Instead of the usual flesh and blood, I was now glowing white, my body floating like feathers as I faced the one person other than my parents who cared for me the most. Sokka was on one knee, his lips quivering involuntarily as he tried to make sense of the scene. I could tell that he was shocked by my departure from the physical world, too hurt to speak even as the world was saved.

Sensing his sadness, I had to reassure him one last time before I took on my new duties. "Goodbye, Sokka," I told him, leaning my body into him, "I will always be with you." With that, I gripped him by the cheeks and pressed my lips onto his.

There was no hesitation as Sokka returned the gesture, knowing that it was the last time we would ever meet in these circumstances. I could feel myself floating higher and higher, straight into the sky as I disappeared from Sokka's life for good. I could see him still kneeling there, staring longingly as I amalgamated with the moon and restoring its brightness. As the balance was restored, I could see La and Aang separate from each other, with the young Avatar being placed on a safe ledge while the Ocean Spirit returned to the pond. The battle was won, and the Fire Nation was on the retreat.

When I was younger, my father had always told everyone how he was very proud of me, no matter what small achievement I did. He said part of the reason was that I was destined to become the Moon Spirit, and one day I must leave him for good. He always told me to cherish whatever time I had left on this world, as we were never sure when I would finally depart. While I left the physical world, away from my tribe, my family, and my friends, I realized that I was part of a bigger world now. My journey with the water tribes was over, and now, a new journey must begin. I would continue to guide the Avatar on his quest to end the war and hopefully restore that sorely-needed balance to the world. I stared over the oceans from my position on the moon, reminding me of the time Sokka took me flying on Appa. It was such a joyous moment, and I was so happy I got to spend it with him. As I thought back to all the wonderful things that my family and friends had done for me, only one thought crossed my mind.

My name is Yue. That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 4: Ty Lee

*****

"Ty Lee, could that possibly be you?" a teenage female dressed in traditional Fire Nation nobility garbs inquired, stopping right before me. Even when she was upside-down, I could recognize her physical features from when I last saw her a few years ago. Her above-average height, straight and confident pose, piercing gold eyes, and royal head piece told me it was the exact same person I attended school with all those years back.

"Azula!" I exclaimed. Immediately, I tilted out of my handstand, or more like finger stand, since I was balancing on my two index fingers, and positioned into a bow. I remained silent, keeping my forehead to the ground some seconds, as customary for Fire Nation inhabitants when meeting their superiors, before charging up to her. "It is so good to see you," I greeted, pulling her into a hug while my grin stretched from ear to ear.

My childhood friend and daughter to the current Fire Lord, Princess Azula, told me to not let her interrupt me from my exercises. "Tell me, what is the daughter of a nobleman doing here?" she asked as I laid my body front-side-down onto the ground. I could feel the grass tickling against my bare belly, the tips edging onto my pink crop top as I flipped my legs over my back, to the point where my feet nearly touched my face. "Certainly our parents didn't send us to the Royal Fire Academy for Girls to end up in places like this." Azula commented, sniffing the smell of wild animals irritatingly.

I propped my head up with my hands, still smiling at Azula as my long ponytail dangled onto the side of my face. "I have a proposition for you. I'm hunting a traitor. You remember my old fuddy-duddy uncle, don't you?" Azula suggested, staring at her nails as a large platypus-bear grunted and laid a polka-dotted egg, "I would be honoured if you joined me on my mission." She concluded, dropping her hand and staring back at me.

My mind froze, not sure what to think. Sure, I knew Azula quite well from my younger years, but it was rare that she would seek someone like me to help her with such a mission. Besides, why did I want to give up my life at the circus when I enjoyed it so much? Flipping back to a standing pose, I told her that while I would love to help her, I didn't want to leave here. "My aura has never been pinker," I replied with a grin, albeit an uneasy one as I knew Azula's tendencies in dealing with those who defied her.

Oddly enough, Azula didn't press on any further, stating that she didn't want to force me into satisfying her. Turning away, she headed for the exit, but not before telling me that she wanted to catch my show tonight. Suddenly, I could feel the surrounding area grow cold, a brisk wind blowing through and sent shivers through any exposed skin. For years, I knew Azula had a way of getting to people. And even though she claimed she wasn't forcing anyone to do anything, somehow I doubted her words here.

The afternoon went by uneventfully, but somehow I couldn't get my mind off Azula's words regarding my show. Even as I dressed up for the evening, getting ready to do my high wire performance, something about the offer told me that maybe I shouldn't have rejected Azula that casually. I might have been a cheerful, optimistic girl, but I still worried for my own safety. For some reason, whenever Azula's requests were rejected, that safety became awfully elusive, and that wasn't a good thing for a performer like me.

I could feel the atmosphere as I stepped out from the curtains on the wires and onto the strings. I was in full costume and makeup, the materials making my face sweaty as I glanced below. There was Azula, given a royal suite all to herself as the ringmaster thanked her for honouring us with her presence. I slowly negotiated my way down the wire, balancing upside-down on a platform that moved via a rolling barrel. Inside, my heart thumped faster than ever before as I wondered what trick Azula might unleash. Once, when we were little, she shoved me to the ground just because I could handstand better than her, so I could only imagine the results of my latest act on her.

Although I couldn't make out the words, I could see Azula lean over to speak with the ringmaster. Before I knew it, the middle-aged man shot a fireball out his fist, causing the netting below to glow in an orange aura. I swallowed hard, beads rolling down my face quicker than ever, smudging my makeup as I steadily shifted my weight from one hand to the other. I bit my lower lip, trying to get the barrel to roll to the other platform where I could get off safely when the roar of large animals interrupted me. I glanced down and saw that the ringmaster, on the orders of Azula, released all the wild animals into the tent, causing sheer pandemonium should I fall off.

As the beasts roamed at the bottom, some panicky due to the flames tickling the edge of the net, I truly thought to myself what my options would be. If these were the dangers I would face every day, then maybe joining Azula wasn't so bad. I knew I had always told Azula and my other friend, the usually gloomy and unemotional Mai, that I joined the circus because it was my calling. But now, I felt maybe Azula called a little louder, as in yelling at me to get off the wire, pack my bags, and get moving with her.

*****

The flowing waters rippled and splashed along the rocky edges as Azula asked us to get off our Basilisk lizards. We strolled into the river as Azula dipped her hands into the cool liquid, wrapping her long digits around wet white strands. "Wads of wet fur," Mai commented in an unimpressed tone, "how delightful."

"Hm. They're not wads. They're more like bundles." I replied, looking at the mysterious material Azula examined. Azula's persuasive ways managed to get our other childhood friend, Mai, to join us on our quest. The Fire Nation military defeated the city of Omashu, overthrowing their king Bumi and installing Mai's father as the governor. But given that Mai was bored to death at the Earth Kingdom, she decided to take Azula's offer as well, and now we would track down the Avatar together.

As Mai and I discussed the right quantity word for the fur, Azula marched off. I could see her stand before some trees, her head tilting to look up thoughtfully. "How about clumps?" Mai suggested, her back to Azula and was oblivious to her actions.

It was the word that escaped me, and I was overjoyed that Mai managed to find it. I jumped into a tight hug with her, which didn't exactly make her feel any better. I looked back at our friendship and wondered how two people who couldn't be more different met and coexisted with each other. While I was the giddy, excitable, no holding grudges type, Mai was silent, disinterested, and rarely showed any emotion. Even as I was delighted by the word, Mai wanted nothing more than to be released. Oh well, different strokes, right?

But polar opposites were about to be conjoined as Azula pointed out a track of white fur heading down a small path leading deeper into the forest. "The trail goes this way," Mai stated, pointing at the direction where more fur could be found. Indeed, the white material was sprinkled all over the ground, almost like clouds from the sky had descended, but kept their shape even as it reached the floor.

As Mai and I looked around for signs of an escape, Azula wandered to the trees in silence. Her pose wasn't as straight, and her steps weren't as authoritative as something on her mind seemed to be bothering her. This struck me as odd, as Azula was never one to hesitate. Given that she was filled with authority and was never afraid to use it, seeing her doubt herself seemed out of character for her. Did the Avatar and his friends try to outsmart us? If so, then which way did they really head towards?

A couple of brisk drafts passed by, whipping and slightly snatched at our clothing before the Fire Nation princess turned to us again. Pointing at several trees which had the top branches snapped off, she concluded that the Avatar was trying to mislead us. "You two head in that direction and keep your eye out for the bison," she ordered, pointing in the way opposite to the fur, "I'll follow this trail." With that, she marched back to her own Basilisk, turning it towards the direction where the fur landed.

We hopped onto our own lizards and gave chase, heading deeper into the woods while keeping our eyes peeled to the sky. Trees swished past us as leaves and branches flew off, flicking at our skin and clothing as we hurried down the path. Everything was a blur until a large white object was within sight. We saw a flat and wide tail, and six feet swinging in rhythm as it propelled forward. Knowing the target was reachable, we urged our Basilisks even more, hoping we would have what Azula wanted when she returned.

We pulled even with the Sky Bison, which slowed down its progress due to its fatigue. We had chased the Avatar and his group all night on our newly developed Fire Nation armoured vehicle, which provided us with both defence and speed. Realizing that they couldn't outlast our machine, the end product was bound to be an easy catch. Seeing the bison's right legs drooping low enough for us to touch it, Mai unleashed a series of blades, shooting straight for the passengers on the bison's back. That seemed to have done the trick, as it forced the animal off track. Losing its concentration, the white and furry beast clipped the water, throwing up a wave before veering off into the forest on the other side of the river. It finally crashed with a thud, destroying the first set of trees over there. The tremors were so great that the entire earth shook upon landing.

Despite the close call, we were undaunted, and were intent to show the two water tribe warrior siblings the Basilisk's secret ability. Lining the lizards up, we pushed them on at breakneck pace, the wind tearing at our faces as we gained momentum. We were about to show that a small body of water would not be an obstacle to us as the Basilisks took to the river, running on the surface of the water at such amazing speeds that they would not lose balance nor get swept away by the currents. Azula made the orders to take them prisoners, and we wasted no expenses trying to make it happen.

The female water bender, a teenager around our age clad in blue, whipped her hands towards the water, creating a huge wave hurtling towards us. But Mai and I timed it perfectly, and leapt into the air just as the waves blew our lizards back. I could feel the blast of water underneath us, the moisture flicking onto our leggings as I aimed for the water bender. Kicking off a few trees, I attacked her body directly. My specialty in attacks was to disable an attacker but jabbing various pressure points that turned parts of their body limp. Given that water bending was all about movement, I could do a lot of damage to their defences should I land some blows. Keying my eyes in ones that dealt with movement of arms and legs, I charged forward for my attack.

Another whip of water caused me to somersault away, avoiding the hit while Mai fired her projectiles at the bender's brother, who had two blades at his arsenal. Given that he swatted Mai's daggers straight out of the air, I figured that he probably couldn't bend, meaning the water bender would be defenceless once we took him out. Somersaulting to his back, I immediately aimed for his right arm, giving him a hard stab into the shoulder.

As expected, the arm became limp, causing a groan out of him. The blade landed onto the ground with a soft thump while I looked on. Either the boy didn't understand what happened to him, or he was too thick-headed to realize my attacking style as he tried to club me with his other arm. Watching the slower, slightly disabled attack, I pushed his left hand away and jabbed the left shoulder, causing that to grow limp as well. He only stood there, arms dropped to either side while still maintaining balance. His eyes were wide in surprise, but also helplessness as he glanced around, wondering why his arms were frozen. In my mind, I thought he looked kind of cute standing like that.

Using his last weapon, he shot his left leg forward at me. I managed to catch that attack also, and did a number to his knee, causing limpness there as well. Now, with only his right leg being operational, his balance teetered dangerously, with his head dipping closer to me. I thought I could jab out his skull as well, but it was thicker than a rock. My fingers trembled and throbbed in pain as I glared at the clueless one, wondering how his head, of all body parts, could withstand my chi-blocking abilities.

The warrior boy tried hopping away to no avail as Mai pinned his water bending sister to a tree, her blades cutting through her wrist bands and disabling her bending for the moment. As the siblings were trapped, I tiptoed up to Mai, who crossed her arms and pursed her lips. "I thought when Ty Lee and I finally caught you guys, it would be more exciting. Oh well, victory is boring." Mai stated in her typical monotone voice.

Suddenly, a large gale of wind ripped us off the ground, causing Mai and I to fly into the air. The sudden draft caught us off guard, sending us flailing and screaming into the river. We landed headfirst into the currents, the water rushing us away as we could barely see from the water the Avatar's Sky Bison getting up slowly. It seemed like the large beast finally awoke from its nap, and was ready for a fight again. While I would have loved to stay, it was getting increasingly difficult to fight the swift water.

After what seemed like an eternity, with the water throwing us about and pushing us down like tree branches, Mai and I finally found slower and shallower ground. As we climbed out, Mai collapsed onto the ground, supported by her knees and hands as she gasped for breath. As I wrung out the water from my long ponytail, I asked Mai, "Is it just me, or is that guy kind of cute?"

Mai turned away in disgust, trying to avoid every attempt to bring in that topic. But for me, it was what I would expect on a mission from Azula. While she had always been my friend, I also knew that Azula stopped at nothing to get what she wanted, even if it meant putting us in danger. Still, it was all fun and games, and I wasn't too keen on seeing her angry. And besides, with a hot guy like that, who wouldn't want to pursue?

*****

"The Earth King and the Council of Five do not trust the Dai Li" Azula's strong voice echoed off the rocky walls of this large tavern. With the exception of torches on the walls, there was relatively little light as an army of men wearing dark robes and large hats stood on guard before us. "They imprisoned your leader, Long Feng. Soon they will turn on all of you, and eliminate you. Seizing power today, is a matter of life and death."

Azula soon stepped off the platform, her head tilting from side to side as she scanned the group. It was the first time that I had seen her in Earth Kingdom clothing, and I must say that it fit her in a strange way. Azula, Mai and I managed to sneak into the capital, Ba Sing Se, disguised as the Kyoshi Warriors. We ran into them on our journey here, around the same time as our failed invasion involving the Fire Nation's largest war machine, a mechanical drill. We retreated for the moment, trying to think up of another plan when we ran into the warriors trying to rescue the Avatar's Sky Bison. Knowing that it would lead us to our prize, we were intent on attacking this way.

I tilted my head at Mai, who observed a teapot while twitching slightly in the Kyoshi clothes. She was not impressed by this type of fashion, going as far as to say that the colours made her nauseous after we took the warriors prisoners. But me, I could get used to the makeup, as it was similar to the material I used in my circus shows. Add the relatively loose clothing and I could give a performance with this on. My eyes turned back to Azula as she described the plan to throw a coup against the current Earth King. "Long Feng has placed you in my command as we overthrow the government," Azula stated. She threatened the usually fearsome guards, warning them that she would not tolerate any cowardice or disobedience. Although I couldn't see it clearly, I knew some of the secret agents quivered slightly as Azula bore holes into them with her gold eyes.

Azula dismissed the Dai Li, who marched in unison out of their cavernous bunker to prepare for the attack. I reached across the table we were at and poured Azula a cup of tea while Mai gave her seat to the Fire Nation princess. I complemented her speech, but Azula insisted that we shouldn't celebrate just yet. "There are still a few loose ends," she told us, grabbing the full, steaming cup, "the Avatar, and my brother and uncle."

We quickly got back to the palace, heading for the main room where the Earth King was. The slim, bespectacled man wasn't exactly the brightest person in the world, and it was easy for us to keep him under wraps. He just finished speaking with the Avatar and his friends, assuring them that Katara, the female water bender on their team, had left with the Kyoshi Warriors. This was partially true, as she was the one who informed us of Zuko and Iroh being present in Ba Sing Se. After some quick jabs to her pressure points, we made quick work of her and threw her into the Crystal Catacombs, a historical artefact of ancient Ba Sing Se located just underneath the palace. Now, it was just a matter of holding our ground until the Dai Li made their way into the central chamber.

But our peace and quiet was interrupted when the male water tribe warrior and his earth bender friend rushed in. He shouted out to the Earth King, who sat dimwittedly on his throne, as usual. But their words were nothing but murmurs as I turned my gaze on the teenage boy. We first battled back at Omashu, over an exchange deal between the Omashu king Bumi and Mai's little brother Tom Tom, who somehow found his way to the earth bending rebels. Add to his actions on the last fight at the river with the bison, and I felt he looked cute. So while the Earth King sorted out the mess, I somersaulted towards him, leaning my face close into his and stretching as wide a smile as possible.

That only got our friend clad in blue more worried, as beads of sweat flooded his forehead. "Uh, I'm kind of involved with Suki,"he admitted, slowly rubbing the back of his neck. It was obvious that he was afraid to admit that I had my eyes on him.

Before I could inquire more, a huge slab of rock shot up from under me, sending me hurtling into the air. Luckily, I flipped my body around just in time to land on a small platform directly above the throne. I glanced back down to see the short girl expose our identities. "They're not the Kyoshi Warriors!" she declared, taking a fighting stance.

The fight was on as Mai, who again showed off her self-taught dagger throwing skills by aiming the blades at the earth bender. The sharp objects hurtled through the air, but didn't hit the target as another slab of rock was raised, blocking the blades in midair. The earth bender then sought to turn the tables on Mai, sending the slab of rock at the throne. At the last possible second, my friend leapt into the air, almost in slow motion as the boulder passed harmlessly under her. I reached ground level just in time to feel the rock slam into the wall, causing tremors throughout the chamber and dust to be blown into the air. Mai balanced herself on the ground, and charged in for the attack.

That left me with the water tribe warrior, which I didn't mind dealing with, since it was another excuse for me to get close to him. Giggling as I approached him, I tried to stab at his pressure points, placing him entirely on the defensive. Unable to use his blade due to the barrage of jabs, all he could do was twist and turn his body, trying to avoid my every jab. Not that I minded the evasiveness, as it only made things more fun. "Looks like we're dancing together," I commented, shifting my body along with him. It was something I looked forward to, I guess, given my now not-so-secret crush on him.

But before long, Azula intervened, grabbing the Earth King and holding a blue fire blade to his head. The warrior and his earth bender friend immediately surrendered as Azula glared at them from the throne, her eyes cold and authoritative as if she was to be the new Earth Kingdom ruler. With their attention on the Dai Li agents surrounding the throne, I sneaked up to the two and stabbed their pressure points. Their bodies became wads of paper, crumpling and dropping straight to the ground. A few Dai Li agents helped Mai and I take them, along with the Earth King and his pet bear, to the dungeons.

From there on out, it was all smooth sailing as Azula turned the Dai Li against their former master, Long Feng, and convinced her brother Zuko to side with us in the invasion. Even when the water tribe warrior, the short earth bender, and the Earth King made their escape (along with the Earth King's bear), it didn't matter to us as Azula told us that the Avatar had been defeated. Now, all it took was for the Dai Li to open the gates and allowed our armies in. As Mai and I scanned over the sprawling metropolis, waiting for our troops to arrive, part of me felt that it was our destiny. Despite all the things that Azula did to get me here, including cutting off my circus performance and putting Mai and I in countless dangerous situations, I still felt it was all worth it.

*****

"Look, it doesn't matter who I met first, because I like you all!" I stuttered, staring at the wall of teenage Fire Nation boys mounted before me. All this was the result of a trip to Ember Island, a famous Fire Nation ocean resort where the Fire Lord's family owned a property. Because the Fire Lord had a confidential meeting with his ministers, he sent Azula and Zuko on this trip, and they in turn invited Mai and me to tag along. We had a fairly enjoyable morning on the beach, where I interacted with all these boys, and one of them even invited us to an evening house party.

But the boys weren't willing to go quietly. Even as I tried to play peacemaker by assuring them that I liked all of them, they insisted that I reveal which one of them was my favourite. All of these boys, along with the hosts of the party, Chan and Ruon-Jian, were children of Fire Nation nobles, meaning being second best was not an option for them. Sensing that there was no way out, I had to reach deep into my arsenal and disable them all with my chi-blocking. As the boys all collapsed to the floor, their bodies stiffer than the wooden floorboards, I scurried off to find my friends.

The series of fire torches on the wall beckoned me like the introduction runway at my former circus tent, leading me straight to a central pillar where Azula was. The Fire Nation princess had her back on it, her arms crossed and her eyes looking unimpressed. "I'm glad you're here. Those boys won't leave me alone!" I exclaimed, glancing back at the pile of bodies in the corner, "I guess they all just like me too much!" The heat and humidity of this summer day had us all wearing loose-fitting clothing. Male guests had on sleeveless shirts and shorts, while females had crop tops, similar to the one I had on.

"Come on, Ty Lee. You can't be this ignorant," Azula stated, casting a slightly downward glance at me. I could sense something unusual about to happen as Azula had an unrelenting look in her eye. I could feel my eyebrows curl involuntarily as my eyes turned to Azula's lips. "Those boys only like you because you make it so easy for them. You're not a challenge, you're a tease. It's not like they actually care who you are."

Those words slammed into me like a hundred boulders bended by the elite earth benders we faced at Ba Sing Se. I knew Azula never liked anyone besting her, and I could understand that my monopoly on the attention of the boys probably ticked her off somehow, but how could she say this about me? Was she implying that I was nothing but a phoney? All the bright auras and positive energy that I brought, was she claiming that they were all faked? At this thought, my stomach churned, pushing up to my throat as tears jerked out from my eyes, rendering me to nothing but sobs.

"Okay, okay, calm down." I could feel Azula grab my hands and pulled them away from my wet face. "I didn't mean what I said. I said it, because I was a little, jealous." She told me, cupping her mouth with one hand and whispering the last word.

That last revelation was by far the biggest surprise. It was as if Sozin's Comet had crashed onto the world. "What? You're jealous of me?" I demanded, my tears drying up, "but you're the most beautiful, smartest, perfect girl in the world!"

Azula naturally agreed with my statement, but revealed that she had some trouble interacting with boys. Somehow, she felt they all were afraid of her, and that they were so intimidated every time she approached them. Sensing that I could be of use, I gave her a few tips on what to do. "If you want a boy to like you, just look at him and smile a lot, and laugh at everything he says, even if it's not funny." I concluded with a grin.

We did a quick run-through, but Azula ended up attracting too much attention to herself by laughing too loudly. After some fine-tuning here and there, she was ready for the real thing. Approaching Chan in the most nonchalant manner possible, she asked him for a tour of the house. I beamed in delight as our host took Azula for a walk, knowing that this could be the way for Azula to break out of her authoritative mode and into a softer, kinder, people-friendly person. It was the first time in years that her family was put back together, as Azula managed to convince her brother to turn against their uncle Iroh and fought the Avatar together. When news spread that Zuko defeated the Avatar, Zuko was officially invited back to the Fire Nation from his exile. The Fire Lord especially requested a meeting with him and instantly restored his honour, which was something Zuko sought ever since he received his eye scar years ago.

But a large bang snapped me out of my thoughts, the entire party silenced as we searched for the source of the noise. My eyes followed the multiple pairs belonging to the guests before me, pausing at the far wall as Ruon-Jian collapsed onto the ground, broken shards of ceramics littering the floor around him. My eyes traced the direction from which Ruon-Jian flew in from, and I could see Zuko and Mai yelling at each other. When we were ready to leave Ba Sing Se, Azula and I decided to rekindle the crush they had for each other when they were younger. It worked marvellously, as the two became a couple and were seeing each other quite frequently. But now, with this eruption, I could only bite my lower lip nervously, realizing that things were not well between the two.

Just then, Chan charged in from the balcony, presumably where he and Azula were when they went for their walk. Shocked that his family vase was broken, he turned to Zuko and demanded that the Fire Prince removed himself from the party. Zuko said something back defiantly before heading for the door, closing it with a loud slam. As Chan tried to reignite the atmosphere, my eyes tilted back and forth like a metronome, alternating between Mai and Azula, who just stepped back into the room.

Right away, I went to Azula and updated her on what happened. Sensing that something was not right, she insisted that Mai and I left the party as well. "It's time that the three of us had a chat with my brother," she decided, leading us to the door.

Mai and I waited patiently while Azula went to fetch Zuko from their family's beach house. We didn't stay in the royal lodging, opting to go into the smaller one owned by Lo and Li, two elderly twin sisters who had been close to the royal family for decades. While Mai tried to avoid eye contact with us, I was truly concerned for Zuko. Even as his status was restored, he seemed more troubled than before. We knew his exile might be a factor, as he probably needed time to readjust to the Fire Nation royalty lifestyle. Still, it felt odd that he would be this angry, especially when his life seemed complete now.

After a few minutes of waiting in darkness and relative silence, with the waves being the only sound echoing off the rock formations around us, Zuko finally returned to our group. Mai was still not talking to him, going as far as to slapping Zuko's hand away from her shoulder when he asked if she was cold. Trying to lighten up the mood, I told him that a fire was preferable. With immense energy, Zuko managed to crack a smile, offering to return to his family beach house and burning all of the old materials kept there from his childhood days. As he trucked armful after armful of old pictures and trinkets, I couldn't help but wonder what he was doing. "What are you doing?" I asked.

"What does it look like I'm doing?" he replied, his tone laced with harshness as he blasted a fireball out his fist. The flames illuminated our area, dancing to the moon as its warmth shielded us from the cool ocean breezes swishing in from the waves.

But even with the heating, I was concerned by Zuko's actions. What purpose was he serving with this destruction of his family memories? Now that Zuko and Fire Lord Ozai had reconciled, surely he didn't have to destroy his past, did he? "But it's a painting of your family," I pointed out, "I think you do care, right?"

Zuko's temper only flared higher, eclipsing the fire before us as he erupted on me, claiming that I didn't know him well. "You're stuck in your little Ty Lee world, where everything is great all the time. Look at me, I'm so pretty, I can walk on my hands," he tauntingly did a handstand even as Mai told him to ease up. "Circus freak!" he growled.

I could feel tears coming to my eyes again, but this time I held them in. I was not about to let Azula, and then Zuko, belittle my past anymore. "Yes, I'm a circus freak. Go ahead and laugh all you want!" I retorted, my eyes firing glares between Zuko and Azula, "You want to know why I joined the circus? Do you know what my home life is like, growing up with six sisters looking exactly like me? It was like I didn't even have my own name!" I ranted, getting onto my feet. Even as I was the shortest person out of the four, I suddenly felt a tower of power surge in me, refusing to let myself stop until they heard me out. "I joined the circus because I was scared to spend the rest of my life as a matched set. At least I'm different now. Circus freak is a complement!" I yelled, getting onto my knees like one of the animals I used to work with and roaring the words at Zuko.

Then Mai pointed out that, because I used to be a performer, I was too hungry for people's attention. "You couldn't get enough attention when you were a kid, so you try to make up for it now." She stated monotonously, her face tilting away from mine.

"What's your excuse, Mai?" I countered, grinning sarcastically at her. The fact that she turned away from me meant her face was hidden in the darkness, but it would take a lot more than avoiding the light to prevent me from prying out her dirty laundry. Taking the argument up a notch, I decided to hit her where it hurt. "You were an only child for fifteen years, but even with all that attention, your aura is this dingy grey."

But Mai dismissed my argument, claiming that she didn't believe in auras. That only turned Zuko's attention back to Mai, accusing her of not caring about anything. As Zuko continued berating Mai, the usually emotionless girl leaned her back on the rocks, staring straight at the sky. "You want a teary confession about how hard my childhood was?" she retorted nonchalantly, "I was a rich, only child who got anything I wanted, as long as I behaved. I sat still, and I didn't speak unless spoken to. My mother said I had to keep out of trouble, as we had my dads political career to think about."

Azula, who had been relatively silent so far, took this chance to turn the tables on Mai. Pointing to her parents' control over her, Azula concluded that it was due to this that Mai could not express any of her emotions. But instead of being submissive, it only made Mai more expressive, shouting at Azula to leave her alone. She also let loose on Zuko, telling him that she was still angry with him, before taking a seat with a fume.

"My life hasn't been that easy either, Mai. My father decided to teach me a permanent lesson on my face!" Zuko retaliated, pointing to the scar surrounding his left eye, "I'm back home now, my dad talks to me, he even thinks I'm a hero. Everything should be perfect, right? I should be happy now, but I'm not!" the Fire Prince strolled to the edge of the ocean, letting the waves trickle onto his feet as he continued his rant, "I'm angrier than ever and I don't know why!" he screamed, waving his arms in frustration.

Upon hearing that, we all tried to diagnose why Zuko was so angry. It almost seemed like a total contradiction that he would get mad at all the honours and attention he received after becoming a war hero. As we pressed the question further, we could tell Zuko became more and more confused. First he said he was angry at no one, but in the next breath he told us that everyone angered him. "I don't know!" he shouted, pressing his hands against the sides of his head while his face twisted in agony.

Immediately, we started listed off people who might have caused Zuko to be like this. The Fire Lord, General Iroh, Azula, they were all mentioned, but so far, it was still the same response. Zuko became more and more flustered, and his anger becoming more and more uncontrolled and inexplicable. His head twitched nonstop as we barraged him with suggestions, hoping that we could solve the problem. Then, the pot boiled over as he unleashed the answer on us. "I'm angry at myself!" he screamed, slamming two fire fists into the flame, which blasted two columns of fire into the night sky.

That fiery blast burned up all the fuel we had for our fire, causing the area to go pitch black. "I'm confused," Zuko told us, his back hunched over as his eyes scanned the sand, "I'm not sure I know the difference between right and wrong anymore."

Seeing this scene, Mai approached Zuko and told him that if there was one thing she still cared about in the world, it was Zuko. As they kissed, Azula fake-applauded our so-called performances, stating that she had no "sob" stories to tell. "My own mother thought I was a monster," she muttered, staring into the flickering embers. I dipped my head slightly, recognizing the sudden change in composure for Azula as she said this. But before I could inquire, she was back to her usual self. "She was right, of course. But it still hurt," she finished mockingly, holding her head up high again.

As I observed my friends all telling their personal tales, I recalled the words of Lo and Li. "The beach did help us learn about ourselves. I feel all smoothed," I commented, picking up a nearby stone and rubbing the flat side, "I'll always remember this."

And as Azula suggested that we crashed the very party we were thrown out of, I couldn't help but replay all those things in my mind. Maybe being a circus freak was a good thing, as it allowed me to embrace being different and trying out new things. From now on, I could wear my beliefs and principles on my sleeve, showing them with pride as we headed up the wooden steps. This unexpected trip turned out to be a perfect one.

*****

Azula and I rushed to the top of the boarding platform, just in time to see the large gondola leaving the Boiling Rock. I originally came with Azula and Mai to the prison after hearing that there were special prisoners from the failed invasion on the Day of Black Sun being transferred here. Moreover, it was rumoured that Zuko, who betrayed the Fire Nation yet again during the invasion, breaking Mai's heart in the process, was captured somehow. Sensing something unusual happened, we decided to investigate.

While Mai headed directly for the interrogation room where Zuko was held, Azula and I went to speak with the warden, who also happened to be Mai's uncle. The older man informed us that there was a planned escape, courtesy of one of the guards. But before we could say more, there was a prison riot, as fireballs and other objects were all over the open area. That actually happened to be the distraction the main prisoners, including Zuko and Hakoda, the leader of the Day of Black Sun invasion, used to get off the prison. Now, seeing them head away from us, Azula and I felt we must do something.

Azula nodded to me, signalling to the top cable on the gondola. As I scaled the pillar leading up to it, Azula grabbed a set of handcuffs from the closest guard, hooking it onto the bottom cable and propelled herself towards the escapees via fire bending from her feet. As we sped towards the gondola, an attack plan was already hatching. Even without Mai, we were sure we could take those guys on, including the Water Tribe boy that I met so many times and used to have a crush on.

I got to the target first, flipping off the wire and landing on the front side of the gondola's roof. The first person to face me was Suki, leader of the Kyoshi Warriors, a group that we defeated prior to our invasion of Ba Sing Se. Zuko and Sokka, the Water Tribe boy, took on Azula on the other side. While Azula and Zuko immediately went at it with fire bending, Suki and I stared each other down. The battle on the other side of the gondola was nothing but muffled grunts as our concentration was on each other.

Before anyone could blink, Suki attacked with a flurry of punches. Thanks to my circus training, I blocked them with relative ease, but her quick pace also did not allow me to chi-block easily. Sensing a need to change strategy, I flipped under the roof, travelling to the other side of the gondola via its interior, and hoped to ambush Suki from behind. As I returned to the daylight, aiming straight for Suki's shoulder, the Kyoshi Warrior dodged at the last second, sidestepping away and returning with a new series of blows. With both sides unrelenting, it was evident that we were fairly evenly matched.

But a sudden screech from the line above halted any battling, as the gondola halted its progress completely. As we all gingerly rebalanced ourselves, we could see the people on the platform bring forth a huge saw. "They're about to cut the line!" I shouted, the scratching sounds of the saw eating into the cable echoing off the rocky surroundings.

Azula glanced up, and a malicious expression took over her eyes. "Then it's time to leave," she stated, nodding to me. Standing up straight, she rocketed herself into the air with feet fire bending again, flipping around and landing on the opposite gondola's roof perfectly. I followed suit with an acrobatic jump, dropping in right next to her as those on the doomed gondola watched on helplessly. "Goodbye, Zuko." Azula sneered.

As the seconds ticked down to the halted gondola's drop into the boiling liquids below, I couldn't help but wonder what would happen. My eyes followed keyed in on the trapped people as we continued our descent, the wind dying down completely as the heat wrenched into my clothing and mugging the skin on my bare abdomen. Even though Zuko became a traitor again and there were escaped prisoners on board, it didn't feel right to end it this way. Moreover, Mai's uncle was also on the gondola. What would she think had we informed her that her loved one was going to die, knowing that a different option could have been chosen? Somehow, I felt what we did was not the way to go.

But before another word was uttered, a figure clad in dark clothes approached the controls. The figure hurled a series of projectiles, disabling the prison crew cutting the line, before the mechanisms were activated again. As suddenly as the gondola's stoppage was, it moved away again, carrying the fugitives to safety. Even as that was done, the dark figure swung around gracefully, almost like a fast-paced but lethal dance as blades and other sharp objects whistled through the air and pinning the prison staff against the walls. As we got closer to the platform, we could see the mysterious figure: it was Mai. "What is she doing?" Azula demanded, gritting and gnashing her teeth together.

Mai was finally subdued when, in the flurry of activity before her, someone jumped her from behind and disarmed her blades. Azula and I hopped off the gondola to confront her, with Azula glaring at my usually emotionless friend with fiery eyes, the golden orbs flashing in anger as she sought answers from Mai. After dismissing the two guards holding her, Azula muttered, "I never expected this from you. The thing I don't understand is why. Why would you do it? You know the consequences." she demanded, her tone a mix of anger and, dare I say it, sadness.

My fingers fidgeted nonstop, my hands clasping and unclasping each other while my eyes darted between my two friends. The hot sticky atmosphere only increased when a sudden gust blew by, sending heat from the volcanic island onto our faces. My brows furrowed and drops of perspiration leaked down my face as my eyes zoomed in on Mai's lips, which parted for the first time since this betrayal. "I guess you just don't know people as well as you think you do," Mai stated, tilting her head back up to face Azula, "you miscalculated: I love Zuko more than I fear you."

That was the final nail in the coffin, as Azula displayed an eruption that would dwarf any volcano in the Fire Nation. "You miscalculated. You should have feared me more!" Azula roared. With that, she set her feet, blue flames lighting up from her fists as she prepared to attack Mai. Sensing danger, Mai pulled out a knife of her own.

But for whatever reason, something compelled me to attack Azula. Maybe it was seeing my friend getting attacked. Maybe it was Azula being too intent on using fear and intimidation, to the point where it seemed like she no longer cared for people's lives. Or maybe it was even a feeling inside me saying that circus freaks like me should be entitled to some respect, and not be pushed around by anyone. Nonetheless, it was like my body had been taken over as I unleashed a series of jabs, all of which landing on crucial pressure points that disabled Azula's fire bending. As the Fire Princess hit the ground face-first, I grabbed Mai and insisted that we departed from here.

Mai hesitated for a moment, still shocked at the scene before her, before she finally picked up her feet. But it was all for naught, as the prison guards soon surrounded us. Apprehending us, they turned us to face Azula, who was slowly being lifted onto her feet. Her eyes were filled with hate, almost like she wanted to tear us apart with her bare hands as she ordered us to be taken in cells. "And let them rot," she spat.

As the guards marched us into the confines of this maximum security prison, all I could think of was my actions. As the dimmer environment engulfed us, I finally came to a conclusion. Life shouldn't be driven by fear, nor should it be driven by intimidation. It was wrong to use that type of attitude to enforce loyalty. I lived my whole life in upbeat fashion because I wanted to avoid being in a matched set, and I truly felt I stood out when I met Azula. After all, what could be better than hang out with the Fire Princess, right?

But it wasn't meant to be, as I realized that I left a conforming family only to be with an even more conforming friend. The row of torches above me led the way to my cell as I pondered what it could have been had I rebelled sooner. Given that Azula used fear as her only tactic, I probably wouldn't have fared any better. But Mai was right about one thing: Azula miscalculated. Just as she underestimated that Mai was driven by her love for Zuko, even though he supposedly broke up with her, Azula underestimated the stubborn pride I had in me. Like I told everyone on the beach, with a life like this, being called a circus freak was a complement, and this circus freak had an honour to defend.

"This is your cell," the guard told me, shoving me into the dark room. The walls seemed to cave in on me, giving this free-ranging acrobat as little space to roam as possible. "We have new prisoners coming in next morning," the guard explained, "it's the rest of those Kyoshi Warriors, although I doubt they'll see their leader here, given that she got out." With that, the door creaked to a close, leaving me cold and alone.

It would be several weeks before I was let out of the Boiling Rock with Mai. By the time I saw daylight again, the world was entirely different. From what I heard, the Avatar defeated the Fire Lord. Zuko defeated Azula in a fire duel called the Agni Kai, and officially ascended the Fire Nation throne. He promised to reconcile with the rest of the world, and started the process with the simple gesture of releasing all prisoners of war. I also thought about what happened to my former friend Azula, who I heard had been placed into an asylum. Maybe it was right for me to keep a positive view of the world; given that all Azula utilized was fear and intimidation, it wasn't long before she made those around her dislike her. While I was still concerned for her wellbeing, I was convinced that Mai and I did the right thing that day. As I felt the sun's warmth tickle my body, my energy couldn't be more positive.

I maintained my optimistic outlook during my imprisonment, getting to meet up the Kyoshi Warriors and exchanging battle techniques with them. After they regrouped with their leader Suki, the team decided as a whole that I could join them, and start my training on Kyoshi Island after Zuko's coronation. It was like my old life had ended, and I was reborn. I might have started off as a lowly performer, only following the orders of those around me in hopes of being different, but I now found a higher calling. If the Fire Nation could reconcile with the world, and the Earth Kingdom based Kyoshi Warriors could accept someone like me, then it was only right I did my part to help the process. As the girls put the green uniform and white makeup on me, I only thought of in one thing.

My name is Ty Lee. That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, and "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 5: Haru and Teo

*****

Teo's POV

"Go Teo! Show that bald kid how it's done!" I heard my friends shout from the stone steps of the large plaza-like opening before my home. My father, who I consider as the greatest inventor in the world, created machines that allowed us to take to the skies. In fact, we had been using these new gliders for quite some time now.

But the sudden presence of this boy dressed in an unusual orange and yellow tunic challenging my flight pattern with unabated ferocity only made me more determined. I was the first person to receive the ability of flight, with my father attaching a series of bars with fabric-like wings to my wheelchair. I lost my ability to walk since I was a toddler, so for me, mimicking air benders with flight wasn't just a hobby, it was freedom. When I was in the air, I felt like my disability disappeared, as I could move just as well as all my fellow fliers. So, to have this newcomer contest me, I couldn't possibly lose.

I tilted my head to see the bald boy flying near. Moistening my lips, I gripped the controls on the sides of the wheelchair. My dark open-fingered gloves shielded my hands from the chill of this high altitude as I steered my flyer forward. I could sense the glider behind me match my velocity, the winds picking up more as we sliced through the air.

Undeterred by the advancement, I flipped the flyer and did a perfect back flip. But to my surprise, the boy copied this as well. It's time to raise the bar, I thought to myself. I dipped down and dropped straight for the central structure of the Northern Air Temple. My father discovered this place some years after the flood, and it had been home for the displaced Earth Kingdom denizens and me ever since. We twisted and turned in the air, neither one of us wanting to back down. "I can do more than just fancy gliding!" the other boy shouted, a smidge of smugness in his tone as he whipped his glider at the wall.

My eyes trailed the boy through my goggles as he released his grip from the glider and jumped onto the wall. Despite being sideways from the ground, he did an amazing job maintaining balance as he sprinted on the stones. As he picked up enough speed, he created a ball of air and rode on it, throwing up dust from the wall. I couldn't see through the grey soot, but it became evident to me that he succeeded in the difficult move as he leapt back onto the glider hovering near him and took to the skies again.

"I don't think I can do that," I called excitedly as he returned to my altitude, "but here's a good one." With that, I yanked on a switch near the handlebars, letting out a line of grey smoke behind me. I wasn't even looking at where my friends or my challenger were, as all I did was focus on my flight path. I usually didn't say much in the air, in case something unpleasant flew into my mouth, like an insect. But this time, knowing the challenge, I wasn't going to go quietly. Whirling several times in midair, I made at least two round loops. The clouds and sun swung around me while the wind tore at my shirt, causing the fabric to flap uncontrollably. This was the move to settle the duel between us, as I was about to tell this bald guy not to show up my flying abilities. Get this, I thought.

As I returned to a level position, I could hear cheering from below. I signalled the boy to look at my carving in the sky. "What do you think?" I asked, admiring the piece.

I could see his expression neutralize, his cheeks easing as he knew I got the best of him. I chuckled as I took one last look at my art before the wind distorted it. It was a spitting image of our bald friend, with the same expression he currently wore: the face of defeat. I might be a paraplegic, but I wanted to show that I belonged with those who could still use their legs. There was no way a disability would make me inferior to others.

I aimed the wheelchair on the landing strip, touching down and braking with pinpoint accuracy. The wheelchair screeched to a halt, but maintaining perfect balance as my friends raced in to remove the wings. Lifting my goggles, I rolled to my challenger and finally caught a glimpse of him. He was a bit younger than me, and had a blue arrow on his forehead. "Hey, you're a real air bender," I stated, recalling the statues around the place, "you must be the Avatar!" I exclaimed, trying to contain my excitement.

After a quick introduction, I got to know each visitor a little better. The Avatar, Aang, was an air bender from the Southern Air Temple, and had visited this place some time before. His companions were Katara, a teenage girl from the Southern Water Tribe intent on finding Aang a water bending teacher, and Sokka, Katara's brother who was really amazed by the technology around here. "You think this is good, then wait until you see some of the other stuff my dad designs," I told him, taking them into the temple.

I took them through a dark tunnel, finally emerging to the central area. The hiss of air being released and pumped echoed through the chamber as tubes and mechanics came into view. "My dad is the mastermind behind this whole place," I explained as the three glanced around in silence and awe, "everything's powered by hot air. It's great, isn't it?"

Sokka wasn't even listening as he shot to the machines, touching each tube and examining each nut and bolt like a treasure. Aang, however, had a muted response. He strolled around, scanning through the jungle of pipes and at the wall underneath. There were fading sculptures of air bending monks, bison, and other aspects of air bender life, probably reminiscent of his life a century ago. I could see Aang march up to the centre statue, that of a Sky Bison overlooking a pond. The fountain bubbled for a minute before the bison let out a blast of steam, depressurizing the room and getting the Avatar in the face. Grunting in disgust, he whipped his head away in anger. As Aang left, Katara asked me, "Are there any parts of the temple that are still the same?"

I took them to the back, away from the main area. I didn't recall new construction here, so I thought Aang could get some peace here. But was I ever wrong as Aang was greeted from my father in the most direct way possible. As the Avatar stepped up to a monk statue, a huge wrecking stone came crashing through the wall, nearly toppling him. From behind the debris, five figures came into view. The one in the centre was a tall, lanky, and balding man with a large beard and wearing an apron over his green clothes. Upon seeing us, his eyes grew larger than the moon. Immediately, he demanded why we were here, considering the dangers of construction zones as he designed a new bathhouse.

Aang, however, was none too pleased by my father's actions. "You just destroyed something sacred, for a stupid bathhouse!" he ranted, gripping his staff in anger. Even as my father explained that people were starting to stink, it still didn't make the Avatar feel any better. "This whole place stinks!" He yelled. With that, he slammed the staff to the ground, letting out an air cutter and sending the wrecking ball over the cliff.

After a quick clarification by me, I officially introduced the Avatar and his friends to my father, who then explained why everyone was living here. There was a flood at my village when I was an infant. It killed my mother and left me paralyzed waist-down. The other villagers, led by my dad, became refugees and wandered the world for years. It was not until we found the Northern Air Temple, located in a secluded mountain range near the North Pole that we decided to settle in and called it our home. "Build a new life for my son in the air, so everyone would be on equal ground, so to speak," my dad described, marching back to the hole created by the wrecking ball, "we're just in the process of improving what's already here. And after all, isn't that what nature does?" he asked.

The Avatar seemingly calmed down after understanding the situation, but I could tell that he still wasn't happy. As my father took Sokka to view his other inventions, I brought Aang into the deepest part of the temple. "There is one part of the temple that hasn't changed at all," I explained, glancing at a still expressionless Aang. I brought the wheelchair to a halt before a large door, with an elaborate set of tubes at its centre.

Katara commented that she had seen a similar design on another air temple, and I agreed. "Only an air bender can open it, so inside it's completely untouched, just the way the monks left it," I told the Avatar, "I always wondered what it was like in there."

There was complete silence as we looked to Aang. I could see his cheek muscles tighten up, his eyes closing as he firmly replied, "This is the last part of the temple that's the same as it was. I want it to stay that way." With his head still bowed, most likely in disappointment that his culture had radically changed, he left the sacred entrance.

*****

Haru's POV

Our three special guests followed me out of my small house and into the barn behind. Rarely did this quiet coal-mining town get visitors. And given that the Fire Nation had invaded this area for the resource and kept us under martial law for the last five years, meeting new people was that much more a treat. "My mom said you could sleep here tonight, but you should leave in the morning." I told them, pulling the doors of the old barn open and letting the light into the wooden chamber.

"Thanks," the youngest member, a boy wearing a large hat, replied cheerfully, "I'll make sure Appa doesn't eat all your hay." He pointed to the large Sky Bison situated on the far end of the barn. The large animal already had some of the yellow, dry material in its mouth, and was chewing patiently as we entered.

I smiled and nodded, gently closing the doors as they settled inside. It wasn't often to see someone as special as the Avatar and his friends around, and I was especially glad this young boy decided to come. The Fire Nation had harassed my town long enough and I felt it was time to fight back. When their troops attacked, they made sure to target all the earth bending inhabitants, imprisoning them and leaving only those who couldn't bend as to keep the town helpless. With limited fighting abilities, the Fire Nation troops acted like thugs, bullying us with high taxation and violence and milking our coal away.

But before I got very far, the teenage Water Tribe girl stepped back out. "Let's go for a walk together, shall we?" she suggested, tilting her head at the nearby woods.

I paused for a second, not knowing what to think. We didn't exactly hit it off very well, as they barged into my house claiming they saw me earlier. That got my mother very worried, as she was afraid that the Fire Nation troops might have captured me. After some careful explanation, they convinced my mom that they meant no harm and would not be telling the Fire Nation about what they saw. In exchange for that, Mom agreed to let them stay with us for the night. As we entered the forest, the girl, Katara, spoke. "I'm sorry about what I said earlier. I didn't know about your father."

I couldn't help but smile at the mention of my father. "The way you were talking back at the store, it reminded me of him," I replied. For some reason, when Katara was with my mother earlier, ranting about how the villagers could stand a chance in a battle against the Fire Nation, I genuinely felt he was here. "My father was very courageous. When the Fire Nation invaded, he and the other earth benders were outnumbered ten to one, but they fought back anyway. After the attack, they rounded up my father and every other earth bender, and took them away. We haven't seen them since."

We stopped at the top of the hill. I crouched down, my hands feeling for the rocks and pebbles on the ground as I overlooked the valley. "The problem is, the only way I could feel close to my father now, is to practice my bending." I picked up some sand and twirled them with my fingers, clumping them into the two round objects, making them spin in midair and circling each other. "He taught me everything I know."

I released the sand, letting it blow into the wind. I turned to watch the dusty material disappear into the distance, reminding me of the time when my father was taken away and my mother and I could only stand outside our house and watch helplessly. Deep down, I really wished that I could do something to rectify this problem. But given that I was just one, and everyone else refused to act, my chances of succeeding were slim.

Katara then knelt down beside me and showed me her necklace. She told me that it was the last memento from her mother, before she was killed in a Fire Nation raid. She described her own experiences with Fire Nation attacks, stating that even with her water bending and the necklace, it still wasn't enough for Katara to cope with the loss. Seeing the shiny blue pendant hanging from her throat, I realized the similarities between us. Maybe, even without my father, it was a new method to deal with this issue. After all, it might be better to heal together rather than alone, right?

As evening progressed, and we descended the hills and back to the village, we passed by the same area where Katara and friends first found me. Yes, I was secretly earth bending here, hoping to do it away from the views of others who might have chosen to report me to the authorities. Also, there were enough open mines here, meaning earth was abundant here, letting me use all sorts of new techniques that I had developed along the way. I was about to show Katara some of my favourite places to be when suddenly, a series of rocks caved in ahead of us, the boulders roared from the mouth of the mine and kicked up a huge dust cloud. "Urgh, help!" a voice shouted from the mine.

Katara and I rushed in, all the while keeping our eyes on the bottom of the rocks. There was an elderly man trapped by the cave-on, pleading to us for help as the rocks from above threatened to flatten him. I raced in and held up the rocks with my arms and shoulders while Katara pulled at the man, hoping he would lodge free. I could feel the rocks thundering at my spine, the mine ready to collapse any minute. Through squinted eyes, I glanced at Katara, who made minimal progress on the man. The rocks had him clamped to the ground, and there was no way out for him.

Sensing the danger, Katara did the unthinkable. "There's no one around to see you, and it's the only way to free him." She begged, holding onto the old man, who seemed closer and closer to suffocation. Biting my lower lip, I had to expose my secret.

Stepping away from the entrance, I faced the menacing rocks hurtling their way down. Aiming with my left hand, I got into a crouch and took a deep breath. Spinning around, I gathered my momentum and shot my hands towards the cave. My motion made the first set of rocks wiggle free, before the entire collapsed section went hurtling into the darkness inside. The roar of the rocks being thrown about echoed ominously as I relaxed my stance, getting a good look at the injured man. Katara was all smiles as I approached them, helping her pick up the senior and taking him back to the town.

After taking him to a medic, we were on our way back to my house. I bid Katara good night as she returned to the barn. I understood that she had to leave early tomorrow morning, so hopefully I could be there to see her off. She really inspired me to pursue my bending, as it would be crucial to not only bonding with my father, but freeing him from the Fire Nation should the battle ever take place. Right now, for me, bending represented freedom, as for once I could feel that I was away from the clutches of the Fire Nation.

After a quick dinner, my mother decided to go to bed. I was hoping to stay at our family shop for a little longer, just to finish cleaning up. It was completely dark outside, so I guessed most people had already gone home. That's why I was somewhat surprised when there was knocking on the door. Cocking an eyebrow, I approached the front, the lights around me flickering in suspicion as I undid the lock and pulled it open.

The only thing I could see from that moment on were the lit torches held by each Fire Nation soldier as they grabbed onto me. "That's him, that's the earth bender!" I heard an elderly voice shout. Immediately, I turned to the source of the sound, and much to my dismay, it was the same man I rescued from the cave-in earlier today. Even though Katara believed nobody would see, we didn't expect the victim himself would turn me in.

"Argh, what are you doing?" I grimaced, trying to wrest free from the soldiers' grasps. I heard that the Fire Nation was intent on using metallic hand cuffs to ensure that earth benders couldn't escape, as no known earth bender could bend metal. I could feel myself getting free when a series of blows slammed into my body. Pain seared up and down my spine and my sides as my vision blurred. I could feel my arms being pulled back, the soldiers roughly yanking my shoulders as they slapped the cuffs onto me.

The sounds of the troops barking instructions to each other drowned out the voice of an older woman hollering from the shop. "Mom?" I muttered, trying to look up. I had blood and sweat dripping off my head after the Fire Nation took multiple shots at me, but I had to make sure my mother was safe. "Mom, get inside, it's not safe here!" I called out to her. I tried to edge forward and prevent the Fire Nation troops from attacking her. But before I took another step, I felt a dull thud on the back of my head. And suddenly, the already dark night just became darker as I blacked out on the street.

*****

Teo's POV

A tall, silhouetted man stood at the entrance of the sacred chamber. Outside light cast a shadow over his face as four people gathered around him. "It was about a year after we moved here. Fire Nation soldiers found our settlement. They were going to destroy everything," my father stuttered, his eyes refusing to leave the floor. After hearing my intentions to share air bending with others as a way of expressing freedom, Aang decided to share his air bending heritage with me as well. As Katara experienced her first try at gliding, Aang told me he would open the sacred chamber and show me what was inside.

We returned to the area afterwards, and Aang shot two streams on air into the two tubes lining each side. But as the doors edged open, I couldn't believe my eyes. Dozens of weapons and other deadly devices lined the chamber, some of which decorated with the Fire Nation symbol. Before long, my father arrived, and we immediately demanded an explanation. "I begged them to spare us, and they asked what I had to offer. I offered my services," he concluded, hanging his head in shame, "I did this for you."

I turned my wheelchair away from him, refusing to look at my father. Tears spilled from my eyes as I couldn't bear to see the truth. My own father, the man who saved our village from the flood, led us away from the attacking Fire Nation, and helped us rebuild our lives in this temple, was assisting in genocide. I could hear his footsteps echoing down the hall, heading away from the sacred chamber and probably back into his own lab. Save for slight sobbing coming from me, the room was completely silent.

Suddenly, a surge shot through my body as I wheeled around, heading straight for my dad's lab. The voices calling from behind me were nothing but slurs as I hurried to my destination. My heart pounded on my sternum and my teardrops dissipating, blown away into the air as I headed to the final elevator that headed into the tower. When we first moved here, my father invented these elevators to allow me to get around this tall, multi-storied temple better. Using hot air, he was able to manipulate the amount needed to send this skyward. But now, all these inventions meant nothing as I had to find out what he intended to do, and when the Fire Nation would come to pick them up. Just as I was about to lift off, Aang joined in. "I'm coming with you," he stated.

We were in complete silence as the walls blurred past us, both of us with only one thing in mind. As we reached our destination, we burst through his lab, and demanded to know when the Fire Nation would arrive. A nearby candle popped once, indicating that it was an hour past noon. "They'll arrive soon," my dad replied, "very soon."

Undaunted, Aang approached my dad and told him not to give the Fire Nation any more weapons. Even as my dad told Aang that the Fire Nation would attack us should he refuse the deal, I wasn't about to let that slide. "How can I be proud of you when your inventions are being used for murder?" I retorted, half angry and half pleading. I stared into my father's eyes just as he knelt down to pick up another prototype. For once, we were on the same level, and I could see the pained creases lining across his face.

Suddenly, a small chime jiggled through the air, interrupting our thoughts. My father indicated that it was a Fire Nation representative, and told us to leave. When Aang and I refused, he merely pushed us to the side, placing us into a corner. With us away from the light, he opened a trapdoor located in the centre of the room. Within seconds, a grey-haired man with a long, thick beard came into view. It was just as we feared: the war minister of the Fire Nation himself came to see my dad's newest killing machines.

I could see hesitation in my dad's eyes as the war minister pressed him for the new inventions. The fire bender marched up to him, sticking his head right into my dad's face and glaring at him with threatening eyes. Sensing danger, Aang and I decided to take action. "The deal's off," Aang declared, kicking an air blast and slamming the lab door shut. Aang crouched near the door, guarding it with his life. "Get out of here, you're leaving empty-handed." Aang shouted, shooting an air blast at the middle-aged man.

The war minister glared at us one last time as he returned to the trapdoor, the light behind him swallowing him in darkness. "The destruction of this temple will be on your head." He spat, pointing at Aang before lowering himself back down to ground level.

As the minister left, Aang and I also took off, trying to get to Sokka and Katara to inform them of the news. We met on an open hallway bridging the lab to the rest of the temple, fretting continuously as we wondered what our next move should be. Even with the bleak odds, Aang refused to let our hopes drop. Insisting that we owned the skies, an aerial assault on the Fire Nation troops would be an option. And since the Fire Nation had no air force, there was no way they could hit back, meaning we had the advantage. But what surprised me the most was when my father emerged from the tower. He didn't say much, but that one line he uttered was the loudest he's ever spoken, "I want to help."

I couldn't help but grin from ear to ear as my father approached us with his new ideas. The details were nothing but murmurs to me as I admired the bearded man. He stood tall and proud, his facial features more poised than ever as he finally decided to stand up for his beliefs. We had been chased out of our village after a disaster, and were harassed by the Fire Nation wherever we went. But today, the Northern Air Temple was about to tell the Fire Nation in one voice that we would not go quietly into the night. "Go tell everyone to come to my lab,"he instructed, "I have some new methods to show you."

Before long, everybody gathered in my dad's laboratory as he explained the new aerial techniques we were about to employ. Thanks to Sokka, who worked very hard on remedying a few problems on the inventions, we were well on the way to defeating this invasion. But throughout the briefing, I had to say that my mind wasn't really on details. Rather, it was on my father, who was determined as ever to stop this disaster. It truly got me thinking as to what our relationship would be like afterwards, as I knew part of the reason for this resolve was to make up for what he did. And given that he asked me to take a huge roll in leading the aerial assault with the Avatar, it would probably mark a huge change in the way we relate to each other. No longer would I be Teo the unfortunate paraplegic, but Teo the able fighter, leading the way to repelling the Fire Nation.

Within an hour, we had our gliders lined up on the exterior of the temple. Each one would be armed with several types of bombs, all with a different purpose in our counteroffensive. One by one, we raced to the edge, throwing ourselves into the wind and diving through the clouds. By the time we emerged, we could see the Fire Nation troops marching up the mountain, the soldiers lined up in single file due to the narrow walking space on the rock ledges. With their full concentration on negotiating their way up, it was the perfect time to strike. Signalling to Aang, we tilted down and zoomed in on them.

The group closest to the top were our first victims as we hurled a series of slime bombs at them. The viscous liquid splattered all over the soldiers, creating green goo all over their armour and weapons. As the bottom troops prepared to reinforce, the gliders in the back of our formation wheeled in and dropped several smoke bombs, choking them and blurring their vision. With grey hue before them and dark green slime around them, the Avatar sought to add insult to injury as he dropped out of his glider and on the top ledge. Creating his air scooter, he shook loose the snow above them and let it smother the troops even more. With the Fire Nation on the run, it seemed like a sure win for us.

But the Fire Nation wasn't about to go quietly. Just as we pulled back out, leaving some room between the cliff and us, a series of hook shots blasted through the snow. The hooks grasped onto the ledges before an ominous clacking could be heard. I stared below and saw a series of tanks rolling their way up the mountainside. Soon, they were at the entrance to the temple, shooting their fire bombs at us and scattering our formation. Even as we pelted them with our bombs, while Aang got onto the ground and hoped to slow them down physically, it wasn't doing us any good. Given that we were just not doing enough damage to the tanks, my heart sank. Would this be it for the Northern Air Temple and its denizens? Remaining defiant, I decided that we should at least go down fighting.

I brought Katara, who was on Aang's bison supplying the gliders with bombs, onto the ground next to Aang. The two together formed an unstoppable bending team that kept the tanks at bay, a mixture of air slices and snow upheavals throwing the Fire Nation troops about. But there was only so much they could do, as I realized we had no bombs left, meaning there was no way we could assist them. Biting my lip, I could only wonder where my dad and Sokka were. "Come on, where's the great invention they made?"

Just then, a large war balloon with a red exterior floated out from the bottom of the temple. The large insignia might have been that of the Fire Nation, but it was evident who was on board. Carrying four large loads with a stench that could be smelled even inside the temple, Dad and Sokka steered the balloon above the troops and let their stink bombs loose. Each large bundle exploded into the snow, throwing about another set of dark liquids and reeking up the entire mountain. Then, in a last ditch effort to finish them off, Sokka unhooked the balloon's fuel source and hurled it into the crevasse below. The boiler fell in slow motion as it clanked against the rocks. Once, twice, and then complete silence. Then, before anyone could inquire, a huge explosion rocked the temple, shaking its foundation and sending most of us grabbing onto the nearest thing for balance.

By the time the smoke cleared, I could see Aang swoop down on his glider toward the falling war balloon. My heart pounded nonstop as I worried if Aang could reach them in time. I never got a chance to tell Dad that I forgave him, and that we could work things out again. He couldn't possibly go down without knowing that, right? Luckily, the Avatar emerged from the clouds, bringing them both back to safety. There was nonstop cheering as they were brought back to the temple, our people crying victory over the Fire Nation.

But none of that mattered as I wheeled up to my father, his face noticeably lighter and more emotional. Feeling tears sneaking up on me as well, I immediately pulled him into a hug, not letting him go as I pressed my chin onto his shoulder. I could feel him do the same as we held this position for a while. I might have disapproved of his acts, but he was still my father, and I was proud of his actions today. And like what we did with our lives after the flood, we realized that it was possible to start anew. Together, we hoped to improve upon the inventions, hoping one day our world would no longer be ruled by fear and intimidation when we free everyone from the Fire Nation using these tools.

*****

Haru's POV

"So you got yourself arrested just to find me? You've got guts, Katara, I'll give you that." I commented as I scanned the teenage Water Tribe girl standing before me. She had the brown prisoner uniform on top of her usual blue tunic, and seemed slightly worn out, but otherwise she looked like she was in good shape.

"There's someone I want you to meet," I brought Katara to a group of older earth benders. They were seated in a circle on the ground, most of them eating whatever little scraps offered for our meals. Pointing to a balding, grey-haired man with a thick beard, I made the appropriate introductions. "This is my father, Tyro. Dad, this is Katara."

Instantly, my dad offered Katara his food, thanking her for looking out for my family for the last couple of days. As Katara tried to gulp down the cold, disgusting and tasteless liquids, my father turned to the other earth benders and asked them to take care of the elderly and sick prisoners. I couldn't help but smile, as my father's passionate side was on display again. Even with his age, he refused to let others suffer more, insisting that they got the extra blankets instead. It was no wonder why I admired him so much.

"If you don't mind me asking, what's your escape plan?" Katara chimed in, "you know, the plan to get everyone off the rig?" The Fire Nation placed the prisoners on a metal rig in the middle of the ocean. There was no way earth benders could bend metal or water, so escape would be very difficult. While we stayed here, the guards forced us into hard labour, digging up more coal from the ocean and refining them for their navy's use.

"The plan is to survive, wait out this war," my father replied in a low tone. I could see the pain in his eyes, most likely reliving the failure of our town's defence. I couldn't bring myself to look on, turning away from the once-proud man now forced to live his life as a prisoner of war. How could my heart not ache seeing the freefall he experienced? "Katara, I admire your courage, and I envy your youth. But people's lives are at stake here. The warden is a ruthless man, and he won't stand for any rebellion. I'm sorry."

Undaunted, Katara shot up and marched to the other side of the open area. Even though it was evening, I could see her silhouette clearer than ever, as her confident pose let her stand straighter than anyone on this rig. Climbing onto an old dining table, she grabbed a pan and banged it with a spoon. "You don't know me, but I know of you," she announced, getting everyone's attention, "every child in my Water Tribe was rocked to sleep with stories of the brave Earth Kingdom and the courageous earth benders who guard its borders. Some of you may think that the Fire Nation has made you powerless."

I couldn't help but take my eyes off the ground and turn to the standing figure. Despite Katara's age and gender, her voice had much power and authority, almost like urging us to fight on. "Yes, they have taken away your ability to bend, but they can't take away your courage." Katara dropped her items and raised up a fist. "The time to fight back is now. I can tell you that the Avatar has returned! So remember your courage, earth benders! Let us fight for our freedom!" She exclaimed, her words echoing off the walls.

As she finished that speech, I almost wanted to jump to my own feet and applaud, but a hand on my shoulder prevented me from doing that. I looked around, and saw my dad shaking his head at me and warning me not to raise a fuss. I could feel my eyebrows creasing in frustration as the rig remained in silence. Except for some ill earth benders coughing, not a voice spoke. I turned to Katara, and her erect pose sagged. Her head dipped low, ashamed at the total rejection by these villagers, most of whom I knew well. My head sank too, pondering their reaction had I spoken out in favour of Katara.

Before long, a bell tolled, signalling that it was time to return to our cells. The prisoners trudged back into the rig's interior, again done in complete silence. I looked on guiltily as one of the guards grabbed Katara off the table and escorted her away as well. I was deeply embarrassed by the actions of these villagers, wondering what ever happened to the brave earth benders exemplified so well by this group. I was especially pained by my own father, who did a total about face here. Silently, I swore I would rectify the issue, and show everyone here, my father included, that bending was our way back to freedom.

A sleepless night for me only became more restless as the guards pulled us into the open area at daybreak. They stated a headcount of the prisoners was needed due to an intruder. But soon, the invaders were located, pressed up against a vent and surrounded by guards. We raced forward and instantly I recognized the troublemakers: Katara and her brother Sokka. Trying to diffuse the situation, my dad told the siblings to surrender, as it was a battle that couldn't be won. Even though I understood the danger, I couldn't help but grimace at the words. How could he tell those trying to save us to just give up?

"Listen to him well, child," a threatening voice echoed above us. I glanced to Katara again and saw the warden approach. His emotionless face, mirroring his own cold tactics, increased my pulse and breathing rate at least tenfold. But before anyone could move, a stream of coal shot through the vent and scattered everyone, Katara and Sokka included. Confused, I stared around, not knowing what to make of this phenomenon.

Then, from the same vent the coal shot through, the Avatar leapt into sight. His face and tunic were covered with black soot, but it didn't matter as Katara took centre stage again. "Here's your chance, earth benders!" She grabbed a piece of coal and waved it before us, boldly declaring, "Take it! Your fate is in your own hands!"

Seeing the courageous pose, I truly wanted to dart forward and show these Fire Nation guards the power of earth bending. But guess who was stopping me again? That's right, my father, who lifted an arm and blocked my path. Looking around, I could see that no one else made a move. Most of them were either too scared to act, or didn't want to make this fuss even bigger. I could feel blood rushing in and out of my head, my brain spinning uncontrollably as I struggled in deciding what to do next. As that happened, the warden laughed at Katara's attempt to inspire us, belittling her every word. He stated that none of us had hope left, claiming that all hope was crushed when we were brought here.

His mockery struck a nerve in me, as any control inside my body snapped. It was like my body was moving on its own as I charged in, much to the horror of my father and those earth benders around me. Lifting up some coal, I twirled them with my fingers, and hurled them at the warden. The stones made their mark, smacking the warden in the back of the head. The warden whipped around, glaring angrily at me for my defiance, only to be matched by my own stare. I wasn't about to let up, especially to this arrogant man who taunted my entire village. We weren't about to let the Fire Nation run roughshod over us. Twirling a couple more pieces of coal, I prepared to let them loose as well. If it weren't for freedom, then at least I must fight for my honour.

The cruel old man shot in two blasts of flame, the heat sizzling through the air towards me. The clacking of coal echoed around me just as the flame arrived. I glanced up just in time to see my father blocked the shot with a wall of black. It only enraged the warden even more as a few other earth benders lined up around us, forming a horizontal line. My father, directly to my right, glanced over with a smile. Nodding to everyone around, this was the time to fight back. "For the Earth Kingdom, attack!" He shouted.

There was sheer pandemonium as everyone was earth bending the coal. My father and I moved in unison, almost like we were one as we pulled up a large amount of coal. Using our bending, we pressed the coal together, forming a large, hard ball. Then, in one smooth motion, we kicked the ball at the wall, rocking its foundation and forming a hole. Estimating its size, we figured it would be a perfect escape route once we beat the guards. "Get to the ship, we'll hold them off!" Dad called to the others, pointing at the opening.

The warden, in a last ditch effort, tried to fire bend at the escapees, only to be stopped by the Avatar. Aang, in an ingenious move, created a funnel of air while Katara and Sokka loaded it with coal. Using the funnel as a slingshot, he fired a series of coal pieces at high velocity, hindering the warden's progress. Sensing our chances, Dad and I moved a large amount of coal under the cruel man, lifting him into the air and moving the coal over the sea. "Don't worry, I hear cowards float." I heard my father told the warden mockingly. Together, we relaxed our stances, dropping coal and warden into the water.

We finally boarded the vessels and headed for home. Even as Katara and friends had to move on, I was forever grateful for their actions, which inspired me to use my bending to take back our homes as well. Perhaps, one day, my bending might be put to use in a real battle. But for now, I was happy to play my small role and leave the rest to the Avatar. As my father and I waved farewell to the Sky Bison, I realized there was one more reason, other than parental bonding, for me to bend: I bend to obtain my freedom.

*****

To be continued...

[Canada Cowboy]

Continued from above post...

*****

Teo's POV

The sounds of battle raged as I glanced through the small crack before me. For the last few months, my dad and I had been refining inventions for the invasion of the Fire Nation. Ever since Aang and the others found out there would be a solar eclipse on this day, they had been planning for an invasion of the Fire Nation capital city. Sokka got my father and I involved by reviewing some of Dad's old invention plans. With some fine-tuning, we created several new devices that would become useful in our invasion today.

And this machine I was currently in, a long metallic but flexible tank, was such an invention. Operating the lead tank, we had to disable Fire Nation sentry stations along the way. Taking aim at the station in front of me, I pulled some levers, moving the tank on top of it and wrapping it from above. Then, with hydraulics and the assistance of earth benders manipulating the earth making up the stone structure, we clamped down on the sentry station and crushed it into rubble. Not bad for my first land battle.

As we continued our march forward, we were taking heavy fire from the Fire Nation troops. The metallic interior heated up dramatically as we took blast after blast of flames. Perspiration dripping from my forehead, I manoeuvred around several of our own troops, supplying them with whatever defence needed. Wiping the front of my goggles, I glanced around and saw sentries and other bunkers still present. But they were not the biggest threat, as a cavalry of Komodo Rhinos charged out and aimed at our foot soldiers. "This is total mayhem," I called to the earth benders in my tank, "let's provide cover."

We twisted around and pulled near the walls, trying to block the Komodo Rhinos from cutting off our foot soldiers. My dad, who drove around a supply truck dropping off large boulders for our earth benders to use, was under heavy fire as well. Even though a fair amount of boulders had been left on the ground, they weren't in convenient areas for our earth benders to launch their attacks. "This is bad," I murmured, "really bad."

Things continued to stay disorganized until a large Sky Bison landed before us. The rider stood up and called to all of us, insisting that it was time to take out the central tower and make our way to the capital city. "It's Sokka, guys," I told those inside my tank, "he wants us in wedge formation and covering the foot soldiers. Let's move this thing around and provide cover. We're going to make the final push right now."

There wasn't any doubt in our minds what we would have once this succeeded. Our sudden change in tactics caught the Fire Nation off-guard, as most of their troops had to scramble just to catch up to us. One of the Water Tribe warriors had a truck loaded with explosives heading straight for the wall. Jumping off at the last second, the truck bomb slammed into the stones, creating a huge explosion that rocked the foundation of the tower. With Fire Nation troops on the run, we were about to close in. "We're going to cross the gate, and then it's a straight line to the top of the mountain." I announced.

My group let out a cheer as we ploughed forward, following Sokka's lead through the main gate. We were met by another line of defence for the Fire Nation, who formed a blockade with their tanks and shot flames at us. As the heat rained down on our group, we decided to realign ourselves. "Let's form a line of our own," I told the earth benders, "we'll provide cover with the sides of our tanks, and we'll earth bend out from the side panels. I'm going to see if I can get Sokka to communicate with the others."

Luckily, Sokka disembarked from Appa, and saw me wave him over amidst the chaos. After a quick chat, he managed to get the others to realign with me as well. "Let's see how the Fire Nation handles boulders being shot from our sides,"I tilted my head behind, getting a look at the earth benders lining up, "are you ready?"

Their nods of approval only excited me more as I pulled each lever controlling the side panels. Staring down the length of the tank, I had a perfect view of boulders flying out into the light and at the Fire Nation. Rumbles and tremors rocked the area as I pulled out the timer my father gave me, indicating the time of the eclipse. At this rate, we should be up the mountain before the eclipse began, and into the capital at its peak.

Suddenly, the outside became significantly darker. The moon's shadow slowly crept up to the sun, their exterior rims starting to cut into each other. My eyes alternated between the eclipse and the Fire Nation, their troops retreating as their attacks would soon be rendered irrelevant. "Guys, they're pulling back. This is our chance!" I shouted to the field leaders outside. In one swift move, we were ordered to pursue, whipping our tank around and heading straight for the mountain. Capital city, here we come.

*****

Haru's POV

Our tanks rumbled down the mountainside, finally reaching the crater of the volcano. The eclipse was taking place as of we speak, as the Mechanist, our technology expert, told us to put on sunglasses. Our group of earth bending foot soldiers rushed down the hill behind the tanks, ready to take out any Fire Nation soldiers. Knowing that they would have no fire bending left at this time, the capital city should be easy picking.

My father led our group down the capital city streets flushing out their troops. It just so happened that we ran into one battalion patrolling the area at the next block. He signalled us into position, getting into fighter stances as he called to the soldiers. "Stop! Surrender peacefully and we won't harm you!" He stated with authority.

The group leader across from us refused to cooperate, waving his arms around and pushing a fist towards us. Usually, this action meant we should probably dodge away, or at least bend out some rocks to block the fire. But today was the Day of Black Sun, meaning all fire benders would have their abilities minimized. With only a puff of smoke exiting his hand, the Fire Nation battalion leader had no choice but to concede. My father pointed to the two earth benders on the outermost of our formation. "You two, take them prisoner for now. We'll deal with them later on." He ordered.

Throughout the eclipse, our group marched around the city, trying to find any enemy forces. But surprisingly, the place was quieter than the mines near my hometown. Not a soul was around as it seemed like the city was evacuated. "Do you think they knew about the invasion, and planned an escape to avoid losing the war?" I asked my dad.

"I'm not sure, Haru," he replied, hesitance in his tone. He led us back to the city centre, where our tanks were parked at the moment. The eclipse was nearly over, but still there was nothing from the Avatar. "This does seem kind of suspicious to me."

Suddenly, a series of ominous shadows arose from behind the palace. We all glanced up and saw several war balloons, each with the distinctive Fire Nation insignia, floating above our heads. But even scarier were the enormous mechanical airships lifting off behind them. They took to the skies, which had brightened considerably as the moon had officially lifted its veil over the sun. With fire bending back in full force, there was no doubt in our minds what was about to happen. "Let's get back to the subs!"

Panic suddenly took over as our invasion team hurried away from the city and back down the mountain. The Avatar had returned to us, stating that his attempt to face the Fire Lord resulted in a failure. They pretty much confirmed everyone's fears, as the Fire Nation knew of this invasion long ago, and made plans to prepare for it. Now, with our group on the run, the only hope we had was to get to the submarines and evacuate before the airships burned us to a crisp. "Aang and Katara are holding them off," my dad told our earth bending team, "let's hurry before the airships reach us!"

Bombs sizzled down from the skies, shaking the hills violently as soil and pebbles raining down from our rocky shields. We could see that the airships didn't consider us the main target, heading straight for the submarines, seeking to destroy our only source to escape. Sensing that there were few options left, Hakoda, the leader of the invasion, made a fateful decision. "You kids have to leave. You have to escape on Appa together."

It was decided that the youngest of the group would leave while the adults stayed behind as prisoners. "I've got some experience with the Fire Nation prisons," my father stated, approaching the Water Tribe warrior, "it's not going to be easy, but at least we'll all survive." With that, he brought me forward, insisting I got onto the Sky Bison.

I could hear our subs exploding in the distance as the parents said goodbye to all the children. The Mechanist went first, placing his paraplegic son onto Appa. "I'm really proud of you," Teo told his father, holding him in a hug. I was truly impressed by how this boy did all the tank operations while coping with this disability.

Seeing Teo's actions, I couldn't help but embrace my own father as well, telling him that I would be back for him. "If I don't escape the prison first," Dad retorted, slight defiance in his tone. We performed quite well at our first imprisonment, breaking out with ease and overthrew the Fire Nation battalion at our town. Maybe the second go would be more successful? But either way, we had to stay alive to fight another day.

As Appa took off, my eyes were peeled for the invasion team standing helplessly at the foot of the mountain. Anytime now, the Fire Nation troops would gather them all up. I felt a pang of sadness in me, as shortly after I regained my father, I ended up losing him again. Clenching a fist, I vowed to help the Avatar do whatever possible to defeat the Fire Nation so that one day, nobody had to be taken prisoner by these cruel troops again.

*****

Teo's POV

"I told you! It's The Duke!" the young boy's voice echoed throughout the main chamber of the Western Air Temple as Haru and I went off to explore. Shortly after we left the Fire Nation capital, Aang decided that the Western Air Temple would be a great hiding ground for us, indicating its remote location and far distance from any main points of civilization as advantages. Given that I had never seen another Air Temple other than the Northern one before, I was naturally intrigued, and decided to investigate.

Haru helped my wheelchair up a flight of stairs before we took off for another ramp, leading away from the central plaza. Even at first glance, this place truly amazed me, as it was built into the side of a large canyon, with structures hanging down like large stalactites. There was a huge fountain in the middle, the water still moving and spraying twice as high as an adult's height. Looking back at the centre, I couldn't help but admire the scene. Amidst the sounds of the young boy correcting yet another one of my so-called butchered attempts at his name, insisting that there was a "The" in front of "Duke," we shot down the ramp and into a darker part of the temple.

I glanced around the dim area, trying to see past the two standing figures now situated on my either side. A sense of wonder descended upon us three as we saw the line of sculptures, each one depicting a different air bender, carved into the walls. There were air bender sculptures on the walls at my home, but never in this quantity or prestige. "It's so different compared to the Northern Air Temple." I stated in awe.

Haru tilted his head at me, one eyebrow slightly cocked. "Didn't you say you were from an Earth Kingdom town?" he inquired, intrigued by my comment.

"Oh," I stuttered, realizing that I hadn't fully told him my past. I rolled the wheelchair along the hall, letting Haru and The Duke slowly follow me. "My original hometown was destroyed by a flood, and for the first few years of my life I lived as a nomad of sorts. It wasn't until my father found the abandoned Northern Air Temple and made it into a home for my villagers and me that I had a permanent residence."

"I see," Haru responded, his tone slightly sombre, "and is that why you have to use a wheelchair? You lost use of your legs in that flood, right?"

I could feel my face freeze up slightly as the question arrived. The only sounds around us were footsteps echoing down the empty hallway. "Yeah, I've been a paraplegic since I could barely walk, and I've been confined to a wheelchair all this time," I replied, feeling the stone gazes of the air benders, "it was with this, and my father's own interest in machinery that inspired me to be involved in designing new pieces of technology." I didn't want to tell them about my father's involvement with the Fire Nation. Even though I forgave him, and he did more than his fair share of making up for the mistake, it was an issue that still touched a nerve, and I tried my best to avoid it.

But Haru had a story of his own as well. Just as we turned the corner, away from this hall and going deeper into the temple, he referred to his town's experience with the Fire Nation. "Just like you, my town had its fair share of disasters during my younger years. Because we were a resource-based area, with an abundance of coal, the Fire Nation had always wanted our land to supply fuel to their navy. My dad was among those who fought back, and unfortunately he was captured." Haru explained, closing a fist.

My eyes tilted to the tall figure at my right, and I could feel The Duke turning his eyes the same way as well. This teenage, goateed earth bender was no longer standing so brave and proud, as a pronounced slouch curved his back. "It was Katara who inspired me to fight back against the Fire Nation. She even got herself arrested just to break us out of jail," Haru described. His tone grew quieter, so much so that the soft wind blowing in from the openings behind us nearly overtook his voice, "Dad and I, along with the other villagers, just took back our town from the Fire Nation. Our family just got reunited when Hakoda went around the Earth kingdom recruiting people for the invasion. Naturally, my dad and I took part, but then that happened."Haru tilted his head in the direction of the exterior, signalling the failure that saw the Fire Nation take all the adults prisoners.

I sighed, turning my eyes to the ground. The cobbled stones went under my wheelchair one by one, our pace slowing down dramatically as I mulled over what was just said. I might have only known Haru for a few days, but suddenly I realized all the similarities we had. Our pasts were both marred by tragedy that involved the absence of one parent, and we both had to cope with the Fire Nation in our own way. And, perhaps in a strange twist of fate, we managed to cooperate with each other in this invasion. "At least you know you're not alone in getting through this,"I told Haru, staring up at the tall figure, "I'm in the same boat as you, and we'll get through this together."

I could see Haru turn back to me, the sunlight illuminating half his face, but still enough to show a smile crawling up his face. "Thanks, Teo," he responded, placing a hand on the back of my wheelchair, "to be honest, I should be impressed by you, because you managed your way through life without the ability to walk, hence without the ability to bend. It takes a lot of courage to do that, I'll say." He commented.

"No, actually," I replied, pointing back at Haru, "I'm really impressed by you. You never had a chance to freely practice bending, since you said the Fire Nation pretty much put your town under martial law. So for you to not just be proficient at earth bending, but to do it under dangerous circumstances, I say that's an achievement."

"Guys, come look at this!" The Duke shouted, waving us over to a darker area in the corner. While we had been talking, somehow we lost track of The Duke, who went ahead in exploring on his own. Now, it seemed like he discovered something unusual in this little nook, and wanted us to check it out. "Do think this leads somewhere."

Haru and I looked on as The Duke tried to dislodge one of the stones covering the front. When I first arrived, I wondered if there would be secret chambers and passages, the same things that were so common at the Northern Air Temple. But now, it seemed like the Western Air Temple was the same, and we were in for a big surprise. "So Duke, are you going in first?" I asked, my eyes widening involuntarily.

"The Duke, not Duke!" the youngster snapped, glaring daggers into my face, "and since I'm the smallest one, I guess I can go first." He and Haru cleared out a few more blocks and glanced into the darkness before slipping through opening. His cries of excitement echoed through the tunnel before being replaced by a dull thud.

"Hey, are you alright down there?" Haru called, kneeling down to the same level as the opening. We could here his muffled voice sounding like he was describing the area below. It sounded something like rocks, statues, and other holy objects being found. "I think I'm going to follow," Haru stated, climbing into the hole as well.

Seeing my two friends disappear into the darkness, I decided to follow as well. Being in a wheelchair, I had to move more carefully as to avoid being stuck. Luckily, the tunnel was wide enough, and before long I could hear the wheels rolling down below. I could see silhouettes of humans standing in line, their stony gazes guarding this chamber as I rumbled towards them. Sensing that I was about to reach the bottom, I reached for my brakes. But this time, I could tell something was different, as the sounds and my deceleration weren't up to par. "Look out!" I yelled, hoping those underneath could get away in time as I tried to manually stop myself from crashing and turning into oblivion.

*****

Haru's POV

"How many days has it been since Sokka and Zuko took off on us?" Teo asked as we edged towards the tunnel leading to the underground hall of statues again. Much to the whole group's surprise, Prince Zuko, heir to the Fire Nation throne and our supposed sworn enemy showed up at our temple and offered to join our group. He stated that Aang still didn't master fire bending, and that he would be a good candidate as Aang's teacher. Naturally, there was some mistrust hearing that, knowing his history, but he proved to be surprisingly friendly, bonding well with most of us and even gaining our respect. To us, this former Fire Nation enemy definitely redeemed himself, that's for sure.

"It's been at least two now. Three, if you count the fact that it's night time." I replied, pushing the rocks out of the way. Zuko's been here for less than a week, and he spent most of his time with the Avatar, demonstrating different fire bending techniques. It didn't work very well at first, as Zuko temporarily lost ability to fire bend. But after a trip to an ancient city from a thought-to-be-extinct tribe called the Sun Warriors, Zuko and Aang seemed to have found inspiration to fire bend again. This time though, Zuko went with Sokka, supposedly on a fishing trip, and wouldn't be back for a while.

As usual, The Duke slid in first, followed by me. But I made sure to provide some type of contingency measures to ensure Teo's wheelchair didn't spin out of control again. The first time we came down here, Teo's brakes choked up, causing my good friend to tumble to the ground, scraping up his head in the process. He managed to fix the brakes now, but just to be safe, I stood at the mouth of the tunnel, waiting patiently for him to come down. "If need be, I'll bend some pebbles up just to slow you down." I called.

But there was no need, as the wheelchair hurtled down the chute, making a perfect landing and screeching to a halt. Teo's brakes worked perfectly as he grinned at me. "No need to bend, everything's fine. Now, let's go back to that bending practice chamber!"

The Duke was the first to race off while Teo and I followed closely behind. There were several areas in the back rooms that had loose boulders and other rock pieces, which made it ideal for earth bending. I developed a few new tricks on my journeys there, and I was intent on showing Teo and The Duke just what they were about. "Speaking of which, Teo," I turned to my paraplegic friend, "are there any benders in your group?"

Teo chuckled. "That depends on your definition of bending," he responded coyly, "if bending to you means what you do, actually manipulating the elements in sequence with your body, then no. But if bending to you means taking certain aspects of a certain type of bending, mimicking it and enhancing it, then I'm proud to say we're air benders."

My eyes grew wide as we entered the room of interest. Teo might have lived in the Northern Air Temple for years, but never had I imagined him having the ability to do air bending techniques. "What do you mean?" I inquired, "what can you guys do?"

Not even the most traumatizing events could wipe the smile off Teo's face as explained how his father, The Mechanist, modified air bender gliders for non benders to use. "For me, things were a bit different, because I had to be on a wheelchair. But in the end, it's all the same, as I had to manipulate the air currents around me in order to gain flight," Teo described, shrugging as he thought about his experiences, "to me, flying is a sense of freedom. For a little while, it allowed me to forget that I was bound to this set of wheels. All in all, bending is my liberator, and I'm going to use it to liberate the world."

Hearing that, I couldn't help but nod, a grin stretching across my face as well. "You sound so much like me, you know that?" I commented, giving him a pat on the shoulder, "for me, I bend for pretty much the same reason."

Teo looked on as I approached the stone wall. Placing a hand next to the largest pieces, I made some of the settled dust levitate towards me. Squeezing the dust together, I formed a few small earthen balls, twirling them in the air with my fingers as I told Teo about what bending meant to me. "You know I told you that my father was captured by the Fire Nation before for fighting back, right? It just so happens that before he left, he taught me all the basics of earth bending, and that's how I knew the techniques even though he was absent all this time." I recalled, my eyes glued to the rotating balls.

"So when Katara came in and inspired you guys to break out, that's when you got to show your dad the earth bending progress you made?" Teo asked, rolling up to me and placing his head closer to the earthen balls, "and that's why you felt bending represented freedom to you. Because it got you and your father out of jail, correct?"

I squeezed my hand into a fist, the balls stopping their spinning and clumped into an even larger sphere. "Not only that, but earth bending managed to get us our town back, at least after we got out," I continued, thinking of the first battles our villagers fought in regaining our town, "I got a chance to fight along side the most skilled earth benders of our town, and it was truly an eye-opener. I was still a relative novice in terms of bending, but to get my dad and the other elders' approvals, that truly meant something. And it also inspired me to help them liberate other towns, and later on help Aang save the world."

With that, I pushed my arm out, sending the earthen sphere into the wall, melding it into the rocks and making a conglomerate of sorts. "You know, if we do get through this ordeal, and the Fire Nation is defeated by Aang and the others, I would like to invite you to my town," I offered to Teo, "I think most of the villagers would be thrilled to meet you, considering your unique history. Would you like to come, if that happens?"

Teo beamed in delight, accepting the offer without hesitation. "But that means you have to come visit my group afterwards, in the Northern Air Temple," he countered, "I would love to strap a glider onto you and see how well you handle flight."

I chuckled, imagining the crazy things Teo's friends would attempt in the air. For me, flying was almost never an option. As an earth bender, my comfort zone was on the ground, close to the earth and such. I needed to feel the soil around me to be secure, and to be that far up in the air was something I dreaded. But then I met Teo, and it made me realize that in this world, nothing was impossible. Besides, should the Avatar set a new order for the world, perhaps it was only fitting that people of different elements should interact more with each other. And if it meant putting high-flying Teo on the ground, and strapping a glider onto my soil-covered back, then so be it. The world was ready for a change, and Teo and I were intent to play our parts. After a bit more earth bending, Teo and I decided to go back up. Taking The Duke with us, we spent the rest of the night wondering what would happen to our future, and what new challenges it might hold.

We awoke to the sounds of a huge mechanical airship, piloted by none other than Zuko and Sokka. The doors opened to reveal two people; one was a teenage girl who Sokka identified as Suki, the leader of the Kyoshi warriors, but the other was a familiar face we had been dying to see: Hakoda. Despite Toph's complaints that Zuko and Sokka didn't bring back any meat, we were overjoyed to be reunited with our invasion leader. Zuko brought Aang aside, demanding what progress the Avatar made on fire bending, while Sokka and Katara spent time with their father and Suki. But for me, this signalled that things were looking up. Although Hakoda insisted another Fire Nation invasion was not on his mind at the moment, I had a feeling that, somehow, this war was near its end.

*****

POV's of both Haru and Teo. Italics represent thought process.

The crowds erupted into cheers as the final head piece was placed onto Zuko's head, signifying his official coronation as the new Fire Lord. From the crowd, we hugged our respective fathers, exhilarated and relieved that the war was finally over. It wasn't easy, as the Fire Nation managed to track us at the Western Air Temple, launching a new attack on us and forcing some of us to flee. While we left with Hakoda, The Duke, and Chit Sang, a prisoner who escaped prison with Hakoda, Aang and the rest of his group decided to fight on, biding for time until the final battle with Fire Lord Ozai.

And what a battle it was. We heard that Aang and the Fire Lord actually had a one-on-one battle, but Aang couldn't bring himself to kill the Fire Lord. Instead, he told us of a new technique that allowed him to strip Ozai of his bending. With the tyrant no longer posing a threat, it was relatively easy for Zuko to ascend the throne, promising us a new era of "love, peace, and hope." We glanced around to see members of all different nationalities gathering here. To us, even before taking the first step, Zuko had already made progress, as no Fire Lord before permitted this large variety of people to attend. As we gathered around, realizing how much the world had changed and how we changed along with it, there was one common thought going through both our minds.

My name is Haru...
My name is Teo...
That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch 6: Earth King Kuei

*****

The large doors at the far end of the wide room blasted open, letting in a violent rush of air. As the dust cleared, I could see a boy dressed in blue on the ground, rubbing the back of his head. I could feel my hands grip the sides of my seat harder, my fingers turning white as three other figures barged in as well. Helping the boy up, they raced down the aisle and straight at me. "Who are you?" I demanded with a gasp, just as a line of men in dark green robes lined up before me, facing the intruders aggressively.

Immediately, they held their ground, standing in a horizontal line across the room and whipping out their set of very unique weapons. There was a bald boy with a blue arrow on his head standing to my furthest left. He seemed to be the youngest of the bunch, wearing a yellow and orange robe-like tunic and holding a staff to his side. "We need to talk to you," he stated strongly and firmly, his eyes set straight to me.

My most trusted advisor, Long Feng, who I had known throughout my life, turned to me with a grimace. "They're here to overthrow you," he replied, waving his arm at the invaders. Seeing how they brandished their weapons at me, I would say I agree with him.

"No, we're on your side." The boy who fell in insisted. I got a better look at him, as he seemed to be the oldest of the bunch. He was the second person from the right, and wielded a set of bladed clubs. Although I was a bit intimidated, I was also curious to see how the clubs were used, as nothing in the Earth Kingdom was remotely close to that.

"You have to trust us." A girl standing between the club wielder and the bald boy emphasized in a gentler but just as tough voice. She was also dressed in blue, which made me believe that she was probably related to the one on her left. For some strange reason, her weapon of choice was a stream of water, hovering in the air just in front of her. I had no idea how it stayed floating like that, and that only made me more suspicious.

Frustration building inside me, I decided to take action. Taking a deep breath, I gathered all the courage inside me, forcing myself to my feet and confronted these unruly guests. "You invade my palace, lay waste to all my guards, break down my fancy door, and you expect me to trust you?" I retorted, glaring at them through my glasses, "If you are on my side, then drop your weapons and stand down!" I commanded firmly.

Finally, all four relaxed their stances. My eyes tilted from left to right, seeing the staff dropped, the water placed back into a sash on the girl's waist, the bladed clubs hit the ground, and a large boulder released. My eyes stayed on the far right, where a fourth group member, a girl in dirty Earth Nation garbs stood idly. Out of the four, she was the only one that probably resembled anything I knew. But it was her misty eyes that scared me the most, as those dull spheres sent a sharp piercing sensation through my body.

Nonetheless, I let Long Feng take over. The balding man raised a hand in the air. The Dai Li agents, the palace security guards, threw out earthen handcuffs and bound the invaders?wrists behind their backs. "Detain the assailants," Long Feng ordered, the team sliding across the hall before screeching to a halt behind them. Despite their protests, I heard Long Feng say, "make sure the Avatar and his friends never see daylight again."

Suddenly, I halted. Turning to my long-time confidant, I couldn't believe the words coming out of his mouth. I had heard stories of the Avatar from my ancestors, all of whom were Earth Kings before me. In fact, my ancestor from six generations back actually had a chance to work with an Avatar, an Earth Kingdom woman named Kyoshi. So, hearing that the current Avatar was with us, I couldn't help but get curious. "The Avatar? You're the Avatar?" I asked, pointing at the male teenager in blue.

The teenager tilted his head to the right, in which the bald boy waved at me. He pretty much proved his ability when he did earth bending on the handcuffs, freeing his arms to signal to me. Despite the friendly overture, Long Feng soon cut in, claiming that they were enemies of the state. "Perhaps you're right," I muttered, mulling it over. To my advisor, I was nothing more than a child, so who was a kid like me to question my elders?

Just then, my pet bear lumbered up to the group. It was about a week ago that we threw a party for him, and I did recall seeing someone similar to the Avatar's appearance do a performance that really got Bosco's attention. I didn't catch too much of a glimpse, as within seconds of me being carted out on a palanquin, I was pulled away again. I wasn't sure if the performers were seen as invaders or something like that, but the party was nearly called off. Yet, seeing Bosco give the Avatar a lick, I couldn't help but crack a smile. "Though Bosco seems to like him," I pointed out, "I'll hear what he has to say." I had never seen anyone like them before, so it wouldn't hurt to find out more, right?

The bald boy came forward and introduced himself as Aang. "There's a war going on right now, for the past one hundred years, in fact. The Dai Li kept it secret from you. It's a conspiracy to control the city, and to control you," he stated, his grey eyes staring right at me, "Long Feng didn't want us to tell you, so he stole our Sky Bison to blackmail us. And blackmail's the least of his crimes, as he brainwashed our friend!"

Long Feng turned to me with an unimpressed face, claiming that he had never even seen such animals before, as he thought they were extinct. Taking a seat on my throne, I mulled everyone's words carefully. The large, dim chamber was in complete silence, the small flames dancing in the shadows around each stone pillar. Turning my head slightly, I could see Long Feng's determined eyes right at my face. Sighing, I made my decision. "I have to trust my advisor," I concluded, waving the guests away.

Suddenly, the Avatar and his friends had a strange suggestion. Turning to Long Feng, they demanded that he lifted his robe. My trusty minister naturally refused, and I admit that should I be placed in the same situation, I would too. But Aang did almost the unthinkable as he sucked in a huge breath of air and blew it towards Long Feng. I could only shield my face as the head of the Dai Li took the force head on, his robe flapping up and into his face. Although I couldn't see it clearly, I could hear the Avatar's group yell excitedly as the wind died down, pointing at a weird pattern on Long Feng's lower leg.

Upon hearing that, Long Feng insisted that it was an old birthmark that he wasn't particularly proud of. But the evidence soon became clearer as the youngsters brought in a large, white, furry, six-legged animal. Aang got the bison to bare its teeth, comparing them to the markings of Long Feng's legs. While the match was strong, I was still quite unconvinced of their crazy conspiracy theory and talks of a secret war. "But this matter's worth looking into though," I pointed out, "so where do you want us to start?"

*****

"That's a drill. A giant drill made by the Fire Nation to break through your walls," Sokka, the teenage boy dressed in blue explained. After some careful consideration, I decided to go along with the Avatar and his group to check out some of the evidence that point to this so-called conspiracy and secret war. We originally rode on a monorail to Lake Laogai, and I truly didn't expect it to be packed with people. But then again, I had never been outside the palace throughout my twenty-five years in existence, so seeing the city of Ba Sing Se as a whole was a completely new experience for me.

But when we got to Lake Laogai, we didn't find what they claimed. Toph, their earth bender, lifted a series of rocks resembling a runway from the water. That act truly impressed me, as they told me that Toph was blind. To have a blind person do that was truly amazing, but excitement was soon replaced by annoyance as no secret passage was present. Claiming that the group was wasting my time, I was about to return to the palace when Sokka offered to bring me to the Outer Wall of the city. As an added bonus, he told me I could become the first Earth King to fly a Sky Bison if I tagged along.

And after a terrifying but exhilarating ride, we finally reached the Outer Wall. I gathered enough courage to look down, my head still spinning from the flight, but the scene couldn't be clearer to me. A large metallic machine was imbedded into the wall, the surrounding area fenced off as soldiers stood on guard on top of the wall. "I can't believe I never knew," I murmured, bowing my head in shame as Aang landed Appa on the wall. As we disembarked, I could only grip the side of the wall, my eyes staying on the machine below. On the hull was the Fire Nation insignia, positioned front and centre on the drill and reflecting the sunlight at me almost tauntingly.

Just then, Long Feng shot up from a nearby trapdoor, with two Dai Li agents accompanying him. Stepping up to us, he had on his usual stoic demeanour as he offered to explain the presence of said drill, claiming it was a construction project funded by the Fire Nation. "You know you can't trust domestic machinery," Long Feng explained. Even with the usual authoritarian tone, I could hear the stutters in his voice.

I could feel my head swing back and forth between my most trusted advisor and the group of children. My mind spun more violently than ever before, as I couldn't just throw out everything Long Feng taught me throughout my life. On the other hand, no one, not even the Earth King, could disregard the claims of an Avatar that easily. I took one more look at the drill below, with that Fire Nation symbol carved into the top, and I realized that the evidence was too great. Turning to the guards, I simply ordered, "Dai Li, arrest Long Feng. I want him to stand trial for crimes against the Earth Kingdom."

I could see the shocked expression on Long Feng's face, as my closest confidant was apprehended by the two agents to his either side. I figured that he probably felt a bit betrayed by my actions, but I had to do something for my kingdom right now. Because I took the throne at the age of four, I simply didn't have the knowledge of the kingdom to make crucial decisions. Long Feng had been in the bureaucracy since then, and had been with me during the time I grew up. He slowly worked his way to this position as the head of the Dai Li and as a chief minister, staying loyal to me throughout. But right now, the proof against him was just too strong. If he were the chief minister, the least he could do was to clear up the situation. So, when the Dai Li took him back down the same shaft he came up from, I turned to the Avatar and requested to be taken back to the palace.

There was complete silence during the flight back, compounding to my already increasing level of shame. How could I have been so blind to what the world was going through? My own capital city was almost invaded, yet I sat on my throne expecting the Dai Li to protect me, only to have them double-cross me and cover up the incident. Given that they were the cultural police, had they denied this knowledge to the citizens as well? How many lives were at stake should the Fire Nation succeed in their invasion? As Appa landed at the palace, I trudged back to the throne room, my head dipped lower than ever before. "I want to thank you young heroes for opening my eyes," I told Aang's group as I climbed onto my throne, "all this time, what I thought was a great metropolis was a city of fools, and that makes me the king fool." I stated, shielding my eyes with one hand.

I could feel four sets of emotionless eyes piercing through my body. I didn't know if they were disappointed at such an imbecile being a king, or if they were trying to take pity on me for my blindness to the world. I didn't need their assurances right now, as all this was brought upon me by myself. As I continued to admonish myself, Sokka spoke up. "We think you can help us end the war," he explained, telling us that a comet would come by summer that would empower the Fire Nation even more, to the point where they could wipe out the world. "Before the comet comes, we have a window of opportunity. A solar eclipse is coming. The sun will be entirely blocked out by the moon, and the fire benders will be helpless. That's the day we need to invade the Fire Nation!" He declared.

At first, I was unconvinced, as any invasion required a lot of manpower. To move all those troops out of Ba Sing Se and onto another battlefield would leave us vulnerable. Just as I was about to make my point, Sokka corrected me yet again. "You're already vulnerable. The Fire Nation won't stop until Ba Sing Se falls. You can either sit back and wait for that to happen, or take the offensive and give yourself a fighting chance."

Instantly, I could feel a surge of energy race through me, pushing my slouched posture into a straight one and lifting my chin away from my sternum. Sokka was right, I thought. Instead of grumbling over the past mistakes, I should focus on the future and use every means to rectify it. Turning to Aang's group, I agreed to their demands and told them I would contact the Council of Five, the top generals of the Earth Kingdom to plan for this invasion. For all the years that I had lived with such an immature mindset, seeing the world with rose-coloured glasses on, this was the least I could do. It was time for me to grow up and face the world like a man, and nothing was going to stop me.

*****

"Aang and Sokka, I wish you a good journey." I told the Avatar and his Water Tribe warrior friend, who were positioned right before Appa. After Long Feng's arrest, we raided his office, and it turned out that he was spying on the Avatar's group the whole time. He even intercepted their mail, including one from Sokka and Katara's father, who had a fleet of Water Tribe ships guarding the bay that sailed straight into Ba Sing Se. As well, there was one for Aang from a guru at the Eastern Air Temple who offered to teach him some new skills. "Ba Sing Se owes you its thanks, and we look forward to your safe return." I concluded, just in time to see them return with a bow.

I beamed as I watched Sokka and Aang get onto Appa. Because one person must stay to discuss battle plans, Katara volunteered to remain at the palace. We also received a letter hidden in Long Feng's office that Toph's parents were in Ba Sing Se, and had wanted to see her. Since that would take Toph's attention away from the planning, Katara was the only one available. As Katara and I were about to take the steps back up to the palace, one of the guards approached. "Your majesty, there are three female warriors here to see you. They're from the island of Kyoshi." He reported, signalling below.

I glanced down just in time to see three young ladies. They were dressed in green robes, with strange decorative pieces sticking out their hair, and their faces covered in white make-up. I had been told by both the Council of Five and the Avatar's group, who supposedly knew these warriors quite well, that they were on their way to the city. "Let's welcome them as honoured guests." I decided, instructing the guards to summon them.

I saw the Avatar take off with Sokka, while Toph bid us farewell as she wandered into the city. Katara was the only one left, and she decided to wait for me in the Council's planning room. As the guards lined up, I welcomed the visitors. "In our hour of need, it is with the highest honour that I welcome our esteemed allies, the Kyoshi Warriors!" The threesome got to their knees and bowed before me just as I announced their names.

After a quick introduction, I invited them into the throne room. This would be where the warriors would spend most of their times, as the guards wanted them to be my personal bodyguards for the next little while. Turning to Bosco, who was on his stomach just before the throne, I took a seat and showed him our visitors. "The Kyoshi Warriors are here to protect us. Aren't you excited?" I asked, gently pulling on his face.

Bosco replied with a low groan, which only got my spirits higher as I turned to the ladies. "It's been a difficult week for me," I explained, recalling the events that really changed my life, "my most trusted advisor, Long Feng, and the Dai Li agents, tried to take control of Ba Sing Se from me." Although I never revealed it, I actually didn't want to trust anyone for the last little while. But after the Avatar and his group told me how I could make the difference in this war, I was convinced to open up my heart again. Now, to see the Kyoshi Warriors, close friends of the Avatar's group, come to my aid, I felt more relaxed then ever before. Somehow, things were going to be different in the future.

"It's terrible when you couldn't trust the people closest to you." The girl in the centre, who I assumed to be the leader of the group, commented. Those words had some special connotation for me, as throughout my life, Long Feng was the one making my every decision. Aang's friends were right, as in a private conversation, they told me that it was almost like I was a mere figurehead. Maybe they had a point that I was somewhat of a puppet, but at least things were better now that I had control of the throne again.

"But there is good news," I responded, "as we speak, the Council of Five is meeting to plan an invasion of the Fire Nation this summer on the day of a solar eclipse." I described each detail with pride, knowing that our allies would be there to support us when we took down the Fire Nation. I could see the team listen to my every detail, like they wanted to know better so they could prepare for it too. The more the merrier, right?

Before long, I lost track of the time, and realized that I should probably meet up with Katara in the war chamber to get a status report from the generals. "I'm going to have to be excused for the moment. Why don't we take you to the guest rooms first? I'm sure you must be tired from the long journey you took here." With that, I summoned a few servants to take our honoured guests away. As they spoke softly to themselves, I couldn't help but smile. "Alright Bosco, I'm leaving for a while. Be good, okay?"

I managed to fetch a nearby messenger as I exited the throne room, asking him to check on the status of the Council of Five. "I didn't recall them needing your presence, your highness, but if they are indeed ready, then perhaps all you need to do is give them your approval of their plans. Do you still want me to check?" He asked.

I cupped my chin, wondering if that was still needed. If the generals had the plans under control, then perhaps my visit to their headquarters might be nothing more than a disturbance. Maybe it was best to let them handle it on their own. Besides, while Long Feng betrayed me, it wasn't like the generals would be a threat to my security, right? "In that case, I think a meeting with them won't be needed. I'll just wait for whatever news they'll send." I told the messenger, dismissing him as I wandered off to my chambers. Knowing that the kingdom was in such great hands, I didn't have a single worry now.

*****

"Katara's fine. You have nothing to worry about," I assured the Avatar and his group. For some strange reason, Aang, Sokka and Toph returned to the palace, claiming that Aang had a vision that Katara had been captured or something like that. I wasn't sure why such a preposterous claim that had no evidence supporting it would take them away from their important missions. To be frank, I was a bit surprised they all believed it.

"She met with the Council of Generals to plan the invasion, and since then, she's been off with your friends, the Kyoshi Warriors." I told Aang, regurgitating the day's details to them. I personally didn't see why they were worried, as the Kyoshi Warriors were great fighters. Surely they should have more faith in their own allies, right?

Sokka was the first to relax his pose, claiming that everyone was probably at their apartment. I could still see the worry in Aang's eyes, his face tilting to the ground and not looking at anyone. Sensing that he was unconvinced, I continued on, "Believe me, if there was any danger at all, Bosco's animal instincts would sense it." I signalled to my pet bear, who was peacefully napping away at my feet.

Sokka and Toph managed to convince Aang to return to their apartment. As they closed the throne room's large doors behind them, it was when I realized that the entire area was in complete silence. Except for breathing sounds from Bosco and me, nothing could be heard in this wide chamber. My calmness was somewhat overtaken by a slight concerned feeling. In these dangerous times, anything could happen right now. "Hey Bosco, do you think the Kyoshi Warriors are really at the apartment?" I asked my bear, who looked up nonchalantly, "maybe we should get someone to fetch them back."

It would be another harrowing few minutes before two Kyoshi Warriors returned to the room. I breathed a sigh of relief, feeling my heart ease the pounding on my chest as they took their positions near the throne. I didn't even bother asking them where they truly went, or why they took so long to return, or where the third person was. I was just happy that they got back, and that they could provide defence of the area again. I looked on as they talked quietly, completely relaxed as my safety was guaranteed once again. What would I ever do without these trustworthy and reliable allies?

Jus then, Sokka and Toph burst in, panting in exhaustion and telling us that got here just in time. "In time for what?" I asked, confused by the commotion.

That was when one of the warriors somersaulted towards Sokka, leaning her face close to his flirtingly. Some inaudible words were said before Toph shot a pillar of rock from under the warrior's feet. "They're not the real Kyoshi Warriors!" She declared.

Before long, an all-out brawl took place, with the two supposedly fake warriors advancing in on Sokka and Toph, who brandished the bladed club and stones respectively in an effort to expose the warriors' identities. Unfortunately, the battlefield was between my throne and the door, meaning an escape wasn't viable. Amidst flying blades, rocks being shot out from the ground, and a jabbing sequence between one warrior and Sokka, I could only look on in shock. How could the Kyoshi Warriors be defeated on their way here? And if they were replaced, then were these imposters from the Fire Nation?

But that was soon confirmed as a strong hand was wrapped around my neck. With a blue flame flickering from her finger, the leader of this invasion group demanded the battle be ended. The heat tickled my cheek, threatening to puncture my skin as Sokka and Toph shot their hands up. One warrior stepped up and jabbed at their bodies, causing them to fall limp to the ground as a series of Dai Li agents showed up. "Get them all out of my sight," the female leader orders, shoving me into the hands of one agent. As we were led away from the throne room, that was when I saw Long Feng enter. He didn't say a word to me, but seeing where he was headed, I knew where his new loyalties were.

I tried to holler out, but to no avail as the Dai Li agents pushed us out. Now, seeing the kingdom's highest official and his agents give up the Earth Kingdom to the Fire Nation, I could feel my heart sink to my feet. How could the person that I trusted the most, throughout my entire life, betray me like that? Was it for money? Was it for power? Why would he hand the kingdom to our enemies like that? Whatever the true reason was, my heart was truly broken. The line of Earth Kings might very well end with me, but that was minimal considering what might happen to the people. With the Fire Nation about to arrive any moment and the Dai Li on their side, who could save us now?

*****

"All clear," Sokka informed Toph as he peered out the peephole of our cell. This was where the Dai Li had taken us after we were attacked. I had always declared that prisoners be taken to these cells as they awaited trial, but never in my entire life had I imagined that I would become a prisoner myself. Now, to feel these dark and damp walls around me, I truly realized the grave situation we were now in for.

Just as Sokka announced that the coast was clear, Toph marched up to the metal door. I had to admit that I was curious at how Toph was going to get us out, as she said she developed a modified type of earth bending that allowed her to manipulate metal. To be honest, it was the first time since the Dai Li arrested us that I lifted my head, as only thoughts of the impending apocalypse for the Earth Kingdom swirled in my head. Soon, the Fire Nation military would march into Ba Sing Se, conquering the land and placing my people in great hardship. To top it off, I would be forever remembered as the Earth King who failed his people, sitting in a prison cell while they were subject to pain.

I glanced out just in time to see Toph place her hands on the door. Gently rubbing the metal a few times, she squeezed her hands together and crumpled the door into debris. The loud crunch echoed through the hall as Toph casually tossed the crushed metal to the side, marching out and glancing around. Once it was confirmed that nobody heard us, she called back for me, insisting that we must leave. "Let's go!" she declared.

As Sokka grabbed my arm and rushed me out, I suddenly remembered that there was still one person we had to save. "I'm not leaving without Bosco!" I shouted, rushing through the halls in an effort to keep up with my younger counterparts.

All I could see were the dim torches lining the hall whipping past me, my legs churning nonstop as we checked each cell for Bosco. A large animal like Bosco was unlikely to be taken into a small area, knowing how he hated to be in tight, confined spaces. It wouldn't put it past me that he was back at the throne room, subject to all sorts of crazy Fire Nation torture tricks. As Toph broke down another metal door, I told them my suggestion. "Why don't we go back to the throne room and look there?"

Sokka and Toph glanced over, their expressions said it all. It was evident that neither one of them were keen on the idea, as they figured that the chamber would be filled with Dai Li agents or Fire Nation fighters. But still, it wasn't right that Bosco must be left behind. "Please, he's my only friend left," I pleaded with them, "Save him."

Sokka and Toph nodded to each other. I could barely crack a smile, realizing that there was a small silver lining. With Long Feng's defection to the Fire Nation, I had no friends left. The only one I could truly bond with was Bosco, the only one to actually keep me company the entire time. I knew Bosco didn't understand how to run a kingdom or how to interact with ministers, but for the longest time he was the one that I confided in. So no matter what it took, I would only evacuate the palace if Bosco came with me.

We finally emerged back into the throne room, where I could see the smaller of the two fake Kyoshi Warriors stunting before Bosco. She put herself into a handstand, and was trying to entice my bear into doing the same. Without missing even a beat, Toph used the earth beneath and trapped the girl into an arched position. "Nice trick," Toph commented, stomping up another huge slab of rock. She aimed it for the other fake, who sat nonchalantly on the steps just before the throne.

But for some reason, the fake warrior didn't attack. Rather, she seemed more than willing to let us take Bosco and leave. I couldn't help but rush up to my bear, holding him in a tight embrace before hurrying out of there. Even as my kingdom was under siege, at least I knew my lifelong friend was about to escape with me to safety.

Sokka managed to locate Appa and flew us away from the palace. We dropped by a large hole in the ground, going deep into the earth and into the crystal catacombs that supposedly existed under my palace. There, it was a gruesome sight as Katara lifted Aang through to the opening. Katara seemed like she took a beating, with tears on her clothing and her hair undone. But it was the Avatar who had been damaged the most severely. A strong burnt smell shot its way into my nostrils as Aang laid unconscious, burn wounds on several parts of his body. Sensing the impending danger, we decided to fly out.

As Appa lifted off the ground, Katara pulled out a small container, pouring out some water purer and sparkling brighter than anything I had seen in my life. Using her water bending to keep it spinning on her hand, she lifted Aang over and examined his back wound. It was the worst of the injuries inflicted onto him, as a large, dark hole-like mark was literally branded onto his spine. Not a word was spoken as Katara pressed the fluid onto the grotesque mark on Aang's back, filling up the entire burned-off section of his shirt as the blue light radiated into the now darkened sky. My body twitched in total anxiety as I wondered if the world would end should Katara's healing not come through.

After an intense minute or so, a low-pitched groan sounded from Aang's mouth. I could see Katara's face relax as she pulled Aang into a hug. Aang's hands tried to move to Katara, returning the embrace, but I could tell he was too tired to do that. It wasnt long before Aang flopped back down, his eyelids dropped shut as he rested on the bison. I could tell that for the short time Aang was conscious, it lifted the entire team's spirits, but I predicted that it would be an intense coming few days for the rest of us.

As we flew further away from the palace, I got a last look at Ba Sing Se. While I escaped the attacks, I couldn't help but wonder what would happen to these citizens when the Fire Nation marched in. All households, regardless of wealth or social status or even number of individuals in the family, the inevitable would happen to them all. They were about to become victims of the Fire Nation's harsh ways. I couldn't imagine how anyone could withstand this type of treatment, and how many might actually live to tell the tale.

But the main thought in my mind was how I was directly responsible for this, and how much of this was my fault. Because of my own ignorance and incompetence, I allowed the Dai Li conspiracy to happen, leaving myself vulnerable so that they could turn against me, and in turn betray the entire Earth Kingdom. Somehow, I had to make this up to the people, and if I ever got the throne back, I promised that things would change for everyone. As we left the capital city for good, I could only utter one line. "The Earth Kingdom has fallen." I murmured, dipping my head in shame.

*****

"Well, that was a waste of time." Sokka commented as we returned to the camp. After leaving Ba Sing Se, Sokka managed to steer us to Chameleon Bay, where a fleet of Water Tribe ships was located. Informing his father Hakoda, leader of this group, that the city was invaded and that I was among the evacuees, they decided to let Bosco and I stay with them for the time being. From their conversations, I could hear that they might still plan for an invasion of the Fire Nation, but that would have to wait, given the situation.

The Water Tribe warriors tried to make our lives as comfortable as possible, given that this base camp was no palace. But still, I was grateful that we managed to leave with our heads still on our shoulders. Since there wasn't much for me to do, I took out a small notebook and jotted down all the information regarding Bosco's natural life habits. Bosco was a bear from the east coastal forests of the Earth Kingdom, and was given to me as a pet by zoologists from Ba Sing Se University, who periodically briefed me on things that an animal like him would do to ensure its survival. Given that we were pretty much in the wild, maybe it wasn't a bad idea to train Bosco on these natural techniques.

"Actually, I think I learned something today." I responded. We had been going over basics early in the morning when Sokka overheard us. Insisting that he knew how to live in the wild, he chose to take over as Bosco's instructor and showed my bear what he needed to do. He went over how to fetch food, fishing, finding shelter, and basic defence, none of which Bosco did the orthodox way. Even as I explained to Sokka that Bosco had never left the palace from the time he was captured, meaning that it would take time for Bosco to learn to live in the wild, Sokka was of the belief that my bear was doomed.

But those exercises Sokka subjected Bosco through made me realize one thing. As dusk fell onto the bay, I finally decided on my future, and how I could help the world. "There are so many things that I don't know about the real world," I told Sokka as we returned to camp, "how could I hope to ever be a good king if all my knowledge is so limited? Just like Bosco, who doesn't know how to be a good bear," I stated, tilting my head to the brown furry animal beside me. Bosco's training showed that, because he never bothered to leave the palace, he had no ability to survive elsewhere.

But that was also a perfect mirror for me, as I never left the palace either, meaning my abilities were limited. While it was alright for Bosco, it was never alright for me, as a king must lead his people wisely, and in turn respond to the people's every need. With this, I decided to make a change in my life. I turned to face Sokka, who had a perplexed expression on his face. "Sokka, I've decided. I will experience the world in the shoes of a humble man." I declared, my tone loaded with seriousness and determination.

Sokka's face froze. I didn't know if it was because of shock or concern, but I could tell that he wasn't expecting my decision. "For too long, I have been blind to the needs of the people. I've relied on the opinions of a select few, and that ended with a situation where they misused power for personal gain," I described. It was still painful to talk about or come to grips with, as it meant throwing my failures into the open. But if this was the way to rectify my past mistakes, then there would be nothing stopping me from proceeding this way. "If I want to better the world and take my kingdom back from the Fire Nation, then I must better myself first. That's why I'm living as a commoner for the time being, letting me see the world from the people's perspective."

Sokka smiled while curling his eyebrows at the same time, probably a mix of happiness and worry as he mulled over my words. "It won't be easy, as we're still in a state of war right now," he pointed out, "if you're staying in this region, then you could very well be under Fire Nation threat. Also, you risk exposing your identity to others, who may choose to report you to the Fire Nation just to remove a potential risk to their lives. Or in the worst case scenario, you could downright get killed." He warned me.

But none of these mattered to me, as there was a bigger factor at hand here. "Is my one life more important than the hundreds, maybe even thousands, of lives that may be at stake should the Fire Nation continue its ways?" I retorted, piercing through Sokka with my every syllable, "I'm going to do my best to intermingle with the commoners, so there's no way my identity will be exposed. Besides, I have to know what they're going through so when I do take back my throne, hopefully after the war is over, I can use this new knowledge to help the people. I failed them before, and I don't want to do it again."

Sokka sighed, realizing that nothing he could say would change my mind. I was set on doing this, and that I would be leaving the group soon. "Alright then," he replied, conceding his point to me, "in that case, we'll get you some less formal clothes and make you blend in with the people more. You're pretty much on your own."

As Sokka searched through the wardrobe, he told me how he anticipated the world would be like in the coming few months. "Once we settle this war with the Day of Black Sun invasion, I really hope we see you again," he wished, "I hope, with your new knowledge, you can lead your kingdom again. This war has divided the world, pitting people against people, and created mistrust. If you can help rebuild and reintegrate the Earth Kingdom with the rest of the world, then it's my honour to help your journey."

I nodded, waiting patiently for him to fetch new clothes for me. Whatever that I was about to put myself through, I realized that it wasn't just for my own good. The entire Earth Kingdom, and even the world, depended on how I applied my experiences to life. To succeed on changing the kingdom, I must first change myself. I would gather new information while roaming around various towns and villages in the Earth Kingdom. I would go through whatever the people went through. Their needs would become my needs, their lives becoming my life. Building an understanding with the commoners would be crucial for my new mandate, and I was intent to make it happen.

*****

"It is with the greatest honour that we welcome you back, your majesty." I could hear the crowd below erupt into cheers as I stepped down the stairs of my palace. It had been months since I last lived here, after the Fire Nation invasion that forced me to flee with the Avatar's group. As I told Sokka, Bosco and I did spend some time travelling the world, seeing things from the commoner perspective. But now, knowing that the war was over and the Earth Kingdom was liberated, I realized it was time for me to return.

I nodded to the guards lined up in rows on either side of the stairway, but my eyes were at the crowd below. Unlike previous coronations, this time I invited all the people of Ba Sing Se, regardless of their background, to come witness this. During my travels, I witnessed the different living conditions of the Earth Kingdom, as towns so close to the capital could have needs so unlike those from within. I spoke to as many of the people in these areas as possible, trying to gauge their thoughts and understanding issues affecting their daily lives. Knowing that should I ever return to the throne, I must have these things in mind, for I would never let ignorance and blindness dominate my reign.

"My citizens, today the Earth Kingdom embarks on its journey of healing. But not only are we healing with the world, we are healing within." I announced, my pose taller and straighter than ever before. My journeys brought forth many changes to my life, and I hoped to share the lessons of my hardships with the citizens. I understood how hard life was with the war still going on, so now that the war was over, I intended to reform our own government system to make it more responsive to the people's needs.

"Let us rebuild our nation together, and let us no longer be ruled with fear. Either fear of a foreign invader, or an internal threat," I declared, referring to the Dai Li. My first act in my return was to dismantle the Dai Li, ordering the destruction of their base and stripping the agents of their powers. Long Feng, currently in prison after the Fire Nation princess supposedly double-crossed him, would be put on trial for treason as soon as possible. This was to be my first act of reconciliation with the people, as a way to beg for their forgiveness after many years of neglecting their needs. If Zuko, the new Fire Lord, could promise a world of "love, peace, and hope" for his nation, then this was the least I could offer for mine. As the people cheered, only one thought crossed my mind.

My name is Earth King Kuei. That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an Avatar: the Last Airbender fanfic
Ch. 7: Jet

*****

A group of people sat around a large table in this platform among the trees. We had been living here for many years now, and I considered this central meeting area to be a piece of art. As everyone gobbled up the food before them, I decided to stand up and make an announcement. "Today, we struck another blow to the Fire Nation swine." I told my team, updating them on the results of today's mission.

A series of voices cheered in unison. I turned my eyes left and right, looking at this group that stayed loyal to me all this time. The ones with me the longest were in their teenage years, having worked with me since I started getting involved with raiding Fire Nation camps in the region. Others, mainly children, joined me later on, and together we made up the fearsome Freedom Fighters, here to rid the region of Fire Nation invaders. "Now the Fire Nation thinks they don't have to worry about a couple of kids hiding in the trees," I continued, tilting my head mockingly, "maybe they're right."

Immediately, I was showered by loud boos. The crowd, many of whom left their villages when the Fire Nation invaded them, roared in disapproval of our sworn enemies taking us this lightly. After all, with all the damage we had done to them throughout the years, why should they underestimate us? Playing to that line, I concluded emphatically, "Or maybe, they're dead wrong!" I declared, my face tightening in seriousness.

Upon hearing that, the crowd erupted in applause, the loudest yet of tonight. I climbed off the table and took my seat, right between two Water Tribe siblings that I ran into on my Fire Nation raid earlier this morning. The sister, Katara, was a water bender, and actually helped our raid with her skills. "Hey Jet, nice speech," she complemented.

"Thanks. By the way, I was really impressed with you and Aang," I replied, signalling to the bald boy at Katara's left. Aang, as my group found out, was the long-lost Avatar, and had recently begun training on his second element, water. Even though we only met earlier in the day, something told me that Katara really admired me. Every time she talked, she spoke positively of my acts, and her comments were usually accompanied with a smile and a shy glance to the ground. Knowing that she was that talented and that dedicated to my cause, it could come in handy should I ever need to recruit her.

Keeping my grin on, I made my move. I pointed out that Katara and Aang, with their skills, could help us in our struggle. But before they could answer, Katara's brother Sokka, seated at my right, interrupted. "Unfortunately, we have to leave tonight," his voice sliced into our talk, his tone filled with bitterness. I knew it was probably because he didn't fare well at the battle, having knocked out zero fire benders.

Despite his lack of bending and overall clumsiness, there was a use for Sokka in my group as well. He had quite a quick mind, having able to come up with new plans that were more useful than what we used to have. Besides, with him being that suspicious of our group, especially regarding my so-called advances on his sister, it was best to appease to him for now. "Sokka, you're kidding me," I called to the figure strolling away from us, filling my tone with as much sincerity as possible, "I needed you on an important mission tomorrow." There was no way someone as bull-headed as him would turn it down.

I could see Sokka pause, his body barely into the shadows as the evening sun dipped even lower on the horizon. My grin spread wider as Sokka slowly tilted his body around, the slanting light catching just enough of his face to reveal his eyes narrowing into darts. "What mission," he demanded, shooting them right at me.

I could only smirk as I watched Sokka lumber his way back at me. Maybe it was only right that a hot-headed individual like him would react this way, but for now, I had Sokka right where I want him. I could test out his true skills while keep a good eye on him. There was no way I would let this wannabe leader ruin my plans.

*****

"Sokka, you told them what happened and you didn't mention the guy was Fire Nation?" I responded nonchalantly, sitting on my bed and countering Sokka's words. As promised, we took Sokka on our mission to raid Fire Nation residents of their resources. At first, Sokka proved to be useful, imbedding his bladed club into a tree trunk and using it to seek out sounds in the forest. We managed to ambush a lone man, snatching his bag and giving him a good scare. To me, it was all part of the game to beat the enemy.

But apparently, that touched a nerve with Sokka, who accused me of attacking an elderly civilian. That ended with Katara and Aang interrogating me like a suspect, all the while hearing Sokka spit his every accusation in their faces. "Even if he was Fire Nation, he was a harmless civilian." Sokka insisted, refusing to budge from his morals.

It was here that I had to show the group once and for all. "He was an assassin, Sokka," I told everyone, revealing a knife from my bed. I slammed it into a nearby stump, the blade swinging slightly but ominously. "There's a compartment for poison in his knife. He was sent to eliminate me. You helped save my life, Sokka." I declared, unscrewing the back while putting on as sincere a look as I could muster to Katara. Knowing that she had good rapport with me, I truly hoped she could be swayed by this.

What followed was a sequence where siblings became polar opposites. While Katara was compassionate, accepting my explanation without question, Sokka became more enraged, claiming there was no knife. From my position, I could see Katara's face was relaxed and her expression relieved, while Sokka's face was tense and with a huge scowl. Despite having the same parents, they were different as night and day right now. Seeing the split, I had to take action to further cement Katara's support. "You didn't see the knife because he was concealing it." I added, staring back at Sokka's grimace.

That was the last straw for the Water Tribe warrior, who stormed out of my hut in a huff. As he ranted how he wouldn't sacrifice his morals even when facing the Fire Nation, I tried convincing Katara and Aang to stay. "Tell me you guys aren't leaving yet. I really need your help." I pleaded, standing up and reaching to them, "the Fire Nation is planning on burning down our forest. If you use water bending to fill up the reservoir we could fight the fires. But if you leave now, they'll destroy the whole valley."

I could see Katara and Aang look at each other, their eyes meeting with the same look of concern. After an agonizing few seconds, they nodded their heads. "We'll try and convince Sokka to stay too," Katara suggested. They waved at me, leaving me alone in my hut as they returned to theirs, mumbling about Sokka being stubborn the whole time.

As quietness descended upon the forest on this relatively cool evening, I couldn't help but admire the work I did today. Not only did I manage to send a resident of the Fire Nation town a message, I also pulled Katara and Aang closer to me. To be honest, Sokka was right, as there really was no knife. The blade was from the initial raid of the military camp where I first met the threesome. But knowing Sokka's attitude, I had to resort to this to make everyone understand. Why didn't Sokka just see things my way?

I flopped onto my bed, my eyes boring a hole on my sticks and leaves roof as I mulled over today's events. I didn't understand why Sokka had to defend Fire Nation folks, referring to his morals and principles all the time. To me, all Fire Nation people were the same heartless monsters. They burned down my town, killed my parents, and destroyed countless lives. The only punishment they should get tomorrow was death, and if Aang and Katara would stay to help me, they would ensure this victory succeeded.

And the more I thought about Sokka, the more frustrated I became. Gnawing hard on the usual piece of wheat in my mouth, I couldn't understand how two siblings who grew up and experienced the death of their own mother react so differently. Katara was completely set on helping me, not even bothering to ask what would happen. Sokka, on the other hand, claimed it was against his principles, and that his "instincts" told him it didn't make sense. Even as I told him to never forget the Fire Nation killed his mother, he still refused to fight the old man we saw, preferring to show mercy and letting him go. If he were a member of the Freedom Fighters, I would have banished him long ago.

Soon, complete darkness smothered our hideout, making this the perfect time to get moving. Years of living in the forest had made me used to operating in the middle of the night on only a few hours of sleep, and this mission was no different. As quietly as possible, I stepped into the tents of those serving me the longest: Longshot the archer, Smellerbee the blades expert, Pipsqueak the strongman, and The Duke, the youngest and most nimble of us. "Let's get our stuff," I told them as we descended from the trees.

We went into the deepest part of the woods, to an area located behind the hideout. This was where we stored all the goods that we stole from the Fire Nation. Here, we had the most important material needed for our mission: blasting jelly. Again, thanks to the last raid where we met the Avatar's group, we had enough to destroy an entire dam. "It's crucial that we bring all this," I instructed the group as they began untying the barrels. I signalled to Pipsqueak as he rolled a large cart over, telling the team to place the barrels onto the cart to be transported to the reservoir. "Once we get this to the dam, we'll blow the thing apart and drown the Fire Nation troops in the region. There's no way any of them will survive after this one." I declared, clenching my fist in determination.

*****

"Jet, why?" I could hear Katara's voice ask me. Her tone was still laced with her usual gentleness, one that I would never be tired of hearing, but I also sensed urgency and hurt in her voice. Earlier, I sent Katara and Aang to a series of geysers upstream of the dam and asked them to use water bending to fill the reservoir. I honestly didn't expect her to be here watching us set up the blasting jelly on the dam, as I told them to meet me at the camp. But now, knowing Aang was going to stop us, I had to take action.

With my back still toward her, I stated my premises for this attack. "Think about what the Fire Nation did to your mother. We can't let them do that to anyone else ever again." I reminded her, "I want you to understand me, Katara. I thought your brother would understand." Sokka, as expected, followed my group out to the dam, and spied on us throughout the night. At the crack of dawn, he was discovered by Pipsqueak and Smellerbee, who promptly marched him back to camp as a prisoner. With him out of our way, there wasn't a single obstacle stopping us from flooding the area.

I glanced at Katara, who was visibly shaken, with her eyes screwed shut and tears streaming out from them. I reached out to her, gently brushing her face with my hand. I might have only wanted her help in my Freedom Fighters in the beginning, but for the last few days she stayed with us, I truly grew an attachment to her. Our common past united us on one goal, and I hoped that I could convince her to stay with us. "Katara," I called her name, trying to sooth her increasingly unstable emotions.

But the volcano soon erupted as Katara reached for her sash of water. I soon felt myself lifted into the air, being sent into the distance as Katara shot the water at me. I landed hard on my back, but lifted my head just in time to see Aang reach for his staff, which also doubled as his glider. Realizing that the Avatar would ruin my plans, I pulled out one of my hook swords and lifted the staff away. To ensure there would be no more interruptions, I swung my swords at Aang, beating him into the trees. "You'll have to fight me if you want your glider back." I declared angrily as I jumped into the woods.

The trees, leaves and branches were nothing but a blur as I ventured deeper into the forest. Using my hooked swords as leverage, I leapt and bounded on each branch. I could see the Avatar on an adjacent tree, and decided to swoop in. Gathering momentum with one sword, and propelled myself to Aang, swinging the other sword furiously.

Although he didn't retaliate, I could see Aang trying to hold his own as he shot air blast after air blast at me. The wind tore at my face, whipping my hair into my eyes and making it difficult to see. But knowing our greatest victory was at hand, there was no way I would let anyone, the Avatar included, interfere. Rebalancing myself, I whipped the swords at him again, beating him back several times. I saw that Aang had his eyes on the long and thin object sticking out from my back the entire time, and I wasn't about to let him have an easy way at it. Guessing that he felt the battle was too much, I saw Aang leap into another tree, trying to get back to the dam on foot.

"Oh no, you don't," I muttered under my breath, hooking the nearby branches and pushing myself to Aang. Amidst the leaves and branching whipping at my face, I saw Aang scaling down the trunk and nearly reaching the ground. Lunging forward, I hooked onto his foot and pulled hard. Aang yelped in surprise as he slipped off, plunging straight to the ground in a freefall. I threw myself into the fray, going right after him and swinging my swords. Luckily for us both, a large branch underneath broke our plummet. We managed to catch our balances, before staring down each other in determination.

I made my advancement once again, this time swinging both swords in the latest and most ferocious attempt in beating back Aang. I really had Aang on the defensive as he bobbed and weaved around the blades, even resorting to clutching the tree branch from underneath to scoot away. Silently, I waited for Aang to turn back up, timing it just perfectly for me to charge in. There was no way he could leave unharmed.

But that soon proved to be a costly mistake, as Aang caught me in the act. Using his most unique attack yet, he created a current of air that pushed me back. It wasn't enough to knock me off the trees, but it tore at everything around me. Clothing, weapons, even the staff on my back, they all began to loosen. I felt a searing pain from my legs as I struggled for balance, scratching sounds echoing from the bark below my feet as I began to lose control. Finally giving way, I tumbled from the trees, my body twisting through the air as I flailed around, hoping to grab onto anything sturdy.

My entire spine was yanked mercilessly as my hooked swords bit into another tree branch, halting my downward progress. I twisted my head around to see the Avatar floating to the ground, following his fallen staff. Undaunted by the soreness throughout my body, I released myself from the branch and followed Aang. I ambushed him just in time, thanks to his slower rate of descent due to his use of air bending. Aiming for his back, I slammed into his spine, knocking him into another branch. The Avatar groaned as his stomach absorbed the hit, his body crumpling to the ground like leaves in autumn.

I dropped in right behind him, my eyes burning with anger and hatred. The more I fought Aang, the more I realized that he had no sense of justice in him. While he spoke like some world saviour, he wouldn't even face me directly in a fight. What honour was there in that? How could he defeat the Fire Nation if he couldn't even beat me? Sensing that the Avatar was still groggy, I realized it was best to knock him out and return to my original task. Tapping my swords casually, I moved in for the final blow.

Before I could advance, three blasts of cold water slammed into me. Water coated my face and eyes, making it extremely difficult to see. Then, before long, I could feel my entire body paralyzed, being encased in a cold layer that bit into every exposed skin area. As I tried to wiggle free, I could finally see the person who froze me in approach. "Why, Jet?" Katara asked, her voice almost pleading with me, "I can't believe I trusted you! You lied to me! You're sick, and I trusted you!" She ranted, tears spilling from her eyes.

With every ounce of energy, I blocked out the chills around my body and the ranting in my ears. Focusing on the important task, I edged my head towards the opening of the trees and whistled. It had been a staple of the Freedom Fighters' communication techniques for years, mimicking the sounds of animals in the forest and not giving away our actual locations. After I finished my call, I turned back to Katara and Aang, who now had his staff back in his possession. "You're too late," I smirked.

The final countdown seemed to be in slow motion as a fire arrow from Longshot sizzled through the air. It imbedded into the blasting jelly barrels at the bottom of the dam and lit the area bright orange. The roaring explosion created tremors through the forest, shaking us to the bones and making our environment sway. The water rushed through the dry riverbed and hurtled straight at not just the Fire Nation base camp, but to the nearby village. "This was a victory, Katara," I continued as they regained balance, turning around and glared daggers into me, "the Fire Nation is gone and this valley will be safe."

"It will be safe, without you!" I glanced up in shock as Appa, the Avatar's Sky Bison hovered near the edge. On the back of the large animal was Sokka, staring me down with uncompromising eyes. "I warned the villagers of your plan, just in time."

As Katara and Aang stared up in delight, Sokka continued his story, telling us that he was dismissed by the Fire Nation troops who thought he was a spy. But there was one man who believed him and insisted that the villagers heard Sokka out. "It was the same old man you attacked," Sokka spat, his tone filled with disgust, "he urged them to trust me, and we got everyone out in time." As he finished his description, Sokka tilted Appa around, allowing Aang and Katara to hop onto its back.

"Sokka, you fool! We could have freed this valley! You traitor!" I shouted. Had it not been for the ice around my body, I would have killed Sokka on the spot.

"No, Jet. You became the traitor when you stopped protecting innocent people." Sokka retorted, his tone easing down. It was there that I realized my hopes to keep Aang and Katara on my side were all but dashed, as the two were on their way out of here.

My eyes trailed to Katara, who was about to hop on the bison. Her shoulders still shuddered as she climbed on, but I could tell she was much more relieved. I begged her one last time, requesting that she stayed with me. But she replied with only one line, the two words etching forever into my brain. "Goodbye, Jet." She declared. As she took a seat on the bison, Sokka steered Appa away from the woods and sailed into the skies.

As I remained stuck at that tree, I couldn't help but replay the words again and again. Was I truly a traitor when I let loose that water on the village? They were Fire Nation villagers, so what was wrong with driving them out? Realizing the damage I might have done to the reputation of the Freedom Fighters, knowing that the Avatar was now against me, I came to a difficult decision. I was going to disband the group and start fresh. Once the team rejoined at the base, I would make this announcement. Anyone who still wanted to stay with me could do so, but those who wanted a new life were free to go.

*****

The train station bustled with people as we waited for our ride into the city of Ba Sing Se. It was months ago that I officially disbanded the Freedom Fighters, letting each member go their own way and find a new life for themselves. I decided to start over in the Earth Kingdom's capital and largest city, and made the trek to the Serpent's Pass ferry terminal for a boat to the city. The pier was filled with refugees hoping to escape the Fire Nation, heading for a safer and probably more prosperous life in the walled city.

"Hey Jet!" I heard Smellerbee call my name. The chatter from various directions, thanks to the people surrounding us on this train station, nearly drowned out her softer voice. Smellerbee and Longshot were the only members of my original group left with me, staying loyal to the end. I didn't see anybody leaving as traitors, as I made it clear that what they chose to do with their lives would be their decision. Looking around, I could see those from troubled backgrounds, broken families, and general misery from the refugees. To me, it might not be a bad idea to restart the Freedom Fighters in the city, where I could help these poor souls out in relative safety away from the Fire Nation.

And that was when my eyes turned back at the two figures sitting on a nearby bench. The old man, Mushi, was taking his nephew, Lee, to Ba Sing Se for a new start. From the scar on Lee's face, I could tell that he was an outcast like me. So, I made it clear to my group that we were to stick with him, as outcasts ought to support each other. "I think Lee would make a good reedom Fighter," I commented, rolling the piece of wheat in my mouth, "he's just trying to find his way in the world."

Smellerbee, however, wasn't too impressed with the idea of reviving our old team. "You don't know anything about him, Jet," she pointed out, the eyebrows above her round eyes curling in uncertainty, "besides, I thought we're going straight now."

"We are, and the new Freedom Fighters could use a guy like Lee," I insisted, nodding at the scarred teenager, "what do you think, Longshot?" I asked our archer.

Longshot merely nodded, but didn't say a thing. Longshot wasn't a person of many words, as I barely recalled him saying too much throughout my years of working with him. There could be situations where he went on for days without saying a single thing, leading some to believe he didn't exist at all. But despite the times he kept to himself, I always valued his opinion, as he had been a loyal team member. Also, given his proficiency at shooting arrows, I could never underestimate him, and always admired his abilities. "I can respect that," I replied, acknowledging his silent support.

Just then, a tea vendor stopped by, advertising Ba Sing Se's specials. Mushi raised his hand and requested jasmine, which gave me the perfect opportunity to speak with Lee regarding my plans. Excusing myself from my two comrades, I took a seat next to Lee, who seemed somewhat grumpy with his eyes on the ground and a scowl on his face. I guessed he much have had a long journey, and was too tired to think about anything else. Trying to lighten the mood, I asked, "You guys got plans once you're inside the city?"

Before Lee could answer, his uncle spat out the tea and grunted in displeasure. "Coldest tea in Ba Sing Se is more like it," he grumbled, "what a disgrace!"

While Mushi continued his rant about the tea, I pulled Lee aside and offered him to join us. "We made a great team looting that captain's food," I advocated, pointing to the event on the ferry. Lee and I met on the boat when he was unhappy with the terrible food being served. Knowing the captain had many good meals, and most refugees also desired better, I convinced Lee to join Longshot, Smellerbee and I in stealing the crew's rations and splitting it with others. It was there that I saw Lee's fine physical skills in play. In minutes, he scaled the crew's quarters, swiped the food with ease, and left undetected. It was then that I decided I would accept him into my crew. "Think of all the good we could do for all these refugees." I told him, proudly gazing all over the station.

But Lee refused to budge, claiming that it wasn't a good idea to incorporate him on the team. "I say no," he concluded, returning to his uncle. I could only look on as he sat beside Mushi, who sipped happily from a steaming cup.

Wait, steaming cup? When had the ice-cold tea became hot? How did they get a fire lit without any equipment? "Fire benders, I can't believe it!" I murmured, feeling my entire body tense up. Immediately, I hurried back to Longshot and Smellerbee. I realized that to beat down our enemies, I needed all the help I could get.

By the time I got the two over to the platform, the train had already arrived. I kept explaining to Longshot and Smellerbee of my observation, trying to convince them to help me take action. But I soon found a tough audience as neither one of them was keen on starting a fight. As I scanned the platform, trying to locate Lee and Mushi, Smellerbee insisted I was paranoid. "So the old guy has some hot tea, big deal!"

"He heated it himself," I ranted, taking long and forceful strides onto the train, "those guys are fire benders!" I took one last glance, and saw the two enter the train in a compartment ahead of ours. Once this train stopped, I swore that I would not let them out of my sight. I wasn't going to let two disguised fire benders into this city and hurt more people, and I was intent to hunt them down and defeat them myself.

*****

"Jet, we need to talk!" I snapped out of my trance-like observation state, the soft female voice doing just enough to slice into my concentration on this dark, cool night. I turned just in time to see Smellerbee and Longshot stand beside my hiding spot, which comprised of several old baskets and wood pieces. Even in relatively dim lighting, I saw the concerned expressions on their faces. "We've been talking," Smellerbee continued, "and I think you're becoming obsessed with this. It's not healthy!"

"Oh really, you both think this?" I asked, signalling at the tea shop before me. I had been following Lee and Mushi ever since we got off the train, as I couldn't just let two fire benders exist right under everyone's noses. I figured that it had been at least a day since I tailed them, and so far I couldn't catch either one fire bending. Agitated, I was determined to expose their secret, and show the entire world the fake refugees they were.

"We came here to make a fresh start," Smellerbee explained, "but you won't let this go, even though there's no real proof!" Earlier in the day, Smellerbee insisted that an old man with a hot cup of tea wasn't reason enough for us to bust into their new home and start a fight. So, instead of violence, I merely changed tactics to an observational one, getting enough evidence to report them to the police.

But from then on, I had extreme trouble getting Longshot and Smellerbee to help me. Neither one was convinced to spend their time doing this, as they were more intent on finding a new home and starting over. That left me by myself, making me resort to more extreme tactics to get the proof I needed. Just around the sunset, I sneaked up to them and stole their spark rocks. Without them, they couldn't make a fire for heating, meaning they must fire bend. I was intent on catching them in the act and reporting them to police, but unlucky for me, they managed to borrow new ones from the neighbours.

Yet the more elusive their fire bending became, the more determined I was to crack their shield. Even without concrete acts showing their malicious sides, the risk of having two fire benders in a city of refugees was too great. "Maybe you've forgotten why we need to start over," I retorted, "maybe you're forgotten that the Fire Nation left us all homeless? How they wiped out all the people we loved? If you don't want to help me, then I'll get the evidence on my own." Then, before Smellerbee and Longshot could reach for me, I leaped out from the hiding spot and marched straight for the tea shop.

In one smooth motion, I shoved the door wide open, letting the cool night wind into the shop and at the customers. I could see Mushi move back to the counter with a teapot in hand, while Lee took some cups away from one table. Seething with anger, I charged straight at the two tea servers. "These two men are fire benders!" I shouted, signalling at Lee and Mushi while reaching for my hooked swords.

The crowd, stunned at my accusation, sat so quietly that I could hear the night insects' chirping. Seizing my chance, I further explained, "I saw the old man heating his tea!"

The customers at the table Lee served consisted of two local law enforcers, and they didn't seem convinced of my claim. "He works in a tea shop, so why won't he be heating tea?" he challenged, "Drop your swords, boy. Nice and easy," he commanded, slowing getting out of his seat with his partner.

I ignored the officers, knowing that they were probably too well duped. I swung my swords around and approached uncle and nephew. "You'll have to defend yourself, and then everyone will know," I sneered, "go ahead and show them what you can do."

A bigger bombshell was dropped when Lee placed his serving tray on a nearby table and grabbed the dual swords of the officer. "I'll give you a show," he responded. In one smooth motion, he yanked another table from its position and kicked it at me.

I barely reacted in time as the flying piece of wood came at me like the platypus bear checking refugees' luggage at the ferries. As the table was just about to slam into my knees, I rammed my swords down on the tabletop and somersaulted myself over it. I landed right in front of Lee, waving my swords and beating him back. The scarred teenager backpedalled and hopped onto a third table, escaping my blows just in time.

But it would take more than fancy footwork to stop me as I proceeded to hacking the table apart. I swung one sword down the middle of the table, slicing into two. Then, I whipped my right sword around, sending one half of the table against the wall. Lee only jumped off and landed on the other half, in which I attacked with my left sword, cutting the table leg off cleanly. As the large piece of wood slammed into the ground, Lee leaped into the air and came down hard with both his swords at my feet. That caused me to be on retreat, rushing backwards and screeching to a halt just before the door.

Taking several deep breaths, I regained balance and rushed in. So far, Lee hadn't shown his full skill, most likely because he was keeping the customers' safety in mind. It was time I used that to my advantage as I made a swift turn and targeted the other tables. Hollers of fear echoed off the walls as I threw hot tea, noodles, and other dinner entrees at Lee, all of which he dodged or batted down with ease. I could also see that we reversed our positions, as Lee was now at the door while I was near the counter. Since taking him outside would mean more eyes could see his fire bending, I lunged forward for the hit.

Lee crashed through the door, but maintained his balance even after my series of blows. I slammed my hooks into him, bringing him to his knees as Lee blocked with his swords. "You must be getting tired using those swords," I taunted him, his grimaced face and gritted teeth squarely in my vision, "why don't you fire bend at me?"

Somehow, Lee pushed his way back up, getting back on his feet and going on the attack. We parried and jousted for what seemed like an eternity, and I could tell that both of us were probably fatigued. But I couldn't possibly stop now, as I couldn't let this fire bender win. "Bet you could use a little help from your fire fists right now,"I mocked him again, hoping to entice him into letting loose a flame or two.

But that proved to be my mistake as Lee slammed one of his swords onto my left hook, lodging it into the ground and inhibiting one of my weapons. "You're the one who needs help," he retorted. He pounced at me, right blade up high, before bringing it down in one smooth motion. I bent my back over as far as possible, barely avoiding the slicing blade. But when I got back up, I could tell the piece of wheat in my mouth was cut off.

Our battle continued with each side holding only one sword. There was nothing but clangs of metal echoing into the night as we circled each other, trying to gain the upper hand. It wasn't until a booming, authoritative voice cut in that we stopped our parrying. "Drop your weapons!" I could hear a man in a dark robe and hat call.

I stood back, taking a good look at Lee. His shoulders heaved up and down, his face scrunched in tightness after the fight. Given his fatigue, he would have no choice but to fire bend when the police apprehended him. "Arrest them," I told the new officers that just arrived, pointing at my opponent, "they're fire benders!"

For some reason, nobody moved a muscle. I could only stare in horror as Mushi pointed to me being confused. Their manager, the tea shop owner, claimed that I wrecked his shop and assaulted his employees, and the officers Lee served earlier agreed as well. My heart rate jumped to unbelievable levels as the two robed men grabbed me. Twisting my arms back, they forced my only sword to drop with a clang. "You don't understand, they're Fire Nation," I objected, trying to get free from them, "you have to believe me."

I felt myself get shoved onto a cart, my face hitting the ground as the door was shut behind me. The entire journey was done in darkness as I wondered where I was taken to. By the time I arrived, they pulled me into another dark room and slammed me against a wall. "You have to believe me. They're fire benders, they won't stop until they win the war," I kept pleading my case, hoping at least one person would set me free.

But it was to no avail as they locked me in place. I could hear footsteps around me, but the only thing I could see was a single light swinging back and forth before my eyes. "Calm down, you're safe now," I heard a male voice told me in a relaxed tone, "there is no war in Ba Sing Se. There is no war within the walls. Here we are safe, here we are free," the voice continued. Before long, the monotonous chanting put me into a daze, my entire body loosening as I allowed myself to be consumed by the darkness.

*****

"The Dai Li must have sent Jet to mislead us," Katara stated emphatically, her arms crossed and her face fuming. For some strange reason, I had this strange need to go to the Avatar's group, informing them of where Aang's missing Sky Bison was. But yet, somewhere in the deepest parts of my mind, I had no idea how I came across this lead. In fact, I wasn't even sure what I was doing, let alone how I knew that Aang was in town.

"I've been to nowhere. I don't know what you're talking about!" I insisted, glancing helplessly at Aang, who demanded to know where I was captured or something like that. It was already an awkward scene when I first approached Katara earlier in the day, only to have her freeze me against a wall and threatened to stab me with a custom-made icicle. Then, two people, a short girl with an almost buzz cut and a taller boy with a bow and arrow claiming to be people I used to know marched up to me in the middle of the street and demanded where I was. Even though I didn't recognize her, the oddest thing was, according to Sokka, he felt both the girl and I were telling the truth.

"We need to find a way to jog his real memories," Aang suggested. I looked at the Avatar in disbelief, as there was no way I would be led to think that I had amnesia. Even with Sokka's taunting of Katara, asking her to kiss me, I still didn't see what good this experiment would do. How could they claim I lost memory when I was perfectly aware of where I was and what I was doing? This was Ba Sing Se, and I was locating Aang.

The rushing thoughts were rudely interrupted when Sokka rushed in and shoved a piece of wheat into my mouth. I was nearly knocked backwards from my chair, my eyes widening as I glanced at the semi-circle of people before me. "I don't think it's working," I responded, spitting it out in disgust. To be honest, it was getting kind of annoying, and I really didn't see the point in continuing this exercise.

At this time, Toph, a petite girl and the Avatar's earth bending teacher, told me to think of something from my past that triggered my emotions, such as a Fire Nation attack I was involved in. I must admit I was very impressed by this individual, as her cloudy eyes indicated that she was blind. But to still master earth bending and teach it to Aang, that was truly remarkable. I took a deep breath and thought back, getting through the impression that I had been living peacefully in the city and digging into my past. "Close your eyes," I heard Katara say with determination, "picture it."

Within seconds, a sea of flames surrounded me, the heat so great that it nearly burned my skin. I could hear people screaming, villagers rushing past me and away from the Fire Nation troops attacking my home. The smell of ashes and soot clogged up my nose as I saw the leader of the Fire Nation invasion troop. He has only one streak of hair going down the middle of his head, with the end tied up into a ponytail. Then, as if in slow motion, the head tilted around to face me, the final victim still in the village.

"No!" I screamed, shooting up from my chair, 'It's too painful." I could feel the beads of sweat rolling down my face, my diaphragm pulling hard on my lungs as gulps of air rushed through. It got so bad that Katara, who I heard learned abilities to heal with water, had to place her water-covered hands to my temples just to settle my mind.

As I felt the liquid ease the pain, I was transported to yet another place. I was on the edge of a lake, seeing the clear blue water beneath me. The sky was clear, giving way to a perfect view of the mountains before me. I saw a balding, middle-aged man stand in the middle of the lake, inviting me into the water. Before long, I was taken underneath the lake, through a set of passages and into a dark room. I was stuck against a wall, with a small light circling me and a younger man in dark robes chanting to me. "They took me to their headquarters underwater, like a lake." I declared, the events finally coming back.

Immediately, Sokka got up and told us the possible destination: Lake Laogai. We hurried out of our chamber and onto the streets, racing for the area where we believed Appa was held. As I raced through Ba Sing Se, I could tell that my memory had been regained. No longer was I Jet, the Ba Sing Se native. I truly remembered my past, why I created the Freedom Fighters to ward off the Fire Nation, and Longshot and Smellerbee, the two members of the Freedom Fighters that journeyed with me. Now, I had one more target: the Dai Li, who kidnapped me and supposedly brainwashed me into this scheme.

*****

"You have made yourselves enemies of the state," the balding man from my memory sequence announced in a low tone. We were in a large, cavernous underground chamber surrounded by rocks and dimly lit with small torches. Several Dai Li agents dropped down from the ceiling and encircled us, giving us no room to manoeuvre. "Take them into custody," the leader, identified as Long Feng, ordered his troops.

There was sheer pandemonium as Dai Li agents shock earthen fists at us. The first blows were deflected by Toph, but it became an all-out brawl when everyone went on the offensive. I tried protecting myself when two agents shot their earthen fists at me, raising my swords and knocking the blasts out from the air as they came close. In one smooth motion, I slid between the agents and hooked onto their ankles with my swords, pulling hard and toppling the two robed men to my either side. As they landed onto the rocky ground with a thud, I quickly got up and scanned for more enemies.

In the middle of the room, I could see a series of pillars created by bending. A tall one jutted up from the centre, carrying Toph above the battlefield. Two Dai Li agents from her either side scaled the walls and shot their own sets of pillars, going horizontally across the way. Toph managed to hold them both off, but a third agent from the ground shot a fist that pounded at her back, sending her tumbling to the ground. "No!" I called, lunging forward with my hooked swords. I managed to hook onto her shirt just before she slammed into the ground, preventing her from some very serious injuries.

The Dai Li agent that knocked Toph off the pillar followed us closely, shooting a series of rocks at us. Longshot, ever the expert archer, held him at bay with several arrows, giving me just enough time to pick up the pace. Holding my two swords before me, I swung them around like a windmill, batting down any rocks the Dai Li agent threw at us. With the barrage dying down, it gave us enough room to advance our group, and just enough time to see Long Feng hurry out of the room through a back door.

Aang, who used air to blow back several agents surrounding him, was aware of the escape as well. Calling to me, we hustled to the side closest to the exit and blasted the wall open with Aang's earth bending. We could see Long Feng's silhouette at the end of the hallway, turning a corner and disappearing out of sight. Our legs churned as we raced down the damp sewer-like ground, going under an arch and into yet another chamber. This one had running water, flowing in the direction away from us from two pipes above and on either side of our heads. Just then, the room was sealed shut.

We turned to the source of the tremors, and there was Long Feng glaring at us with an infuriated look. "Alright, Avatar, you're caused me enough problems. This is you last chance, if you want your bison back." he threatened, taking a bold step forward.

Aang hissed angrily. "You do have Appa. Tell me where he is!" He demanded, stomping defiantly up to Long Feng. It was evident that he wasn't about to back down, even when he knew how dangerous of a man Long Feng could be.

However, Long Feng was no pushover either, opting to bargain with the Avatar. He insisted that Aang departed the city at once, in return for getting back Appa and not having been branded as a criminal in Ba Sing Se. Hearing the Dai Li leader taunt Aang like a criminal, I became more incensed. For once in my life, I was convinced that there were people less honourable than the Fire Nation, and the perfect example was standing right before me. "You're in no position to bargain," I chimed in, waving my swords.

But Long Feng was not worried; rather, in a calm and clear voice, he stated the following words, "Jet, the Earth King has invited you to Lake Laogai."

It was like my mind lost control of my body as I felt the urge to attack Aang. In a trance-like state, I murmured, "I am honoured to accept his invitation." With that, I held my swords in Aang's direction and swung at him furiously.

Aang dodged the first blow, but it only drove me to attacking him even more. I had no control over what I did, as somehow I saw Aang as an enemy. All I could do was chase him around the room, thrusting and jabbing my swords in his direction while he pleaded with me to stop. "Jet, it's me, Aang. You don't have to do this!" Even as Aang blew me back with an air blast, I still had a burning desire to attack the bald boy. As I marched forward again, ready to slice into Aang, the Avatar declared, "Look inside your heart. He can't make you do this. You're a Freedom Fighter!" He put extra emphasis on the last two words, as if they had extra meaning in my life.

But it was those two words that charged up my brain, as a sudden burst of energy shocked me back into reality. I recalled the time I formed the Freedom Fighters and how we raided Fire Nation camps in order to drive them out of our homes in the forest. The faces of Longshot, Smellerbee, Pipesqueak, and The Duke raced through my eyes. I also saw Aang and the two Water Tribe siblings, meeting them on a raid, inviting them to my camp, and trying to convince Katara and Aang to help me. Lastly, I recalled Katara's rejection of me, and Sokka lecturing me on how I had betrayed my cause by sending innocent people to die. That was when I realized why I had come to Ba Sing Se: to start a new life, only to be captured and brainwashed by the Dai Li.

Turning around, I saw the lowlife of an earth bender at the door, urging me on to attack the Avatar. It was scum like him that made it so easy for the Fire Nation to bully people. Long Feng manipulated those around him, weakening them so to control them easier. Seething with anger, I clutched my left sword and hurled it at him like a spear.

The next few seconds appeared to play out in slow motion, as the sword clanged against the stone walls behind Long Feng. The Dai Li head ducked his head and shot out a fist, sending a huge slab of rock at me. My eyes widened as I tried to pick up my feet, but it was too late. The rock slammed into my chest, sending me straight to the ground. I saw nothing but dust around me as a piercing pain shot through my body. I could feel my ribs were no longer in the correct places, and it became increasingly difficult to breathe.

As my ragged breathing decreased significantly, I could feel a group of people surround me. My vision blurred as a set of water-covered hands rubbed my chest, the soothing feeling giving me the last bit of comfort before the end. I could hear Smellerbee tell Aang and his group to leave us, and Longshot offering to take care of me. "There's no time, just go. We'll take care of him. He's our leader." The archer added. Just like how I had known him, the archer didn't say much, but he made every word count. As Katara looked on in worry, I assured her I would be fine, even eking out a smile. I could feel Aang's group shuffle past me to the next chamber, leaving me in my final moments.

Maybe it was poetic justice that I had to end it this way. I lived fast and risky, putting my life on the line and cheating death multiple times. I didn't regret forming the Freedom Fighters and convincing them to live this way with me. Rather, my only regret was that I didn't get to know Katara better. Somehow, I felt we really bonded during our times together, and I did admit that I had some admiration for her. Had I survived, maybe we could be a couple? Who knows, but that's not important right now. What's important was to give Aang's team enough time to save Appa, and hoped he could in turn save the world. With the Freedom Fighters completely dispersed, Aang was the only hope now.

And maybe it was most fitting that Smellerbee and Longshot would stick with me to the end. They were the longest serving Freedom Fighters, and they were the most loyal to me. I could hear Smellerbee sobbing, her tears probably rushing down her cheeks and splashing onto the ground. Rumbles were heard from the other side, prompting Longshot to hook an arrow and prepare to fire. Soon, I would give way, letting dozens of Dai Li agents into the chamber. Longshot and Smellerbee might stand a chance against them, but probably not for more than a few minutes. In my last breath, I formed one thought.

My name is Jet. That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 8: Suki

"Sorry ladies, didn't mean to interrupt your dance lesson." A male voice echoed from the doorway. I was in the lead position, meaning out of everyone, I got the best view of the smug mug sticking his face into our hut. We all paused from our exercises and looked at the teenage boy clad in blue, unimpressed with his tone and attitude. To him, we might look like a dance troupe, but what we did was more than entertainment.

But still, it was best to remain civil, given the status this character had in the world. "Sorry about yesterday, I didn't know you were friends with the Avatar." I told him in a sincere tone. When we were told that the Unagi, a large eel-like creature that lived on the bay surrounding our island, was going crazy again, our village elder Oyaji sent my group to investigate. What ended up happening was that we discovered the long-lost air bending Avatar, Aang, and two Southern Water Tribe siblings, the sister Katara and the brother Sokka. Given that our island was named after a past Avatar, Kyoshi, we decided to let them stay as guests, allowing them access to all our facilities.

"It's alright. I mean, normally I'd hold a grudge, but seeing that you guys are a bunch of girls, I'll make an exception." Sokka responded in a condescending tone. He was stretching out his arms and legs, eager for a workout with us. Apparently, from the reaction he showed yesterday, he wasn't too happy that my group, an all-female fighting team called the Kyoshi Warriors, bested him, and was probably demanding a rematch.

I glanced around my team, and saw most of the ladies had the same response I did. Giving his chauvinistic attitude, perhaps letting Sokka in on the fun would be a good way to show him up once more. At least, if we beat him, he probably wouldn't dare to say such arrogant things. Turning back at him, I tilted my head and answered coyly, "I should hope so. I mean, against a big strong man like you, we wouldn't stand a chance!"

"True," Sokka retorted, rolling his head around his neck. The shameless arrogance of this Water Tribe warrior knew no bounds as he continued bragging. While I tried to be patient and let him talk away his defences, I could hear snickers under the breaths of my teammates. "After all, I'm the best warrior in my village." He boasted, crossing his arms.

"Best warrior, huh? In your whole village," I dipped my head in his direction, my hip leaning so far forward that my headpiece nearly looped down over my eyes. I could tell that the hook was baited, and the question was if Sokka would bite. "Maybe you'd be kind enough to give us a little demonstration?" I suggested. "Come on girls, wouldn't you like him to show us some moves?" I waved the rest of the warriors over.

The concerted giggles behind me only bloated Sokka's confidence even more. "If that's what you want, then I'd be happy to." I stood in the middle of our training room as Sokka approached me. He stuck out his chest and flaunted his arms around, almost like he was invincible to any weapon. "Now you stand over there, and try to block me." he instructed, keeping me in my position and waving his left hand in my face.

In one swift motion, Sokka twisted his body around and shot his right fist at me. I still had my two fans, which were crucial to the Kyoshi fighting style, in my hands, and I responded by jabbing out my left. I nailed Sokka right in the shoulder, freezing his move and sent him reeling back. Watching him grimace and wince, I dropped my arm and smiled as casually as possible. "Good," Sokka stuttered, rubbing his shoulder in pain, "but of course, I was going easy on you." He assured me, his eyes flashing frantically.

Smirking, I taunted him some more, telling him I expected him to go easy. So let's see if you can handle this!" Sokka shouted, advancing in with a wide leg kick. Like I had done it every day of my life, I merely ducked under the kick and whipped my right fan around. That collapsed the extra weight Sokka had on his remaining leg, sending him reeling across the room. Luckily, he managed to land on the mat, or else his back and rear end would have some serious bruising for the next few days.

I could see Sokka blink a few times in surprise, before he became consumed in frustration. "That does it!" He yelled, his voice cracking. In his most bull-headed move yet, he rushed at me, one fist held right before him. I must say that, with all the taunting we heaped on him, Sokka's finally lost his cool, and was resorting to random flails.

But randomness like this was the easier technique to defend against in the Kyoshi fighting style, as I merely used Sokka's strength against him. Grabbing onto his extended arm, I spun him around in circles, using his own momentum to drive out his energy. The only sounds that could be heard were Sokka's screams as he whirled around me, his body nothing but a blur as I toyed with his position. Then, in one smooth motion, I halted my motion, yanking Sokka's arm right behind him as he screeched to a halt. The ride was wild enough, although it was probably nothing compared to what the Unagi could do.

Then, in my final act of humiliation, I undid the white belt on Sokka's waist and brought it to his hand. Sokka was still only on one leg, a great position to pull off this trick. With some quick tying work, I bound his left wrist to his right ankle, leaving him in an awkward position. Letting go of him, I only watched giddily as Sokka bounced around the room, trying helplessly to return to a fighting posture. After a few more seconds of pathetic hopping, Sokka finally dropped to the ground.

I approached the fallen figure amidst the giggles of my team. I could heard Sokka hyperventilating, partially because of the exercise that left him in this state, but also due to the great indignation that he was bested twice by the same group of, you guessed it, girls. Placing my hands on my hips, I dipped my face lower again, asking Sokka with a smirk, "Anything else you want to teach us?" Hearing that, the girls burst out in laughter.

I decided to keep Sokka like that for a few more minutes, hearing him plead and beg us to spare him, just to torture him a bit. To me, there was no excuse or justification for being that mean-spirited towards the female gender, even if he claimed he was the chief warrior left in his village. If the great Avatar Kyoshi, a female and the longest-living Avatar, was so active in defending our land from Chin the Conqueror, an invading warlord that was just as cruel as the current Fire Nation, then there was nothing that girls couldn't do as well as guys. So, for Sokka to barge into our training hut and declared that he was going to teach us lessons on fighting, I was not going to let that pass.

Finally, my good side took over, and I undid the knot in pity for him. Sokka glanced at us, his eyes wavering and slightly watery. Dipping his head in shame, he hurried away from us. While I genuinely felt better about teaching him a lesson, I also felt somewhat sorry for him. He suffered a lot of embarrassment in that battle, and I was certain he would have doubts about challenging females again. Sighing, I could wish he would be more open-minded should he return, as I hoped to show him some of our skills.

*****

"Hoping for another dance lesson?" I asked, unimpressed as Sokka made another appearance in our training grounds. We thought after being humiliated twice, he would finally learn his lesson and take his chauvinistic thoughts elsewhere. But it seemed like he wasn't about to let up, as he popped in on us in the middle of our routine again.

But there was something about Sokka this time, as he didn't seem as strong in his efforts to talk to us. His eyes shifted around, his hands fidgeted, and his back slouched as he struggled for words. As we continued observing him, he did an unexpected thing: he got down on his knees and begged before us. "I would be honoured if you would teach me," he stated in humility, his eyes never leaving the ground.

I pursed my lips, not sure what to think. After all the nastiness that he hurled our way, we weren't about to forget his sexist comments too easily. That being said, if Sokka were to show true remorse for his actions, perhaps it was worth a chance. Trying to test him out, I asked bluntly, "I teach you? Even if I'm a girl?"

"I'm sorry if I insulted you. I was wrong," Sokka replied, his tone barely above a murmur. It was evident that he was still coming to terms with women being capable and strong fighters, but at least it was a start. "I won't let you down." He assured us, doing a full kowtow as his forehead dipped to the mat. Whatever doubts the girls and I still had regarding his intentions, they were all erased with this powerful gesture.

Finally conquering my stubborn side, I relented on my position. "Alright, but you have to follow all of our traditions," I responded, "and I mean, all of them!"

Within minutes, my teammates brought out a traditional Kyoshi Warrior uniform for Sokka to wear. We had many extras in our wardrobe, and we found one that we felt was around Sokka's size. Sokka protested for quite a bit as we prepared to dress him up, ranting nonstop even when the final act of applying the face paint was done. "Do I really have to wear this? It feels a little, girly." He complained, completely slouched over.

"It's a warrior's uniform, so you should be proud." I declared, quickly describing what each piece of the uniform stood for. Avatar Kyoshi first donned such clothing when she served the world, and despite centuries later, there were only a few modifications from the original. Emphasizing that honour and bravery were among the most important traits from our island's namesake, I reminded Sokka never to forget what that meant.

Before long, the girls had finished their training, and were about to head home for the day. With the training grounds empty, I decided to stay longer and teach Sokka the basics. Making him do repetition after repetition of the basic steps, including movements of the fans, I tried to install the fundamental skills of the Kyoshi fighting style into Sokka. Even in his first day, I could see him being very sincere in learning the skill, his every step and pivot filled with concentration to the most precise detail. "You're not going to master it in one day," I pointed out, "even I'm not that good."

"I think I'm starting to get it," he assured me, waving his right fan while kicking out his left foot. With three spinning pivots, he gathered his momentum and shot the fan out of his hand. While the throw was strong, it was extremely out-of-control, as the fan sailed out of the room and slammed into a tree outside. The snow from the leaves shook loose and slumped to the ground, burying the fan in white fluff.

Alternating my eyes between the buried fan and a tired-looking Sokka, I decided to clarify. "It's not about strength. Our technique is about using the opponent's force against them. Think of the fan as an extension of your arm." I stood in a fighter stance, my right fan closed and pointed straight at Sokka's face. Sokka returned the gesture, his painted face in complete seriousness as he watched my movement. Continuing with my description, I told him, "Wait for an opening, and then..."

I tried to thrust forward, but Sokka caught my arm in time. In one smooth motion, he yanked me by the fan and shot me forward. I was in total shock as I lost hold of the fan, letting it bounce to the ground as Sokka turned his arm and shoved me back. I landed on my rear end, sitting on the ground and looking up helplessly. For some strange reason, I felt like Sokka in the morning, when I shamed him before my team. Now, the shoe was on the other foot as Sokka exclaimed, "I got you! Admit it, I got you!"

Getting back to my feet, I could feel my face flush with embarrassment. Earlier, it seemed so much fun trying to set Sokka in his place, but now the tables had turned. Still, I did admire the way he learned the trick so quickly. Maybe with more lessons, we could show him the real ways of our world, and hopefully changed his views permanently. "Okay, it was a lucky shot," I conceded, grabbing Sokka's outstretched fingers, "let's see if you can do it again." I challenged, prepared to use more advanced techniques.

Returning to our fighter stances, we circled each other and prepared to spar. To be honest, while I was busy condemning Sokka's close-minded view on women, I had to say the Kyoshi Warriors didn't exactly have a record on open-mindedness that we could be proud of either. For the entire century that the world had been at war, all the warriors did was to hide from trouble and refuse to take part. Oyaji said the reason was our isolated location made it possible for life to still go on, and we could declare neutrality while still being part of the Earth Kingdom. But how long could we sustain that? Was it right for us to stay in the corner and watch the world be engulfed in flames? Mulling this over, it was an issue worth discussing with my team later on. But for now, my attention returned to Sokka as he advanced. I wanted to show him the true power of the Kyoshi fighting style.

*****

"Come out, Avatar! You can't hide from me forever!" I heard a loud booming voice echo through the village as I rushed down the hill from the training facility. Sokka and I were so caught up in going over basic Kyoshi style techniques that we soon lost track of the time. Sokka really picked up his skills quickly in this first day, so much so that I had to say it would be great if he chose to stay and continue training, in hopes of becoming the first ever male Kyoshi Warrior.

But our fun was about to be interrupted as Oyaji, our village elder, requested my team to help the people, as fire benders reportedly landed on our shores. It seemed like my earlier prediction of needing to remove Kyoshi Island from splendid isolation and into the war came true. We might not be interested in trouble, trouble was interested in us, as a fleet of Komodo Rhinos stood at the edge of the town. There were three rhinos with two Fire Nation soldiers on each, and one with only one person on, presumably the team leader. As the three soldier rhinos slowly trudged forward, I signalled my team into position, hoping to ambush the invaders from the side.

There was complete silence as the setting sun cast its rays across the mountainous exterior of the island, creating long shadows across the land. It placed a perfect silhouette on the leader of the group, whose face was in complete darkness. From my angle, it was like he had horns from his head, the Fire Nation helmet resonated his ferocity. On our way here, Oyaji told me that he already requested the villagers returned to their homes and locked all doors, and it was up to the Kyoshi Warriors to protect them from harm.

Seizing the opportunity to strike, I signalled my teammates to surround the rhinos from the side. Being in the middle of the village meant we could come at them from all sides, and that was exactly what we did as warriors leapt onto the fire benders from each angle. The soldiers were caught off guard as they were disarmed, with some being kicked off the rhinos overall. With my team keeping the front three rhinos busy, I made a beeline for the group leader. With my fans spread and a determined look on my face, I raced to the lone rhino and rider in the distance, ready to repel him off the island.

Immediately, a barrage of fire rained down on me. Even with my armour and face paint, I was getting close to being burned. All around me, orange balls of flame battered the ground, the projectiles becoming brighter than the waning sun. At the last possible second, I leapt into the air, away from the flames and straight at the rider. I figured that once I could knock him to the ground, he would be at a disadvantage, as my speed and evasiveness would make it difficult for him to hit me with fire. Twisting my body, I had my feet whipped forward, ready to shove them straight into the rider's chest.

But it was me who miscalculated, as I did not expect the Komodo Rhino to be used as a weapon. The rider simply yanked the reins and spun the creature around. It was like everything slowed down as the tail of the large animal made its way towards me. The next thing I knew was that I had been sent into the air like a rag doll in a windstorm, my body limp and in immense pain as the hard tail bones of the Komodo Rhino made full impact with me. I landed hard onto the ground, creating a neat sand trail with my skidding. I could feel my teeth rattle, and had it not been for the armour, I was sure to have several broken bones by now. Wincing, I tried to get up, but to no avail.

I could only look on in horror as the rider glared down from the rhino, his fists clenched and ready to attack. My head still spun in pain as I barely saw him reel an arm back, ready to send another wall of fire at me. But then, everything slowed down once more as a blurry figure jumped before me just before the large orange blast smacked into me. The mysterious saviour swung an arm around, batting away the flames with a fan. I looked more carefully and realized that the Kyoshi Warrior before me wasn't a female; rather, it was Sokka, who bravely stared down the fire bender as he fiercely defended me.

My concentration was finally interrupted with one of my teammates jumping at the Fire Nation invasion team leader, knocking him off the rhino while we were all still stunned at what happened. Sokka, after making sure I was alright, immediately charged in to provide backup for my teammates. As I tried to crawl to safety, I could see a third Kyoshi Warrior joining Sokka and the one who originally knocked the rider off the rhino surround him. I couldn't make it out quite clearly, but I could feel flames shooting out in a circle. The fire bender swung around and knocked everyone back, their backs slamming into walls and pillars. I couldn't see Sokka, so I could only hope he got out alright.

But Sokka became the least of my concerns as the fire bender stepped into the middle of the village again. "Nice try, Avatar," he shouted into the skies, "but these little girls can't save you!" In my weakened state, I felt so helpless. Everywhere around me, there was fire flickering. The Fire Nation invaders, despite being few in numbers, did a lot of damage to this place, and showed us just how strong of a fighting force they were. In my mind, there was a genuine fear that our homes would be destroyed.

Luckily, the Avatar finally stepped out, standing defiantly on the other side of the village. With his air bending skills, he managed to stall the assailants just in time. In the midst of the confusion, it was decided that the Kyoshi Warriors would do everything to hold off the attackers while the Avatar got off the island safely. "There's no time to say goodbye," I told Sokka, who managed to find my hiding spot. He had taken a huge hit by landing hard on his back, and even as he recovered he was still in some pain.

"What about I'm sorry?" he responded, "I treated you like a girl when I should have treated you like a warrior." There was genuine regret in his tone as we urged him to catch up with Aang, who was in the process of getting Appa, his Sky Bison. Somehow, from this experience, I truly felt Sokka was ready to abandon his chauvinistic ways.

"I am a warrior, but I'm a girl, too," I replied. Leaning in, I gave Sokka a peck on the cheek. I saw the stunned expression on his face as I pulled back, as Sokka rubbed the side where my mouth met his face. Maybe that was my way of change, as I had lots to learn to incorporate myself in the real world. While it was great to work with an all-girl fighting team, meshing with the other sex, even other cultures, was more important.

The ensuing battle was quick, but at great cost to our village. The fire benders all but razed our land as they went on the retreat. Guessing that chasing the Avatar was the highest priority for them, they weren't about to stay for long, but the cruelty they showed to us was unmatched as they chose to destroy whatever debris left on the island. Had it not been for the Avatar, who got the Unagi to spray water over our village, there would be nothing left. Sighing, I realized that this was the price to pay to get involved in the world. There was no way Kyoshi Island could progress without some sacrifices, but if it meant bringing forward long-term peace by fighting the Fire Nation, then it was worth it.

*****

"I know you're just trying to help, but I can take care of myself." I insisted to Sokka as we sat under a rock arch. It was a beautiful spring night, with the breezes from the bay tickling our skin as we stared into the dark but cloudless sky. Because of Aang's team, the entire Kyoshi Warrior team was inspired to help others less fortunate than us across the Earth Kingdom, and we decided to leave the island to search for opportunities. One arose at the Full Moon Bay ferry terminal, where refugees were waiting to get onto the ships heading for Ba Sing Se, the only safe haven for the Earth Kingdom for now.

And that was when we ran into Aang's group, who happened to be escorting a couple to Ba Sing Se. The wife, Ying, was pregnant, and they wanted to get to the Earth Kingdom capital to raise their family in peace. Unfortunately, their passports were stolen from them, meaning they were not authorized to board the ferries. In a desperate move, Aang decided to guide them through the Serpent's Pass, which was a very dangerous area. Not only were there steep cliffs and Fire Nation patrol boats, there was also a large sea serpent, comparable to the Unagi that lived in the waters. We already dodged an attack by a patrol boat earlier, and it wasn't about to get any easier along the way.

"So why are you acting so overprotective?" I demanded to Sokka. To be honest, he had been like that since we first reunited at the terminal. At first, I could sense he had some doubt about letting me on this journey; even without him voicing it, I could feel it from his posture and tone. Next, he was completely in panic at the Fire Nation attack, so much so that he didn't even notice Toph, the newest member of their team, save us all from danger. Perhaps he was scared for Toph, since she was blind, so much so that he became worried for anyone, but I had to stop this obsessive behaviour before it worsened.

Sokka sighed, biting his lower lip as he tilted his head upward. There was a full moon tonight, and its brightness shone through the line of rocks we traveled on. "It's so hard to lose someone you care about," Sokka murmured, his eyes never leaving the bright circle above us, "something happened at the North Pole, and I couldn't protect someone. I don't want anything like that to happen ever again." He turned away from me, refusing to even look my way. I figured that, whatever it was, it must have impacted him greatly.

Seizing the moment, perhaps it was time for me to tell him the truth about my personal feeling. "I lost someone I cared about. He didn't die, he just went away." I described, my eyes tilting back and forth between Sokka's ponytail and the ground. A part of me felt this probably wasn't right, as Sokka's subdued tone and slouched posture painted a scene of mourning, but maybe it was the perfect chance to cheer him back up and let him start anew. "I only had a few days to get to know him, but he was smart and brave and funny..." I listed off the traits, hoping he would notice.

Immediately, he shot up, demanding who this mysterious person was. Chuckling, I got to my feet as well. "It is you, stupid!" I declared joyfully. At this time, our eyes were on each other, not moving an inch away as our faces grew closer. I knew it was a moment we both longed for. I had this feeling for Sokka since we first met in Kyoshi Island. He sure changed a lot since I first met him, as not only did he gain respect for the other gender, he also developed into quite a warrior in his own right. Hopefully, by being sincere with him, I could get him to truly move on with life and fight another day.

But just before our lips met, he pulled back. I could see the moonlight illuminate one side of his face, but it was all I needed to see. Sokka's face completely drooped, his eyes close to tears as he stepped away from me. "I can't," he merely stated.

For the rest of the night, I was totally sleepless, wondering what I did wrong in that incident. Maybe I was overly ambitious in thinking he had already recovered, and was ready to let go of whatever past failure he experienced. Still, I realized that it was my fault, and I figured I must make up for this mistake. But for the moment, I decided to keep my distance from Sokka, trying to focus on the task at hand. Even as we crossed a section of the Serpent's Pass that required going underwater, I remained calm, letting Aang and Katara create a water bubble for us to breathe while I watched the family.

We were almost through completely when we were rudely interrupted by the pass' namesake. The aquamarine, scaly serpent reared its fearsome head over the water and hissed at us, its mouth armed with razor sharp teeth as it scanned our group. In an effort to buy time, Aang offered to distract it while Katara used water bending to let the others cross. Hurling his glider into the air, the bald boy leapt up and headed off.

My eyes alternated between the serpent and Katara, who created an ice bridge from our land piece. Standing in the middle, she hurried us across to the other side. I only had Ying in mind as we gingerly stepped on the ice, hoping nobody would lose their balance. Luckily, Katara made it so thick that it wouldn't crack, but it wasn't enough to get a certain blind earth bender to cross. "Toph, come on!" Sokka called.

Toph was extremely hesitant, as her blindness did not allow her to navigate on anything other than solid rock and earth. Earlier in the morning, I had a casual chat with Toph, who told me that she used earth bending via her feet to see the area, so it was likely that ice prevented that from happening. With the serpent nearby, Katara decided to take off and help Aang subdue it, leaving Sokka and I to guide Toph across the bridge.

As the short girl with misty eyes carefully side-stepped our way, we kept calling out directions to make things easier for her. Just as she was about halfway across, the serpent was pushed back by Aang and Katara, and unfortunately its tail snapped the ice into bits. Toph screamed as her body was thrown into the water. "Help, I can't swim!"

My instinct took over as I propelled myself into the water. The surrounding ice made it cooler than usual, the chill biting onto my exposed skin and numbing me. But I ignored the uncomfortable feeling as I propelled forward, taking long strokes as I reached out to Toph. I pulled her out of the water just before she went under, letting her take in a few breaths of air before pulling her back. Toph, completely relieved, leaned over and kissed my cheek, thinking I was Sokka. It led to a rather embarrassing situation where I had to reveal my identity, to which she replied, "You can let me drown now."

As we made our way to safety, I could see Aang and Katara create a huge vortex that trapped the serpent. The monster would have difficulty swimming out of this hole as it became lodged in the currents. The Avatar and the water bender rejoined us on the thin land bridge, our nerves finally calming as we left the danger zone for good.

Just as we got back on land, Ying's stomach couldn't hold it any longer. Yelling that the baby was about to come out, we had to quickly improvise a scheme for delivering it. Katara, with her quick thinking, asked Aang and Sokka to fetch rags and water while Toph created a large earth tent around the family. I went into the tent with Katara as we watched Ying hyperventilate. I helped hold onto Ying as Katara instructed her to breathe deeply. "You're doing great, Ying. Now get ready to push: one, two, three!"

The new bundle of life plopped out of Ying, its cries filling the air. Holding the infant, Katara told me to cut its umbilical cord and check its health while she took care of Ying. I followed her instructions, making sure the baby was generally well off. "It's a girl, by the way," I called out as I examined it carefully. It might be a regular birth, but it came at a time significant time. All of us went through a rebirth of sorts, especially Sokka and me. So maybe this experience was telling us that life could always restart, even at the most unexpected time. Returning the baby to Ying, I stepped out of the tent.

It would be another hour or so before we finally got going again. Aang wanted to get to the city to see if he could find Appa, who was supposedly kidnapped and taken into Ba Sing Se. As his glider shot towards the wall in the distance, I approached Sokka again. "I came along because I wanted to make sure you got through the Serpent's Pass safely. But now I need to get back to the other Kyoshi Warriors," I explained gently.

Sokka was in shock, as he didn't expect me to tag along to protect him. The whole time, he thought he had to protect veryone. Taking a deep breath, I clarified the last case for him. "Listen, I'm really sorry about last night. I just got carried away, and before I..."

I never had a chance to finish that sentence, as Sokka lunged forward and closed his lips onto mine. There was no need to describe what happened, as it was evident that Sokka regained his composure again. As we wrapped our arms around each other, I knew that it was a new beginning for us. Maybe, when the war was over, we could continue to move forward with this relationship. But for now, I was just enjoying the moment.

*****

"We'll never make it onto the gondola. There are too many guards." I pointed out. It was several months since I last saw Sokka, having returned to the ferry terminal after escorting the pregnant family across. Unfortunately, things took a turn for the worse, as in a scouting mission around Ba Sing Se, my team was captured by the Fire Nation army. There was a fierce battle with the Fire Nation princess, Azula, and her two minions. Even as we outnumbered them, they managed to overwhelm us and took us prisoners. The girls were placed in a separate prison near the Fire Nation capital, but I was considered to be a dangerous prisoner. So, they took me to the high-security prison, the Boiling Rock.

"Let's say by some miracle that this all works and we make it onto the gondola. The warden will still just cut the lines, even if we have a captive." I continued opposing the escape plan Sokka envisioned. For some reason, Sokka sneaked into the prison in hopes of freeing his father. He did manage to reach Hakoda, and together they thought up of a crazy plan to cause a prison riot to distract the guards while kidnapping a prison staff member as hostage. Even without hearing all the specifics, I had serious doubts about it.

"Not if the warden is the captive," Sokka quickly retorted, placing a hand on my shoulder. Earlier, Sokka already tried a riot by having me fight with another prisoner. And believe it or not, said prisoner was Prince Zuko, heir to the Fire Nation throne. I had no idea how he did it, but Sokka convinced Zuko to join in on the activities. He told me that Zuko had a change of heart and decided to join our group. I still had reservations, as a former enemy was now in our camp. Moreover, given that Zuko tried to burn down my village, I didn't feel quite comfortable trusting him yet.

But whatever time I still had to think things over was smashed as several guards marched past my cell. Sensing that something unusual was about to happen, Sokka told me he had to leave, but would find me before the riot. I gave him a hug, wishing him the best of luck as he marched out. As the door slid shut, I was all to myself.

I took a seat at the small bench which also doubled as a bed. I had been here for several months now, and it really gave me some time to think. The war was definitely near its climax right now, as I heard a planned invasion of our forces into the capital. It supposedly failed thanks to Azula going undercover into Ba Sing Se as a Kyoshi Warrior and overhearing the plans. Now, it seemed like nothing was stopping the Fire Nation from world dominance, and our escape might not really matter.

But it also raised a whole new set of issues: let's say Sokka managed to get me out of here, and that Hakoda and Zuko, two experienced war planners, were available resources for us. What was the next step? Even if Aang was still alive, and had mastered his bending, there was no telling that he could reach the battlefield in time to stop the Fire Nation from advancing. Even here in prison, I heard ample news of Fire Nation military advancements, to the point where they had made contact with almost every corner of the world. With only a few isolated patches untouched, it almost felt like the end was near.

No sooner had my mind begun its battle between optimism and pessimism, the cell door slid open again. I recalled Sokka's instructions and slipped out to the central open area, the sunlight shooting into my eyes as I filed through the crowd of people. I could hear confused chatter of prisoners as they glanced at each other, wondering what was going on. Sensing that there was uncertainty, perhaps things might work out. I took a long look around, and finally located Sokka near a wall away from the tower. Hakoda was with him, and so was another prisoner, a tall man with a small goatee named Chit Sang. Knowing that they needed a riot, Chit Sang promptly grabbed another person and lifted him into the air, shouting for the crowd to cause some mayhem.

What surprised me the most was the people actually listened; as fists, feet, and fire balls were launched through the air, we tried to locate the warden, who was in the safety of the tower. While Zuko and Sokka griped over who should do what and why no one thought it through, I decided to take action into my own hands. Leaping into the air, I raced onto top of everyone's heads, heading straight for the tower where the warden was. "Men," I murmured to myself, "why can't they be more decisive in crucial times?"

The entire process of kidnapping the warden took less than a minute, as I scaled the tower and made quick work of the guards surrounding him. With the warden bound and gagged, we made our way to the gondola in relative peace. We loaded up the cab and Zuko made sure they couldn't stop the machine by destroying the brakes. For a while, I could truly breathe easier. "We're on our way," I assured everyone.

"Wait, who's that?" Hakoda, who was at the end closer to the prison asked. We dashed to his end and saw two teenage females in Fire Nation costumes racing towards us. One was using a set of handcuffs on the line and propelled herself to us with fire bending from her feet, while the other leaped onto the top wire and charged at us.

As they came nearer, I could get a better look at their faces. It was Princess Azula and one of her friends who ambushed my team outside Ba Sing Se. Knowing that this was a chance to get some payback, I insisted on battling them head on, particularly the girl on the top wire, who disabled many of my fighters by blocking their chi. "This is a rematch I've been waiting for," I spat, climbing out of the cab and onto its roof.

Zuko and Sokka would soon follow, deciding that they would go after Azula. That left me with the acrobat Ty Lee, who jumped off the wire and stared me down. The hot steam mugging our bodies only did not make it more uncomfortable as the girl and I refused to move, knowing that the first blow could turn the battle.

The sounds of flames being shot behind me prompted my battle to begin as I advanced on Ty Lee with a series of jabs. Her amazing stealth and coordination let her block most with ease, causing me to fight defensively as well. Her chi-blocking was a factor in my mind, as I would be thrown into a disadvantage should any part of my body be frozen. As my blows came fast and furious, my opponent somersaulted underneath the open carriage, going through the interior before appearing on the other side. It almost proved to be costly, as my sudden lapse in concentration nearly allowed her to ram a knuckle into my spine, which could paralyze me completely. As I pulled my body to the side, I kept to the centre of the gondola, avoiding any blows that could throw me into the boiling waters below. We were evenly matched, and were even tired.

But the unexpected happened as I heard the voice of the warden call to his troops. I had no idea how he did it, but he undid my knots and removed the gag from his mouth. Leaning over the side, he yelled, "Cut the line!" Before anyone of us had a chance to react, the gondola screeched to a halt, nearly throwing us all off balance.

There was silence for a few seconds, but a rhythmic buzzing sound could be heard from the prison. We leaned over and saw the guards operating a huge saw, eating away into the cable and threatening to drop us to our doom. As Sokka and Zuko tried to regain balance, Azula and her friend bailed the doomed gondola, hoping onto one parallel to us. As they descended back to the prison, I heard Azula sneer, "It's time to leave."

We could only look on nervously, waiting for the inevitable as the cable would snap any second now, sending us into the boiling lake below. But as we climbed back into the cab, it unexpectedly started up again. We could only watch in shock as Zuko told us Mai, the usual third member of Azula's team, disabled all the prison guards and turned the engine back on. I was totally caught off guard by this incident, as I understood the risks one took to defy the Fire Nation princess. What could Mai be thinking by letting us go like that? What reason did she have sending known fugitives to their freedom?

Either way, we got ourselves out safely, tossing the re-tied and re-gagged warden back on the gondola as we hurried out. Zuko managed to locate a giant airship, the same one Azula used to get here, and used it to take us to their hiding place: the Western Air Temple. As I mulled over the actions of everyone, I realized that not all hope was lost. If Sokka could free us from prison, Zuko truly changed completely, and the Fire Nation princess could be defied, then the battle could still be won. Balance must be restored to the world, and even with a sliver of hope, I would do my part to make it happen.

*****

"Even if I did defeat Ozai, and I don't know if I could, it would be the wrong way to end the war." The ever wise General Iroh explained to us. It was days after I was freed from the Boiling Rock, and I managed to rejoin everyone at the Western Air Temple. It was there that I found out Fire Lord Ozai planned a large scale attack on the remaining parts of the Earth Kingdom, using Sozin's Comet to boost fire bending powers. Zuko told us that there was no time to wait, and Aang had to face the Fire Lord as soon as possible.

But for some strange reason, Aang disappeared from us just days before the Fire Nation attack, leaving us scrambling for a solution. Zuko recruited a bounty hunter named June to try seeking out Aang via his scent with a pet Shirshu, a large mole-like creature with an extremely keen smell, but it was fruitless. June reported that the Shirshu could not locate Aang, as if he disappeared off the face of the planet. So, Zuko turned to a final resort, and asked June to locate his missing uncle, General Iroh. Ever since Ba Sing Se fell, Iroh had been taken prisoner, but Zuko found out that Iroh had escaped prison on the day of the eclipse. Given that Iroh was probably the only one that could match Ozai's fire bending strength, it was our final chance.

We finally located Iroh in a secret camp outside Ba Sing Se, where a group of rather elderly individuals resided. These people, calling themselves the Order of the White Lotus, planned to liberate Ba Sing Se from the Fire Nation, and they considered Iroh their leader. After letting Zuko reconcile with his uncle, we told him of our plans, to which he calmly but firmly refused to participate in. "History will see it as more senseless violence," Iroh commented on having him face Ozai, "a brother killing a brother to grab power. The only way for this war to end peacefully is for the Avatar to defeat him."

Iroh took it even further by refusing to take his rightful place on the throne. Since he was Fire Lord Azulon's eldest son, the position of Fire Lord was Iroh's to begin with. But even as Zuko offered it to him, Iroh flatly denied the request. "Someone new must take the throne, an idealist with pure heart and unquestionable honour," he stated, giving the position to Zuko, "only you can restore the honour of the Fire Nation."

But still, the issue was with Aang, and whether he would make it back in time. Iroh insisted that he must, and that everyone should play their roles in helping the Avatar restore balance to the world. "And that's why you gathered the members of the White Lotus," I observed, getting a good look at the different people here. There was a water bender named Pakku, who supposedly became grandfather to Katara and Sokka by going to the South Pole and marrying their grandmother. There was King Bumi from Omashu, which, like Kyoshi Island, was a semi-autonomous region in the Earth Kingdom. There was a maverick fire bender named Jeong Jeong, who Aang originally requested to be his fire bending teacher before meeting Zuko. Finally, there was Piandao, a sword master who taught Sokka the ways of the sword. Seeing the large group of different people from different backgrounds and skills, I realized what it was like to truly integrate the world.

After further discussion with Iroh, it was decided that Zuko and Katara would go to the Fire Nation capital, facing off against Azula to reclaim Zuko's rightful place as the new Fire Lord. Sokka, Toph and I would stall the Fire Nation airship fleet, which was the main tool Ozai would be using to launch the aerial blazing. "The airship base is on a small island just off the Earth Kingdom shore," Piandao instructed us, handing Sokka a map, "you should be able to intercept the fleet within a day's journey."

The three of us mounted on an Eel Hound, which was the fastest creature to move on land and sea. Glancing at the Sky Bison, where Zuko and Katara were mounted on, we sped off onto the fields, heading straight for our target with only General Iroh's last words in mind. "Today, destiny is our friend, I know it!"

By the time we reached the final body of water between us and the airship base, it was already evening. The sun had dipped to the horizon already, but the skies were still bright as ever, thanks to the comet grazing our planet's atmosphere. Being on the back of the eel hound, I turned around and got a good look at the bright object arriving from the other horizon. "It's weird to say, but the comet actually looks beautiful," I commented. Perhaps this was highly ironic, as such a beautiful object was about to foreshadow the end of the world. With the fleet about to take off, there wasn't a moment to waste.

By the time we reached land, we could see the airships lifting into the sky. The large ominous ovals hovered above us as we fretted nonstop, wondering how we would get on. Toph, suddenly getting an idea, positioned herself right between Sokka and me. With a huge stomp, she used earth bending to send a huge slab of rock up, throwing us into the air and at the nearest airship. I didn't dare to scream despite the terrifying flight, afraid that we might be noticed. But all turned out well as we landed on the airship on the right edge of the formation. "Now let's get to the control room," Toph ordered.

We trudged up to a metal door located at the front. Sokka and I stood to the door's either side as Toph placed her hands on the metallic object. From what I heard, Toph had developed an enhanced earth bending technique called metal bending, which allowed her to feel for the earth-based impurities in a piece of metal and manipulated that. In seconds, Toph crumpled the metal and wrapped it around her body, using it as a shield as she took out the crew inside. Sokka and I stayed outside, ducking and curling our bodies as flames and other debris were sent flying from the room. "She's good, alright," I commented.

Within minutes, Toph emptied the control room of the crew, leaving us with the controls. Sokka originally asked Toph to steer, only to get Toph's sarcastic reminder that a blind girl probably wouldn't make a great navigator. So I offered to take the wheel, placing my hands on the round object as I squinted into the horizon. Fire Lord Ozai was on the large, central ship, and we were quite far away. To make any moves at them, it would bring attention to us and the crew currently onboard. "What will we do about the rest of the crew?" I asked Sokka, realizing that any one of them could sneak up on us.

Sokka, however, had a plan. Instructing me to lower our altitude, he grabbed the intercom and declared that everyone met on the bomb bay, claiming that there was a staff member onboard whose birthday was today. Then, with his eyes on the open area, he made sure all crew members were gathered before yanking on the release lever. All the crew fell into the ocean below, leaving the ship completely to ourselves. "Smart move," I commented again, raising back to our original altitude, "that's why I like you so much."

The rest of our flight was uneventful but anxious, as we realized that we would have great difficulties catching up to the Fire Lord. Ozai's larger airship was way ahead of us, and there wasn't enough power in our engines to stop him in time. As we fretted over the consequences, something unusual happened. Ozai's airship fishtailed violently, causing it to bank into the rocks below. Sokka, who observed the events through his telescope, couldn't help but beam. "It's Aang! He's back!" He shouted.

Within seconds of the announcement, flames and rocks shot into the air. Ozai had finally approached Aang, thus beginning the final battle. In the airship, I was reluctant to do too much cheering, unlike Sokka. "Shouldn't we be helping him?" I demanded.

Sokka shook his head. "The Fire Lord is Aang's fight. We need to stop that air fleet from burning down the Earth Kingdom." He leaned his head outside the window and, after a few minutes of thought, recommended a move called "airship slice." Pointing to the airship formation before us, he instructed me to raise the altitude even more, going higher than the fleet and cutting them down one by one.

I cocked an eyebrow at Sokka, not knowing what exactly he meant. It was best that I gave way to him, allowing Sokka to have the controls while Toph and I braced ourselves for the impact. From my position further back, all I saw was Sokka pulling various controls and levers, causing a massive punch onto our bodies as we were lifted higher. My stomach rumbled nervously as we were far away from the formation, going to the far left as Sokka was a statue of concentration, not even flinching from his pilot seat. As he lined us up for the attack, I could feel intense heat coming from below. "That's a lot of fire, isn't it?" I heard Toph murmur, her usually tough tone turned timid and mild.

Immediately following Toph's comment, our bodies were thrown in another direction, this time towards the front of the aircraft as Sokka made a sudden descent. We had the fleet of airships in our sight, each one raining down fire onto the Earth Kingdom territory below. The strain on the mechanisms of our airship was so great that I could hear hissing, creaking and cracking from the metallic exterior, making me wonder if we could even survive this manoeuvre at all. "It's going to be a rough ride," Sokka called to us through gritted teeth, "we need to get to the top of this thing fast."

Sokka guided Toph out of the control room first, and then asked me to follow her. "Watch each other's backs," he told me before giving me a kiss. Even as my whole body shook in fear, I forced myself on, hoping that we could get out of this alive and together. Just as we scaled the ladder to the top, we could feel the collisions onto the tops of the airship fleet, bump after violent bump making any progress difficult. My muscles strained and pulled as we clenched onto the ladder, with Sokka, the last one to leave the control room, nearly not getting off in time. By the time Toph punched a hole to the top, I could truly see our airship falling apart, flames and smoke emitting from various places.

We finally managed to pull Sokka out from the hole, letting him guide us away from the carnage. Throughout the entire time, he grabbed Toph's hand, guiding the blind girl to the front while I raced on behind them. The metal below my feet creaked and bent some more, and I wasn't sure how much more this airship could take. Just as Toph and Sokka crossed the middle point, the airship fell apart, leaving me on the other side falling away. "Don't worry about me, just finish the mission!" I yelled as they disappeared from sight. In my mind, there was the idea the mission might succeed at the expense of my life.

But my spirits were unexpectedly lifted, as the broken part of the airship fell right onto another airship just below me. The collision rocked both aircrafts, causing me to fall off my ship and onto the one below. I could tell that, from the relative good shape it was still in, that it wasn't among the ones that was hit by Sokka's airship slice attack. Even so, the huge smash it took from the pieces of the broken airship I was on was enough to send its crew scrambling for an evacuation, with many people just diving into the water below. As I struggled to my feet, my eyes alternated between my current position and where the others were. With Sokka and Toph tumbling onto another airship, and this airship being emptied at the moment, this might be my chance to bring an end to this.

I quickly climbed down from the top, hurrying into the control room as the airship dipped dangerously. All these airships had similar design, so it wasn't difficult for me to locate the right switches and levers to pull. Stabilizing the aircraft, I aimed it straight at the remaining airship and went full throttle. I could see several fire benders lining up on the deck, so I figured Toph and Sokka must have fallen onto that craft, and were about to be smoked alive. "Let's hope this can save them," I wished through gritted teeth.

I barely had time to get to the top, as my airship slammed into theirs in the most violent hit yet. I was nearly thrown off the ladder and back into the hold as I landed the hit. Straining to hold on, my entire body felt like boulders as I dragged myself to the top, hanging onto the rudder for support after an exhausting climb. From my position, I could see two figures, the one in blue sprawled to the ground favouring his leg while the one in green looking on excitedly. Even without getting near them, I could sense the relief on their faces. "Are you guys alright?" I yelled as they struggled to get onto my ship.

*****

"I kind of admit I kind of miss the face paint." Sokka commented as we gathered outside the coronation location. A few days had passed since the Avatar defeated Fire Lord Ozai, stripping him of his title and his bending. All prisoners of war were declared to have been released, including my teammates, the Kyoshi Warriors. As we waited for the main event, we met up with Sokka, who was nursing a broken leg after falling from one airship to another. "So how does it feel to be back in uniform again?" he asked.

"It feels great!" Our newest member declared, squeezing in between one Kyoshi Warrior and me. That immediately aroused Sokka's suspicion, as said member was Ty Lee, former ally to Princess Azula and had used Kyoshi disguises to invade Ba Sing Se.

Sensing that Sokka wasn't about to ease up, pointing his crutch in Ty Lee's face like a sword, I grabbed the wooden stick and lowered it to the ground. "It's okay. She's one of us now." I told Sokka. We explained to him that Ty Lee met the other warriors in prison, and they really got along after exchanging some battle techniques. When I met up with the others after the fight, we decided as a group that Ty Lee would be a new addition to our team. "Anyway, let's pay attention, because here's Zuko." I pointed to the front.

Indeed, our former scarred enemy, now turned friend, appeared to thunderous applause from the crowd. He spoke of the world being torn apart by the war, and that it was up to all of us to put it back together using peace, love, and hope. Getting onto his knees, he allowed the Fire Sage to place upon his head the Fire Nation royal headpiece, officially signalling the beginning of this new age. There was nothing but deafening roars as we cheered on the new Fire Lord, one that we knew could make a change.

I looked around me, seeing Sokka lean on his crutch. We stared at each other for a while before moving closer, cuddling each other as Aang and Zuko took their first steps as the new leaders of the world. Looking back, the world had indeed changed for me. I went from being the leader of an isolated all-female battle group, jealously guarding the island from any outsiders, whether friend or foe, to a world-seeing individual who not only tolerated other groups, but accepted them for who they were. My boyfriend was from the water tribes, the newest member of my team was from the Fire Nation, and we all looked up to an Avatar originating from the Air Nomads.

Perhaps that was what we at Kyoshi Island needed: integration. We had been isolated for so long that we were refusing to accept changes, and it was intolerance for differences that created such a war. We could still hold on to our customs and traditions, but we didn't need to be so defensive about it. If Aang and Zuko, two people isolated in their journeys of life, could come together and make the world a better place, then it was only right I played my part too. As I watched the festivities, I thought of one thing.

My name is Suki. That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an Avatar: the Last Airbender fanfic.
Chapter 9: Mai, Part 1

*****

The shadow of the large tree I sat under hovered over me, keeping me out of the scorching summer sun as I watched my two lifelong friends. The taller of the two was the Fire Nation Princess Azula, and the cheerful, chipper and acrobatic one was Ty Lee. Just like me, Ty Lee was the daughter of a Fire Nation nobleman. The ever competitive Azula was following Ty Lee's lead in learning acrobatics, and was having some difficulty with it. Compared to Ty Lee, who was a complete natural, Azula was downright clumsy.

But the Fire Nation princess wasn't one who fancied people that showed her up, as she sneaked up on Ty Lee while the cheerful one was finishing her back flips. Just as she landed perfectly, Azula planted a two-handed shove onto Ty Lee's back, sending her face-first to the grass. As Azula laughed and taunted Ty Lee, I couldn't help but think about how I met two people with such different personalities. Originally, the three of us attended the Royal Fire Academy for Girls, and often ran into each other. Since we were in so many classes together, it was natural that we bonded and hung out together.

But things would take a change, as Ty Lee and I were merely nobles and had to worry about our families' political careers. That meant always getting on the good side of the Fire Lord Azulon, Azula's grandfather and namesake, and we were taught to behave properly throughout our lives. Recently, my father received a promotion and had to move into the Fire Nation capital. While my parents dealt with our new house, I went over to the Fire Nation palace with Ty Lee and met up with Azula. I wasn't really into their games, preferring to remain quiet and polite. It was a staple in my family, where I would receive whatever I wished as long as I behaved, so being silent as the grave was nothing new to me. However, there was something in the palace that interested me.

I turned my head to the side, just in time to see my object of interest. It was a boy, about a year older than me, strolling past the garden with her mother. He was Azula's brother Zuko, a Fire Prince and the only son of Ozai and Ursa. While I wasn't one to display emotion publicly, I had to admit that he was kind of cute. Just like a royal family member, he had to walk straight and proud and remain calm and collected, not showing any fear in the face of danger. But yet, the fact that he was still so attached to his mother made me feel there were still some childlike tendencies in him. I felt my cheeks heat up like the fire bending techniques being practiced back at the academy, my face probably flushed redder than Zuko's clothing. So was it wrong for me to have a crush on him?

Apparently, I wasn't subtle enough, as Azula and Ty Lee noticed my predicament at the tree. Azula whispered something into Ty Lee's ear, causing the acrobat to giggle nonstop as the Fire Princess rushed off. I didn't bother looking, but I had an idea what she was up to. I only heard Zuko's vehement opposition to Azula's proposal as she tried to convince him to join us. Only after Ursa's urging did Zuko relent and entered the garden, his face pressed into a hard fume. Getting up, I wondered what they were up to.

Azula grabbed my arms and pulled me out of the tree shade. The bright sun slashed into my eyes, causing me to squint as Azula reached above me to the branches above. She plucked out an apple and balanced it on my head. I could only cock one of my eyebrows as Azula strutted over to Zuko and Ty Lee, her chest puffed out and her arms half-flexed as she described the game. "Try to knock the apple off the other person's head like this," she stated, getting into her position between the others.

Before I could prepare, Azula thrust her arm forward, a line of flames shooting out of her index and middle fingers and straight at my face. I could barely holler as the fire zinged my head, barely missing my hair and lighting the apple on fire. I wasn't really a fire bending prodigy like Azula, so to see that trick was surprising and shocking. But I never expected the target would be me, and I was seconds away from lighting my hair up.

But before I could even show any sign of worry, Zuko lunged towards me. My eyes grew larger than the sun as the boy reached for the object on my head, trying to prevent an accident. The actions slowed down entirely as I opened my mouth, letting out a long scream as Zuko's face dominated my entire line of sight. My muscles tensed up as I felt our bodies collide, my ribcage taking the brunt of Zuko's hit as we were sent into the air. In total panic, I squeezed my eyes shut, hoping I would land on something soft.

Wait, wasn't there a fountain behind me? So that meant I would be royally soaked then, right? By the time I realized it, it was too late, as our bodies crashed into the pool with ferocious velocity. All I could feel around me was water soaking through my clothes and hair, plus an additional numbness on my legs as Zuko's body became entangled with mine. I spat out some water, not even caring if Zuko got hit, and shook my head hard to wring the water out of my hair. As I opened my eyes again, I could see Azula and Ty Lee laughing at us. "They're so cute together." Ty Lee commented, pointing at us.

Zuko, feeling the humiliation, left in a huff, letting me field the majority of the embarrassing remarks. Turning to Azula and Ty Lee, I felt my fists clench up, my back and shoulders tightening as I glared at them. "You two are such, argh!" I spat.

That only caused more laughter as I stormed out of the fountain, ripping through the grass and returning to the safety of my tree. The last thing I needed was to be shown up like that, especially in front of Zuko. So I had a crush on him, but did that mean they had to expose me like that in public? As I crossed my arms and pursed my lips, I could feel the water still dripping from my clothes. Still, Zuko was kind enough to "rescue" me from that situation, so I should give him credit. "Let's hope I see him again," I muttered.

*****

"Please tell me you're here to kill me." I greeted Azula in an unorthodox but absolutely realistic way. It had only been a few days since my family moved to the city of Omashu, which was conquered by the Earth Kingdom. Their king Bumi gave up almost without a fight and the governorship was handed to my father. Despite coming to this new place, I was honestly bored to tears regarding what it had to offer. So, to see Azula and Ty Lee drop by for a visit, I was more than relieved.

My response got a kick out of the two, who giddily pulled me into an embrace. I honestly thought Ty Lee ran off to join the circus, as years in the Fire Nation capital with so many things to conform to made it difficult for her to stand. But Ty Lee explained that despite it was her calling, Azula called louder, gesturing to the Fire Nation princess right beside her. "I have a mission," Azula offered, "and I need you both."

We entered the former Omashu royal residence, which had been turned into my father's home for the time being. Summoning the servants, we had my parents come to the main meeting room to hear out Azula's proposal. My father's patronage to the Fire Lord finally paid off with this appointment. But given that Fire Princess Azula was to tour the newly conquered area personally, he couldn't afford to mess up. I rolled my eyes as my parents, a set of pathetically helpless faces, got on their knees before Azula, apologizing for a billion things. "You've come at a difficult time. At noon, we're making a trade with the resistance to get Tom Tom back." My father stuttered.

I cocked an eyebrow, as finally something interesting was about to happen. A few years back, my parents decided to have another child, ending my fourteen-year run as the only child in the family. Two years ago, Tom Tom, my little brother, officially came into the world, and had moved to Omashu with us. The citizens were evacuated yesterday with some sort of pandemic, which officially removed the resistance movement from our city. But word got out that my brother Tom Tom left with them, making us believe that the movement kidnapped him. To get him back, we offered to trade them their former king. Knowing Azula wouldn't be pleased, I would love to hear her response here.

Indeed, to my expectation, Azula chewed my father out, calling him out for the mess he created. "Mai will handle the hostage trade so you don't have a chance to mess things up," Azula decided, getting onto her feet. Her every step strong and authoritative as she marched out, signalling to Ty Lee and me and asked me where Bumi was kept.

I led them to the top of Omashu, or as Azula now dubbed it, New Ozai. Being on a mountain, the governor residence was at the top, and currently there was a new statue of Fire Lord Ozai being built. Fire Lord Azulon passed away a few years ago, and Azula's father succeeded his father as the new Fire Lord. With the new government in place, she ordered that the new statue be built and the entire city be reorganized. We kept Bumi in a large metal coffin-like container, suspended in the air and away from all soil and rocks, as not to allow an escape via earth bending. As we made our way to the top platform, we could see the metal coffin being lowered from behind the statue. We stared forward and got a glimpse of our opponents: it was a set of water benders and a boy dressed in orange. Tom Tom was in the hands of the male water bender, oblivious to what was going on.

But before anyone could move, Azula interrupted. "A thought just occurred to me," she called from my left, "we're trading a two-year-old for a powerful earth bending king. It just doesn't seem like a fair trade, does it?" she asked, cocking an eyebrow.

Sensing Azula's idea, I immediately agreed. Knowing that we could take the other side, maybe we could get Tom Tom back and defeat the threesome. Boldly stepping up, I announced with as much energy as I could muster, "The deal's off!" With that, the crane operator lifted Bumi back into the air, much to the surprise of our opponents.

The boy in the orange and yellow robe immediately gave chase, prompting Azula to whip around and shoot a blast of fire at him. In some miraculous move, the boy evaded the blue flames from the Fire Nation princess, leaping high into the air and opening his staff into a glider. I watched with amusement as his orange cap fell off, revealing a large blue arrow. "It's the Avatar," Azula declared, "my lucky day." As the boy flew higher into the air, Azula approached the compound and gave chase.

Ty Lee and I took on the two water benders, charging them head-on as they prepared their weapons. From our analysis before, it seemed like the girl was an actual water bender. The boy, despite lacking bending, was knowledgeable in using different weapons, making them dangerous in their own ways. Based on our fighting styles, it was decided that Ty Lee went after the male, as her close-range chi-blocking attacks were better suited to fighting a non-bender. But for me, I would take on the water bending girl, finally putting my years of self-taught skill to good use.

The girl took a stand against us while the boy, holding Tom Tom, tried rushing to safety. It wasn't going to be easy, as Ty Lee ducked under the construction boards and negotiated her way through them with ease. Her years of acrobatic training allowed her to be even faster than a runner when swinging through bars and that allowed her to ambush the opponent as she punched out his foot from under him. The Water Tribe boy flopped to the ground, skidding along before halting just before the edge, with Tom Tom still in his hands. Ty Lee then reappeared from underneath the boards, rushing for the baby and creating just enough of a distraction to the female water bender.

I whipped out a series of knives from under my sleeve and brandished them in the air. I flung them at the girl, who witnessed it at the last second. Using her water whip, she slashed at the wooden boards, sending several into the air and blocking my blades. In one smooth motion, she hurled the boards at me, hoping to throw me off track while she went back to dealing with the running Ty Lee. As the boards became bigger and bigger, I bent my back over in the nick of time, letting the wooden pieces fly over me. The wood bits sailed over my head in slow motion, letting me see exactly where my blades imbedded into. For something I developed over my years of boredom, I say that was pretty good.

By the time I regained balance, I could see the Water Tribe girl send a stream of water onto Ty Lee, tripping her up as the male warrior escaped with Tom Tom. Sensing an opportunity, I immediately pulled out more daggers from my clothes. I usually wore robes with extra long sleeves, which was suitable for my fighting style, as I could hide many projectiles inside them. Seeing the Water Tribe girl had to juggle between Ty Lee and me, it was the perfect time to strike. Taking a deep breath, I hurled the knives at her.

My opponent's reflexes were just as quick as my blades, as she froze her water into ice and blocked the projectiles in midair. Trying to feel her movements, I decided to get into a better position, taking a wide turn before rushing in on her. But in the midst of my turn, I became too predictable as the water bender shot out a line of water and froze it on my right arm, preventing anything from being hurled out. Frantically, I chopped at the ice block with my left hand, but to not avail. Gritting my teeth, I could only look across at the girl, who glared at me with eyes colder than the ice around my arm.

Luckily, Ty Lee managed to get back onto the platform. There was no sign of the male warrior or Tom Tom in sight, but it didn't matter as the key thing at hand was to free me first. With a few jabs to the water bender's body, Ty Lee blocked the attacker's chi, paralyzing her completely. Her line of water splashed pathetically to the ground in a long puddle. Tried as she might, but she couldn't manipulate the water again. With my arm still free, I whipped out another blade, the largest and sharpest one of them yet. "How are you going to fight without your bending?" I taunted her.

We soon found out the hard way, as a huge gust of wind rumbled our direction. There was nothing but sand and wood shavings covering our faces as we were lifted into the air, over the platform and down the stairs. Had it not been our training in aerial moves we would have suffered serious injuries for sure. As we struggled back onto our feet, we could see a huge white animal lifting into the air and flying to the city below. The Avatar had taken Bumi's coffin, and Azula was giving chase. Given the aerial power they had, it was difficult for us to chase, meaning there wasn't much we could do for now.

It would be evening by the time we met up with Azula again. While Tom Tom was still in the resistance's hands, we realized that there wasn't much they could do, with the Avatar's identity now revealed and all. It was decided that my parents and the Fire Nation guards at New Ozai would continue negotiations while we pursued the Avatar and his friends. While I gathered my belongings, Azula also informed us that General Iroh and Prince Zuko were now fugitives of the Fire Nation. They were currently on the run from Fire Nation troops, hiding somewhere within the vast Earth Kingdom. "So we're tracking down your brother and uncle, huh?" I asked Azula as we prepared to depart.

"It'll be interesting seeing Zuko again, won't it, Mai?" Ty Lee chimed in slyly, a wide grin on her face. I couldn't help but turn to the side, my face flushing red as I went back to my childhood days. I did have a crush on him, but now I had to arrest him and bring him back to the Fire Nation to face justice. I wonder what would happen then?

As we went into the sunset, going to the military group preparing to meet Azula, I thought about the past few years. So much had changed, as I went from an ordinary girl from a nobleman's family to some type of special law enforcer with Azula. We were on the verge of winning a war, and Zuko was somehow turned into a fugitive. What role would I play in these upcoming events? Would they be drastic enough to change the world? And would Zuko still feel the same way I did about him knowing that we were now on opposite sides? With intrigue hovering in my mind, I was set on finding out.

*****

"This drill is a feat of scientific ingenuity and raw destructive power. Once it tunnels through the wall, our troops will storm their city. The Earth Kingdom will finally fall, and you can claim Ba Sing Se in the name of your father." War Minister Qin told us as we rode this large, lumbering metallic machine across the dusty plains before reaching the Earth Kingdom capital. Our pursuit of the Avatar's group, along with Zuko and Iroh, had to come to a halt as Azula ordered the Fire Nation to put its latest invention to work.

That was where Ty Lee and I found ourselves, sitting in the main control room of this hunk of metal, slowly creeping its way towards the walled city. I was bored to tears, as there was only sand and dust around us. This beast just couldn't move any faster, and quite frankly the hot, humid atmosphere in the interior was making me sweat, so much so that my hidden blades were starting to stick onto my skin. Even as Ty Lee reported earth benders approaching our drill, speaking excitedly as she scanned the outside with the periscope, War Minister Qin kept things dull. "The metal shell is impervious to any earth bending attacks," he snorted, knocking on the periscope and sending Ty Lee reeling back.

Nonetheless, Azula decided to send Ty Lee and me outside to dispatch the earth benders. "Finally, something to do," I muttered, slowly getting out of my chair. A few days back, we managed to chase down the Avatar with another Fire Nation machine, with Ty Lee and me pursuing the two water benders on Basilisks while Azula went after the Avatar. While we were blown away by the Sky Bison again, Azula cornered the Avatar in an abandoned town, where, as luck would have it, Zuko also showed up. Although we didn't witness the details, Azula told us that Iroh appeared, and she used him to distract Zuko and the Avatar's group to make an escape. We were gathered at the nearby Fire Nation military bases ever since, waiting for this gargantuan drill to be completed.

By the time Ty Lee and I slid down from the top, the earth bending teams already created buttresses on the sides of our drill. However, their rocks were no match against the sheer power of our machine, which kept moving like nothing had happened. Sensing the urgency in them, as our drill's continuous movement required them to regroup again and again, it was the perfect time for us to strike. In their confusion, I launched a series of blades at them, paving the way for Ty Lee advance on them to block their chi.

As I stayed near the drill, orchestrating a torrential downpour of knives, my friend clad in the pink belly shirt was nothing but a blur. She raced around the earth bending teams with unbelievable velocity, her arms jabbing out in various directions. I could see a literal wave of earth benders falling, one group after another as they lost their ability to move, let alone bend. By the time Ty Lee hoped back onto the drill, there was nothing but paralyzed bodies around us. "It's not too exciting." I commented, helping her back in.

"Yeah, but it does make for a good workout, doesn't it?" Ty Lee replied. There was a layer of perspiration on her bare belly, the liquid causing her midsection to glisten slightly. She had a huge grin on her face as she brushed it off, her fingers dancing on her abdominal muscles and around her navel. I could only roll my eyes, wondering how something as simple and ordinary as wiping sweat could cause that much giddiness. It wasn't a secret that Ty Lee and I were polar opposites, but we got along nonetheless.

No sooner had we gotten back to the control room did we get another message from the War Minister. "Congratulations, crew. The drill has contacted the wall of Ba Sing Se. Start the countdown to victory!" He announced with pride, amidst the cheers echoing in the control room. We took our positions to Azula's either side, trying to gauge her reaction. Despite the milestone, she was a bust of concentration, her eyes narrowing to darts as she glared at the wall ahead, determined to win it all today.

The drill shook and rumbled violently, a cloud of debris blasting out from the wall as the front imbedded itself into the stones. We all got to our feet, edging forward from our positions just to get a better look. Just as Qin smirked confidently, two messages were sent through the intercom system declaring that there was a sabotage attempt, with a brace being cut clean through and an engineer being attacked. I glanced forward and saw Qin's shoulders shake slightly, and even with his back towards us, I could imagine the nervous expression on his face. Sensing that we needed to take action again, Azula asked us to follow her down to the areas of interest. "Let's go, ladies." She declared.

The scene at the machinery level wasn't surprising at all, as the Avatar and his two water bending friends were at work slicing another brace with some water. Without another word spoken, Azula unleashed a line of fire straight for the bald boy. For Azula's fire was blue, indicating a higher skill level than regular benders. It was something that was always in the back of my mind; with this ability, she could probably do a lot of nasty things to me, or anyone else, should they ever disobey her. But right now, there was another task at hand, and I was certain that the blue flames would be unleashed should we failed. Observing the Avatar the entire way, we saw them duck into another passageway, and we promptly gave chase. "Don't let them out of our sights!" Azula ordered.

We raced through the narrow passage, which was a jungle of tubes hanging over a small catwalk. It led us to an intersection, where we saw the siblings split up with the Avatar, the water benders going left while the boy with the arrow going right. "You two follow them," Azula instructed, pointing down the left hall, "the Avatar is mine!"

Ty Lee and I raced through the hall, knowing that they couldn't have gotten far. We finally caught up with them at a dead end, with the two figures clad in blue jumping into an open hatch. Whipping out two blades, I hurled them at the intruders, who ducked just in time and fell into the hatch. If they disappeared, then it could very well be the end of the chase, given that we had no idea where it led to. Bravely, I edged my head forward.

The scene below was a revolting one, with rocks and water all mixed together into a gooey paste. The viscous liquid steadily flowed out the back of the machine, and its smell was anything but pleasant. "Ugh, it's disgusting." I complained, scrunching up my face and holding my nose. Whoever that created this drill obviously didn't consider how bad this slurry was, and to have me jump in after them was out of the question.

Ty Lee, ever the chipper one, tried convincing me to go with her, insisting that Azula would be disappointed at us if we didn't catch the intruders. Even so, I wasn't about to budge. "She can shoot all the lightning she wants at me, but I am not going into that wall sludge juice." I insisted, crossing my arms and pursing my lips. Part of Azula's advanced fire bending skills allowed her to generate lightning, and although I had never seen it being demonstrated, I heard about its destructiveness. Knowing that a direct hit could cause death, I would be crazy to let her unleash something like that on me. So, for the longest time, I just did what she was told, hoping she would give me credit each time.

But this time, there was no way I would stand for it. This slurry was the most sickening thing in the world, and I would rather face lightning than swim in it. Ty Lee obviously didn't view it the same way, diving headfirst into the material. As she landed into the pipe, it created a huge splash that almost hit my face. Shivering involuntarily, I closed the hatch and marched off, hoping everything would be taken care of.

For the next few moments, there wasn't much that I could do. I loitered around the catwalk, trying to keep an eye on everything. It gave me some time to think, as I realized that for all these years, Azula kept a lid on Ty Lee and me via mainly fear. While we were somewhat friends, it was evident that should there be any important decisions to be made between us three, Azula usually got her way. With the Fire Nation currently the way it was, Azula had much control over everything, including military affairs and the war effort. With that much power saturated into her hands, and such destructive skill with her fire bending, it was clear that whatever Azula wanted, she was likely to get. It made me consider what would happen if Ty Lee and I ever disagreed with her in the future.

Suddenly, a roaring sound echoed through the machine. I glanced up nervously, trying to locate the source. The ground shook nonstop, throwing me about as steam shot in from the surrounding pipes while slurry blasted up from the hatch. From my position, each section of the drill slowly cracked apart as the pressure from the drill'd front rushed through the interior, slicing through the cut braces and knocking down each support structure. I held on to the nearest pipe for dear life as the rocking continued through.

By the time I regained balance, I could hear groaning coming from the metals, the drill falling apart as the soft humming below my feet stopped. Letting out one final breath of steam, our machine finally ended its run, our mission a failure as I heard from the top that we couldn't penetrate the final wall. Getting up slowly, I strolled to the nearest hatch that led to the outside, opening it up and taking a good long look. There was slurry all over the back, covering the ground in thick brown goo. Ty Lee and Azula were below, trying to figure out what happened. In one monotonous line, I stated, "We lost."

Our return to the military base was done in complete silence. Ty Lee and I kept glancing over at Azula, wondering if she would unleash her anger at us or Qin for this failure. To be honest, Ty Lee and I actually weren't too fond of Azula always bossing us around, and many times we privately disagreed with her actions. But given her power and status, there wasn't much we could do, as our families' occupations depended on her mood, so to speak. Any attempts for us to speak out were blocked by our fear for her, to the point where we would silently proceed along with her without question. Perhaps it wasn't the best way to go, but for now we really had no other choice.

Surprisingly, Azula was quite muted, her expression neutral as we trudged along. Maybe she had another plan in mind that worked better, as she always claimed her ideas were superior. But until then, I was content to get back into my tent and wash myself of the slurry memories. If succeeding in a mission meant being near something that gross, then I would much rather lose this battle and concocted another plan for another day.

*****

"The Earth King and the Council of Five do not trust the Dai Li. They imprisoned your leader, Long Feng." Azula announced to the group of agents dressed in dark robes, standing in order before us in this large, cavernous chamber. After the last defeat with the drill, Azula came up with another plan to infiltrate the Earth Kingdom, this time trying to pose as traditional Earth Kingdom allies and slipping into the palace. Luckily, the Kyoshi Warriors were on a patrol of the nearby region, giving us the perfect undercover outfits. Despite being outnumbered, we took them down relatively quickly, sending them all back to the Fire Nation as prisoners while taking their costumers for our personal use.

And the plan worked to perfection, as we managed to fool the royal guards and even the Earth King himself. Although given the total dolt that the Earth King was, I felt it was expected. Azula explained that the Dai Li, Ba Sing Se's secret police, would be a crucial part to our operations. She revealed our plans aloud in hopes of getting a meeting with their leader Long Feng. It was found that Long Feng was imprisoned by the Earth King, and Azula made a deal to give him power over Ba Sing Se should Long Feng get Azula the Avatar. It seemed to gain Long Feng's trust, as it allowed us to proceed.

But knowing Azula, she had other plans as well. Immediately, she called this meeting of the Dai Li, claiming to have news for them from Long Feng. But really, it was her attempt to gain their trust instead, hoping to use them to her advantage. "This coup must be swift and decisive," Azula continued, marching down from her podium. She had a straight posture, her every step taken with confidence as she observed the troops. "Long Feng has placed you in my command as we overthrow the government. If I sense any disloyalty, any hesitation, any weakness at all, I will smell it out." She finished in a low, sinister tone, glaring right into the eyes of the agent directly before her.

As she dismissed the Dai Li, Ty Lee and I invited her back to the podium where we served her a cup of tea. Part of Azula's ability to install fear into people was that she gave them very little wiggle room when her mind was set. "I thought you were going to make that one guy pee in his pants," I commented, pointing to the Dai Li agent she shot daggers into prior to their dismissal. I had to admit it was fun watching Azula intimidate people, seeing their faces twist up in horror. I had never wished for Azula turning that face on me; that was why I remained loyal for all this time.

But Azula soon snapped me back into reality as she asked us to prepare. Ty Lee and I were assigned to observe the Earth King all day, never letting him out of our sights. It meant being cooped up into these nauseating Kyoshi costumes, but if it meant making our mission a success, then maybe it was worth it. "My brother and uncle will be showing up at the palace today, and I want to personally greet them." Azula stated as we headed back to the throne room. Whatever was about to happen, it would be making history.

The rest of the day went peacefully as Ty Lee and I parked ourselves next to the Earth King's throne, barely saying a word as we awaited further orders. The bespectacled doofus spent more time talking to his pet bear than worrying about his country's current situation, which made me wonder what made him king in the first place. "At least Zuko works to regain his honour, even though he's now branded as a traitor," I muttered to myself, "what has this guy done to gain anybody's respect?"

With that thought, it really brought my mind back to Zuko. Ever since he spoke out of turn at his father's war meeting three years ago, I hadn't seen him at all. The word was that Zuko was forced to fight an Agni Kai against his father, leading to him getting the scar at his eye. His punishment was to capture the Avatar, as that was the only way to restore his honour to the Fire Nation. Part of me truly sympathized with him, as the burns he suffered to his face and his heart must be really deep. While I understood the decision Fire Lord Ozai made, I couldn't help but wonder what this put Zuko through. Perhaps, if we managed to reunite with him, he would be a changed person. And if he could defeat the Avatar or the Earth Kingdom, then certainly it would score him some points, right?

My concentration was soon shattered as two people barged into the throne room. From battles past, I recognized them as the male warrior from the Southern Water Tribe and his blind earth bender friend. As usual, Ty Lee had to go flirt with the Water Tribe boy. It was no secret that she had a crush on him, mentioning him every single time we met up. But the reunion was short-lived, as the earth bender realized our plan and shot a slab of rock at Ty Lee. "They're not the real Kyoshi Warriors!" She shouted.

The rock blast sent Ty Lee flying into the air, doing several somersaults before landing on a ledge above the throne. Sensing that there was finally a chance for me to take action, I hurled a series of blades at the earth bender. She neatly shot up another slab of rock, blocking my projectiles before sending the entire block at me. I leaped over the piece with ease, as years of academy training made me quite agile, which complemented my knife-throwing abilities very well. As I landed, I searched for the next set of blades.

But there would be no need, as Azula held the Earth King hostage. "This fight is over," she declared, waving her fingers at the king's head. There was the ominous blue flame again, ready to spear in the simpleton's brain as our two opponents surrendered. Ty Lee did a series of jabs at the Water Tribe boy and the earth bender, paralyzing them as Azula pushed the Earth King down from his throne. "Get them all out of my sight."

As the Dai Li agents pulled our opponents, along with the Earth King and his pet bear, away from the throne room, a squat, balding man appeared before us. He was in an Earth Kingdom suit, similar to the one Azula had on, and had a fume on his face. Behind him were a squadron of Dai Li agents, lined up in formation and glaring gat the front emotionlessly. "Now comes the part where I double-cross you," Long Feng told Azula in a slightly mocking tone, "Dai Li, arrest the Fire Nation princess." He ordered, his eyes aimed smugly right at Azula as he closed in on his prize: the Earth Kingdom throne.

Oddly enough, nobody moved. Ty Lee and I were at the side, glancing at each other in slight confusion as we wondered what was going on. Azula told us how she had plans to deal with Long Feng a while back, but now we weren't sure what would happen. Long Feng ordered his agents to attack again, and the response was the same silence. When Azula responded that the Dai Li agents were unsure of how the battle would end, Ty Lee and I knew on the spot that Long Feng had lost.

We turned to Azula as she pulled off the total reversal on Long Feng. Staring down the former Dai Li leader, Azula taunted him with his history. "You were born with nothing, so you've had to struggle and connive and claw your way to power," she sneered at Long Feng, whose expression turned from frustration to shock, "but true power, the divine right to rule, is something you're born with. The fact is the Dai Li don't know which one of us will be sitting on that throne, and which one is going to be bowing down. But I know, and you know." Azula concluded, plopping into the Earth King's old seat.

As Azula glanced nonchalantly at Long Feng, we couldn't help but get a kick out of his reaction. His mouth was dropped to the ground, his arms shaking, and beads of sweat rolled down from his face. The golden moment came when he got to his knees and bowed before Azula. "You've beaten me at my own game," he stated, conceding totally.

Azula smirked, watching the pathetic scene before her. "Don't flatter yourself," she replied arrogantly, "you were never even a player." With a wave of her hand, the Dai Li agents behind Long Feng stepped up and arrested their former leader. That act alone showed us that from this moment on, Azula would be in charge. "I still have to get my brother, so just stay here and make sure nothing happens." She instructed to us.

As she marched off, Ty Lee and I returned to the front, sitting on the steps before the throne. Azula's words truly got me thinking, as she had a way with people that no one else could possibly imagine. Was this truly why Ty Lee and I stayed with her for so long? Because we feared her so much? How many mind games had Azula truly played on us for the past years? And if she managed to get Zuko back to the Fire Nation, what else would she do to cement her place in the Fire Nation? All these thoughts intrigued me as I thought about how to go about adjusting to a new lifestyle after conquering Ba Sing Se.

"Where's that bear the Earth King has? He's kind of fun," Ty Lee quipped, cutting into my concentration, "why don't we bring him back and see what we can get him to do?" she suggested, marching off. I could only shake my head at the ever cheerful one, wondering if she realized that the world was about the change. She was always in her pink world, always seeing life through the same set of eyes. Would there ever be a time when she approached an issue differently, and actually saw some things for what they were rather than through pink-tinted shades? I guessed only time would tell.

*****

"It's taken a hundred years, but the Fire Nation has conquered Ba Sing Se!" Azula announced, sitting comfortably at the throne. We were told when she went to the catacombs below the palace, Azula wanted to see Zuko. The Dai Li imprisoned him there, along with that Water Tribe girl that we captured when we sneaked in as the Kyoshi Warriors. We were given the task of guarding the throne room while Azula dealt with Zuko, and Ty Lee and I merely loitered around taught the bear new tricks.

And was it ever boring sitting there watching Ty Lee speak to the bear like he was my baby brother Tom Tom. The only interruption we had was when the Water Tribe boy and his earth bender friend charged back in, pulling Ty Lee down from her handstand with earth bending while they took the bear. Even when the Avatar's group supposedly got away, Azula seemed like she was in relatively good spirits. She sang Zuko's praises as she invited him into the throne room, briefing him on our supposed return home.

But Zuko was anything but chipper, as he was downcast, and his eyes never left the floor. I had to admit that he was even more attractive now that he grew up, his stature taller and more muscular than the fairly scrawny little boy I saw those years back. Still, I truly wondered what was going through Zuko's mind. As Azula congratulated her brother on his ferocious battle, saying how she would have never defeated the Avatar without his assistance, Zuko merely murmured, "I betrayed Uncle."

I cocked an eyebrow, not realizing that Iroh was siding against us. From the day Zuko was banished, I knew that Iroh had become Zuko's surrogate father, and throughout the three years they were wandering the world, Zuko and Iroh had grown quite close. It was obvious in many respects, as Zuko had never been close to his father Ozai, and Iroh lost his own son, Lu Ten, here in Ba Sing Se. I understood that Zuko must have been very conflicted regarding what to do, as helping Azula meant fighting the man he loved and respected. I could imagine the pain he had when he made that choice, releasing that first fist of fire as he turned against his uncle in the catacombs below.

But Azula was quick to dismiss Zuko's doubts, claiming that it was Iroh who betrayed him by asking Zuko to turn on the Fire Nation and had him run away from his responsibilities. "When you return home, Father will welcome you as a war hero." Azula declared, getting up from her throne and staring at the standing figure to her left.

Even from my position in the corner, I could sense Zuko's apprehensiveness. "But I don't have the Avatar," he muttered, his tone weak and quiet, "what if Father doesn't restore my honour?" he asked, more to himself than to Azula. Whatever doubts about Zuko's sincerity I still had inside me melted away in an instant thanks to that line. I knew that, after the Agni Kai incident, Zuko had wanted his father to recognize him again. So, to see Zuko choose his country and, should the time come, his throne, I couldn't help but respect him even more. If someone could convince him to return to the Fire Nation and embrace those who used to support him, it would be great for his morale.

Azula, however, beat me to the punch again. Placing a hand on her brother's shoulder, she stated boldly, "Today, you restored your own honour." The two siblings at the Earth Kingdom throne couldn't be more opposite, with Azula being assertive while Zuko passive. This was the story of their lives, with Azula being the favoured child and Zuko the neglected one. Add the past few years of wandering the world into the fray and it was evident that Zuko required some time to recover from the ordeal.

Deciding that I heard enough, I decided to retire to my room. There were so many things to still figure out, but for now, I was eager to just rest. The Fire Nation won a huge battle at Ba Sing Se today, meaning it had most of the Earth Kingdom territory occupied. Of course, my role in it was small, being an undercover Kyoshi Warrior, and it wasn't even that enjoyable. As I said before, victory was boring, but if it meant keeping Azula relatively satisfied, I was willing to pay the price. I just hoped my parents and Tom Tom were enjoying their time at the even duller city of New Ozai better than I was.

Speaking of family, maybe this was one reason why, even as the Fire Nation got its biggest victory in history, I didn't feel any jubilance. Sure I was happy that we won, and somewhat relieved that Zuko rejoined us rather than continue running like a fugitive. But whenever I felt something, I had an equally great urge to suppress it. Even when I heard from my parents that Tom Tom was returned to them shortly after I left New Ozai, I didn't feel the urge to celebrate his safe return. It felt somewhat awkward, as it was like I had all the rewards in the world, but couldn't touch a single one.

Sighing, I entered my chamber and changed out of my Kyoshi Warrior uniform. I guessed Azula might still choose to stay in Ba Sing Se for the next few days, sorting out the bureaucratic mess now at hand with a leadership change. With our return to the Fire Nation eminent, I could only wonder what the next possible step for me would be.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 10: Mai, Part 2

*****

"Where is everyone? Azula told me Admiral Liang was visiting and wanted to join us for dinner. All of us," I asked, looking around this empty courtyard. A few days after the Fire Nation officially conquered Ba Sing Se, Azula managed to bring Zuko back on our side. I didn't get much of a chance to speak with Zuko even after he came back, so I hadn't heard too much about how he was doing. In fact, this dinner with Admiral Liang was officially the first meal I had with Zuko in years.

But for a gathering with one of the Fire Nation's most skilled admirals, it was very quiet. There was a small table in the courtyard with only two seats. Plates of food encircled a series of candles in the centre, making this more like a dinner for two. From the other entrance to the courtyard, Zuko stood with a perplexed look on his face. "She told me the same thing, Mai," he replied, "she's up to something."

We slowly approached the table, my face warming up as I peered at the plates. Zuko and I were dressed in traditional Earth Kingdom outfits tonight, opting for a mix of green and yellow rather than the traditional Fire Nation red. I couldn't say that I liked this colour any better, but after wearing it for a while I started getting used to it. We hovered over the table, letting the smells of steamed buns, fried rice, and other dishes waft into our nostrils. "The food doesn't look that awful," I stated, picking up a pair of chopsticks and poking a fried item, "I guess we shouldn't let it go to waste." I suggested to Zuko.

Zuko shrugged as we took our seats. I took a quick glance at him, trying to gauge his face, but to no avail. I knew from his experiences that he was very conflicted, having to send his own uncle to prison, but whatever troubles present inside his mind were being masked quite well. He calmly grabbed some food from the plate, slipping it into his mouth and chewed it thoughtfully. "Almost tastes like Fire Nation food, just not seasoned enough." He commented, his eyes not even lifting up. Despite the relative calmness, I could sense some uneasiness in him. The Zuko I knew was a bit more expressive than this, and didn't hesitate to voice out or take action. The best case in point was the incident with the flaming apple game, when he didn't even hesitate in supposedly rescuing me from having my hair lit on fire. So for me, this was definitely a sign that all was not well with the Fire Prince, who was more focused on his food than me.

Whatever train of thought I had was disturbed by an out-of-tune, inartistic Dai Li agent. He stepped up to us strumming his instrument, his song so bad that we just lost whatever appetite we had. "Can you please stop that? You're giving me a headache!" Zuko yelled, gripping his head, the horrible music almost making our ears bleed.

As the Dai Li agent smiled sheepishly, I could hear a couple of voices giggling in the bushes. The sudden sounds did not sit well with Zuko, who promptly marched over to the shrubs and showed off his famous fieriness. "I know you're back there, Azula! Don't you have something more important to do?" He snapped, his entire body tightening.

Indeed, to neither one of our surprises, Azula and Ty Lee popped out from the bushes. Earlier, when Zuko and I approached the table all alone, I had some idea that Azula and Ty Lee had something to do with it. While Azula calmly brushed herself off, sliding the blame on their presence here to Ty Lee, Zuko and I decided to leave the area immediately. "Let's go to the city for a walk," he suggested, shooting Azula a dark look.

As we strolled into the markets, a series of smells blasted through my nostrils. Most of these were foreign to me, and some weren't exactly pleasant. "Ugh, do people actually eat any of this?" I complained, casting a downward gaze at the stalls. I had to admit that I had never really been outside of the Fire Nation, and my knowledge of the culture and cuisine of other places was limited. Knowing Zuko's journeys, I tried to stay open-minded, but some stuff was just too disgusting to bear.

Zuko was about to elaborate, but an Earth Kingdom girl soon monopolized his attention. The Ba Sing Se native had a green tunic with a yellow belt tied around the waist. "Lee, I can't believe it. It's been so long!" she exclaimed, clinging onto Zuko. Seeing the new girl's excitement, I couldn't help but wonder who she was.

But before I got a chance to respond, it was the girl who demanded of my identity first. Zuko glanced at me uneasily, trying to spin a way out of this. "Hi, Jin, um..." he stuttered, his hand wringing nervously. I had to admit that nervous Zuko was a rare scene, but was loads of fun to watch. "This is just my friend. My friend Mai, from the circus, is the knife thrower. Yeah!" He concluded with an apprehensive chuckle.

The new girl, Jin, glanced at me in awe and amazement, wondering what type of skills I had. I couldn't help but smirk, as in this dingy and overpopulated Earth Kingdom metropolis I inadvertently gained a new fan. "Here, I'll show you," I offered, pushing Zuko to the fountain at the middle of the square. As Zuko got to position, I grabbed a fish from a nearby stall and slapped it onto his head. "That's better." I commented.

I could feel Jin's nervous stare as I strolled back to the stall and casually broke off a long icicle. Although I had no confirmation of this, I guessed that Jin met Zuko, or for her case Lee, some time during Zuko's stay in Ba Sing Se. Whether they actually got to know each other well was uncertain, although I doubted that Zuko would release that much information about his past to her. In my mind, I felt that experience might have been Zuko's first taste of happiness in years, as I could tell it being relative positive given Jin's tone alone. If only you knew what Zuko has been through, I thought.

Staying in character, I positioned myself in a direct line with Zuko, showing Jin the grip I had on the icicle. "It's all in the wrist, really." I told her, recalling the countless projectiles I had tossed throughout my life. Taking aim at Zuko's head, I reeled back and let the ice loose, the sharp transparent blade going straight at the Fire Prince.

Then, as if it were attracted to the fish, the icicle impaled it right on the belly, the sharp end sticking out the other side. Zuko, his eyebrows curled tightly, was completely unharmed. I couldn't help but snicker at his reaction. Did he really think I was so poor in the skills department that I would send the icicle straight through his head? Beside me, Jin couldn't help but applaud. "Wow! That was amazing!" She exclaimed.

My eyes alternated between Zuko and Jin, my face gushing with pride as I managed to impress someone with my act. But then, my eyes landed on the fountain behind Zuko, and found it a great way to get some payback. Turning to Jin with a slightly mischievous grin, I asked her if she wanted to try throwing an icicle.

At first Jin refused, insisting that she couldn't possibly hurl one of those. But her words were nothing but murmurs as I focused in on Zuko's face. His eyes became bigger than the moon, and his body paralyzed like most of the fish on that stand. If my plan was to succeed, I would have plenty of stories to tell when I got back to the Fire Nation.

Finally, Jin was convinced, and gripped a piece of ice from the stand. I eased her into position and asked her to do as I did earlier. As Jin got into her wind-up, I could see Zuko's face scrunch up in fear. As the icicle was released, it headed away from the fish, as expected. Instead, Jin threw it low, aiming right for Zuko's face instead. Zuko shouted out in fear, dodging hard to the side and letting the icicle sail straight into the fountain. But as he did that, he lost his balance, and fell backwards into the water.

There were a couple of splashes here and there as Zuko struggled to regain balance, but my mission there was complete. Marching to the fountain and sticking my head in, I sneered, "Now we're even." I recalled back when we first met, when Azula played the apple game with me and Zuko tried saving me by pushing me into a pool.

Zuko roared and anger and pulled himself out of the fountain. That was my cue to run as he pursued me through the streets of Ba Sing Se. I didn't even get a chance to say goodbye to Jin as he cornered me in an alley. "Are you crazy? You could have gotten me killed!" He ranted, trying to hold me in one place as I weaved back and forth.

"Whatever, Lee!" I retorted, trying hard to suppress my giggles. All those feelings that I felt all those years ago, when I raced away from the fountain wet and embarrassed, all came soaring back. Back then, I had a small crush on him, and I still remembered how my face would flush red every time he marched by. I had always wanted some time with Zuko together, wondering what he was really like. Well, tonight, I got it all.

And Zuko wasn't completely oblivious to it either, as he stopped his wild pursuit of me. Holding me still, his golden orbs looked into mine as noise from our surroundings was blocked out. As we stared into each other, Zuko quietly reminisced, "You finally seem to be enjoying yourself. I've missed seeing this side of you."

My eyes shifted to the ground, unsure of how to react. While I had the natural urge to suppress my emotions, it was also a fact that I had never heard someone being so open to me before. And adding to this formula was that it came from the very same person I had a crush on. "A lot had changed since the days when I used to throw mud on your face," I managed to eke out, my mind still flustered from his words. I placed a hand on his face and turned him to me. "But not everything's changed," I concluded. Whatever confusion I still had, I was about to end it with my decision to show Zuko the feelings I had for him, the same feelings I had stored in the deepest parts of my heart.

I could feel our faces lean closer, almost like the brisk evening wind had blown us together as I felt his breath on my cheeks. I had never been this open with my feelings before, not even before my own family. But somehow, seeing Zuko again and spending time with him, reminiscing the times we had and understanding what he went through, I felt a sense of relaxation and release whenever I was near him. Maybe this was what I needed to stop suppressing myself? Who knows, but for now, I didn't need to be the stiff as a board noblewoman I had been all my life. Letting our natural feelings guide the way, our lips soon found their way to each other, and drank in the kiss to the fullest.

*****

"Aren't you cold?" I asked, approaching the lone figure standing at the bow of our ship. It was a cloudless summer night, with the full moon being the only source of light illuminating the world. Even though the weather was supposed to get warmer as the year progressed, the night at sea provided a fair bit of ocean breezes, making it just that much chillier as I emerged from the lower decks of the ship.

"I've got a lot on my mind." Zuko responded, his quiet tone almost drowned out by the lapping waves against the boat. I leaned up against the edges, craning my neck and trying to see his face. Even as Azula and Ty Lee boarded this ship yesterday, Zuko was still hesitant, going with us almost involuntarily. As I continued to make sense of this new nervous side of Zuko, he merely stated, "it's been so long, over three years since I was home. I wonder what has changed, and I wonder how I've changed."

I couldn't help but yawn, my fatigue getting the better of me. While I was quite concerned with Zuko, I couldn't help but take a dig at him. "I just asked if you were cold, I didn't ask for your whole life story." I joked, trying to add some humour amidst the cool surroundings. Being with Zuko really got my happier and funnier side going, like it had been released from a ten-plus-year jail sentence thanks to my upbringing.

Still, Zuko kept his head turned away from me, and that only made me want to get even closer to him. Ever since the "date" at Ba Sing Se, I made it my mission to get Zuko back to his old self, the one that I met all those years ago. If there was one thing the scrawny little boy had in common with this tall and muscular young man was the hesitant expressions on his face. Back then, Zuko had Lady Ursa to turn to, but today he was the one and only Fire Prince and heir to the Fire Nation throne. There must be a way to get him to relax a bit, right? Grabbing his face, I tilted it towards me and told him, "Stop worrying!" And with that, I planted my lips onto his, my body warming up immediately.

As I pulled back, I could see the muscles on his face relaxing a bit. It was still somewhat difficult to gauge his entire expression given the relative darkness, but I knew whatever I did had taken effect. Feeling the chill get through my clothing, I decided to leave the deck for the moment. As I pulled the hatch to the interior open, I turned back and told Zuko, "Give it a few days, and you'll be fine. Once you meet up with the Fire Lord again, I'm sure everything will be okay."

And indeed, everything was getting brighter for us. Zuko met with Fire Lord Ozai shortly after our return, and while I wasn't in the throne room for their private meeting, the gossip was all over the palace. From the servants to the guards, to even those nobles living near the palace, the word was that the Fire Lord could not stop singing praises to his son, claiming Zuko redeemed himself by staying loyal to the Fire Nation and slaying the Avatar. The latter piece of information was completely new to me, as Azula never truly explained the battle in the Ba Sing Se catacombs. Until now, all I heard was that she and Zuko cornered the Avatar, and they both took part in beating him. But it was Zuko who dealt the final blow? Now that was all news to me.

That was where things stood right now, with me getting more chipper and giddy as the days passed. The fact that the Fire Lord wanted my parents to continue governing Omashu meant I had the house all to myself, meaning I could have Zuko over whenever I wanted. He certainly seemed receptive enough to the idea, opting to spend the first day after his restoration with me. As we enjoyed our picnic on top of a nearby hill and just enjoying the sunset, I couldn't help but lean into his arms. Despite the extremely boring act of watching the big fireball dip into the horizon, I had to admit that I actually liked having Zuko around. "Orange is such an awful colour," I commented.

Upon hearing that, Zuko snickered. Even with my supposedly more positive and cheerful outlook, it was hard to drop my usually monotone life. To be honest with myself, I was actually a little afraid to let my feelings run too wild yet. It wasn't because of the old reason, where I had to consider my father's political career; rather, it was because I didn't know how to act before Zuko. Sure I wanted to be intimate, but what could I do in front of my future Fire Lord? But then again, it didn't seem like Zuko minded what I had to say. "You're so beautiful when you hate the world." He replied, grinning like an idiot.

I tried suppressing a laugh, as Zuko certainly got that point straight. While it did not represent the true me, my monotone side was an important part of how I grew up. And as I thought about it, maybe Zuko was trying to get me to let go of this side, given that we were together now. In a way, this was as much about me helping Zuko as it was me helping myself. "I don't hate you," I responded, tilting my head up at him.

Zuko's grin stretched from ear to ear, the first time he displayed that much happiness all at once. And would anyone have guessed that it was in front of me? "I don't hate you too," he concluded our talk with a firm kiss, linking our lips one more time. My more girlish side ate away at my brain as he showed his affection. Having no one that openly showed their love for me like this, could one blame me for being this excited?

Then, in perfect fashion, the bossy Fire Princess herself showed up and ruined the mood. She originally demanded for a conversation with her brother, and was roundly rejected by Zuko. I wasn't sure if this was true, but I could smell a smidge of defensive manoeuvring from Zuko. It had only been days since we had become a couple, and he was already becoming this protective? Or was there another reason why Zuko was so intent not to have Azula interrupt anything he, or we, did?

But for Azula, ever persistent and forceful, there was another way to get Zuko alone to her. Insisting that Ty Lee needed help with her braids, she told me to go check on my acrobatic friend. Hearing something like that usually meant not to get Azula mad, and I got up without question. I did, however, threw a side death glare at the Fire Princess as I departed, showing her my frustration with this disturbance. I had to admit that my open defiance for Azula like that was pretty brave, considering that Ty Lee and I never attempted anything like this before in our lives.

But for some reason, now that I was with Zuko, I felt bolder than ever before, opting to be more expressive with my distaste for Azula's actions, at least to an extent. After all, if Zuko had to go through all those messy experiences just so he could come home, then the least I could do was defend him. As I marched down the hill, I really hoped that I would get another chance with Zuko, one without the outside interference.

*****

"Zuko, what is wrong with you?" I demanded, flipping my boyfriend around and making him face me. While our relationship had blossomed somewhat, things didn't take a turn for the better. Ever since Zuko learned that his father requested a private meeting with his top advisors, sending Zuko and Azula on a "forced vacation" to Ember Island with Ty Lee and me, he had been grouchy through and through. So I wasn't too impressed with him giving me a seashell, and he did spill ice cream onto my legs earlier, but that shouldn't make him that volcanic, right?

But I hadn't seen anything yet, as Zuko just threw Ruon-Jian, one of the hosts for this house party, across the room. Ruon-Jian ended up landing on a pot, shattering it completely while Zuko's chest heaved up and down. That was when I decided enough was enough, and it was time to rein him in, Fire Prince or not. We were the guests at this party, and that was no way for guests to behave. Moreover, Ruon-Jian was just talking casually with me. What could possibly bring about such a violent reaction? "Your temper is out of control. You blow up over every little thing, and you're so impatient, hot-headed and angry!" I ranted, not even caring that every set of eyes in the room were on us.

That only drove Zuko angrier, as he tried turning the tables on me. "Well, at least I feel something, as opposed to you! You have no passion for anything! You're just a big blah!" He yelled, waving his arms dramatically in the air.

But it was that last line that was etched into my mind: you're just a big blah. I had not idea what was in Zuko's mind when he uttered that phrase, but to claim that I had no feelings for anything was going too far. He wanted to see me be expressive? He got it. "It's over, Zuko," I stated, turning my back to him, "we're done." I could hear Chan, our other host, scream in shock over how his family's favourite vase had been broken. But for me, it wasn't my biggest concern right now. Sighing, I headed away from the dining area, needing to get away from the explosive situation.

To nobody's surprise, Chan ejected Zuko from the party, sending the Fire Prince out into the evening air. Maybe it was the right thing to do, as the cooler climate outside might be good for Zuko to flush out his mind. Sensing something might be up, Ty Lee and Azula approached me, deciding that we should speak with Zuko. Azula told Ty Lee and I to wait on the beach while she fetched her brother.

Not a word was spoken as Ty Lee and I plopped ourselves onto a series of logs at a secluded corner of the beach, away from the beach houses. Only waves banging against the seashore could be heard as we waited for the royal siblings. Perhaps it was for the best that we were all alone and quiet, as it gave me some time to think. Even if I could attribute what Zuko said to his rage-filled head, it was still unjustified to launch into a violent attack against another person like that. Moreover, his over-protectiveness now made it uncomfortable for me to be with him anymore, as I couldn't do anything with anyone else without him getting all jealous. As if my parents weren't restrictive enough when I was young, now I had to put up with this? What did I look like, some prisoner?

Finally, I could see two shadows coming in from the hills above. As Azula and Zuko descended the hillside towards us, I couldn't help but fume at the male figure. It was one thing to say I didn't express myself often, but it was another to say that I had no feelings for anything. Not only did it imply that I cared for nothing, it also meant that I wouldn't react to any of Zuko's negative actions, so much so that he could run roughshod over me. In cases like this, there was no way I would sit idly and watch him mess around.

I wasted no time voicing my displeasure with Zuko as he placed a hand on my shoulder, asking if I was cold. I slapped his hand away, turning my head so that I didn't have to face him. The only cold here was the cold I displayed to Zuko, as I wanted him to know how much what he said hurt me. Ty Lee, sitting across from me, tried to lighten the mood by requesting a fire. This prompted Zuko to depart again, presumably to get some firewood. To me, it didn't matter, because until Zuko apologized, I wouldn't let this pass.

What were supposed to be firewood became Zuko's old family relics, as he explained to us that he returned to his family's old beach house and removed all the old items there. As the flames engulfed old paintings and other materials, Ty Lee couldn't help but ask what happened. That turned out to be a bad move, as Zuko unleashed his anger on her. "You don't know me, so why don't you just mind your own business?"

I winced as Zuko continued berating my friend, claiming that Ty Lee was stuck in her own little world. As the insults got more and more outrageous, I couldn't help but interject. "Zuko, leave her alone." I chimed in, hoping he would calm down.

But then Ty Lee did the unthinkable. Not only did she ditch the ever-optimistic attitude, she hit back at Zuko by claiming that she actually had to go through hardship just to get to her current stage. "I joined the circus because I was scared to spend the rest of my life as a matched set. At least I'm different now. Circus freak is a compliment!" Ty Lee concluded emphatically, glaring daggers into Zuko.

While I admired Ty Lee's courage for speaking up, it was evident that she did it because she craved attention, not because it was the right thing to do. "Attention issues," I pointed out, my calm and steady voice a total contrast to Ty Lee, "you couldn't get enough attention when you were a kid, so you try to make up for it now."

That seemed to have touched a nerve with Ty Lee, who took swipes at my life as an only child. Given that Tom Tom was barely a year old, it meant I spent almost fifteen years of my life being the centre of attention for my parents. While Ty Lee ranted about my grey aura, I merely told her I didn't believe in them, as my childhood wasn't the least bit harsh at all. "I was a rich, only child who got anything I wanted, as long as I behaved. I sat still, and didn't speak until spoken to," I reminisced the number of times my parents got me to be perfect, just so I didn't make them look bad before some high-ranking folks who frequented our house. Sure my parents got meticulous, and sure I got annoyed at their every attempt to straighten out even the slightest crook in my posture, but I soon got used to it when my parents rewarded my every effort to conform to their wishes. It wasn't hard to keep emotions bottled in when you got whatever you wanted as a result.

"That's why afraid to care about anything, and why you can't express yourself," Azula concluded for me, arrogance laced throughout her tone.

Those words ended up doing what couldn't be done for the whole night: getting me up in arms. I had no idea what Azula was trying to prove, but it seemed like she was taunting my current state. As if Zuko calling me out and publicly humiliating me was not bad enough, now Azula had to rub it in my face? This was too much. "You want me to express myself? Leave me alone!" I screamed, letting my anger shoot through the night.

It was like the fire increased its power tenfold as I turned my eyes to Zuko, taking it out on him as well. "Don't touch me. I'm still mad at you!" I yelled at Zuko, even when he complimented how much he liked it when I unleashed my emotions more. "There's no excuse for the way you've been acting." I snapped, keeping him at a distance.

That only provided ammunition for Zuko, who went on to describe his tough life. "My father decided to teach me a permanent lesson on my face!" Zuko shouted, pointing at the scar around his left eye. As he paced up and down the beach, his words echoed off the hillside. "I should be happy for returning, but I'm not! I'm angrier than ever and I don't know why!" He ranted, sounding almost confused as he presented his dilemma.

That ended up getting all of us talking, as we tried to figure out why a war hero like him would be so frustrated. Even when we considered the factor of needing time to adjust to life after exile, it was still very unusual to see that much aggravation in a person. "Who are you angry at, Zuko?" I asked, suddenly forgetting any grudge I had against him from the party. Instead, I felt the need to show my caring side, trying to find out just what went wrong with my lifelong friend, who seemed flustered than ever.

We began listing off name after name, trying to figure out what was wrong with Zuko. The Fire Lord, General Iroh, Azula, everyone close to us was named, but it only drove Zuko crazier. He gripped the sides of his head, shaking it violently as his voice went closer and closer to cracking. That was when I realized Zuko was truly in trouble, and needed my help more than ever. In one last blast, he slammed his fists down. "I'm angry at myself!" He cried to the skies, turning our fire into a pillar of flames.

That ended up burning up all our fuel, turning whatever old relics still inside the pit into ashes. I could see Zuko's silhouette against the night sky, his back hunched over and his head never leaving the ground. He was so pitiful, so helpless, and so lost. "I'm confused. I'm not sure I know the difference between right and wrong anymore." Zuko muttered, his tone sounding like he was close to breaking down in tears.

Finally understanding the situation, I decided to do the right thing. Stepping up to Zuko, I placed a hand on his shoulder. "I know one thing I care about: I care about you." I declared. Maybe I was a bit harsh on Zuko earlier and perhaps my usual monotone and emotionless self did not sit well with Zuko. If I wanted a long-term relationship with him, I ought to understand him more, and tried to help him deal with his problems rather than condemning them. Leaning in, I planted my lips onto his.

It didn't matter that Azula tried to rub it in our faces that she had no sob stories to tell, or that Ty Lee felt Ember Island truly changed us. All that mattered was that Zuko and I were together again, and we would both take steps to rectify the rift between us. But for some strange reason, I noticed Azula growing extra quiet as she told us about how her mother favoured Zuko more than her, and that she was once called a monster. Perhaps it was something in the royal family that wasn't revealed? I made a mental note of this, and I should probably ask Zuko for an elaboration should I get the chance.

But for now, we had a party to crash. Azula suggested that we returned to the very house that we were thrown out of and did some serious work of our own. As we marched up the steps again, with nothing but retribution on our minds, I decided on one thing. I would be more open with my thoughts, and expressed myself more freely. Whether my parents liked it or not, I was almost an adult, and it was only right that I spoke with my own voice. Besides, communicating with Zuko was probably the best way to deal with both our problems, and I wouldn't trade being with him for anything in the world.

*****

"War meeting? What are you talking about?" Zuko demanded, suddenly shooting up from the couch. It had been a couple of weeks since the incident at Ember Island, and Zuko and I had been well on our way to not only patching up, but proceeding with our relationship. He had been visiting me more often, and we'd hang out in my currently empty house, getting whatever we wanted from the servants. Overall, I must say that I really enjoyed my every moment with him, even amidst all the trouble with war plans and such, as evident by the Fire Lord's special meeting tomorrow night.

But that apparently touched a nerve with Zuko, who demanded to know what happened. "Azula mentioned something, so I assumed you were going too," I explained, sensing Zuko's sudden downward spiral in spirits. Seeing Zuko hunched over with his eyes to the ground, I couldn't help but feel a pang in my heart.

The entire room was silent as Zuko mulled his thoughts over. A sudden night breeze whirled through the open window, chilling us considerably. By the time Zuko lifted his head again, his mug was filled with bitterness and resentment. "I guess I wasn't invited," he spat, turning away from me. From that moment on, it became clear to me that no matter what I said, it wasn't going to make a difference to how Zuko felt right now.

As Zuko stormed out in a huff, I was left in my room, silent and alone. It gave me all night to think about what was going on. It was true that Zuko's return to his rightful place as the Fire Prince was an exciting moment for us all, but there was something quite unusual about this move. Until now, Zuko hadn't been invited to any royal meetings held by the Fire Lord, as we were sent on vacation during the last one with the Fire Lord's war advisors. So for Azula to speak to me about some important meeting involving the same group of advisors, it did arouse suspicion. Was the Fire Lord trying to send us all some message regarding Zuko's status? Did he feel that Zuko was still not ready or mature enough to handle these issues, even as his birthright had been regained?

And speaking of Azula, the entire way she went about announcing this news was also questionable. Assuming what Zuko had said was true, that he had no idea there was a meeting taking place tomorrow, then it was logical to conclude Azula had not told him anything. It really made me wonder why Azula would approach me to talk about this, as it was clear to both of us that this meeting was more important to Zuko than anyone else. I knew Azula was one to play mind games to control people, and both Zuko and I had been targets of her attempts before, but to have her toy around with her own brother's emotions was going too far. This was Zuko's chance to redeem himself, so why did she have to make life so difficult for him? Had she just approached Zuko and told him in a direct manner, maybe Zuko wouldn't get this upset and rant about being left out.

By the time Zuko returned to my house, he reported that he did speak with Azula. He confirmed my suspicions that Azula was indeed invited to the meeting, and he demanded to know why he never received an invitation. "She told me that since I was expected to go, it was obvious that I didn't get an invitation," he spat, trying to mimic Azula's usually haughty tone, "in that case, I told her I wouldn't go."

Zuko trudged to the window overlooking the capital city, his face tight and emotionless. Even when he insisted that he didn't regret refusing the meeting, I could tell the decision weighed heavily on his mind. Sensing his distress, I had to try cheering him up. Telling him that it was just a dumb meeting, I suggested that we tried to have fun on our own. "Let's order some servants around. I might be hungry for a whole tray of fruit tarts," I declared, reminding him of the even yesterday when he asked a servant to bring me a fruit tart with rose petals on top, "and maybe a little palanquin ride around town?"

However, nothing would lift Zuko's spirits, as his face was wounded up tight all night. Even as he left for the royal palace again, I could tell his uncertainty as he gingerly stepped into his palanquin. I knew that while Zuko chose not to go as an act of defiance to Azula, deep down he really wanted to be there. I could imagine how much he longed for his father's respect as he planned the final invasion of the Earth Kingdom and took it down for the Fire Nation. That way, he would truly be a war hero, and would be revered by all. Azula shouldn't have played that trick on Zuko, I thought.

Checking on the time, I realized that I should probably get to bed. As I went into my bedroom to change, I thought about the confrontation between Zuko to Azula. It probably wasn't a pretty sight, but for once I genuinely felt Zuko ought to speak up. The past few days that I had spent with Zuko, I felt I started understanding him better. He wasn't the hot-headed, foul-tempered royal brat that most past gossip portrayed him to be. Rather, I found him quite sensitive, both to others and himself. He was also fairly intelligent, and could be quite witty at times. In my mind, anyone trying to destroy his spirits was merely trying to assert the picture of the negative Zuko for their selfish purposes. Knowing Azula, I doubt this was too far from the truth, given how much she thirsted for power and control. Sighing, I changed into my nightgown and slipped into my bed, trying to take this out of my mind.

Zuko would return to my house the next morning, sulking as usual as he trudged to the upstairs living quarters. But before I could say a word, one of the servants barged in and requested a word with him. "Everyone is waiting for you," he informed us, bowing down to the Fire Prince, "the high admirals, the high generals, the war ministers and the princess have all arrived. You're the only person missing in the meeting. The Fire Lord said he will not start until you arrived, sir." He ended, dropping a bombshell to us.

For a second, the only thing we could do was stand there with our mouths nearly hitting the ground. So Fire Lord Ozai did want Zuko at the meeting after all. Was there any doubt to what Zuko could do for his country? Finally, after an eternity, we beamed at each other, realizing that Zuko's wish had come true. Dismissing the servant, we quickly got Zuko back to the palace, asking the servants to put him in his military uniform. As I waited outside his room, I was overjoyed and excited. There was no better way for Zuko to show the Fire Nation his real mettle by helping us achieve the greatest victory ever. "So that means our day's activities have to be all cancelled," Zuko told me as he stepped up, his sparkly new uniform making him look sharper than ever.

"Don't worry about me," I replied, linking his arm as we hurried to the main conference hall, "I'll keep myself busy. I managed to survive after all those years being bound by my parents, so what makes you think I can't do it?" As we stopped at the last door, I could hear Zuko inhale deeply, probably just to calm his nerves as he prepared for the biggest meeting of his life. "Don't fret about it, okay? I'll be right here waiting for you." I reassured him. Giving him a final kiss, I released his arm and strolled off to a nearby pillar, trying to keep out of the way as Zuko entered the large room.

The hours ticked by slowly and painfully as I sat next to the large pillar, doing nothing more than juggling the many projectiles hidden in my sleeves. It was this type of stewing that allowed me to develop my knife throwing skills, as throughout my younger years my best friend seemed to be walls. But now, I was being bored to tears for another reason: the love of my life. Zuko was in there talking about war strategies, which by the sounds of it was awfully dull already. But if sitting through these dreary times meant he could further his honour, then I was willing to go all the way with him. We promised each other that we would be there for each other, no matter what the circumstances.

After hours of looking at a wall and polishing my blades, the meeting was finally over. Many middle-aged men stepped out from the hall and into a smaller room, most likely to get refreshments. I got up and tried to find Zuko in the crowd, hoping to see through the seasoned war veterans who talked excitedly amongst themselves. After a few minutes of fruitless searching, I finally spotted him exiting the refreshments tent, a very thoughtful look etched onto his face. "So, how did it go?" I asked him.

We marched down the hallway, leaving the older folks behind as Zuko explained the situation inside the room. "When I got to the meeting, everyone welcomed me. My father had saved me a seat, he wanted me next to him," he described in a surprisingly monotonous voice, "I was literally at his right hand."

"Zuko, that's wonderful!" I declared, placing my hands on his arm. Whatever doubt we had last night regarding Zuko's status were erased completely as I continued, "You must be happy!" I tried gauging his face again, which barely moved an inch.

Zuko paused right at the end of the hallway. We looked up together and saw the royal portrait of Fire Lord Ozai, his pose straight and tall as his face proudly gazed over the hall. "During the meeting, I was the perfect prince, the son my father wanted," he stated. But it was what he said after that shocked me the most, "but I was not me."

I glanced over at Zuko, wondering what that could all mean. It was his wish that his father accepted him again, right? So why did it seem like his was still discontent? Did something happen inside that embarrassed him? The generals and admirals were usually tough-as-nails people, so maybe they said something that referred back to the exile time, causing Zuko some humiliation. Either way, whatever the event, it caused Zuko a bit of uncertainty. As we stepped back to the living quarters of the palace, I made a mental note of this, deciding once I had the time, I was going to find out what was going on.

*****

"I guess I don't know you," I stated flatly, unrolling a scroll before Zuko. When I heard there was an invasion into the Fire Nation capital city on the day of a solar eclipse, I heeded the emergency evacuation orders and hid in an underground safety bunker, just like most of the city's residents. In the midst of the chaos, I didn't manage to locate Zuko, so for the time I was in that stuffy chamber my mind fretted with worry, wondering if the invasion force could overwhelm him thanks to their sheer numbers.

But by the time I returned to my room, it was evident that Zuko was gone. All that was left was this farewell letter, which I now waved before him. For some reason, he chose to join the Avatar's group, making himself a fugitive again after only a few weeks of regaining his status. It was my uncle, the warden of the maximum security prison, who informed us that Zuko was found here. Given that Azula planned on going to the Boiling Rock to see some of the new war prisoners transferred there, Ty Lee and I decided to tag along, but I made sure to bring Zuko's letter with me, just to flush out his true motives for abandoning me like that. "All I get is a letter? You could have at least looked me in the eye when you ripped out my heart!" I snapped. All those times I had with him, all the promises we made together, even the celebratory mood I had after his first war meeting, all those were thrown out the window as I berated the way he abandoned me.

Zuko tried to explain, but I cut him off. In my mind, I felt there was no rationale for what he did, and I was willing to let him hear it. He opened my heart alright, getting access to the real me that I bottled up inside for so many years. But for him to just ditch me like that was unacceptable. Scanning the letter, I spat his every word back to him. "Dear Mai, I'm sorry that you have to find out this way, but I'm leaving..."

"Stop!" Zuko shouted, his back hunched on the lone chair n the interrogation room. The only source of light was from outside the open door shining only on Zuko, meaning he was front and centre for scrutinizing. "This isn't about you! This is about the Fire Nation!" He insisted, claiming that he did it for the future of our country.

I paused, glaring at the seated figure. His tone might have been strong, but I could still see weakness inside him. His body quivered slightly, his face kept relatively low as he tried not to look my way. Fuming, I tossed the letter at his head. "Thanks, Zuko. That makes me feel all better." I retorted, unimpressed with his answer.

Finally, Zuko had the strength to stand and face me. He got out of the chair and turned around gingerly, like he was afraid I would start launching projectiles at him. "I never wanted to hurt you," he insisted, "but I have to do this to save my country."

"Save it? You're betraying your country!" I replied angrily, appalled at what Zuko was trying to do. While part of me was concerned with staying loyal to the Fire Nation, the other side of me truly feared for Zuko's safety. Was it worth it to join the Avatar's group and be hunted all over the world again? He knew how much I loved him and that I didn't want to lose him, so why did he become this inconsiderate and started going off when he could have stayed with us? Didn't he know that he was breaking my heart even more should anything happen to him all the while I sat helpless at home?

"That's not how I see it," Zuko explained, offering his side of the story. He told me that he felt the Fire Nation based their rule by relying on fear and falsehoods, to the point where individuals were not being respected for who they were. He went on to say that his father was a great example, as all Zuko wanted was for Ozai to love him, only to get challenged to an Agni Kai, suffering a permanent burn. "Being banished was actually a good thing, because it allowed me to truly see the world. And it is with this conviction that I decided to join the Avatar's group." Zuko concluded firmly.

From my position, I could see a complete reversal being pulled. While I was the one ranting at Zuko, making him feel small, it was now the case where he was speaking with authority and I ended up being a reluctant listener. While my heart wasn't really into Zuko's words, as it still ached from the way he shattered it, I actually found his message quite intriguing. Was it true that I was merely conforming to ways that disrespected life in general? I knew Ty Lee and I always submitted to Azula, but perhaps that went over our heads, to the point where we didn't realize Azula's actions were hurting everyone overall? Maybe the Fire Nation might be better off if some changes were made, even if Zuko was overdoing it by defecting to the Avatar's side.

But the silence inside that interrogation room was shattered when a guard rushed in. "Madam, there's a riot going on. I'm here to protect you." He announced, pointing at my current position standing right next to a supposedly dangerous prisoner.

I turned around and glared at him, my eyes narrowing in anger. While I wasn't happy with Zuko's actions, there was something about him that made me feel welcome and comfortable, even in his status as a prisoner. So, to claim that whatever prison riot was happening and Zuko's presence would pose a threat to me was ludicrous. "I don't need any protection." I replied sternly, irritated by his words.

That didn't deter the guard, as he entered the room describing how my uncle told him to keep her safe. As I looked on flabbergasted, my eyes were completely off of Zuko. That was why it caught us all off-guard when a blast off fire slammed into our feet, the orange fumes burning at our legs as we hopped back. The guard, ever the imbecile, leapt in front of me, shielding me from moving while Zuko made a beeline for the door. "Get off of me!" I yelled, throwing him to the side and pursuing Zuko.

But I was too late, as Zuko pulled the interrogation room door shut, and locked it from outside. I could only stare through the crack, angry and frustrated, but also fearful and anxious, as I still had strong doubts regarding Zuko's decision and subsequent safety. I could see his pair of golden orbs return my stare, his expression both determined and pained, before he hurried off down the aisle. Given I was left all alone with the guard in this room, I had to find a way out. "Is anybody out there?" I called, banging on the door.

Sensing that there was no one present, probably because they were all busy in the courtyard dealing with the riot, I had to resort to drastic measures. Pulling out a longer and thinner projectile, I tried negotiating it into the lock, hoping to free myself from this dark room. Amidst the shouts from the guard behind me, insisting I be careful with such an elaborate lock, I tried to work with the small blade in the limited light. I was by no means a lock-picking expert, but in my boredom I did manage to find more unique ways of handling sharp objects. If it was to include lock-picking, then so be it.

After a gruelling few minutes of working in the dark and being constantly bombarded by the guard's whines, I finally unlocked the door. The halls of the prison were completely silent, which enabled me to locate the source of the action. It came from the top tower, where the gondola was located. On regular days, the gondola was used to transport prisoners into the Boiling Rock, so it wouldn't put it pass me that Zuko was probably using it to escape. Taking a deep breath, I hustled up the stairs.

And indeed, before me was the scene of the escape, with the gondola heading out of the prison dangling over some boiling water. I pressed myself against a pillar, trying to stay away from the guards, who would undoubtedly shoo me away should they see me. The guards on the platform jammed the machinery, making it so that the gondola could not move while they brought out a huge saw. I could only stare in horror as my uncle's voice boomed across the crevasse, "Cut the line!"

Biting my lip to contain my fear, I tiptoed out from the shade, squinting hard as I could make out several figures standing on top of the gondola. One such figure dressed in dark red straightened up and promptly propelled off, blasting out a jet of blue flames from the feet and landing on the parallel gondola making its way down to the prison. She was followed by a figure in a pink belly shirt, acrobatically leaping across and landing in perfect position. My ability to read body language came in real handy again, as Azula and Ty Lee were polar opposites at the moment. While Azula was her usual confident self, Ty Lee was extremely uncertain, knowing full well that should they leave now, those on the stopped cab, Zuko and my uncle included, would surely fall to their deaths.

Then, a sudden surge of energy shot through my body. I didn't care for the so-called escapees, as I didn't exactly know them well. But a couple of factors kept urging me to block out whatever threats there were and approached the controls. One was the fact that Azula was leaving my uncle to die, even though he was doing his duties to prevent an escape. But the more important one was Zuko, as leaving the love of my life to drown in boiling water was unacceptable to me. Even if Azula saw her brother as a traitor, in my mind she was the bigger traitor of the two, as she showed me that she was willing to sacrifice other people's lives just to advance her own agenda. Flipping out a couple of projectiles, I proceeded to hurling them at the guards.

The blades whistled through the air and sliced at each person's clothing, pinning them against the walls and freeing up the machines. I made sure to not hit any major body parts or blood vessels, as to not inflict too much damage. After all, these were people my uncle worked with, and the least I could do was respect their lives, unlike someone else. Amidst their cries, I told them in a clear tone what I intended to do. "Saving the jerk that dumped me," I stated, reaching for the controls and letting the gondola go free.

Knowing that my uncle would be safe, and Zuko would at least get a chance to get off the prison, I turned my blades to the guards, brandishing them ferociously and holding them at bay. I couldn't really see where Zuko's gondola was, but I guessed that they would dock on the other side at any moment now. All I could do for now was giving them time, knowing full well that should I be apprehended, I would probably spend the rest of my life in this prison. Even as my arms and legs ached, my body wobbling from fatigue, the thoughts of Zuko pushed me forward. Zuko had done a lot on this journey to rediscover himself, and I truly believed he had changed completely. Maybe his actions were not acceptable in the current Fire Nation political environment, but his general ideas ought to be commended. Looking back at our history, had any Fire Lord experienced the hardships he did? Had any Fire Lord seen and understood the world the way he did?

My thoughts were jolted to a halt as I felt a huge tackle from my backside. I could feel the blades being ripped from my hands as a rough pair of arms yanked me to my feet. Looking on, I could only grit my teeth as Azula and Ty Lee got off the other gondola and made their way toward me. "I never expected this from you," Azula muttered, her voice laced with poison. She told the guards to leave the area while she dealt with me one-on-one. "Why would you do it? You know the consequences." She demanded.

Taking a deep breath, I brought out all my memories of Zuko to the forefront. It was time to show Azula that respect wasn't bestowed; rather, it must be earned. Royalty wasn't an adequate alibi for forcing others against their will, and comparing the siblings, Zuko was the one who worked harder to gain such respect. Maybe Azula's mother was right to call Azula a monster, as the way she treated others, both in the past and currently, was nothing short of despicable. "You miscalculated," I told her, my tone expressionless but strong, "I love Zuko more than I fear you."

That got Azula more enraged than anything else, as I finally poked through her years of facade via fear. I was proud of who I was, and proud of who I chose. While it was true that Azula had the privileges, it was Zuko who was truly worthy to become a Fire Lord. And while it was true that I obeyed others all my life, I also realized that when the time came, I must stand up for my beliefs. I always felt that had I stood up to Azula with the same vigour as I did to Zuko at Ember Island, things would probably be different today. As Azula got into her lightning bending stance, I whipped out my last projectile. I only had one shot, and I had to make it count should I want to leave with my body intact.

But before anything could happen, Ty Lee zoomed in and attacked Azula. Her hands were a blur as she jabbed at her various pressure points, blocking Azula's chi and preventing her from bending. I was completely shocked at Ty Lee, as I never expected her to take action against Azula. So did that mean Ty Lee agreed with me and decided to take our own path away from Azula? Whatever the case, the thoughts had clouded my mind, and I was put in a strange paralysis, not able to move a single muscle even as we were surrounded by guards. Two guards picked up Azula's limp body off of the ground, letting the princess get a good look at us before ordering us to our cells. As they marched us off, I had a sinking feeling in my mind. While I might have done the right thing to give Zuko a chance, I also realized that I might never see him ever again.

*****

"Mai, you're okay!" Zuko exclaimed, his new tunic half-on and half-off as I appeared at his dressing room doorway. I was actually quite nervous when I was told that I could return to the Fire Nation palace to witness Zuko's big day. I didn't know what he would think of me after the Boiling Rock incident. I knew he would probably remember me, as shown by how upset he was to leave me. But given that the entire Fire Nation was in his hands, I couldn't help but imagine that he had many priorities at hand.

But all my worries that swirled in my mind were eased when I made those final steps to his chamber. My wobbling legs became stiffer, my queasy stomach settled, and my shaking hands calmly crossed themselves across my chest as I faced the love of my life. It seemed like Zuko had another battle scar to account for, as evident by the series of bandages across his torso. I left my position on the door frame and approached, grabbing a hold of the confounding robe-like tunic. "They let you out of prison?" he asked.

"My uncle pulled some strings, and it doesn't hurt that the new Fire Lord is your boyfriend." I stated, sliding his arm into the remaining sleeve and tying the belt up. When it was announced that Zuko took over as the new Fire Lord, my uncle immediately sent for a messenger asking him for leniency. It was unusual for any high-risk prisoners at the Boiling Rock to be released without the Fire Lord's approval, but I wasn't keen on just having me be released. While I was at it, I decided to convince my uncle to request Zuko to pardon all prisoners of this war, including Ty Lee and the Kyoshi Warriors, who were imprisoned with us. Apparently, Ty Lee had gotten along quite well with them. She even convinced me to get to know them better, which was an eye-opener for me.

"Does this mean you don't hate me anymore?" Zuko asked, his tone between coy and hesitance. When word returned that Zuko would grant our pardons, I immediately thought of ideas that could allow him to work better with the rest of the world, starting with a prisoners of war exchange, where we released Earth Kingdom and Water Tribe natives for Fire Nation nationals captured by them. Given I would probably have a role to play in helping Zuko with world affairs, I felt I should get used to giving him advice.

"I think it means, I actually kind of like you." I responded, swiftly silencing him with a kiss. This time, there would be no interruptions as we truly enjoyed this moment. I didn't have to worry about Azula or anyone else disturbing us, telling us how to think or feel. The palace staff informed me that Zuko bested Azula in an Agni Kai, in which the princess lost her sanity. She was currently locked away in an asylum, after Zuko spared her life. Personally, I had little intention to visit this individual again. Perhaps it was only right that, after so many years of playing mind games, she lost her own mind.

Releasing Zuko, I sternly pointed out that I didn't appreciate him breaking up with me, and warned him to never do it again. Giving him one more hug, I hurried off to the courtyard below, finding the best position possible to witness Zuko's coronation. I managed to catch up with Ty Lee, who was in full Kyoshi Warrior uniform. She was back to her chipper, positive self, which was I sight that I never thought I would miss seeing. Perhaps this type of attitude was something we all needed at the moment, as it was a new start for us all. Hopefully, the other nations could feed off of this and help us all make this world a better place to live, for now and eternity.

A gong sounded off, echoing throughout this crowd of Fire Nation, Water Tribe, and Earth Kingdom individuals, signalling the arrival of the Avatar and the new Fire Lord. I looked on as Zuko addressed the crowd, standing proud and tall as the new head of state. I couldn't help but feel that so much had happened throughout the years since I first met him. No longer was he the scrawny little kid that clung to his mother; now he was a true leader, one who had seen the world, experienced the same hardships most ordinary folk had, and could apply this knowledge to the Fire Nation. I was beaming with admiration and pride as I watched Zuko address the crowd. "The real hero is the Avatar!" He introduced Aang, in a traditional Air Nomad gown, onto the front steps with him.

After a boisterous round of applause, Zuko officially declared the war over. "I promised my uncle that I would restore the honour of the Fire Nation, and I will. The road ahead of us is challenging, as a hundred years of fighting has left the world scarred and divided," Zuko proclaimed, scanning the crowd who listened on intently. He then tilted his head to Aang, who glanced back eagerly, "but with the Avatar's help, we can get it back on the right path, and begin a new era of love, peace, and hope."

With that, Zuko got to his knees, letting the head Fire Sage place the royal head piece onto his head. He was now officially Fire Lord Zuko, and I couldn't be happier. I went through so much just to witness this day. Getting dunked into a fountain, riding through thick woods on Basilisk lizards, wallowing through wall sludge juice, getting thrown in a high-security prison, you named it. This was truly the beginning of a new age, and I swore to do my part to help Zuko. As he marched down the steps, heading in my direction, I couldn't help by embrace him again. "I am so proud of you, Zuko," I managed to eke out through my emotions.

Zuko merely nodded, and insisted that we talked at the group reunion at Ba Sing Se later on that week. General Iroh reopened his tea shop, and invited us for a reunion after the war. He told us the Earth King Kuei, who I had a hand in ousting, was to return to his throne, and was willing to discuss the prisoner exchange with Zuko. King Bumi of the semi-autonomous Earth Kingdom region of Omashu and a close friend of Iroh's, was also invited to the talks. From what I heard the exchange included my parents and Tom Tom, currently held by Bumi at Omashu. To regain so much in a span of a few days, I was overjoyed, and became more determined to keep our good fortunes. After years of grey, things were finally becoming brighter.

And that was where I found myself, sitting in Iroh's tea shop and getting into an intense chess match with Suki, Ty Lee's new leader. Sokka, the male Water Tribe warrior I ran across so many times, was busy doing a painting of us, while Zuko was serving us his uncle's famous tea. Never did I imagine me intermingling with folks from the other nations. Throughout my life, I was taught that they were weak and inferior to the Fire Nation. But now that I experienced them firsthand, I found they weren't bad people at all. It only made me realize how important this moment was, and how precious life was. If Zuko could change the world, then so could I, and I would help him every step of the way. As I enjoyed the laughter of this new group of friends, I thought to myself:

My name is Mai. That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 11: Gyatso

*****

A huge crowd gathered at the entrance to the Southern Air Temple, looking to the sky for a small spot weaving in and out of the mountains. I was among the air benders gathered here, waiting to see our visitor from a faraway land. Like most air temples, the Southern Air Temple was located in an isolated mountain range at the edge of the world. For our case, it was the Patola Mountain Range. The only way to reach it was by flying, and this was possible by all the monks here with our Sky Bison. But now, knowing there was another flight being made into the temple, I couldn't help but stare into the skies.

"Look! It's crossing the last peaks, and coming straight in!" Someone yelled, pointing to the scarf-like clouds draped over the mountaintops. A few days ago, a messenger hawk delivered a letter from the Fire Sages, the religious authority in the Fire Nation, to their Air Nomad counterparts, the Council of Elders, informing us that a very special individual would be joining us for air bending training. Since the religious figures of each respective nation served the interests of the world, they weren't entirely bound by their citizenship. It wasn't unusual to see our Council of Elders cooperate with Fire Sages or the Earth Clerics. And it definitely wasn't surprising to see our elders here, welcoming the most important figure in the entire world. "He's landing anytime now."

Before long, the dark dot became more apparent, as the serpent-like form of a large dragon snaked its way across the sky. I could only watch in wonder and awe as this beautiful creature raced its way toward us. It was so different than our method of flying: the Sky Bison. Unlike the lumbering movements of a bison, the dragon was so gracious and effortless, almost like it was meant to be in the sky more than air benders. I squinted hard, trying to block out the sun as my eyes focused in on the rider. Despite the fact that he was just a silhouette, I could make out a tall and lean figure, with flowing robes and an unusual looking head piece. Air Nomads were known to have their heads shaved, so it was uncommon for me to see head gear of any sort, let alone those from the Fire Nation.

Finally, the Council of Elders exited the temple. The five elderly monks that we revered marched slowly to the centre of the hallway. Immediately, some of the older monks signalled to the younger ones to stand to the side, creating an open area for the dragon to land. I was pressed into several other young air benders around me, making it difficult to see beyond the sea of bald heads and yellow and orange tunics. The five elders did an ancient spiritual welcoming ritual, saluting the human incarnation of the spirit of the world. "It is our honour to welcome the next Avatar: Roku of the Fire Nation!" they announced proudly, each bowing as the dragon made its final approach.

As we all observed the amazing scene before us, the sleek creature slid to a perfect halt before the monks. Most of us stared on in wonder and awe at the rider, who finally dismounted and stepped onto the stone ground. I finally got a good look at him, and realized that he was only a teenager, barely older than me. He stood straight and tall, making his lean frame even leaner as he surveyed the scene with calm but curious gold eyes. Despite his attempt to remain collected and dignified, I could tell that he was really nervous. I guessed that being from the Fire Nation he was used to warm weather, so a cold climate like this was uncomfortable for him. This only added to his uncertainty, as his body trembled with every tilt of his head.

Finally, our Council of Elders got to their feet to officially welcome the visitor. Each one approached the Avatar and gave their introduction, and showed him around the place. We followed him closely, almost hesitant to approach this all-powerful figure. From my angle, Roku tried to fit in, bowing and nodding at each elder around him, who offered to make his life more comfortable here. But I could tell that the more they tried, the more uncomfortable he became. He frequently adjusted his collar, and his hands were grabbing and squeezing various parts of his dark red tunic. Trying to sort through the chatter around me, I squeezed past several people as I moved closer to the Avatar.

But I didn't get a chance to speak to him at all, as the elders insisted that Roku must be tired after a long trip, and shuffled him off to his new chamber. There wasn't much left to see as the older monks shooed most of the younger ones away, either back into the temple or to other exterior areas for training or other exercises. "That wasn't too exciting," I commented, my lips pursing in an out-of-character way as I trudged inside.

I was known as the joker and the prankster among the young air benders, mainly because very little could get me down. But this was one of the exceptions, as I wasn't too impressed that the Avatar stayed out here for barely a minute, and didn't even bother to greet us when he arrived. It was partially understandable, as the elders were looking out for Roku's needs, given his journey and him being in a new environment. But still, it might be more useful had he been allowed to intermingle with the rest of us, which would give him more exposure to the air element. "Besides, we're supposed to be relaxed and free, so why did we become more rigid than the Avatar's home in the Fire Nation?" I openly questioned, comparing our carefree lifestyle to the strict rules of the Fire Nation.

I slowly marched back to the wing of the temple where my chamber was located. The living quarters were located at the lower parts of the temple, which was actually part of the bedrock of the mountain. This was to prevent the elements from getting in, and yet still have a way for us to reach the exterior, should any monk want to take a morning stroll or do some meditation. Bonding with nature was a big part of an air bender's life, and the older monks always taught us that respecting nature was a deep part of being an air bender. All life was sacred, and one must find the significance in every little living thing in order to bond with the world. Compared to many others, I was still quite young, so I had a long way to go before reaching full spirituality. Once that was done, I could do more advanced air bending techniques, and be recognized as an air bending master. The elders would then give me my tattoos, and I could openly wear the fruits of my labour.

Suddenly, I could hear the voices of the Council of Elders behind me as they entered the living quarters. My eyes were wide open as Avatar Roku marched in with them, nodding to their every detail as they completed the tour of the more important areas of the temple. He still had a bag in his hand, supposedly containing whatever essential he was allowed to bring with him. "And this is where you'll be staying," they concluded, showing Roku the line of rooms before him. I could feel my jaw drop to the ground as an all-powerful Avatar was about to become my neighbour. How amazing was that?

Before long, the monks arrived at the right room, showing Roku where he would be staying for the next little while. I could only look on quietly, hoping the monks would go away soon so I could get a chance to speak with Roku. I knew that sooner or later, he would appear with us in the temple grounds, but I really wanted some one-on-one time with him just to understand what he was like. Personally, I saw the Avatar as a person who had to live the experience of walking in another person's shoes. Since I never had the chance to learn another element, it was a good way to bond with him.

After what seemed like an eternity, the elders finally left the room. They were on their way back to the main hall, leaving the living quarters unwatched, and giving me a chance to approach the Avatar's room. Pressing my back against the wall, I tilted my head and peeked into Roku's room. The dimness of the interior meant I could only see parts of Roku's face, but I could tell he was still hesitant. He was on his bed, his head slightly dipped over, as if in deep thought. His only package was lying on the ground, still untouched as Roku was almost in meditation. Taking a deep breath, I stepped into the doorframe and gave it a couple of knocks. "Excuse me, Avatar?" I greeted him.

That seemed to have knocked Roku out of his trance as his head snapped up, his golden eyes shooting straight at the door and right at me. "I'm sorry, I didn't notice you were there,?he stuttered, struggling off his bed, "do you live in this part of the temple?"

"Yeah, I do!" I responded enthusiastically. This was the perfect time to engage Roku in living with the Air Nomads, as I could get to know him personally, away from the public spotlight where he might feel alien to our culture. "It's so great to meet you! My room's down the hall, so we'll see each other a lot, Avatar Roku!"

Roku struggled to smile, but from that twitch on his shoulder I could tell he was a bit nervous. "I actually don't feel comfortable being addressed like that," he told me in a sheepish voice, "can you just call me Roku instead? I mean, if you insist on formality, it's fine to call me Avatar Roku, but I really prefer it if you dropped the title."

Now it was my turn to be surprised, as I never expected the Avatar to be that informal. I knew he was scared when entering the temple and during the tour, but at no point in time did I expect the Avatar to remove his title when being addressed. In fact, when the monks instructed us earlier, they told us that the Avatar was a person that was to be treated with utmost respect. "Roku," I gently stated, letting each syllable slide off my tongue, "I could call you that, I guess. It just seems weird, that's all."

Roku relaxed, his tense face loosening as a wide beam spread to his cheeks. "I just don't like the way everyone treats me like I'm extra special, that's all. Even with my duties, deep down I'm no different than you guys," he stated, "how do I address you?"

I smiled back at the fire bender, realizing that for the first time since his arrival, Roku was truly at ease with his surroundings. "My name is Gyatso." I replied. With that, we stood across from each other and bowed in our respective ways. We might have many different customs, but our path of understanding each other began today.

*****

"So if everybody is ready, then follow me!" My air bending instructor, a cheerful monk with an undying spirit and sense of adventure announced. I had to admit that he was a great instructor, as he had the same attitude I had towards life in general: live every minute and enjoy every moment to its fullest. So for him to teach me the basics of air bending, it was always a blast. That being said, he didn't hesitate in getting strict if he had to, pointing out all errors and demanding us to fix them when he saw them.

Still, the relaxed atmosphere was nice, especially when I consider the fact that we had a new student join our class. Standing right next to me, in his brand new Air Nomad clothes, was the Avatar himself. Roku got started on his air bending training the day after his arrival. The monks told me despite the differences in bending style and philosophy, Roku finally understood and mastered the basic techniques and adopting the mindset of an air bender. Now, approximately a month after his arrival, Roku had been placed into an air glider class, and was assigned to be my partner when we took flight.

I took a side glance at Roku as we flipped open our gliders. I had to admit that we bonded quite well, becoming fast friends and even doing a lot of air bending practice together. Roku's words from the first day really resonated in my mind, as he was nothing more than a normal guy. Seeing him around my friends, enjoying life in the Air Temple and letting go of many of his preconceptions and truly understanding what it was like to be an Air Nomad, I felt Roku had really immersed himself into our culture.

Lining up at the edge, we prepared to take off, leaping from the cliff-like walls and sailing into the skies. Not only had Roku been respectful of our culture, he also had an insatiable appetite for striving to be the best, always challenging himself to be more proficient in manipulating the element. It provided quite a lot of friendly rivalry within my circle of friends, but especially with me, due to how close we had become. It was really refreshing to see how Roku would take the simplest techniques and challenged us to practice it with him, only to turn it into an all-out competition. Feeling the air around me as we floated in the sky, I could only wonder what Roku would come up with next.

Whatever trick he had in mind was revealed as Roku called to me. "Hey Gyatso, you want to see a new glider trick?" And immediately, he pulled his glider back, going high into the air before making two widely-arced back flips. As I tilted my head back, I could see a huge grin plastered on his face as he returned to level flying position.

But I wasn't about to be outdone, as I was determined to one-up the Avatar with whatever trick he pulled. This friendly rivalry was only inspiring me to come up with even more advanced air bending techniques, to the point where I could pass my final exam of mastering thirty-six skills and earned my tattoos. There was one that I had been thinking about ever since I was told I would get glider lessons, but it had never been tried before. Given that I was the type that didn't follow convention, I decided to let Roku see what this was all about. "Check this out," I replied, shouting over my shoulder.

Taking a deep breath, I flipped the glider around, turning my body to face the sun instead of hanging from below it. And in one smooth motion, I turned my body from a laid-back position to a standing one, balancing on the teetering glider while steering with my feet. This new trick, which I decided to dub "air surfing," wasn't the easiest thing for me, as no one had even thought of manoeuvring a glider with their legs before. Even with my adventurous side on full blast, my heart pounded nonstop as I tried to negotiate the glider through the winds of these high altitudes. No risk was going to deter me, as my friends would know that once my risk-taking side took over, there was no going back.

But the weather was not cooperating as a large gust of wind blew me off balance. My face numbed as my feet struggled to gain balance of the glider. But it was of no use as I slowly felt the staff loosen from my feet and drop into the cliff below. Suddenly, freefall became my new concern as I realized there was nothing stopping me from falling to my doom. As my arms and legs flailed about, I felt my fall being abruptly cut off as a glider zipped under me, causing me to plop onto the top frame. With my heart still doing hard taps against my sternum, I glanced down to see Roku gritting his teeth, trying to steer this glider which was now overweight and unbalanced.

Sensing the dangerous situation, I instantly laid flat on the top staff, making myself as streamline as possible. Our instructor told us before that flight was based on how air flowed past the glider, and anything that obstructed such flow might cause a crash. But even as I tried to prevent resistance, I could sense Roku fighting a losing battle. The glider dipped and tilted dangerously before tumbling down, spiralling out of control as we quickly lost altitude. The opposite wall of the Air Temple, with its thin ledge as our landing point, suddenly grew larger and larger as we screamed in fear.

The mad ride through the air finally came to an abrupt end as we slammed into the ground, right into a group of air bending students. Our instructor had taken the class onto the ground by now, and was about to give a briefing when he saw us rumble in. He didn't even have enough time to holler out or shoo the other monks out of the way when Roku and I sliced our way through them. What should have been injuries for two became injuries for many as the other kids ended up hitting the ground as we crash-landed, with many suffering cuts and bruises as we collided with them. I couldn't see exactly how or where they were hurt, but I could honestly say Roku and I weren't in the best shape.

By the time we picked ourselves off the ground, we could finally assess our injuries. There were several cuts on our clothes, and various parts of our bodies ached. I glanced over to Roku, who had trouble lifting his head, his neck so tight that tendons could be seen bulging. I guessed he probably pulled a muscle there, therefore placing him in a situation where he couldn't look up. His long hair draped down from his head, and I couldn't help but shoot another gentle breeze at him, blowing out the dark strands and getting a good look at him. "Are you alright?" I whispered.

Roku finally turned over. Despite the crash, he managed to eke out a smile, knowing that our rivalry had taken itself to a whole new level. We placed a hand on each other's shoulders, like congratulating each other on not only pulling off, but surviving a dangerous move like that. I guessed our teacher was probably going to march up to us, demanding to know why we did something that crazy. But to us, this was our friendship, and this was the way we bonded. For me, even a hundred crashes couldn't take that away.

*****

"How do you know it's me?" Aang asked as he faced us nervously. It seemed like a case of deja vu as the Council of Elders summoned Aang into our usual meeting room, the serene environment masking the seriousness of the situation. Per the agreement by the Council of Elders, we would bypass the custom of revealing the Avatar's identity at his or her sixteenth birthday, instead doing so right after Aang had mastered the air element.

And here was Aang, now twelve years old and one of the youngest air bending masters ever, seated before us as we revealed his identity to him. Comparing to those years back, Aang had grown a lot. While he still had that playfulness and curiosity in him, I also saw many traits that he gained throughout the years. Other than becoming taller and more muscular, Aang was more observant, taking things from the elements and absorbing this new knowledge. Also, Aang had a touch of creativity within him, as he always strove to experiment with new things. In fact, when we tested him on the thirty-six air bending techniques, he actually created one of his own called the air scooter. This new trick, which involved sitting on a ball of spinning air and using it to manoeuvre, was so amazing that most of the air bending instructors were astounded by its ingenuity. Even as I approached him earlier to request his presence, he was excitedly teaching this skill to other youngsters. It was truly a sight to admire.

"Do you remember these?" Tashi, in his spot to the left of Pasang, lifted a package into the air. Using an air thrust, he blew the parcel in Aang's direction, letting my favourite student take a good look at the items inside. As Aang marvelled over his favourite toys, Tashi continued, "You chose them from among thousands of toys, Aang. The toys you picked were the four Avatar relics," he pointed out.

As Aang giddily handled the Air Nomad fan, I decided to explain to him why we had to do this. Although I still had reservations regarding telling Aang of his identity this early, I slowly became more convinced that it might be alright to start letting go. Aang had, in my mind, a similar outlook towards life and bending to me, always willing to take risks and try something different. These traits were quite important for an Avatar, as a willingness to have an open mind and trying new things would be crucial in learning new elements quickly. Nevertheless, I described our procedure to him. "There are troubling signs. Storm clouds are gathering," I referred to the coming war with the Fire Nation, "we need you, Aang." I emphasized, realizing that our survival depended on this boy.

Aang's expression went from jubilance to hesitance. A confused look etched onto Aang's face as he chewed over the words. It was truly a big task, as a mountain of duties just buried the usually carefree youngster. I could somewhat understand his situation, as he wasn't used to having such a responsibility being thrown at him. Most air benders had attitudes that let us avoid problems before they began, similar to our bending style where the wind avoided direct attacks. Due to this, I had reservations letting Aang face a fierce foe that directly with little experience with the world's more serious affairs. Thinking of his needs, I hoped to raise the issue of how fast we should go about having him master all four elements. Could we slow it down and observe Aang's growth more carefully first?

Whatever ideas I had regarding that were cut short as Pasang spoke again. "The current situation makes it difficult for us to locate any bending instructors from the other nations, particularly the Fire Nation. But if we go according to the Avatar Cycle, the next element is water, and that means we must contact the Water Tribes immediately to see if any of their instructors are willing to accept Aang." Pasang turned to the other elders and told us that until a water bender was willing to meet with Aang, we must keep training Aang on air bending, in hopes that he could become even stronger.

By then, every opportunity I had to speak for Aang's needs disappeared as the other monks dismissed my student and headed out of the chambers themselves. Nothing seemed to be stopping them as they proceeded with their plan, with Aang's constant air bending training being the only thing their minds. I couldn't help but sigh, wondering what messes they would create. Perhaps I was being overprotective, and maybe wanted to keep Aang around for selfish reasons. After all, I was friend with the last Avatar, and I wasn't too pleased that he died prematurely under such mysterious circumstances. Maybe I saw Aang, being Roku's reincarnation, in a possessive manner, and that I didn't want to lose him again. Either way, it caused me to have many mixed feelings, as I knew the only way I could show him I cared was to free him, letting him explore the world on his own.

But still, even with that in mind, I felt the others really did go too far, as they never truly considered Aang's best interests at heart. Had anyone of them approached Aang and asked him how he felt? They all saw only the needs of the world, but had any of them placed themselves in Aang's shoes? While the war was one consideration, there were other factors regarding the Avatar's growth that ought to be included as well. I told the others before that an Avatar's full maturation was to involve an appreciation of the world, but could Aang truly do it in this state, with that much confusion and a relatively young mindset? Even as a fairly mature sixteen-year-old, Roku told me he had doubts about his abilities, and wondered why it had to be him. So how would Aang feel, going into this as a twelve-year-old?

Either way, I was going to fight for Aang's needs. I wasn't about to let the others run roughshod over him, and disregarded his personal growth. Even though I realized I had to let go some time soon, I was going to battle on until the time came. I had always been the defiant one, always going against the flow, and it was time that my famous rebel attitude returned. If it wasn't for me, then it had to be for the one I loved the most.

*****

"This whole Avatar thing, maybe the monks made a mistake." Aang sighed, his body twisting and turning in impossible angles as he sat on the ledge looking down at the courtyard. It had only been days since we announced it to him, and already Aang was in considerable discomfort, concerned over its consequences. Earlier in the day, Aang met up with the rest of his friends again, opting to play a game using his new Air Scooter technique. But he was roundly turned down by the other children, who claimed that he had an unfair advantage being the Avatar. Rejected and alone, he hoped to find some company in pretty much the only person who still treated him normally.

And that was where we found ourselves, away from the rest of the air benders and baking some cakes using my special techniques. Even with my attention on the oven more than on Aang, I could tell the significant change in him. Instead of his usual bouncy and cheerful self, Aang sat with a hunched back, his head near his knees as his hands were clasped before his shins. Nevertheless, there wasn't much we could do about it for now. The Council of Elders had made their decision, and all I could do was to make life as comfortable for Aang as possible. "The only mistake they made was telling you before you turned sixteen," I explained, "but we can't concern ourselves with what was, we must act on what is." With that, I waved at the scene before us.

Indeed, the beautiful surroundings reminded us of why we were here, and what we could appreciate while we were still alive. The Sky Bison hovering around us, the magnificent towers of the Air Temple, the sounds of young air benders playing, and the smells of nature all around. Perhaps by reminding Aang that it was because he was the Avatar that he must be tied to air bending, it would lift his spirits. In my mind, it was possible for an Avatar to serve the world while connecting with his roots, and I sure hoped Aang would do that should he begin his journey.

But it didn't succeed, as Aang continued to doubt himself. "But Gyatso, how do I know if I'm ready for this?" he asked, still reluctant to accept the revelations.

"Your questions will be answered when you're old enough to enter the Air Temple Sanctuary. Inside, you will meet someone who will guide you on your journey." I responded, trying to ease his nerves. The Air Temple Sanctuary was one area where all Avatars of Air Nomad descent must enter whenever they reached maturity. It was an Avatar's responsibility to connect with the Spirit World, where the spirits of Avatars past were located. Realizing that Aang must go through that process one day, I could only imagine the questions he had when he encountered Roku.

That seemed to have lifted Aang's spirits a little, as he seemed eager to learn more of his special identity. Sensing an opportunity to make him happy again, I turned to him with a mischievous smirk. "Now, are you going to help me with these cakes?" I asked.

That got Aang smiling as well, as he lifted himself off the rails and stood next to me. This was one of our more unusual methods in practicing air bending, but it was a great exercise in testing both strength and accuracy. Given that we had to hit a series of targets located in a small area far away from us, it would be a difficult test for most other air benders. But for Aang and me, it wouldn't even be an issue. Getting into position, we counted to three, creating a ball of air each and hurling it at the railing.

Like we had done it every day of our lives, our air balls threw the cakes I baked into the air, sending them across the skies and to the temple's lower levels. We leaned over the rails, following the cakes in the air as neither dough nor icing fell off from the bases. As they made their descent onto the meditation area below, I could make out the bodies of the other four members of the Council of Elders, as they all gathered under the large trees meditating together. While meditation was an important exercise for all air benders, and I certainly encouraged it with Aang as well, I couldn'r figure out why the elders, despite all their wisdom, chose the same gathering spot every single time. There was no challenge to this trick anymore, as they just made themselves too easy a target for Aang and I to hit. "It's going to drop on them," Aang anticipated excitedly.

And just to our expectations, the cakes landed perfectly on the targets, with one slamming onto each elder's head. Icing and dough dripped onto their robes, causing their moans of disgust to echo off the temple's walls. The comical situation was accentuated when lemurs that called our temple home flocked to them, climbing all over the foursome as they licked the food off their clothing. From our position at the top, we couldn't stop laughing. "We did it again, Gyatso!" Aang declared, laughing for the first time in days.

Aang turned back to face me, the biggest smile on his face as he bowed down low. "Your aim has improved greatly, my young pupil," I complimented him, giving him a pat on the head. Deep down, I knew that these were the moments I would miss the most should Aang be sent away. And knowing Aang, he probably was more focused on these things rather than training. Perhaps there was still time to get him more prepared for the dangers in the journey ahead? Either way, Aang still needed the guidance of those close to him, and I was willing to offer that for as long as he wished.

*****

"Aang needs to have freedom and fun. He needs to grow up as a normal boy." I stated my case before Pasang. I thought things were returning to normal, with Aang still getting frequent training in air bending, but balanced well with leisure, the latter of the two being offered mainly by me. It seemed like a good way to keep a level of normality for Aang as I constantly communicated with the other monks, hoping there was some news on training Aang on other bending techniques. Should there be anything new, I would inform Aang to make whatever change proceed as smoothly as possible.

Apparently, that touched a nerve with some of the other elders, especially Tashi, the so-called grumpy one. Even when we first confirmed Aang's identity, he was for a quicker transition of training methods, insisting that we moved Aang to water bending as soon as possible. When I was playing a game of Pai Sho with Aang earlier, he disturbed our match by insisting that should be training even more vigorously. While his goal was understood, I made sure Tashi knew that as long as I was in charge of Aang, I would decide when he trained and when he got his butt kicked at Pai Sho. Tashi then left in a huff, but nowhere in my mind did I expect him to approach Pasang with this issue.

"You cannot keep protecting Aang from his destiny," Tashi's smug tone sliced through my mind, bringing me back to the current situation. Pasang was eyeing both of us with a concerned face, probably thinking of a compromise again as Tashi needled me repeatedly. Somehow, despite the calm appearance, Pasang realized how firm Tashi and I held onto our positions, and that left him very little room to compromise.

After an agonizing few seconds, which stretched into an eternity when considered with the complete silence in our chamber, Pasang finally caved in. "Gyatso, I know you mean well, but you are letting your affection for the boy cloud your judgment," he stated. With that remark, I knew that Pasang was about to side with Tashi.

But knowing Pasang's understanding nature and willingness to compromise, I had to keep pushing my point. Whenever there was an important issue to discuss, I had found Pasang was always willing to entertain another opinion, sometimes incorporating the new ideas into his conclusion. Perhaps he was willing to listen once more? "All I want is what is best for him," I firmly responded, hoping Pasang would understand Aang's needs.

Whatever hope I had left faded as Pasang responded by claiming that we needed what was best for the world. My shoulders sagged as Pasang dipped his head, a new thought process slowly emerging as he described his idea, which would be the biggest blow to my career as not just an air bender, but a person. "You and Aang must be separated," Pasang ordered, "the Avatar will be sent away to the Eastern Air Temple to complete his training. My decision on this is final."

My mouth drop involuntarily, my face frozen as Pasang's words slammed into me like a hurricane. Not in a million years had I imagined my idea of meeting Aang's needs be so roundly rejected. It wasn't as if he merely told me it was a secondary concern; rather, Pasang basically decided that Aang's needs were a distraction to his Avatar training, and even insisted that I removed myself from the picture. How could he do this? After all the years in which we knew each other, Pasang had to realize that I was doing it with Aang's best interests at heart, right? What possible justification did Pasang have to send Aang away, even though it would deprive him of friendship and love, the two things he needed the most for his growth? I wasn't discounting the coming conflict with the Fire Nation, but did Pasang believe forcing a twelve-year-old into the fray the best solution?

Nonetheless, I realized that in this battle, I was about to go it alone. Bowing to Pasang, I excused myself from the chamber. As I marched through the hallways of the temple, I mulled over my entire life experience, not only with Aang, but also with the Avatar. Roku, Aang's predecessor, grew a close bond with me mainly because I was the first person to address him as a normal being. I recalled how uncomfortable Roku was with the new-found fame, and how he longed for his normal life at home in the Fire Nation. It took a lot of coaxing and encouragement in order to get Roku to start making progress on air bending, and even then most of his peers treated him as a living deity. I was one of a few air benders who truly saw Roku for who he was, and by appealing to his non-Avatar side, we managed to bring out the best in each other.

And with Aang, I saw a similar situation, as Aang strove to be normal in a world where the Avatar was needed more than ever. Aang was already rejected by his peers, almost in a fearful way, when his identity was announced. Already without friends, it would be an even bigger shock for him should he be isolated from all those that he knew and loved. If Roku had difficulty handling it at age sixteen, think about how hard it was for Aang at age twelve! It was not fair for Aang to be shoved into the world like this, especially when his knowledge of other cultures was so limited. And being his guardian, it wasn't right for me to just stay put and do nothing, even if he was the Avatar and would have to face the challenges of the world anyway. My job was to make this journey as meaningful as possible, and in my mind, it was not realistic to rush Aang through.

Stopping in the middle of the hall, I stood with a straight back and lifted an arm to chest level. "I won't let them take Aang away from me." I decided, clenching my hand into a fist. Even if the odds were against me, I was going to fight this decision to the end. The Avatar had to save the world, but there was no way he could do it in this current state and mindset. And if the Avatar needed saving, then I was willing to be his hero.

*****

"We need to prepare immediately. This huge Fire Nation armada is out at the bay, and they're attacking any day now!" Our search team lead exclaimed as the elders around me fell into a state of panic. It had been days since Pasang decided on separating Aang and me, and things had not gone well at the Southern Air Temple. While the other elders busily communicated with the Water Tribes any way possible, I went over how I could still have Aang stay here, and what I could do to convince Aang of my intentions.

But I would never get a chance to do that, as on that very evening, I sneaked into Aang's bedroom. I already decided that I would not only fight for Aang's rights to stay, but also for his choice of life. But when I opened the door, I could see that the room was completely empty. The only thing left for us was a note, as Aang took everything he held dear with him, including his staff and Appa, his Sky Bison. By sunrise, the Council of Elders met already, and even with the sheer impact of the incident, there was, rightly so, no assignment of blame on myself or any other air bender. A search party was organized and sent out, in hopes of locating Aang before anything happened to him.

But it was not Aang that would be subject to a bad event; rather, it was the temple itself, as a Fire Nation armada was ploughing at us at full speed. Apparently, we had been underestimating the Fire Lord, not expecting that not only was his military ready, but it was already deployed and heading straight for our shores. Our search team lead told us that several volleys of fire confirmed their aggressive intentions, and they were all lucky to have made it back with only minor injuries. But according to the reports, the sheer size of this armada was a cause for concern. "We need to keep everyone, especially the young and the ill, inside the temple." Pasang ordered. Despite being a peaceful nation with no standing military, we had relatively well-prepped defences, and were prepared to take a stand against the Fire Nation. There was no doubt we were in for the fight of our lives.

Within hours, the evacuation order was in full force. There was sheer chaos as air benders young and old gathered at the edges of the temple, ready to defend our home. Children were escorted inside, placed into safe places away from potential battlegrounds. Just like the wind, typical Air Nomad defence strategies was to be evasive and defensive, always trying to avoid the conflict and not attacking the invader head-on. But with the huge army marching its way toward us, I wasn't sure how long we could keep avoiding.

We soon found out the hard way how much trouble we were in when mechanical sounds echoed through the rocky cliffs below. Those of us brave enough to investigate this unfamiliar sound dipped their heads over the cliff. Even standing a few steps back, I managed to edge quite close to the edge, letting my eyes soak in the misty clouds draping around the rocks below. Even though it was a sight I had seen every day of my life, I had to say this time it was making me nervous, as accentuated by the ominous silence.

But the mood was soon snapped in the most violent way possible, as a series of metallic objects sliced their way through the clouds and slamming into the sides of the cliffs. The entire foundation of our temple shook as the rumbling became louder than ever, almost like there was a powerful machine cutting through the rocks. As we tried to regain balance, a series of fireballs blasted their way upward, scorching the entire place and slamming into the open area. "The Fire Nation troops are attacking. We must put out the fires!" Pasang shouted, pointing to several areas lighting up in bright orange.

Immediately, air benders swirled the wind above us, trying to use its chill to put out the flames. Another group aimed their air downward, hoping to use an air slice to knock the tanks back. But it was to no avail as the machines crept their way to the level of the temple, their cannons firing at full-strength as many of those on the frontlines were either burned or ran over. As I alternated between the sight of the smouldering temple and the sounds of monks screaming as they got hit, it was evident to me what the Fire Nation's purpose was: they were shooting to kill, and planned on taking no prisoners. "It's no longer safe here," I declared, "should we make a retreat?"

Pasang nodded, and immediately signalled everyone back into the temple, where it was supposedly safer. The Council of Elders tried to hold the Fire Nation military off, but to little avail as more tanks made their way onto the summit. Their cannons were still blazing, with a wall of fire surrounding us all. The smoke from each fire mixed with the clouds, creating a strange eclipse around the sun. Amidst the darkness, the pungent smell and sounds of people choking and wheezing, I had to help as many of the air benders back into the temple as possible. "Hurry," I shouted, pulling a couple of younger monks back as I shielded my face. The smoke's nauseating smell was slicing into my nostrils, and the fumes' heavier than air trait made it more difficult to bend away.

But the scene soon descended into chaos as the infantry finally made their way up the mountain, a series of fireballs coming out from a synchronized sequence of punches and kicks by the Fire Nation foot soldiers. Screams of terror was soon replaced by groans of pain as several people fell, their bodies a simmering wreck as the fire benders launched their full-scale assault. I couldn't even see if everyone had made it back, nor could I see how many of our monks were killed. All I thought about was the welfare of the young ones as I hurried through the halls, hoping they were in safer areas, away from the fight.

Yet I couldn't even take one step into the deeper parts of the temple, as the fire raging from the outside proved too much for our doors to handle. Soon, helmeted men in dark red uniforms raced through our halls, chanting their battle cries as they rampaged through every room. Even from my position away from them, I could see the doorway of each chamber light up, cries of agony echoing through the halls as the Fire Nation tore up everything and killed everyone in sight. This wasn't just a war they were involved in, it was genocide. "I must do something to distract them from the kids," I muttered.

Getting into position, I gathered all the air I could from around me and shot it down the hall, right in the direction of the Fire Nation troops. This would probably set them all chasing after me, but knowing my skills in air bending and evasive manoeuvres, I could probably handle it. All my years living as a daredevil meant this was nothing more than a new challenge for me, and I knew I was ready to tackle it head on. Besides, the children were the most important thing, as I had to get the troops away from them.

Luckily for me, I was soon joined at this hallway by several air benders, all of whom wielded their staffs as they held off the Fire Nation troops. That gave me just enough time to dash off to check on the youngsters. I was about to reach the bottom of the temple, just outside of the innermost chamber when a series of Fire Nation troops arrived. "Freeze, old man," they barked, "tell us where the Avatar is hiding!"

My eyes tilted back and forth, trying to find an escape route. If I stood my ground here, it would pretty much give away the fact that there were children in the other room. And if I ran back up the way I came, I would sandwich myself and the other air benders between two Fire Nation battalions. Even though I had faith in the others in beating the fire benders back, the risk was too great. Glancing to the side, I saw an exit to the back, where the Sky Bison pens were held. Based on the smells from that direction, I could tell the fire benders probably scorched the place as well, leaving who knew how many Sky Bison dead. My hands balled into fists as I imagined the merciless killings that occurred. How could these people have such a disregard for all living things?

Turning back to the helmeted team, I took a deep breath and calmed my mind. Even if I had to fight them, I had to do it in a wise way that limited damage to our people. "You won't get the Avatar here," I responded slowly, "the Avatar is gone. You will not find what you seek here, so please stop the senseless killings immediately."

That only got the leader of this battalion seething with anger. "You're lying!" He roared, sending a jet of flames my way. Just as the orange wall collapsed in on me, I spun around and threw myself at the opening, all the while shooting streams of air at the fire benders. I could see those standing at the front stagger back, but quickly got back to their positions as I hurried out the door. There wasn't much room for me to run, as I realized sooner or later, I had to stand my ground and fight the Fire Nation.

Flames engulfed the bison pens as I barged through, not even bothering to check the welfare of the animals as I tried to pull the troops away from the interior. I scanned around the area, trying to find a spot for me to go as the battalion hustled out from inside. More fire shot out from the soldiers as they pursued me with great ferocity. "You can't run anymore," the team leader taunted, "we have the power of the comet, which will be near our world for the next few days. We already attacked the Western Air Temple, and took out everybody inside. You might as well stop lying to us and give us the Avatar, because we're not afraid to use our enhanced fire bending powers right now."

My heart skipped a beat at the announcement, as I realized why it became so hard to defeat them. Skill-wise, I had to say that most air benders were of equal strength, but the Southern Air Temple had a relative edge in terms of technique and experience. But even the most skilled air benders had difficulty defeating the Fire Nation, which meant whatever this comet was doing to their powers, it had an impact. Waving my arms in a circular motion, I whipped up as much wind as possible, sending them to the battalion's direction. "Then feel free to kill me, for I am ready to defend my people." I replied.

Barely seconds passed when the first line of troops marched forward to me, a line of fireballs heading my way. Despite the smoke covering the area, meaning the air quite impure for bending, I still managed to get enough to bat the flames down. I stared around me and saw that I was surrounded by Fire Nation troops, meaning my chances of getting out alive were very slim. A limited area for manoeuvring, along with thick smoke that prevented access to purer air for bending purposes placed me at a disadvantage. Still, I soldiered on, getting into a defensive stance to field another round of attacks.

There would be no time to react as a hail of fire rained down on me. While I wheeled around furiously, whipping up a small vortex around me to deflect the fire balls away. Even with this more advanced air bending skill, I could still several fall through the cracks, scorching my clothing and the ground underneath. With various parts of my body zinged by fire, immense pain soon took over, making it more difficult to move at all. By the time the barrage ended, I could barely stand, my legs wobbling in fatigue.

Sensing that the Fire Nation troops weren't about to let up, I had to go on the offensive. The Air Nomad philosophy was to avoid conflict and respect all life, but in air bending, there were rarely used techniques that allowed us to damage opponents. Taking a deep breath, I stretched out my arms and, gathering some air, swept them across the Fire Nation formation. The winds rippled down at the way and slammed into the soldiers, knocking several off their feet and tumbling backwards. Staying with my momentum, I spun around and blew at the troops on the other side of the formation, letting out a huge stream of air from my mouth to push back those troops. Hopefully, this gave me a bit more room to move, allowing me to drag my injured body to a safer place.

But there was no time to do so, as the battalion leader took action on me. From my strained vision, I could see him wheel his arms around and charging up a huge plume of fire. I struggled to maintain balance, circling my arms to create an air shield just as the leader spun around and unleashed the flames. The next few moments played out in slow motion as my hastily-made shield soon broke down, the air no match for the raging fire lumbering towards me. Before long, a searing amount of heat coursed through my body, my skin and clothing crumpling in flames as numbness soon overtook me. With nothing more than orange surrounding my every side, I soon found myself collapsing to the ground, unable to move even though I still had some senses working.

I could barely make out the blurred image of the battalion leader cruelly strutting up to me, his words nothing but slurs as he pointed his troops to various places. I knew, at this current situation, my time was probably up. My home was about to be destroyed, and probably all its inhabitants were about to die. Everything I cherished, from the natural beauty of the environment, to the laughter of young air benders playing, even to the Sky Bison pens, all that was about to be wiped out. In my mind, I could only wonder what brought this type of destruction about, and what made the Fire Nation behave this way.

As each soldier's boots clopped away from me, my mind could only wander back to my number one concern: Aang. I had no idea where he was, and what went through his mind when he left. I knew that the Council of Elders, with their decision to split us up, truly scared him, and maybe it was the unclear vision that drove him to run away. In any case, I could only hope that he reached safety, away from this destruction and mayhem. Aang was the only hope now, for the other air temples, should they survive the attacks, and the rest of the world. I could only hope that he could find the teachers needed so he could learn the other elements, and stopped the Fire Nation in time. Otherwise, I shudder to think what the world would be in for. As the last men left, the battalion leader muttered to me, "Since you're of no use to us, why don't we put you out of your misery."

With that, he reeled back and charged up a fire ball with his fist. This short-range attack, similar to an explosive, was meant to do ultimate damage to a close-up opponent, and for my case, that meant ending my life. As the fire fist came closer to my face, the bright sphere dominating my line of vision, only one thought formed in my head:

My name is Gyatso. That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic
Ch. 12: Azula, Part 1

*****

The chamber was as dim as it was wide, with only a single row of flames shining and flickering before me. I stood confidently at the front, my back straight and my arms stretched out to either side as my father looked on in pride. He was the only reason I came to this meeting with my grandfather, Fire Lord Azulon, who sat above me at his throne on the altar. Father had asked me to perform my latest fire bending techniques before the Fire Lord, and given my superior skills, I was happy to oblige.

And Fire Lord Azulon watched intently as I got into my stance, my arms swept across the air and repositioned at my waist. Grandfather used to be a powerful man, with fearsome fire bending skills and an iron-fisted authority, but personally I felt he was over the hill. With someone this elderly still on the throne, how was it that the Fire Nation could incorporate new ideas into the war effort, finally finishing all the good work started by Great-Grandfather Sozin? Dad would make a much better Fire Lord, I thought.

Before long, my punches and kicks sliced through the air, with flames emitting from my every move. The flames danced along with me as I sailed around the room, the raw power of fire on full display as I jumped, flipped, weaved and twisted throughout. It was all easy for me, as I had always been deemed the fire bending prodigy. But for my doofus brother Zuko, who joined us for this meeting, this was something he shouldn't even think of attempting. Seriously, how could anyone that incompetent be even showing up to this important meeting with the Fire Lord?

Now, with all the fire surrounding my body, it was time to finish it off with a flourish. Gathering my momentum, I raced towards Fire Lord Azulon, feeding off of the wall of fire he had before him. I was taught that aggression and fieriness were key to fire bending, and what better way to show that than with this new move I developed. The whole world seemed to slow down as I propelled into the air, leading with my shoulder as fire burned out from my right foot. My eyes stayed on Grandfather, his emotionless mug emerging from behind his flickering flames like an apparition as I twisted my body around. Letting the right leg fly, I unleashed a kick into the air, sending fire to the skies.

The roar of that shot echoed throughout the chamber even as I landed perfectly on the ground, the fire most likely hitting the roof. I could only smirk as my father showered me with compliments. "She's a true prodigy, just like her grandfather, after whom she's named." Try beating that one now, Zuzu. There was no way you could match me.

But knowing my stubborn brother, he had to use every attempt to take the stage. "I'd like to demonstrate what I've been learning," he declared, stepping up to the Fire Lord just as I took a seat next to my father. I could only roll my eyes as Zuko copied my stances completely. Let's see how he would make a fool out of himself this time.

It didn't take long to find out, as by the first manoeuvre, Zuko landed square on his back, the collision so hard that I could feel the tremors all the way from my seat. I could only snicker as Zuko tried again, and fell again. The clumsy oaf just didn't know when to quit, did he? And to no one's surprise, Grandfather didn't seem impressed at all as he gazed down at Zuko with disappointed eyes, wondering why his time was wasted.

As expected, my mother, Fire Lady Ursa, had to approach Zuko and tell him how proud she was of him, and how he kept fighting no matter how hard it was. It nearly made me gag watching the scene, but momma's boy had to have his gross moments, and it sickened me. It took Fire Lord Azulon to cut into the scene and state exactly what was on my mind regarding Zuko. "Prince Ozai, just tell me what you want. Everyone else, go!" He ordered, waving his hand at us to direct us to the door.

My fussbudget mother led the way as Zuko and I followed her out, Zuko's eyes never leaving the ground as he trudged out in shame. But knowing that my father was here to deal with serious matters, I couldn't help but stay behind. So, just as the Fire Lady stepped out from the chamber, I grabbed Zuko by the sleeve and sneaked us behind the back curtain, covering ourselves up but leaving room for us to hear what was going on.

We slipped our faces out just in time to here our father address the Fire Lord. "Father, you must have realized, as have I, that with Lu Ten gone, Iroh's bloodline has ended. After his son's death, my brother abandoned his siege at Ba Sing Se, and who knows when he'll return home," he described the case of Uncle Iroh, my tea-obsessed fuddy-duddy uncle who was the general leading the greatest invasion of the Earth Kingdom in history. He had those inferior dirt-loving pigs on the run until his son, our cousin Lu Ten, died, making him so choked with grief that he couldn't continue the war.

Just then, Dad stood up and faced Grandfather. "But I am here, Father, and my children are alive," he continued, his tone filled with strength. If anyone wondered where I got my speech from, this was it. The pose and posture my father took was the perfect example of what a Fire Lord should be, unlike his royal kookiness who seemed more fascinated with enjoying himself. It truly made me wonder how the laziest man in the Fire Nation became its top general. "Revoke Iroh's birthright. I am your humble servant, here to serve you and our nation. Use me!" he suggested, getting on his knees again.

Apparently, that touched a nerve with my grandfather, who refused to shift the position of heir from Uncle Iroh to my father. "You dare suggest I betray Iroh, my firstborn, directly after the death of his beloved son?" he roared, the flames around the throne becoming hotter and brighter, to the point where inside the curtain, Zuko and I had sweat dripping down our faces. "I think Iroh has suffered enough, but your punishment has scarcely begun!" Grandfather ranted, his voice echoing throughout the chamber.

With that, the flames around Fire Lord Azulon shot into the air, engulfing all that before us in a fiery ball of orange. Being the sissy he was, Zuko shot out from the curtain and raced straight for the door, not even waiting for what was about to come. But I knew better than that, as I stayed and heard out the so-called punishment for my dad. If the Fire Lord felt he could bully through someone as smart as Dad, he was out of his mind.

"Your punishment should fit your crime," the Fire Lord growled, the flames still burning brightly, "you must know the pain of losing a firstborn son by sacrificing your own." With that, he dismissed the meeting, refusing to hear another word from Dad's mouth. It was evident that there was no backing down from the Fire Lord, and I was convinced that my father had to figure a way out. Still, it was fun to torment Zuko with this information. Sneaking from the curtains, I stepped out of the chamber and headed straight for Zuko's bedroom, wondering what his reaction would be should I tell him.

"Dad's going to kill you," I taunted in a sing-song voice. I leaned casually against Zuko's door frame, glancing in at the now awoken individual who clutched his blankets and shaded his eyes in irritation. "really, he will." I re-enacted the scene before Zuko, telling him how Fire Lord Azulon wasn't compromising on his verdict. "I'm only telling you for your own good. Why don't you find a nice Earth Kingdom family who will adopt you?" I sneered as I sat on the edge of his bed, trying to gauge his expression. It was so obvious that Zuko was scared, but did everything in his power to hide it.

And as Zuko's luck would have it, Mom had to barge in and shooed me out. Demanding a talk with me, she dragged me to the hallway, a fume etched permanently onto her face. To me, I didn't care, as the sounds of Zuko pathetically reassuring himself by claiming that I always lied was all worth it. Besides, even when Mom favoured Zuko all the time, I had Dad's respect, and a future Fire Lord was way more important than some prissy lady who claimed to know everything about proper behaviour.

But my dear mother barely got a word off before Dad intervened, demanding he had a word with her. This time, I obeyed orders to leave, as it was Dad who ordered me to go. Even then, I walked extra slowly, hoping to hear as much of the conversation as possible. Despite the murmurs, I clearly heard my father state authoritatively, "After today, the Fire Nation, as well as the world, will be in for a change."

*****

"I come with a message from home. Father has changed his mind, and family is now very important to him." I stated, keeping my posture and tone as serious as possible. It had been years since the event at the throne room, and Fire Lord Azulon soon gave way to my father, Fire Lord Ozai. Apparently, the plot to kill Zuko never hatched out, as our grandfather passed away the very night it was supposed to happen. Father never revealed the details, but I suspected it had something to do with Mom, as she disappeared from the palace ever since. With Uncle Iroh still too traumatized by Lu Ten's death, nobody was there to challenge for the throne, leaving my father succeeding as the new Fire Lord.

And recalling when my father told my mother that change was about to happen, he wasn't kidding, as every aspect of Fire Nation life was dedicated to the warfront. We had everything planned out for several strategic battlegrounds, and to no one's surprise, my incompetent brother had to speak out and challenge those plans. That was why Father didn't even hesitate in teaching him a lesson by challenging him to an Agni Kai, which the coward tried to avoid, even as they approached the arena. Even when Zuko begged for forgiveness, I felt Father did the entire world a favour by flaming him across the face, declaring that he dishonoured the country and banishing him.

And here he was, three years later, the scarred tissue around his left eye prominent as ever. Zuko's lone goal on this banishment was to capture the log-lost Avatar from the Air Nomads. Without Mom around, Zuko had no one left to lean on for support, which was all the better for the Fire Nation, as we couldn't possibly keep weaklings like these around to slow down our progress. Either way, things were about to take another drastic change, as I continued my explanation. "He's heard rumours of plans to overthrow him. Family are the only ones we can really trust. He wants you home." I concluded.

An ominous silence descended upon the lodge, as even the sounds of birds chirping in this resort town dying down as I felt Zuko mull my words over. I knew home was very important to him, as his three years of drifting across the world hardened his resolve to regain his honour. That was why, with this move, it was perfect to get him to come back. "You should be happy," I pointed out, tilting my head to better gauge Zuko's expression. Zuko now had his face looking out the window, leaving only his side turned to me. "I just brought you great news!" I added, hoping to hear him react.

Just then, Uncle Iroh had to cut in, insisting that Zuko merely needed time to mull things over. That was when I had to raise my voice to keep him in line, as any little move by this oversized hunk of lard would ruin my plans. For the last three years, the only one who accompanied Zuko on his journey was Uncle Iroh, as he effectively retired from the Fire Nation military after Father ascended the throne. Despite his hedonistic attitude, I actually suspected that Zuko had gotten along quite well with Uncle, meaning his every word might change Zuko's mind. Had that happened, my plan would fall to pieces.

Turning back to Zuko, I told him I would give him some time to take it in. "I'll come and call on you tomorrow. Have a good evening." With that, I strolled out of the hut and back to the harbour, where my escort ship was waiting. I boarded the vessel and headed straight for my room, where I would spend the rest of the night.

As I closed the door behind me, I realized what a great job I did in getting Zuko to think my way. Really, the story about Father wanting him to come home was all a lie, as he never wished to see Zuko again. The main thing was to capture Zuko and Uncle, who were branded as traitors to the Fire Nation. But knowing that Uncle was a skilled fire bender, capable of taking out even the strongest battalion, a different tactic was needed, hence the story. For something I completely fabricated, I believed I did quite well.

I quickly changed out of my Fire Nation military uniform and into something more comfortable as I pondered Zuko's next move. I realized that to get someone with as stubborn a mind as Zuko to change, the best way was to attack his wants, and that must include family. In my view, everyone in the world was like this, including our enemies from the Earth Kingdom. No matter how stubborn they were, no matter how much they resisted, our military would defeat them once and for all, as all we needed to do was to hit their needs the hardest. After all, Great-Grandfather Sozin started this not as a war, but as a way to share our technology and culture with the rest of the world. Why would these inferior beings even want to reject something advanced that could better their world?

By the time morning arrived, I had received the news: Zuko and Uncle Iroh were to board our ship for the Fire Nation. That meant everything had to be prepared to look like an official welcoming party. I immediately got changed and summoned the guards, having them stand on guard along the pier leading to the boarding ramp. I dispatched the captain of this ship, a loyal servant but a bumbling idiot, to greet the two as they arrived. When things were under my control, inefficiency was out of the question, especially when dealing with my tricky uncle who always had something up his sleeve.

Soon, the two figures, one lean and tall while the other stout and wide, made their way to the ship. "I'm so glad you decided to come," I greeted them as they reached the ramp. The soldiers behind them fell in formation, ready to board with them as I called to the captain, "set our course for home." There was no way I could fail now.

But then, I realized I spoke too soon, as the knucklehead of a captain declared that the boat be readied to take the prisoners home. I could only stutter in frustration as sheer pandemonium took over at the pier. Fire Nation guards tried pouncing on my uncle, but to no avail as the plump man fended off all attackers with using a single bit of fire. Zuko, however, was more livid as he scaled the ramp, shoving the captain off and into the water below. That was the only thing I enjoyed the entire time, as my fume refused to leave my face. "You lied to me!" Zuko roared as he closed in on me.

I smirked, turning my back on him as I strolled nonchalantly to the other side of the ship. "Like I've never done that before," I scoffed. By the time my vision was on the ocean, I could hear the sounds of fire blasting out of fists as Zuko took on the remaining guards standing in his way. Even should he resort to using force, I was ready for him, given my superior skills in fire bending and the development of new techniques.

Zuko was predictable as ever, emitting two fire blades from his hands and swung them furiously at me. There was almost no challenge to this as I dodged his every move with ease. "You know, Father blames Uncle for the loss at the North Pole," I sneered, referring to a second military defeat by the Fire Nation. Hundreds of ships from the Fire Nation fleet laid siege at the North Pole, with Uncle Iroh as the admiral's head advisor, and we still lost. That was unforgiveable. "And he considers you a miserable failure for not finding the Avatar!" I taunted Zuko, pointing to his fruitless search, "Why would he want you back home except to lock you up where you can no longer embarrass him!"

That only got Zuko in a bigger rage as he came with me with intense heat shooting from his hands. His grunts of frustration echoed off the ship as he tried to slash at me, each time ending with a near miss. Unfortunately, our mother wasn't here to give him consolation for trying and failing, and I was getting kind of tired of his pathetically disorganized flailing. Deciding it was time to end the fight, I grabbed one of his arms as he parried, whipping it circularly and locking it in a downward position. With his body exposed in an open pose, it was time for me to show him what true fire bending was like.

My free hand shot forward, sending a blue fire blast into the air. Because of my higher skills in fire bending, my fire burned stronger and hotter than those from a regular fire bender, hence the different colour. It was inches away from Zuko's face, nearly giving him another scar as I blew him back. We were currently halfway up another ramp going to the control deck, and I ended up shoving Zuko down the steps and back onto the main deck. Thuds and bangs sounded from the metallic haul as Zuko landed in the middle of the ship, with nothing around him. It was perfect for testing out my newest technique.

Waving my hands around, I gathered all the energy within me, ready to unleash it in one shot. This was one of the most advanced skills in fire bending called lightning bending. I picked it up from my father, who told me that it would be fatal should it strike its target. But given who my latest target was, it only gave me more incentive to use it. Feeling immense electrical power surging through my body, the static sizzling from my hand, I pointed my finger at Zuko and prepared to let loose the attack.

But before I could reach the final stage, I felt a tight grip around my hand. A soft, muffled hissing sound emanated from the source as I glanced up to see Uncle Iroh right next to me, his rough hand absorbing the energy away from mine. It was like a leech stuck on an animal in the swamp as Uncle squeezed the lightning out of me, sucking it all in before letting it loose. From his finger, the electricity blasted into the skies, slamming into the cliffs above the resort they stayed in earlier. The unbelievable power created a mini avalanche as rocks and other debris crumbled into the water. Sure it was a sight to marvel at, but now my chance at defeating my brother was lost.

As if that embarrassment wasn't enough, Uncle Iroh then had to throw me into the water. While I was a superior fighter in speed and strength, I had to admit I was no match to Uncle in size. With his weight, even a small attack could quickly gather momentum as he sent me into the cold liquid below. By the time I resurfaced, they were already gone. "No one gets away with it like that," I snarled, swimming my way to shore. From now on, I decided that these two would become fugitives, and anyone harbouring those two traitors would be punished severely. The hunt was about to begin.

*****

I could feel the setting sun beat its rays onto my back as I rode my Basilisk into this abandoned town somewhere in the middle of the Earth Kingdom. Ever since Zuko and Uncle Iroh became enemies of the Fire Nation, I had spent most of my energy and time crisscrossing the Earth Kingdom, hoping to hunt them down. A few days ago, I visited the recently conquered city of Omashu, now renamed New Ozai, where the new governor's daughter, Mai, was an old classmate of mine. Along with Ty Lee, another former classmate who had joined the circus, the three of us decided to go on this mission together, as I figured that there was no way we could lose, with our fighting skills.

But at Omashu, a little incident happened that allowed me to set my eyes on a new target. Mai's infant little brother Tom Tom, for some strange reason, fell into the hands of the residents, who departed the city en mass. While we originally offered them a trade, with us giving up Omashu's former king Bumi, it was discovered that the long-lost Avatar was with them. While the young boy tried to escape with Bumi, we managed to catch him in the act and chased them out of town. But that meant there was another fish to fry, and if I could catch the Avatar alongside Zuko, then the honour doubled for me.

I finally saw the young Avatar, seated on the ground in the middle of the ghost town. Using a new piece of Fire Nation technology, we pursued and attacked their group all night, to the point where fatigue would supposedly sink them. Sizing my foe up, I could see he was about twelve years old, completely bald, and had an arrow leading to his forehead. Smirking, I stood confidently next to my lizard as the Avatar squinted at me, the dark bags under his eyes sagging like bricks as he demanded, "Alright, you caught up with me. Now who are you and what do you want?"

I snickered, figuring that this battle would end real soon. Trying to sap as much of his energy as possible, I taunted him by making him guess. "Here's a hint," I replied, lifting a hand to cover my left eye, "I'm chasing the Avatar to restore my honour!" I declared, doing my best impersonation of my traitorous brother.

The Avatar barely moved, his eyes barely able to stay open as he glanced at me helplessly. "Now it's over. You're tired and you have no place to go. You can run, but I'll catch you." With that, I got into a battle stance, ready to spring onto my prey.

To my amusement, the Avatar got onto his feet, his hand gripped tightly around his staff as he declared that he would not run away. Knowing our conditions, there was almost no chance he could win. "Do you really want to fight me?" I retorted.

Then, from out of nowhere, an Ostrich Horse bounded into the ghost town, its rider leaping off and landing right between the Avatar and me. The hat lifted off of the rider's head, revealing that all-to-familiar scarred face. "Back off, Azula," the gruff tone of Zuko growled at me, "he's mine." He had one hand stretched out to his either side, ready to shoot fire at both the Avatar and me.

My eyes tilted back and forth between Zuko and the Avatar. I had to admit that I was in somewhat of an awkward position, as I had to go offensive against the Avatar but play defence against Zuko. But if I could take them both down at the same time, it would be a great day for me. Besides, knowing how superior my skills were compared to these two amateurs, losing was near impossible. I kept my eyes on mainly Zuko, as I planned to take him out and used that momentum to propel myself towards the Avatar. Any slight movement by my brother and it was the perfect time to attack.

That perfect moment came when Zuko tilted his head slightly towards the Avatar, who seemed like he was trying to find an escape route. It gave me just enough time to create a fire blast as I twisted my body around, feeling the flames surge through my arm and out my finger. Everything seemed to move in slow motion as the blue fire slammed into Zuko, sending him straight into a wooden pillar. The thin wood snapped like a twig, causing parts of a roof to collapse and tumble onto Zuko. Good riddance, I thought. Now, I could turn my focus straight on the Avatar, the final prize of the day.

I lifted my head to see the bald boy racing off, lifting open his staff and turning it into a glider. Typical Air Nomad cowardice, as they never dared to face their battles head-on. No wonder Great-Grandfather Sozin was able to ambush their troops with such ease, as they probably didn't bother to practice their techniques at all. Just as he took to the skies, I showed him what a true battle was about. Whipping together even more fire, I slashed my arm down vertically, creating a huge fire scythe that sliced through the air. The boy's glider took the brunt of the hit, twisting out of control before slamming down both staff and flyer. As the ground shook, I could see him in his defenceless pose.

I took advantage of his position by leaping onto a nearby building and raced to the Avatar via rooftops. As I pounced down onto him, there was nowhere for him to go. This was where the merciless power of fire bending came in handy, as I did a perfect leg whip, scorching the earth as he tried to crawl away. But to no one's surprise, Zuko had to get between us and interrupt the fight. While Mom would be proud of his tireless efforts to keep fighting, now was not the time to interrupt, as the Avatar was the most important thing here. As I dodged his fire balls all the while keeping an eye on the Avatar, I could only wonder where Mai and Ty Lee were. They were supposedly chasing the Avatar's group members, which shouldn't be hard to defeat. So what was taking them so long?

I let my guard down for just a moment, and Zuko nearly tackled me. His body sailed through the air, eclipsing the sun and placing his face in silhouette as I ducked out of the way. This distraction wasn't about to do me any good, as it meant the Avatar could run off the other way. Realizing a new possibility, I stretched my arms out in opposite directions and blasted fire to my either side, sending Zuko to the ground again and the Avatar running up a flight of stairs. Without Mom to console him, I didn't even turn to Zuko as I chased the Avatar, who disappeared through a hole in the wall. Confounding he might be, but this young boy was no match to someone with my skills.

But I spoke too soon, as my blazing speed nearly took me off the ledge. In the midst of the chase, I didn't realize that the Avatar escaped into an emptied-out building, with only a thin ledge overlooking at least a two-storey drop. The Avatar was on the other side, hovering in the air on a spinning air ball, waving at me tauntingly as I tiptoed my way back to safety. How dare he be this treacherous and pull off a dirty trick like this, I thought. Should I get back on balance, he would be burned to a crisp.

Again, it had to be Zuko who ruined my chances, as the big oaf followed me into the building and made the same mistake I almost made. I had no idea how he got back to his feet, or how he could make it up here this quickly, but here was my bumbling brother lumbering into the building and, believe it or not, falling into the hole below. Had it not been for the chase, I would have found that hilarious. And because of that fall, it took my eyes off the Avatar, who managed to get back onto the ledge. The sneaky little wretch took another side-shot at me as he hurried past, sticking one hand out and shoved me. Even with my excellent balance, the surprise attack got me reeling back and falling over.

But there would be no embarrassment of joining Zuko in the mud for me, as I twisted my body in the air and managed to land on my feet. Zuko was just stirring when I could hear the Avatar sneak back into the open area of the ghost town. I could feel my frustration level rising as this chase had gone on for long enough, and Zuko had done enough to delay their inevitable capture. Banished prince or Avatar, they were both my enemies, and it was time I treated them both as such. Letting my anger feed the flames, I sent a fist at Zuko, shooting the fire bomb straight at his body.

The explosion rocked the entire building, causing it to weaken even more than its current state. Zuko was sent flying out to the open, his body's landing on the ground blew up more dust. I used this as covering for me to escape, jumping back out and sending yet another round of fire at the Avatar, who tried to scale another building. I seethed with anger at another one of his attempts to escape. Even if he weren't going to fight back, the least he could do was face me with honour and courage. But to run off every time there was a battle was the lowest of the low, and in my mind he shouldn't even call himself the Avatar if he were to behave like this. Clutching my fist, I sent the biggest fire ball yet his way, slamming it into the building and tearing the wall to bits.

That did the trick as the Avatar collapsed into the building, his body covered by debris as I marched up to him. There was no way he could escape now, not with depleted energy and multiple injuries. As he glanced up, struggling hard to escape, I set the entire room on fire, making sure there was no way out. His grunts of agony were music to my ears, as I finally had the greatest obstacle to the Fire Nation's success in my grasp.

But a violent tug on my arm caused me to reel back, the sudden jerk sending me hurtling to the side. I turned around to see a teenage girl dressed in blue holding a water whip, cracking the debris around the Avatar and freeing him. I stepped out of the house in pursuit of the Water Tribe girl when a teenage boy clad in blue swung at me with a club. Gritting my teeth, I parried against the two Water Tribe siblings and the Avatar, a three-on-one battle that placed me on the defensive. While I remained calm, my mind was seething as I wondered how these two pathetic Water Tribe peasants bested Mai and Ty Lee. Did they even want to fight or did they let the water benders go?

As I eyed my three enemies, I was met with another surprise as some rocks shot up from the ground and tripped me up. "I thought you guys could use a little help," a young girl's voice announced from behind me. I could only grit my teeth as a fourth member of the Avatar's group zoomed in on me. So now they also have an earth bender on their team? This would only make my job more difficult. Perhaps I should retreat now and bide some time before thinking up of another plan? There were some new pieces of technology being developed by our military, so maybe those should be considered?

But I barely took three steps before an oversized body got in my way, the large abdomen shoving into me and bouncing me back. I looked around and saw myself surrounded, not only by the Avatar's group, but also by Zuko and Uncle Iroh. Never in my life had I envisioned a six-on-one situation, let alone one where my own brother and uncle were playing for the other team. "Look at this," I commented, "enemies and traitors all working together. I'm done, I know when I'm beaten," I told them, raising my hands.

That seemed to have taken them by surprise, as none of them expected to see me surrender. But that all played into my hands, as I picked the oldest and the most skilled to attack. Aiming right at Uncle Iroh, I shot a blue flame straight into his chest. The older man twirled around in slow-motion, clutching his sternum in pain as he collapsed onto the ground. Knowing Zuko, he was definitely going to turn to Uncle Iroh, leaving me with the Water Tribe weaklings, the shrimpy earth bender, and the goofy baldy, hardly enough ammunition to keep me in one spot. As Zuko hollered in shock, I leapt away from the group, just in time to avoid all four elements being shot at me at once. There was a spectacular explosion, but too bad I couldn't stay to see it, as I had better things to do.

As I rushed back to my Basilisk and hurried away from here, I could only think about Mai and Ty Lee, and how incompetent they must be to let those two water benders escape. Not only that, Zuko had to continue with his obsessive hunt for the Avatar, with total neglect for the bigger goal of aiding our great nation. How could I even deal with imbeciles like these? Grimacing, it was time I showed the world what true power was all about, and I was intent on getting contacts with the nearest Fire Nation technology base.

*****

"You're so dramatic. What, are you going to challenge me to an Agni Kai?" I sneered at Zuko, standing at a broken wall in the vast Earth Kingdom palace. After a couple more failures with externally attacking the Earth kingdom capital of Ba Sing Se, I decided to change tactics and collapse the city from within. Mai, Ty Lee and I managed to sneak into the capital disguised as the Kyoshi Warriors, who we ran into and defeated on our way here. Now, with the Ba Sing Se secret police, the Dai Li, under my control thanks to the capture of their leader Long Feng, I had all the power I needed.

"Yes, I challenge you!" Zuko roared, getting into a fighting stance. Thanks to our disguises, the Avatar's group, who were staying in the city to plan for an invasion of the Fire Nation, couldn't distinguish us from the real Kyoshi Warriors. It was through the water bending girl Katara that we discovered Uncle Iroh and Zuko also settled here, and had opened up a tea shop. Realizing a good chance to capture both Zuko and the Avatar, I purposely faked a letter to them, claiming that the Earth King had invited them over for morning tea. It led to Uncle doing his fire-breathing technique, which caught some of us off guard, letting the oversized lard ball escape. But Zuko had to listen to his mommy and chose to keep fighting, leading to what would be a very painful lesson.

Smirking nonchalantly, I flatly refused him. "No thanks," I stated, letting the Dai Li agents around me to the work. As I observed before, they might be earth benders, but their killer instinct rivalled those from the Fire Nation, as shown by how quickly they subdued Zuko. Two agents lifted a huge block of earth, blocking the fire blast launched by my brother before forming earthen fists and shooting them at Zuko. They managed to grip his feet and one hand, effectively neutralizing his powers.

With a couple more fists, Zuko was all tied up. "We'll be taking him to the catacombs below the palace," the lead Dai Li agent informed me with a bow. I especially told them to not harm Zuko, keeping him as alive as possible so I could enact my future plans on him. Whatever decision he made, I knew I would win out.

I was in no hurry to return to the throne room, where I told Ty Lee and Mai to wait while observing the Earth King. The fact that the Earth Kingdom had a bumbling idiot for a leader only made things easier for me to handle. In my mind, a leader must be decisive, iron-willed, and be able to install fear into others. The fact that the Fire Nation had grown so strong was because Fire Lords Sozin and Azulon were capable of doing that, and my father Ozai was currently employing the same methods. I had made it clear to the Dai Li that anyone showing any hesitation to my commands would be punished for it, and that was why I wasn't surprised at how smoothly the capture of Zuko went.

As I strolled back to the others, I mulled over how I would present my case to Zuko. Although my idea that people would respond to threats against their safety with obedience, in exchange that I didn't cause them bodily harm, I realized that my brother was a more difficult case. Even before being banished, Zuko tended to create bonds with people, to the point where he would act almost irrationally. I recalled the morning after Fire Lord Azulon declared that Dad must kill him, Zuko didn't even bother asking why he was spared; rather, he ran off to the garden demanding to know where Mom went. Even when I recruited Mai to help our quest, I knew that Zuko had bonded with her before, and he might probably refuse to fight Mai. Given how strong his bonds were and how stubbornly he clung to them, he might be a bit more difficult to crack.

By the time I reached the throne room, there was sheer pandemonium. Mai was in a fierce deadlock with Toph, the petite earth bender from the Avatar's group, while Ty Lee was in some weird dance with Katara's brother Sokka, trying to stab at his chi points while he bobbed and weaved frantically. The increasingly pathetic scene had me shaking my head, as clearly Mai and Ty Lee didn't have what it took to get things done. Showing them what it was all about, I marched up to the Earth King and lit a fire on my finger. Not a single person moved as I shouted over the crowd, "This fight is over."

My opponents promptly raised their hands in surrender, letting Ty Lee disable them by blocking their chi. As the Dai Li agents dragged their crumpled bodies out of the room, I plopped myself into the Earth King's throne. Knowing that within days, this seat would officially belong to the Fire Nation, I couldn't help but feel a sense of pride. Not only would I have succeeded where my uncle and many others had failed, I also did it with almost no military power. Uncle and others might have plenty of military muscle to flex, but nothing could beat a good dose of strategizing and back-room deals.

Speaking of back-room deals, here was the man I supposedly made an alliance with, released from his prison cell. Before the beginning of the coup, Long Feng had promised me to give me the Avatar in exchange for having me release him from his cell. But knowing this old fool, he was bound to have more up his sleeve. "Now comes the part where I double-cross you," he stated, gesturing at the Dai Li agents lined up behind him, "Dai Li, arrest the Fire Nation princess!" he declared.

I cocked an eyebrow, mockingly staring at Long Feng as none of the Dai Li agents moved. Long Feng tried again, pathetically ordering his team to attack me, all to no avail. It almost seemed comical as the former fearsome head of the secret police now ranted until his voice became hoarse, demanding that the agents obeyed him. The perfect way to end this show was if Long Feng got on his knees and begged.

But I also knew Long Feng wasn't the type to plead, at least voluntarily. That was why I had to give him a bit of coaxing. "I can see your whole history in your eyes. You were born with nothing, so you had to struggle, and connive, and claw your way to power," I stated firmly, casting a downward gaze at the balding man, "but true power, the divine right to rule, is something you're born with." Gesturing at the robed figures behind him, I pointed at the throne emphatically as I continued, "They don't know which one of us is going to be sitting on that throne. But I know, and you know."

The golden moment came as Long Feng got to his knees, begging for mercy and forgiveness. Beads of sweat glistened off his hairless head as his forehead touched the ground, not daring to lift even a bit. Conceding that I beat him at his own game, I could only smirk in delight. But then again, knowing our statuses, it wasn't much of a contest, now was it? "Don't flatter yourself. You were never even a player!" I sneered, setting the old fool in his place again. Waving to the Dai Li, I instructed them to take their former leader back into his cell, where I would deal with him later on.

As Long Feng was re-arrested, I reflected upon the events of the past few days. Indeed, my superior planning skills and details in execution proved to be peerless. Even that pretender Long Feng fell prey to me, so what other challenge was there? But given the great disparity in skills, I was convinced that it proved my point: some people got to lead because they were fitter to, and some were merely followers because they did not have what it took. Such as how Mai and Ty Lee were always my followers, so should Long Feng. Now, all it took was to sway Zuko to my side, and my plan was complete.

*****

"I expected this kind of treachery from Uncle, but Zuko." I stated as I barged into the catacombs. True to my expectations, Uncle Iroh did manage to find Zuko, filling my brother's mind with all sorts of nonsense about how free he would be. Sensing a threat to our plans, the Dai Li agents I brought with me instinctively locked my uncle in a position where he couldn't move with green crystals, leaving me alone with my brother as I talked some sense into him. "Prince Zuko, you're a lot of things, but you're not a traitor, are you? It's not too late for you, you can still redeem yourself."

Even from his fixed position, Uncle Iroh continued his gibberish, declaring that the type of redemption I was offering to Zuko wasn't fit for him. Sneering at the pathetic old man, I taunted him by demanding that he let Zuko decide. "I need you, Zuko. I've plotted every move of this day, this glorious day in Fire Nation history, and the only way we win is by fighting together. At the end of this day, you will have your honour back. You'll have Father's love. You'll have everything you want!"I concluded emphatically.

Again, more sappy language from Uncle, begging Zuko to look inside his heart to see what he truly wanted, making me that much closer to gagging. But it didn't matter to me, as I had already plotted my next move. With the Fire Nation troops on their way here and the Avatar still within reach, there was still a chance that I could capture my targets. Turning to the other aisle of this vast cavern, I told Zuko, "You're free to choose."

The only light that shone was the reflections of the sunlight seeping through the cracks and bouncing off the crystals. I had some idea what the Avatar and the water bending girl Katara were headed to, as they probably wanted to get to their allies before the Dai Li found out about their escape. Earlier, I had already sent the two Dai Li agents who accompanied me back to the palace, and they probably already warned their team of the events. According to my calculations, it wouldn't be long before Dai Li agents filled up the catacombs and blocked off their every escape route. All I had to do was stall for time, even though I was confident I could take them both down.

I finally reached the opening of the next room, and saw the familiar figures of a boy in orange and a girl in blue rushing away from me. Summoning up some flames, I launched a huge fire bomb at them. I could see the Avatar turning around, lifting up a block of earth to stop my blast. I could only chuckle at his futile attempt as the shot sent the rocks flying and the young boy hurtling back. What kind of attack did he think this was, the weak shots sent out by my wishy-washy brother?

Before I could even admire the shot, the water bender sent a series of waves at me, whipped up from water in a nearby sewer. It didn't matter for me, as my fire could burn so hot that it would evaporate any water thrown at me in seconds. Just before I got the drenching of a lifetime, I lifted a wall of blue fire, heating the water and turning it into a steam cloud. A genius move, if I say so myself, as not only did I block the shot, but I created enough a smokescreen for me to ambush them. Their game was about to be over.

Leaping through the smoke, I sent myself hurtling through the air, laying a barrage of fire onto the ground below. All my enemies could do was to bring up a water shield to cover their heads, and even that barely lasted for a few more seconds. I kicked off a nearby pillar, just before the Avatar collapsed it with earth bending, and landed right between the two, with one hand pointed at each person. Not a sound could be made as my eyes tilted back and forth between the two, my mind racing at breakneck speed. With the presence of water and earth, it might be difficult to attack just one, as they could defend and attack simultaneously. Was there a way to hit them both at once and separated them?

But that question was soon answered as a huge red blast landed right between us. I looked up just in time to see Zuko standing there in a fighter pose, his eyes mirroring mind as he alternated looks between the enemies and me. Uncle was nowhere to be seen, and I wasn't sure if Zuko was on my side or theirs. I side-glared at Zuko, hoping to shoot down whatever thoughts he had of defecting to the other group, as there was no way he could reject my offer, especially when I would give him everything he longed for.

My doubts were finally eased as Zuko turned to the Avatar and fired away. The boy was surprised at this move as he was knocked across the labyrinth. I could only smirk as the room heated up, with Zuko sending fiery blast after fiery blast at Aang, which left me with the girl. I might have more difficulty handling a two-on-one, but when it was one-on-one for both of us, fire bending would have the upper hand.

I made my charge at Katara, who sent a thin but sharp wall of water at me. I knew it was risky going head on, so I side-stepped the attack, the liquid seemingly slowing down as it whizzed by me. Even with my athleticism, I couldn't dodge completely, as the water managed to nick off some of my hair. By the time the water passed, I had barely regained my balance. That was when my opponent had coated her whole body with water and created two long water arms. For once, I was actually caught off guard, as I had no idea how this attack worked, and what defences I could come up with against it.

I soon figured it out the hard way, as the long water arms were for disabling foes. Even before I got one fire blast out, I had water wrapped around one arm and one leg, making for an awkward position. I couldn't neither pull nor push, stuck in a pose where the water bender was in control of me. Gritting my teeth, there was no where I could lose when I came this far, especially to this inferior peasant from some run-down tribe.

As suddenly as I was caught in the trap, I was released, sending my body reeling back as the water bonds broke loose. I turned to see Zuko standing there, flames burning ferociously from his hands as the Avatar tried hard to disentangle himself from the rubble in the back. Switching tactics, I decided to switch positions with Zuko and went after the Avatar, all the while Zuko kept water girl here in check.

Staring down the bald boy, I powered myself up with flames at me feet, ready to propel myself towards Aang. As the surroundings around me blew past in a blur, I saw the Avatar summon a series of crystals around his body, creating some sort of green armour around him. What a fool, I thought, did he really think that could protect him?

I showed him the true power of fire bending as I slammed into the Avatar with full force. The crystals shattered within contact, sending the boy sailing through the air and slamming back-first onto a stalactite. I squinted through the debris, trying not to breathe in the dust as I made sure there was no more movement. If he wasn't dead, then he was bound to be unconscious, given the force of that impact. With one target still immobile, I could turn my attention to Zuko, who had Katara on the defensive.

Zuko and I moved synchronously, our bodies attacking as one as dual blasts of orange and blue hurtled at the Water Tribe peasant. No amount of water shielding could block the shots of two powerful fire benders, and it showed when our enemy crashed through a sea of crystals and crumpled to the ground. At the same time, reinforcements had arrived as Dai Li agents dropped from the ceiling, making sure the Avatar had no place to go. I had no idea how this kid regained consciousness so quickly, but either way, today was the day when the so-called saviour of the world tasted defeat.

I could see the worry in Aang's eyes, his back hunched, his eyebrows curled, and his lips quivering as the Dai Li surrounded him. He glanced around helplessly, almost like when Zuko tried showing off before Grandfather Azulon and failed miserably, before turning his back to us. Sitting himself to the ground, he created a crystal tent, covering his entire body. I could feel the entire Dai Li battalion freeze behind me, some muttering to each other in confusion. What was the Avatar trying to pull here?

Before long, a bright pillar of light shot up from the tent, causing all those around me to duck and shield their bodies. I was the only one who still had my attention on the Avatar, who now floated ominously above the crowd, his body glowing unusually. With my eyes squinted, I could tell that his body was static, with no chance of attacking at all. This was a perfect time to strike, as I harnessed the energy within me. Feeling the surge of power, I whipped around and blasted s bolt of lightning straight through his body.

That seemed to wake everyone up as the Avatar's body grew limp and dropped from the top of the cavern, with his consciousness really knocked out this time. It also meant we all were aware of Katara riding on her wave to the rescue as everyone leapt out of the way to avoid getting washed away. The Water Tribe girl held tightly to the Avatar, his lifeless body completely wilted. Now it was her turn to look helpless as we regained our formation, ready to attack once again. There was no escape for either one of them.

Before Zuko and I could even make a move, another fire bender entered the fray. Uncle Iroh jumped in out of nowhere and blocked off our path. "You've got to get out of here. I'll hold them off as long as I can!" He called to the water bender. Zuko and I were in shock, as Uncle's actions only proved my point that he did indeed betray us. As Uncle sent fire blasts at us, we could see from the corner of our eyes that Katara had taken Aang to a nearby waterfall and shot out of the labyrinth. It was too late for us to pursue, even as the Dai Li contained Uncle in another crystal tent, officially placing him under arrest.

But I wasn't worried, as I realized this move created another opportunity for a new contingency measure. Bringing Zuko back to the throne room, I told him that the bigger goal was nonetheless complete. "It's taken a hundred years, but the Fire Nation has conquered Ba Sing Se!" I beamed, sitting on the throne while Zuko stood beside me.

Zuko was in anything but good spirits, claiming that he betrayed Uncle. Sensing that was a problem, I had to set the record straight. "No, he betrayed you," I corrected him, "when you return home, Father will welcome you as a war hero. Today, you restored your own honour!" I reiterated, trying to remind him what his goal was.

Zuko dipped his head slightly, but I knew even the most complex person couldn't be pried from his own self-interests. Even with someone as stubborn and sentimental as Zuko, there were ways to get inside his head, and constantly bombarding him with home, family, and his honour was the most effective way to achieving this goal. As long as he got what he wanted, who cared that he threw Uncle Iroh aside? And even with the Avatar still missing, raising the possibility that questions might be issued at our conquest, what better way than to find a scapegoat to turn all my troubles on?

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 13: Azula, Part 2

*****

"Why did you tell Father that I was the one who killed the Avatar?" My brother barged into my room, demanding answer in an insecure tone. It was eerily similar to the time I barged into his room, telling him Dad would kill him all those years ago. Funny how things took a turn for the opposite, as that was now it was him demanding things from me, even as he was at his highest point.

I shook my head, trying to get the sleep out of my eyes. I hadn't had a good night's rest in my royal chambers since I first left to bring Zuko and Uncle Iroh back. As expected, Dad branded Uncle a traitor and threw him in prison, and requested a meeting with Zuko to redeem his honour. Apparently, it wasn't good enough for Zuko, who raced in and disturb my sleep. Insisting it couldn't wait until morning, I got up to face him.

I got a good look at him in his military uniform. Even with all the glory, his fists were clenched and his body trembled tightly. "You seemed so worried about how Father would treat you because you haven't captured the Avatar," I replied, nonchalantly eyeing him up and down, "I figured if I gave you the credit, you'd have one less thing to worry about. Call it a generous gesture, as I wanted to thank you for your help." I shrugged, glancing at my fingers and hoping to get him out of my room.

That only got Zuko even more volcanic, as he alleged that I was lying. The dim lights reflected off the fume on his face as I wandered away, deflecting his accusations. "What could I possibly gain by letting you get all the glory for defeating the Avatar? Unless, somehow, the Avatar was actually alive," I leaned into his face with a sneer.

Suddenly, the room grew deathly silent as Zuko's body twitched. I could catch his head dip ever so slightly as I made the remark. "All that glory would suddenly turn to shame and foolishness," I continued, marching back to my bed, "but you said yourself, the Avatar surviving the attack was impossible." I cocked an eyebrow at Zuko just as his eyebrows curled to impossible shapes. Smirking, I dismissed the now-hesitant Zuko out of my room. "Sleep well, Zuzu," I taunted as he marched out my door.

As Zuko's shadow disappeared, I could only grin at the latest ingenious move. Right now, Zuko was all comfortable and enjoying his life back home, with Mai being his girlfriend and all the senior members of the Fire Nation military command chain giving him their utmost respect. But I had some doubts that the Avatar was truly slain in Ba Sing Se. Even as I shot him through with lightning, there was a chance that he might have survived. After all, some of our troops from the Siege of the North told me water benders had healing powers, so it was possible that the Avatar might not have died.

And it was due to this insecurity that I had to get Zuko involved. I was never a fan of people or events that didn't go my way, so if it couldn't be rectified immediately then I would find some contingency measure to help me keep my status. The perfect way here was to declare Zuko the Avatar slayer and taking the blame off of me should the Avatar be alive. After all, Father trusted me over Zuko, so even if I ever got in trouble for it, I'd say the Avatar's death was told by Zuko, and I merely received it by word of mouth.

As I turned to a more comfortable position, it also made me realize how powerful I was in the Fire Nation hierarchy. My words were so strong they could even convince the Fire Lord himself, letting me control anyone and do anything I pleased. Nobody could influence Father more than me, and I was the only one Father would listen to. With everything going through me, I could keep tabs on everyone, and severely punish those who refused to obey. With that happy thought in mind, I slowly drifted off to sleep.

By the time morning seeped through my blinds, my body was entirely refreshed. Even as I entering the dining hall for breakfast, I felt like all the attention was on me. I felt it was rightly so, given the fact that all these people were staring at a war hero here. As I took a seat, I asked the nearest servant, "Where's Zuko?"

The maid bowed and responded that Zuko was off to see Mai, and the two would be going on a picnic together. I could only nod thoughtfully as I pondered the outcomes of this pairing. While it did make them happier, Zuko and Mai together might put me in a slightly disadvantageous position. Knowing how strongly Zuko bonded with people, they might drift away from my sphere of influence, making them harder to contain. What's more, Zuko's bonds might return him to Uncle Iroh, perhaps visiting him in prison, and who knew what could be said between the two? Either way, I must keep an eye on them.

I climbed to the outskirts of the capital, near the rim of the caldera of this large extinct volcano, surrounded by rocks and mountains on every side. The tops of these peaks were usually a gathering spot for romantics to observe the sun, and apparently Zuko and Mai were among them. Just as the two lovebirds kissed, using language sappy enough to make me puke, I crashed their party. "Zuko, can I have a word with you?"

Zuko grimaced, not appreciating my presence. "Can't you see we're busy?" he rudely retorted, turning back to kiss Mai and completely ignoring me. The two were so focused on each other that I didn't matter to them anymore, even though I was the one and only reason they were branded as heroes when they returned from Ba Sing Se.

But like any good strategist, I had other options. Turning to Mai, I told her that Ty Lee required her assistance, effectively neutralizing the usually emotionless girl from the equation. Ty Lee and Mai were always my lackeys, and whenever I requested one to do something, there would be no defiance. As Mai wandered off, I had my brother all to myself. "So, I hear you're been visiting Uncle Fatso at the prison tower?" I asked. It was no good to get direct answers, so why not bait the hook and let Zuko bite it?

And just like old times, Zuko fell for it, hook line and sinker. Roaring that the prison guard betrayed him by telling me, I simply mocked him by retorting, "No, you just did." I savoured every moment of this victory as Zuko slumped back down, sitting on the ground with his back hunched and his head dropped between his knees. Just as I had predicted, Zuko and Mai were strong as a pair, but were weak separately.

Crossing my arms, I insisted that I wasn't here to make further demands of Zuko, stating that I wanted nothing from him. "Believe it or not, I'm looking out for you. If people find out you've been to see Uncle, they'll think you're plotting with him. Just be careful, dumb-dumb!" I warned him, hoping to sway his mind.

Zuko didn't speak, but looking at his glum expression, I knew I got through to him. As long as Zuko doubted his relationship with Uncle Iroh, he would be kept in check. Personally, I felt strong bonds only hindered progress, as before every action Zuko would have to see if Uncle approved. Why couldn't things be like what Dad and I did, where we knew what to do and didn't hesitate in getting it done, regardless of the means? No matter what, I decided that it was best to keep Zuko guessing. As long as he had one strand of thought on Uncle, it would jeopardize the entire operation. With that in mind, I left Zuko alone and returned to the palace, hoping to sort more of these details out.

*****

"Okay, okay, calm down. I didn't mean what I said," I tried to reassure Ty Lee, who was on the verge of tears right now. It had been weeks since I last spoken with Zuko regarding Uncle Iroh, and now our father had other plans in mind. Realizing that it was the perfect time to proceed with the final stages of our war, he decided to meet with his closest advisors, and sent Zuko and me on a vacation to Ember Island. Mai and Ty Lee tagged along, and while we were on the beach we met a couple of guys claiming to be children of Fire Nation nobles, and they invited the four of us to their party.

And that was where we found ourselves, loitering around the dining hall of this large beach house. People wandered back and forth, chatting with each other and grabbed food, with most in short-sleeved clothing and shorts. In an attempt to see how the world truly viewed us, I chose not to reveal my royal status, relegating myself to the role of an observer while Ty Lee had her flirtation mood on in full blast. And I had to admit, she was doing a much better job at getting attention than I did. That was why when she came to me stating that the boys clung to her, I had to tell her that they didn't really like her.

Apparently, that hit Ty Lee a tad too hard, causing her to pretty much burst into tears. Normally I would laugh at how weak Ty Lee was under her preppy exterior, but I had to admit I was intrigued by how Ty Lee did it. Ty Lee got the boys to flock to her almost effortlessly, and perhaps I was a bit envious at all the attention she got. "Maybe I said it because I was a little jealous," I explained, whispering the very last word.

The sad expression on Ty Lee's face was wiped off completely, her formerly scrunched up face replaced with her jaw hitting the wooden floor below. "What? You're jealous of me? But you're the most beautiful, smartest, most perfect girl in the world! She responded incredulously, her arms waving up and down.

I was glad she pointed out all my traits, as everybody should, but that wasn't what I sought. "For some reason, when I meet boys, they act as if I'm going to do something horrible to them." I described, turning around and gazing at all the males in the room. I tried several times to start a conversation with the boy that invited us here, a teenager around my age by the name of Chan. It was to no avail, as he either didn't understand me or he didn't care. What was wrong with complimenting his sharp outfit by saying it could puncture the hull of an Empire class Fire Nation battleship?

Ty Lee smiled and shook her head. "If you want a boy to like you, just look at him, smile at him a lot, and laugh at everything he says, even if it's not funny," she instructed me. At first, I thought it was shallow and stupid, but if it meant breaking out of my usual mould and actually meeting someone new, then it was worth a try.

After a quick practice run with Ty Lee, I was ready to delve into the issue of talking with boys again. Locating Chan, I requested a tour of his parents' house, cutting short his chat with another girl. Placing my drink on the girl's head, I wandered off with my host, listening to his every word and stretching a grin so far across my face that I felt my cheeks would rip. In fact, I was surprised that I managed to get to the balcony alive.

We leaned on the railing, away from the stuffy party and loud people. There was nothing but night sky, the sandy beach, and waves gently splashing ahead of us. For a moment, the scene truly made me forget my role as a royal, and allowed me to integrate with those below my status. Most of the time, anything less than putting these inferior folks in their place would be the norm, but given what Ty Lee had said, maybe I should try enjoying it instead? After all, there were no boys of royal descent that I could speak with on a regular basis, so perhaps being second best would do.

Looking to my right, I saw Chan casually lean his back against the rail. "Is this your first time on Ember Island?" he asked, "It's a great place, if you like sand!"

Believe it or not, I actually found myself laughing to his joke. It wasn't just because I was taking Ty Lee's advice; rather, I actually found Chan a funny guy. I was giggling along to his every attempt to poke fun at the environment, almost like he was advertising how sandy this place was. "Welcome to Sandy Land!" He declared.

By the time he was done, we were both roaring in laughter as I tried not to split my sides open. As I glanced at the boy right next to me, I truly felt what Ty Lee was talking about. It wasn't about being royalty, it was about enjoying the company here. My eyes fell to his sleeveless shirt, revealing the chiselled limb before me. "Your arm looks so strong," I commented, my mind in a semi-trance as the smiling face came closer.

Before long, I found myself kissing the boy. What was considered taboo by my usual routine suddenly felt very normal, as I didn't feel the need to reject Chan. It was like my lips were attracted to his, letting our faces meld into one as we held onto each other. My face was flushed, the warm from the kiss lingering even as he pulled away from me. Still with his goofy grin, Chan responded to my compliment. "You're pretty."

Realizing the mutual attraction, I decided to take it a step further. "We will be the strongest couple in the entire world. We will dominate the earth!" I shouted, lighting two blue flames from my hands. Nothing was going to stop us now.

But that seemed to have the opposite effect on Chan, who shivered slightly and slowly scooted away. I could only fume as the boy sneaked back into the house and once again immersed himself within the crowd. "Coward," I fumed. Still, being around him was fun, and I truly hoped, after the war was over and we slaughtered all those Earth Kingdom pigs, I could return here with Chan and toast our great nation's victories.

By the time I returned to the party, it was sheer pandemonium. Any thoughts I still had on the romantic instant with Chan were shattered as Zuko was unceremoniously tossed from the party. As my brother slammed the door on his way out, I could see Chan in the middle of the room, trying to control his seething anger as a pile of debris were at his feet. My eyes tilted around, catching Mai fuming with her arms crossed while Ty Lee looking nervous. "What happened?" I asked my acrobatic friend.

Ty Lee quickly filled me in, claiming that Zuko erupted at a guest who knocked over his food, which he fetched for Mai. Then, when he saw Ruon-Jian, Chan's friend, speaking with Mai, Zuko immediately confronted him and threw him across the room. Ruon-Jian ended up landing on a vase belonging to Chan's grandmother, causing Chan to throw Zuko out of the party. Sensing tempers flaring between Mai and Zuko, I decided that we would leave as well. "It's time that the three of us had a chat with my brother."

While Ty Lee and Mai gathered at a secluded location at the beach, I went to fetch Zuko. In my mind, there was only one place that he would be: our family beach house, which we hadn't stayed in there for years. I could smell the stench of years of unclean materials locked away inside as I made out Zuko's figure standing there, holding some small trinket. Why was it not surprising that my brother would be so nostalgic? "Come down to the beach with me," I suggested, "come on, this place is depressing."

I took Zuko to where Ty Lee and Mai were. Zuko tried to greet Mai, who responded by crossing her arms and whipping her head away. Ty Lee tried to changed the subject by claiming it was chilly in the most chipper voice possible, but it was evident the tension hadn't gone away. Even as Zuko quickly strolled back to the beach house and hauled out some old materials to be used as firewood, emotions were still flying high.

By now, I was back to my usual self, analyzing my counterparts and trying to gauge their every word. Ty Lee, as usual, had to be chipper and tried to start a talk with Zuko, who just hurled our last family portrait along with some other goods into a fire he created through fire bending. When Ty Lee asked if Zuko still cared about family, it only sent Zuko into a rage. "You don't know me, so why don't you mind your own business?" he ranted at the former circus performer, "You're stuck in your little Ty Lee world, where everything is great all the time. Circus freak!" He yelled, tearing a strip into Ty Lee.

My eyes then tilted to Ty Lee, who was usually quite docile. That was why, when she actually tried to defend herself, I was taken aback, but also quite amused. "I joined the circus because I was scared to spend the rest of my life as a matched set. At least I'm different now. Circus freak is a compliment!" She retorted, glaring at my brother.

I cocked an eyebrow, surprised that Ty Lee would actually take anything in a negative sense. But what became more amusing was when Mai intervened, claiming that it was Ty Lee's thirst for attention that drove her to act this way. "You couldn't get enough attention when you were a kid, so you try to make up for it now." She stated.

Hearing that remark, I was quite impressed by her observation skills. Mai was quite quiet in her childhood, which actually served well strategically. But just being observational wasn't enough, as one must take advantage of the knowledge one gained through observing. Given that Mai had no skills in expressing or advancing herself, it was evident that she too was a failure. "That's why you're afraid to care about anything, and why you can't express yourself," I told her, referring to her parents' controlling natures.

And again, my comment touched a nerve, as it was Mai's turn to blow up at someone. First, she railed at me for not leaving her alone, and then she turned her shots to Zuko, as she claimed she still hadn't forgiven him for his actions. "Don't touch me, I'm still mad at you. There's no excuse for the way you've been acting." Mai snapped.

Now it was Zuko's turn to rant about the wrongs in his life. It was so predictable as he described how Father burned him in the face and banished him, forcing him through so much turmoil and hardship. But then, when it came to describe his return to the Fire Nation, he dropped a minor bombshell on us. "I should be happy for returning, but I'm not! I'm angrier than ever and I don't know why," he declared, his fists clenched.

Pursing my lips, I was determined to find out more about this. I still needed my brother for future plans, and the last thing that should happen was to turn him into a loose cannon. "Who are you angry at?" I demanded, casting a suspicious eye at him.

Surprisingly, Zuko became more and more flustered, not knowing what he felt or why he felt that way. Even as Mai, Ty Lee and I listed off name after name, there was no sure answer from him. Finally, just when his body seemed like it was about to explode, he slammed his fists down and cried to the skies, "I'm angry at myself!"

The large burst of flame ignited our fire to incredible heights, the heat scorching the entire area. Zuko could only hunch his back and face the sea, his body conceding to his own confusion as the fire simmered to nothing. "I'm not sure I know the different between right and wrong anymore," he muttered, his head shaking helplessly.

There was complete silence as I pondered those words. For some strange reason, the combination of Zuko's line and the party before where Chan and I kissed brought back a little-considered memory, one of my mother. While it was no secret that Dad was favouring me, it was just as obvious that Mom had favoured Zuko. Many times, during my taunts at Zuko, Mom would come up to chide me, but never in my mind did I imagine her true thoughts when one day, she said the unthinkable. "You're a monster."

My thought was cut short when Zuko and Mai made up, and in turn taunted me for being overly perfect. As usual, I had to assert the obvious, but somewhere in my mind that line just refused to go away. True, I hadn't been the perfect child in my mother's eyes, and I had done some things that she disapproved, so why did she have to go out of her way to make that statement? Moreover, why was it that, even as I tried to plough on with my life, using all the skills I picked up from Dad and making it to a position of power, this line still haunted me? Was it true that my superiority actually showed a flaw of sorts? Why did it have to be that some things could never go my way?

I quickly shook the thought out of my head as I faced the group. "Know what would make this trip really memorable?" I asked, rubbing my hands in glee. I wasn't too impressed that Chan, my so-called boyfriend, threw us out of the party, and it was fine time that I showed him some manners. Since he trashed my royalty status, I was going to get even by trashing his house. "Let's go, my friends." I exclaimed, pointing at the house.

As I climbed the stairs to Chan's place, my mother's image slowly disappeared from my mind. I wasn't about to let that hassling woman be a factor in future decisions. I had a war to plan, and any signs of weakness, embodied so visibly by her, must be taken out. Once vacation was over, it was time to get extra tough on our enemies.

*****

"So you're alive after all. But it doesn't matter, I've known about the invasion for months." I sneered at the three figures before me. It was truly odd that I was here in an underground bunker during a solar eclipse, facing a person many thought was dead. But nonetheless, here was the Avatar, alive and well, invading the Fire Nation with his two friends, his earth bending teacher Toph, and the Water Tribe warrior Sokka. They lost to me once before in that deserted town, now they believed they could take me on again?

As I stared down my foes standing down between two aisles of pillars, I realized that I had their water bending friend Katara to thank. Had it not been for her thinking that I was a Kyoshi Warrior and revealing this plan to me, I would have never known about this sneak attack. Luckily, I warned Dad about it, and he immediately ordered a full-scale evacuation. With the exception of Zuko and I, and a legion of top guards, nobody was to know where the Fire Lord was. Even War Minister Qin, our closest advisor, was told that he would be in this chamber where I stood. And apparently, the Avatar's group bought this story, and found themselves face to face with me. "Where'r the Fire Lord?"our bald friend demanded, his voice laced with anxiety as it echoed off the walls.

I rolled my eyes. I knew that during a solar eclipse, fire bending would be useless, so the best I could do for now was to stall for time. "You mean I'm not good enough for you? You're hurting my feelings," I stated, gesturing melodramatically at the threesome.

Sokka, to the Avatar's right, brandished his black sword, claiming that I was in no position to bargain thanks to the eclipse. To the Avatar's other side, the earth bender Toph, in her awkward hat, demanded no lies from me, as she claimed she could detect a liar. Cocking an eyebrow, it was time I settled the two in their places. "Are you sure?" I challenged her, testing her technique with my skills. "I'm a four hundred foot tall purple platypus bear with pink horns and silver wings." I stated nonchalantly.

I could see the earth bender's expression change from stubborn firmness to total defeat. Her entire body deflated as she conceded her point. "Okay, you're good, I admit it." What a fool, thinking she could outsmart me. Didn't she know that I was an expert at this, given my years of having to deal with those challenging my power?

Brushing myself off, I merely snapped my fingers. "When I was at Ba Sing Se, I brought home some souvenirs: Dai Li agents." Just as I concluded, two Dai Li members dropped from the rocky ceiling and to the ground. Looks of fear crossed my opponents' faces as they recognized the prospect of having to face the most elite earth benders.

Before long, the Avatar made the first move, sending a jet of air towards me. I barely flinched as the Dai Li created a wall of rock, blocking anything on the spot. Even as Aang leaped above the rocks while Toph blasted through with her own earth bending, I saw no need for alarm, as the main point right now was to bide for time. Somersaulting in the air just as the earth bending girl sent a line of rocks up my feet, I landed right back at the end of the room, sitting comfortably on my throne-like chair. Even without my fire bending, the Dai Li could handle everything by keeping the Avatar's group at bay.

But there was one slip-up by the Dai Li, as they couldn't match the Avatar for speed. Being an air bender, I recalled that they could increase their speed by manipulating the air around them. As his allies kept one agent at bay, Aang propelled himself towards me, slashing through the final rock barrier set up by the second Dai Li member and sending him to the ceiling with a pillar of his own. Soon, I was met with air slice after air slice, putting me on the defensive. "Why are these Dai Li agents so pathetic at keeping them at bay?" I muttered to myself, "Oh well, let's send them on a wild-goose chase."

I barely escaped as the Avatar sent a jet of air and totalled the chair completely. Racing down the rocky cavern, I weaved, dodged, and even did somersaults around each pillar, never going in a straight line as I aimed for the exit. I knew my fair share of evasive manoeuvres, and though fire bending rarely required me to use them, this was a perfect time to demonstrate them. Last battle, offence drove me to victory, as it left Uncle Iroh wounded and the others dazed and confused. This time, it would be defence leading the way, as I avoided all their attacks with the assistance of the Dai Li agents.

Just as I barged through into the rocky passages outside, the Water Tribe warrior held his friends back. "Don't you see what she's doing? She's just playing with us, she's not even trying to win this fight!" He exclaimed, grabbing onto Aang and Toph. Sokka placed a hand on Toph's shoulder, trying to calm her down as he suggested that his group ignored me. "We don't have a choice. We just have to get out of here and find the Fire Lord on our own somehow." With that, they turned to leave.

I smirked, somewhat impressed that they managed to figure out my strategy with time still left in their eclipse. But I was sure they would be no match for my ultimate weapon: mind games. "So, Sokka's your name, right? My favourite prisoner used to mention you all the time!" I declared, referring to the leader of the Kyoshi Warriors. Before she was taken to a high-security prison called Boiling Rock, I heard from some jail guards that she knew Sokka personally, so it was the perfect time to take advantage of this. "She was convinced you were going to come rescue her. Of course, you never came, and she gave up on you!" I finished with a flourish, realizing the reaction was imminent.

Within seconds, I was pinned to the wall, my hand which held a blade earlier now wrapped tightly onto the stones as Toph bound me to place. I could see Sokka's face, his cheeks clenched and hot breath hissing through his teeth. Tears threatened to spill from his eyes as he demanded through gritted teeth, "Where is Suki?"

I said nothing, merely grinning at him. The more time he wasted on me, the less time he had for the eclipse. Even if I were to escape with some cuts and bruises, all of which unlikely thanks to my contingency plan, it would all be worth it. The Fire Nation had developed a set of deadly weapons, and they were about to rain fire on the invasion team outside. I would like to see how our warrior boy reacted when he found out that it was their blood on his hands because he spent too much time on me. "Where is Suki? Answer me!" Sokka roared, his voice slicing into my ears, "Where are you keeping her?"

Again, my lips were pursed. Sokka's voice echoed down each hallway, his cries of anguish music to my ears as I counted down the time. Except for Aang and Toph's pleas to Sokka requesting he stopped, there was still no sound coming from both tunnels. Either way, I knew they were running out of time. I couldn't help but think about the glory for me when I not only thwarted the intruders, but it was my information that led to such a great defence of our capital city. Why couldn't Zuko learn something like that?

Speaking of Zuko, he had been behaving strangely for the last little while. Ever since we returned from Ember Island, he had been acting like he didn't really know what to do. The most interesting one was at the previous war meeting, his first since returning from exile. Father seated him close to the front, and even let him discuss his findings. When he told us of the Earth Kingdom's stubborn pride, Father and I decided that the best way to deal with it was to crush it at all costs. I was quite close to the front as well, so I caught a glimpse of Zuko's expression. It almost seemed like he was hesitant, perhaps even fearful, of Dad's suggestion to raze the Earth Kingdom to the ground. Had three years of exile with his tea-loving kookiness made Zuko go softer than a wet noodle?

A sizzling sound from down the hall alerted me to the presence of the sun. "Looks like fire bending is back on," I taunted. Within seconds, I placed a well-aimed kick right at Sokka, sending him off of me and sprawling to the ground. The earthen shackles were no match for my fiery blue flames, as I made quick work of them. Turning to the tunnel that would take me out of the bunker, I merely told him Dad's location. "I'm sure he would be more than happy to see you now." With that, I raced off for the exit.

I climbed out of the bunker just in time to see five huge airships take to the skies. In the past, our ancestors hadn't mastered the skies, giving some groups, especially the Air Nomads, some advantage. Now, it was all complete, as with land, sea, and air, the Fire Nation would reign supreme in the end. I managed to board a final airship before it lifted off, getting into the air just in time to see the bombs sail through the skies and at the retreating invasion force, my body swelled with pride. With even the most ardent group of invaders surrendering, there was nothing that could stop the Fire Nation now.

*****

To be continued...

[Canada Cowboy]

Continued from above post...

*****

"This is a guard who has been involved in a feeble escape attempt," the warden told me, his head dipped to the ground while he rubbed his hands nervously. When I had heard that war prisoners and traitors were discovered in the Boiling Rock, the maximum security prison located on an island in the Fire Nation, I was determined to investigate firsthand. Knowing that the warden was also Mai's uncle, I decided to bring Mai and Ty Lee along. Besides, there was something here that Mai should probably see.

The seated suspect half-pleaded and half-ranted at me, insisting that he didn't plan the escape, all the while Mai's uncle tried to silence him. I crossed my arms and shifted my eyes between warden and suspect. The Fire Nation's prisons were to follow orders directly from the palace, meaning anyone disobeying would be subject to the Fire Lord's wrath. Knowing that order and obedience were so important, would this feeble guard, who probably had gotten this job via overwhelming patronage and service, throw his career away like that, all because someone wanted to escape?

Looking back at Mai's uncle, who was even more pathetic than his brother, the governor at New Ozai, the former semi-autonomous Earth Kingdom state of Omashu, I told him to stop wasting his time. "That's not one of them," I concluded, turning around to leave the room. Waving to Ty Lee, I decided that we moved on.

The warden, still confused by my words, chased after me, asking how I would know so quickly. "Why? Because I'm a people person," I retorted, rolling my eyes and continuing my march forward. How hard was it to predict human nature? If you gave a person what they wanted, and threatened to take that away every time they didn't do as they were told, could they afford not to listen to you? With that in mind, there was only one way to do things, and that was the Fire Lord's way, soon to be my way.

Speaking of that topic, I couldn't help but switch my mind to Zuko. After the eclipse, he defected from the Fire Nation and joined the Avatar. Mai found out about this firsthand when she picked up his letter at her bedroom as we exited the bunkers after the botched invasion. Mai came with us after hearing that Zuko was found in the Boiling Rock, and while I wasn't worried about my inferior brother's defection, I was concerned that his bonds to Uncle Iroh might cause him to do this. I realized Zuko still saw Uncle quite often, and I figured the kooky old fool must have said something to spark the move.

Before we could even reach the interrogation room where they kept Zuko, a nearby guard rushed up to us stating that a riot had occurred. We hurried to the nearest balcony and glanced out at the yard. The prisoners were located at the moment and sheer mayhem was taking place. I knew some idiot must have fallen for the escape group's trap. "This is eerily reminiscent of something the Avatar's group members would do," I muttered to Ty Lee, scanning the crowd for any suspicious or out-of-place individuals.

A red blur zipped through the crowd, climbing up the tower in acrobatic fashion. Her moves would put Ty Lee here to shame as she took out a couple of bumbling guards and snatched the warden on the other side of the balcony. "There's no way out for them other than the gondola," I pointed at the wires leading to the cliff, "Let's go, Ty Lee."

By the time we hurried to the boarding station, the gondola already left, with the main handle bar of the controls snapped off to prevent the cab from being stopped. The guards around us, in their kowtows, should probably keep their heads down, as they should be ashamed for being so incompetent. Time for them to watch pros at work.

Snatching a pair of handcuffs from a nearby guard, I rushed to the edge, leaping into the air and using my feet fire bending as a propellant to send me to the overhead wire of the gondola. Above me, Ty Lee already scaled the wire, and was using her acrobatic skills to run to the lumbering cab. Realizing the speed advantage, I clamped the handcuffs tightly onto the wire and unleashed a huge blast of flames behind me. The view around me was a blur as I hurtled to the gondola, my prey right in my line of sight.

I was met with the resistors as Ty Lee and I landed on the cab. Zuko, Sokka, and Suki, leader of the Kyoshi Warriors, climbed out from the bottom to face me. Ty Lee had Suki all to herself, leaving me with my treacherous brother and the Water warrior. Not a single person moved as we stared each other down, the hot and humid atmosphere and the windless environment making more uncomfortable. Still, the elements were only part of the battle, as there were other ways to finish off these inferior fools.

Taking the initiative, I started with a wide sweep kick, aiming my flames low to knock them off balance. With the dangling gondola above boiling water, anyone falling off would be cooked alive. As the fire raced towards them, Zuko got in front, splitting it down the middle with a knife of orange. For Zuko to increase his skill level this quickly, not only avoiding, but breaking apart my fire, I found that surprising.

I unleashed more shots at Zuko and Sokka, but it was getting more difficult than I anticipated. The two moved as one, often alternating positions and never letting one shot hit. Zuko brushed my every shot aside, putting me back on the defensive as Sokka pulled out his sword and took a swing at me. Every punch I sent out was the same result, with a ball of orange fired my way followed by a swing of black blade. My mind was getting a bit flustered. Why could I not land a single hit, especially against two inferior foes?

Just then, my momentary lapse in judgment nearly made me pay a price, as the tip of Sokka's sword dangerously passed by my face. As I reeled back to avoid the hit, Zuko unleashed another series of fire bombs, throwing me back completely. I could feel myself in freefall as my body hurtled off the cab, my arms reaching for the edge. Should I slip up here, I would be thrown into the volcano crater for sure.

But as much as they fought a tag-team battle, they forgot their foe was the most skilled fire bender in the world. My hands clutched onto the railing at the last second, my arms straining as I balanced the weight of my whole body sticking out horizontally from the cab. Gritting my teeth, I felt my hatred for them increasing evermore as they taunted my position. As long as I was around, nobody could get away making a mockery out of me. Curling my legs, I swung them underneath and kicked them forward, sending the largest blast yet. It shook the entire cab, swinging and tilting the gondola even more. If I wasn't going to prevent an escape, then I wasn't going to make it easy for them either.

Before anyone could make another move, the gondola lurched violently, almost like it would tear off from the wires above. We all halted our battles and teetered gingerly on the roof, looking around frantically as we tried to figure out what was going on. I turned around to look back at the tower, watching the guards as they struggled to hold the gondola's movements. Ty Lee, meanwhile, hopped onto the top wire again. Just like me, she saw the team bring out a huge saw. "They're about to cut the line!" She exclaimed.

I glanced around nervously, as I realized there was no escape route for Ty Lee and me. Suddenly, an idea came to mind, as there was a parallel set of wires for the gondola to come down. And as luck would have it, the other gondola was on its way down. I took one last look at our gondola, with Zuko trying to save Sokka from falling while Suki looked on in confusion, and decided to let the guards present them with the inevitable. "Then it's time to leave," I declared, jet-blasting off the cab with my feet.

Ty Lee followed suit, somersaulting away from the doomed gondola and landing with me on the roof of the one returning to the Boiling Rock. I looked on in pride as my plan succeeded, eliminating a traitor and three very dangerous invaders all at once. Was there even a thought in their minds that they could escape here? Sure, Mai's uncle would lose his life as well, but it was a small sacrifice for the greater good of the country. In my mind, he should be proud that he would die a hero's death, considering how this escape plan was hatched while the prison was under his watch.

Then, as suddenly as the gondola stopped moving, it went on its way again, taking the prisoners further away from the Boiling Rock. I could only look on in shock as the one allowing the escape was none other than Mai, who sent a flurry of blades out from her and pinned all the guards, preventing anyone from approaching the machine. "What is she doing?" I hissed through clenched teeth.

Mai continued on for a couple more minutes before she was blindsided from the back, a guard quickly pouncing on her and ripping the projectiles from her arms. As my former friend was pinned, a millions thoughts raged through my head. Since when did Mai started acting like Zuko and disobeyed the orders? Did she not know of the results if she continued this act? After all I had provided for her and her family, letting them be the new Fire Nation colony's governor, was this an appropriate way to pay me back?

Hopping off the cab, I marched up to the nobleman's daughter, a fume etched on my face. I dismissed the guards and scanned Mai up and down. Standing alone before me, she was surprisingly defiant, her back straight and her eyes staring right at me. It only made my blood boil, even harder than the waters that I nearly fell into earlier. "I never expected this from you," I spat. While I wanted to tear Mai apart, I was also curious to know her reasoning. "Why would you do it? You know the consequences!"

I could see Mai swallow hard, but her words spoke volumes. "I guess you just don't know people as well as you think you do," she responded, her tone monotonous as usual, "you miscalculated. I love Zuko more than I fear you." She concluded.

A million fire bombs slammed into me at once. All the years I spent reaching to her, influencing her family, and downright ordering her to do my bidding, never in my life did I believe it would fall flat. And of all people she swapped me for, it was for my idiot brother? "No, you miscalculated! You should have feared me more!" I roared. I got into my lightning bending stance, ready to hurl a bolt through her. Mai was no different than the enemy, and the only punishment suitable for her now was death by electrocution.

But no lightning shot out of my hands. In fact, I couldn't move my body at all, as a series of jabs to various parts paralyzed me completely. I fell to the ground in a heap, my face and morale never been lower as Ty Lee stood above me. I thought one friend betraying me wasn't enough, but now a second one ditched me as well? Hadn't Ty Lee forgotten that I was the one who pulled her from obscurity in the circus, allowed her to join my quest to capture the Avatar and Zuko, and made her a war hero? What goal was she trying to serve by siding with Mai? "You're both fools!" I hissed just as guards came to apprehend the twosome before they escaped as well.

As guards lifted me to my feet, I stared hatefully at the two girls. Even those that I trust the most turned on me, all for some friendship with traitors. What was so important about these bonds? The only person they ought to bond with was one that was superior to them, offering them a higher position in life, and gave them titles and honour. "Take them somewhere I'll never have to see their faces again," I ordered, "and let them rot!"

The guards all bowed to me and took them away, leaving me to seethe in my anger. As of today, I was convinced that not a single soul could be trusted, and the one that I had to destroy was Zuko. He was the sole reason why my life was ruined, and he turned my friends against me. Should I ever find him, he wouldn't be spared.

*****

"What am I holding?" I demanded, waving the small, hard, round object before my maid's face. It was the day in which Sozin's comet would be closest to our world, and my father had taken the initiative to carry out the final phase of his plan. Amassing a fleet of elite airships, he planned to use enhanced fire bending to raze the Earth Kingdom, and proclaiming himself the Phoenix Lord, ruler of the entire world.

But while he became supreme ruler, there must still be someone to take care of the Fire Nation throne, and his choice couldn't be better: me. And that was where I found myself, seated at the dressing room where maids scrubbed my feet, combed my hair, and prepared me for coronation. While I did request for a plate of cherries, I never realized that there would be someone bold enough to imbed this object inside the fruit. As I glared at the servant, she meekly replied, "A cherry pit."

"So please, tell me why, on the most important day of my life, you've decided to lump it in my cherry?" I retorted, flinging the object into her face, "Do you realize what would have happened if I didn't sense the pit in time?" Being the new Fire Lord, I was none too pleased that there would be attempts on my life already. That was why, in my opinion, nobody could be trusted, not until Dad returned.

The pathetic girl got to her knees and begged for forgiveness, hoping that I would let her go. In my mind, this ridiculous scene just got sorrier, especially when she thought about who she was in the hierarchy ladder. Would someone like her really make a good leader of the Fire Nation, even if I choked on the pit? Rolling my eyes, I dismissed the maid, declaring that she would be banished. It wasn't so much a generous gesture, but a way to get this idiot out of my face. As she backed out of the room, her head rightfully bowed in shame, I ordered the others back to work. "I won't have my first day as Fire Lord marred by poor foot hygiene." I commanded, wiggling my toes in emphasis.

Finally, after what seemed like an eternity, these morons were finally done. I swore nobody was reliable nowadays. As I marched to the throne room, waiting for the Fire Sages to call me up, a cocktail of thought swirled in my head. I had no idea what the Avatar's group was up to, or where Zuko was now. I pursued him to the Western Air Temple, and ordered the airship fleet to blow the place to bits. But instead of turning tail like the little coward that he was, he charged out to battle me in between two airships.

And by some stroke of luck, he managed to survive, breaking his fall when the Avatar's Sky Bison caught him. Seriously, if ludicrous people like the Avatar could be more reliable than my own servants, what did that tell me? For starters, it showed me the palace staff could not be trusted. But also, it meant Zuko had gained the upper hand, to the point where he could manipulate those around him to help him gain power. It stunned me as to how someone that sentimental and mushy could do anything effectively.

I plopped down on the throne, taking a good look at my surroundings. It was dark all over, with the flames barely flickering before me. In one shot, I changed the colour to blue, just to better suit my style. Despite being ready for coronation, I still didn't feel so comfortable, as I wondered who or what would jump out from where to attack me. In the height of this unease, I decided to call in the Dai Li, hoping they could provide help.

As I waited for the elite earth bending team to arrive, I counted down the time. It was complete silence in the room, without a single sound being made. Personally, I knew how powerful and stealthy some assassins were, as they could creep up on me without any sound, and finishing their killing mission without leaving a trace of evidence. The Dai Li had that type of style, correct? They should know the risks of such a possibility, right? So what in the world was taking them so long to get here?

"You sent for us, Princess? Is everything alright?" The team leader's thick voice sliced through my thoughts. I looked up just in time to see the robed individuals kneeling on the ground before me. Just the thought of their tardiness made my blood boil.

"Everything is not alright. Do you know how long it took to get here?" I met their greeting with a rant of my own, "Five minutes, to be precise, in which time an assassin could have sneaked in, done away with me, and been on his merry way. Is this how you plan to treat your new Fire Lord?" I added, the flames around me starting to heat up. For their insolence, I already had punishments in mind for the entire team.

The team lead tried to reassure me, insisting that his team would never betray me. But of course, I heard that song and dance before. "And I'm sure that's just what you told Long Feng before you turned against him and joined me." I hissed. Knowing how easy it was for people even as tough as the Dai Li to switch allegiances, I had no choice but to remove them from the palace. "You're all banished!" I roared, pointing at the door.

The Dai Li soon made their way out, their tails between the legs as I fumed in anger. Nobody around here was trustworthy anymore, as they were all looking out for themselves. Even when Lo and Li, my family's most loyal and closest advisors, and my hosts during the Ember Island vacation, couldn't get me to change my mind, as they insisted that I postponed the coronation. Deciding that they too were a threat, as they probably planned to use the delay to plot against me, I banished them too. "I'm going to my room. Don't anyone of you dare to do anything funny." I warned.

I finally returned to my chamber, locking the door behind me after entering. It was the one place I could still call my sanctuary, as nobody could really do anything in my private quarters. Plopping down before the mirror, I picked up a comb and tugged at my hair, hoping to make the final touches before I ascended the throne. It felt so good getting those knots out of my hair, as I recalled the times that this happened when I was young, especially when my mother was the one hurrying us to another important meeting. Placing down the comb, I grabbed the band to tie up my hair for the final time.

But for some reason, my front bangs kept falling down, no matter how I shifted them. "Oh, so even you're disobeying me?" I roared. Grabbing a pair of scissors, I aimed them at the confounding locks and clamped down. "It's time to face your doom!" With that, I sliced into the dark strands, cutting them down and hurling them to the ground.

As I glanced into the mirror, seeing the slightly messy but nonetheless shortened strands, a voice I thought I would never hear again appeared. "What a shame. You've always had such beautiful hair." My mother's voice echoed through the chamber.

I couldn't help but be taken aback. The door was locked, and nobody was allowed into the palace while the Phoenix Lord was out, so how did she get in here? Besides, she was supposed to be gone now, wasn't she? Gathering all my strength, I demanded, "What are you doing here?" I glared at the mirror, which showed so clearly her reflection.

Undaunted, my mother continued to speak in her soothing, almost hypnotic voice, stating that she didn't want to miss my coronation. For a while, I truly felt happy, as the one person who never accepted me decided to come at my moment of glory. But how did I know she wasn't here to manipulate me herself? Maybe she was here to sweet-talk me to submission. "Don't pretend to act proud," I spat, "I know what you really think of me. You think I'm a monster." I turned my head to the side, refusing to look at her.

But that didn't stop my fussbudget mother, who stated that I was merely confused throughout my life. "You've used fear to control people," she lectured, reminding me of all the times she defended Zuko, "like your friends Mai and Ty Lee."

Zuko. Just the thought of this individual made me nauseated. Of all the times his biggest cheerleader had to show up, it had to be now. And for her to bring up Mai and Ty Lee, the two traitors, this was unacceptable. I didn't make a mistake, as it was the rest of the world that was mistaken. Feeling my heart rate increase, I rejected her every word. "Trust is for fools! Fear is the only reliable way. Even you fear me!" After all, that was why she uttered that I was a monster, right? Even my own mother feared me.

But instead of cowering and submitting to me, the shameless woman had to be all sweet. "I love you, Azula. I really do." She stated, fake-sincerity laced in her tone.

That was the end of the line, as I couldn't take it anymore. How could she not fear me? Was it because she felt she was superior? Or was it because I really was a monster? I was proud of who I was, but apparently that wasn't good enough in Mother's eyes. In pure frustration, I grabbed the brush and hurled it at the mirror, shattering it into a million pieces. The sooner I got my mother's face out of my head, the better.

But it did no good, as I was soon overcome with emotion. My tears involuntarily fell, dripping down both cheeks and splattering the carpet below. Was she right that all the years when I had Father's attention, I merely gained ground by being on his coattails, and that I never truly earned trust and respect? I was royalty, meaning I had the divine right to rule, so why was there an empty hole in my heart? Would there be people to see my coronation, and be proud of my new role? Still sobbing, I headed for the main square. While I was about to become Fire Lord, right now I felt like I was anything but one.

*****

"You want to be Fire Lord? Fine, let's settle this. Just you and me, Brother," I told Zuko as he climbed off the Avatar's Sky Bison and stood defiantly before me. Everything went as planned, and I met up with the Fire Sages in the usual open area where past coronations had traditionally taken place. I got onto my knees while the lead sage recited the ancient coronation chant, ready to bestow the title of Fire Lord on me.

But what did we know? My obnoxious brother, who thwarted my every attempt to control him, and even made a mockery out of me back at the Western Air Temple, had to return and declared that he was the rightful heir to the throne. In a usual situation, this would be correct, but it was no ordinary time. With Father still on the battlefield, only a competent and gifted individual could lead the Fire Nation. When one compared me to Zuko, need one even think about who would win? Besides, Zuko was a traitor and an escaped fugitive, and those things alone negated whatever qualifications he had to be a true Fire Lord. He wanted to challenge for the throne? What a joke.

"It'll be the showdown that was always meant to be," I continued, staring down at him. Apparently, he struck a pretty good relationship with that Water Tribe girl Katara, as she accompanied him on this trip. But even with them both, I could take on them with no problem. After all, everybody feared me, since I had all the divine right in the world. "I challenge you to an Agni Kai, and the winner will be the new Fire Lord!"

But Zuko remained unfazed, claiming that he would accept my challenge. I could only snicker at him, wondering if he would get another burn on his face. Now that I took out my pathetic mother, he had no one to turn to should he lose. Did he truly expect that Katara to console him when I send a bolt of lightning through him? Water Tribe scum like her would never stay loyal, let alone see him through to the end.

Marching to one end of the large square, I removed my royal cloak, leaving me in my usual Fire Nation military uniform. "I'm sorry it had to end this way, Brother." I sent the first verbal jab at Zuko. In my mind, this was probably the angriest I had been, thanks to the presence of this despicable individual. Then again, I knew anger could strengthen fire bending, which would only work to my advantage. And with Sozin's Comet zinging past our skies, this match had already been decided. I looked across the square at Zuko, getting into a stance eerily similar to the one he demonstrated before Grandfather Azulon. He fell flat on his rear end that time, and I would make sure he fell even harder here.

Swinging my arms around, I gathered up my flames and hurled them at Zuko. The comet's powers surged through me as I felt fire that lit hotter, brighter, and fierier than ever before. Through the blue wall, I could see Zuko summon his own flames, meeting my attack with his orange line. The two blasts met each other in the middle, creating an atmosphere rivalling any summer day in the Fire Nation. Even though I knew I had the superior skill, I couldn't help but feel that Zuko had the upper hand here. It was like he was matching my every move, making it very difficult for me to penetrate through. "How is he doing it? He had never been this good before." I muttered to myself.

I unleashed a series of kicks, whipping out the fire in pure frustration. Zuko was way too calm here; instead of cowering and fearing my better skills, he was fighting back with equal ferocity. It was almost like my mother was correct, in the sense that Zuko was one who never stopped fighting. "How could she be right? She was never right about anything. That's why she's no longer here and Dad is. So how can she be right?" I hissed, flailing my legs nonstop as blue fire emitted into every direction Zuko might be at.

For some strange reason, Zuko was still standing, batting down and slapping away my every shot. It didn't matter that the field was totally scorched, or that buildings near us were on fire. All that mattered to me was to defeat Zuko, and everything he stood for right now. Mother, the Avatar's group, Uncle Iroh, everyone that Zuko had befriended was undermining me in some way. Even with all the power in the world, even with such superior bending arsenal, they still refused to submit to me and did things my way. I unleashed the largest jet of flames yet, towering over our heights as it rushed to Zuko.

The flames soon lost its momentum as a wall of orange slid past me, giving my defenceless side a slight scorching as it hurled past. There was no way that Zuko could have brushed down my flames with that much ease, returned a shot of his own, and made me lose momentum all at once. I was near hyperventilation as possibilities rushed past my head. I couldn't possibly lose to my brother, as Dad didn't choose me as his heir for nothing. With my anger on full, I unleashed a two-legged jet blast at Zuko.

And to my horror, not only did he block it perfectly, he shot his own blast back at me, with a twisting double fire bomb drilling through the air. I jumped out of the way just in time, completely miscalculating its speed and ferocity. This was a miscalculation that I couldn't have possibly made, so how had Zuko become this strong? Using my blue jets again, I propelled myself towards Zuko, hoping for a closer short-range battle. I still had agility on my side, so if I could run circle around him, maybe it would confuse him.

But I barely got two laps around him before I was rudely cut down, my body doing several rolls before slamming to the ground. Zuko's flames hitting me reminded me of how Dad scarred Zuko's face, as the fire crashed into his body and sent Zuko spinning off the battlefield. As I struggled to my feet, Zuko had the nerve to taunt me some more. "No lightning today? Afraid I'll redirect it?" He sneered.

His taunting had gone too far, and now I would give him the ultimate punishment. "I'll show you lightning!" I roared, feeling the sizzle through my fingers again. I could see Zuko stand straight, turning his right side towards me while stretching out his arms. I knew that, with the stance, he wasn't afraid of getting hit, meaning my last weapon would probably be ineffective. Glancing around, I suddenly caught glimpse of a figure in blue seated at the edge of the arena, and realized my luck hadn't run out after all.

Tilting slightly, I aimed the shot right at Katara, who was in no position to defend herself. As the lightning snaked its way to her, in almost slow motion Zuko leaped into the scene, stretching out his left hand and absorbing my hit. My face scrunched up in total agony as my brother took in my shot, hurling his body through the air and sending it into the red skies. My final weapon was lost, and even as Zuko convulsed violently on the ground, I knew my objective of truly beating my foe could never be met.

But it no longer mattered, as I was intent to bring them all down. Laughing manically, I shot blast after blast at Katara, preventing her from approaching Zuko. It was either she died from my fire first, or Zuko died from his wounds first. Not surprising at all, the Water Tribe lowlife turned tail and ran, which only made me more determined to pursue. As the lowly peasant hid behind a pillar, I unleashed flame after flame, all the while taunting my brother. "Zuzu, you don't look so good," I referred to the lack of help from Katara. What did I say? Zuko couldn't install fear into her, and she turned on him.

The lowlife water bender thought she could get past me by drenching the roof of each building with water, hoping to flush me out. But I knew better than that, as I already jetted off and positioned myself behind her. With flames and lightning blazing, I sent the coward on a chase around the square, with only a trail of frozen water manipulated out of a nearby sewer being the only sign of Katara as she skidded around desperately. I was throwing a wall of flame at her, so there would be no escape. Since she was part of the group that turned my world into ruin, now she would experience the same.

"Where you are, you filthy peasant." I roared as I landed before her. Katara was at the edge of another sewer, an appropriate place to dispose of her body once I was done with her. Getting into a lightning bending pose again, I lunged at her, ready to slice her through with the electricity. So long, you disgusting maggot, I thought.

But I couldn't make a move at all, as Katara pulled up a water dome, covering both our bodies in liquid. My eyes rolled around in confusion as the surroundings became cold, with Katara encasing me in ice. While I remained frozen and powerless, Katara managed to snake around me and wrap something around my hands. I couldn't do a thing as she pulled me down to the ground, my feeling of helplessness growing by the second as I heard several clicks. Whatever she was doing, I knew it would end the battle.

In one smooth motion, Katara lowered the water, leaving me chained onto a manhole with my hands immobile. I twisted and pulled, but the binds were locked up too well, to the point where all my efforts seemed pathetic. I hissed and grunted, unleashing flames from my mouth in frustration. All my glory shattered when I failed to defeat my brother, and now this lowly water bender was the one who placed me in my spot.

These chains would foreshadow my future, as Zuko would ascend the throne while I was sent away to an asylum. My domain was only as large as the four walls that surrounded me, a stark reminder of how my past life where I had everything was now diminished to nothing. I had everyone fearing me, obeying my every command and granting my every wish; now, all I had was darkness and dampness. There was nothing more than the echoes of my own voice that responded to my every order.

But perhaps it was for the best, as in here, I was finally secure. I would get what I needed to survive, and I would never be harmed. Mai, Ty Lee, Uncle Iroh, all those who had been with me before, they had to be out there in a world of instability, where mistrust would be present no matter how hard they tried. They were the ones suffering, not me. My mother always said trust and respect was more important than fear and spite, and how ironic it was I could only feel safest when I was trusted to not run away, and respected by my medical team who would monitor me every day. As I toiled away in here, I thought,

My name is Azula. That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 14: Ozai

*****

My father sat stoically above my family, his eyes still as the flames around him shrouded his body. Like slaying a monster, my daughter Azula stepped up to him and took a stance. Azula was the pride of my family, the one that any Fire Lord would be proud of, even though she was a girl. Compared to my son Zuko, who was weak and incompetent, Azula could be a much better leader for our nation.

A fiery display soon replaced my thoughts, flames jetting out from Azula's arms and legs and spraying throughout the dim chamber. These were some of the moves that I personally requested Azula to be trained in, as it would showcase her true power in fire bending. Azula had actually surpassed Zuko in fire bending skill, reaching levels so high that no one at the Royal Fire Academy for Girls dared to compete against her. Given that Zuko was male, meaning he had easier access to training resources, what excuse did he have to be so pathetic at everything he did?

As Azula gained momentum, I could only beam as she prepared for her final move. There was no way my father would be unimpressed by this, given the amount of skill and practice required to pull it off. Zuko, my wife Ursa, and I all looked on as Azula spun around several times, racing towards the wall of fire as flames surrounded her body. Then, in one smooth motion, she leaped into the air and unleashed a high kick, sending a blast of flames so high that I could have sworn it hit the roof.

As Azula landed back onto the ground, I couldn't help but applaud. "She's a true prodigy, just like her grandfather, after whom she's named." I commented. Azula quickly shuffled back to my side, a grin on her face as well. We didn't request this audience with the Fire Lord for no reason, so during my time here, I wanted everything I could get my hands on. If it meant using flattery to get Father's attention, then so be it. As long as my whole family stuck to the script, my goals would be accomplished.

But as luck would have it, there would be an interruption. Azula's performance apparently struck a nerve with Zuko, who insisted that he demonstrated what he had been learning as well. I immediately frowned, realizing that my son could ruin everything. Earlier, I relegated him to the role of historical expert, asking him to recite some rather important dates in Fire Nation history. To no one's surprise, he failed to describe or explain any of the events I raised. Knowing that my father wasn't impressed by Zuko's poor performance, more demonstrations by my son was bound to tick him off.

And again, Zuko would make a fool out of himself before Fire Lord Azulon. He tried to mimic Azula's fire bending sequence, only to fall hard on his rear end not once, but twice. I could only purse my lips, my eyes alternating between my father and my son as Ursa approached Zuko. Personally, I felt one of the reasons why Zuko never developed into a master fire bender was because of his attachment to his mother. My wife was the type of Fire Nation noble that tended to worry more about domestic affairs, like family, rather than political roles, like climbing up the power hierarchy. While that had its advantages at home, now was not the time to act all motherly to Zuko. As she tried to comfort him, stating how his refusal to give in made her proud, I could only think about how weak that would make us look before my father.

My father soon made us realize how annoyed he really was when he insisted that my family left the chamber. "Prince Ozai, just tell me what you want. Everyone else, go!" He roared, waving his hand to my wife and children. Even as an old man, the fiery and iron-fisted techniques he employed throughout the years were still present here.

I waited until the doors had clicked shut before turning back to my father. From my childhood onward, I knew Fire Lord Azulon was a stern man, instilling strictness and strong discipline on my brother and me. He didn't hesitate to use force on us when we disobeyed him, and even today I feared him slightly. But the good news was that it let me in on some very important techniques for ruling a country: always use fear, and no force was too much when it came to disciplining people. That was why, for my current case, I had to be very careful if I wanted to leave here with any sort of victory.

Taking a deep breath, I stated my proposal. "Father, you must have realized, as have I, that with Lu Ten gone, Iroh's bloodline has ended." I began, referring to my older brother Iroh and his son Lu Ten. Iroh was a highly skilled and experienced Fire Nation general that led our troops to battle the Earth Kingdom stronghold and capital Ba Sing Se. He laid a siege outside the heavily fortified walls of the Earth Kingdom capital for six hundred days before he abruptly ended it a few weeks ago. The story was that his son Lu Ten had been killed in battle, causing Iroh so much grief that he no longer had the will to continue the fight. I wasn't surprised at his sentimental side, but I was shocked at the consequences, as Iroh was reported not to have joined the returning troops.

But that meant more time for me to take advantage of the situation by proceeding with my plan. "But I am here, Father, and my children are alive." I knew that as a Fire Lord, my father's duties included sustaining the bloodline, meaning there was a good chance he would be open to this idea. Garnering up all my energy, I had to make this as good for him as it would be for me. "Revoke Iroh's birthright. I am your humble servant, here to serve you and our nation. Use me!" I declared, kowtowing fully before him.

By the time I lifted my head, I could tell my plan backfired. The flames around me blasted in sequence as Fire Lord Azulon unleashed his anger on me. "You dare suggest I betray Iroh, my firstborn, directly after the death of his beloved son?" he yelled at me, his fume shooting clearly through the wall of flames as he pointed an accusing finger at me, "I think Iroh has suffered enough, but your punishment has scarcely begun!"

I wouldn't even be given a chance to speak, as Fire Lord Azulon would continue his rant. "Your punishment should fit your crime," he continued, his tone laced with poison and bitterness, "you must know the pain of losing a firstborn son by sacrificing your own." I could only glance up as my father's decision was final. Nothing short of Zuko's death would satisfy him, after what I had offered earlier.

I bowed slightly before backing out of the chamber, realizing that the stakes had now been raised to insurmountable heights. Of course, I didn't come to the Fire Lord's chamber completely unprepared, as there was a contingency plan. I knew that, at his advanced age, Fire Lord Azulon was nearing the end of his years. Even though he was a picture of health, there was no telling what accidents might occur. Should I be rejected by him, I could always make an attack on his life a priority, leading me to victory and giving me the birthright to the throne, should Iroh not return to challenge me.

But now, knowing that Zuko's blood must be spilt in order to satisfy his sadistic, bloodthirsty side, I had no choice but to take this final step. If Father truly wanted blood, then blood would be what he got, and my wife and I were to make sure of it. Making a mental note to myself, I hurried to the living quarters, hoping to find Ursa to discuss this plan with her. Knowing the throne was on the line, we couldn't possibly mess this up.

*****

"You can't sacrifice an entire division like that!" My thirteen-year-old son Zuko roared at the general presenting our latest war plan. It had been several years since I took over as Fire Lord, and I decided that it was time to finish off what my ancestors had started, and wiped out the Earth Kingdom for good. Summoning my top generals, we had this meeting to decide on the next course of action, which would involve tackling some very skilled defenders at various parts of the Earth Kingdom.

My top general was about to make a suggestion where a battalion of younger, less experienced troops would be used as a distraction for the more experienced ones to ambush the earth benders from the other side. But before he could finish his explanation, Zuko interrupted him, apparently not sitting well with the idea. "Those soldiers love and defend our nation, so how can you betray them?" He ranted. Nobody expected my son to join the meeting, as everyone knew that Azula was the competent one in my family. Now that my wife Ursa was no longer with us, Zuko had no one to hide behind when he had his sentimental whines, so I merely instructed all my generals to ignore him.

But true to the way Ursa described him, Zuko wasn't about to give up, as he kept going on about how these soldiers had families, and we shouldn't send them to their deaths without considering what it would mean to their loved ones. Soon enough, this foolish boy started getting on my nerves. It was not his place to speak, given that these were top military commanders, and he had no right to challenge those with superior skill than his. Moreover, even had I given him the floor, it was not for discussing trivial things like family, which only proved to be an embarrassment to me, given how a Fire Lord had no time for sentimentality. "Silence," I sliced in, "you have made me very angry!"

I seethed as the flames around me burned higher and hotter, my situation eerily similar to that of the seat's former occupant, my father, the late Fire Lord Azulon. My plan for that night was to kill Zuko, but made enough of a plea to Ursa for her to stop my act. Ursa ultimately took over for me, murdering my father in his sleep and allowing me to ascend the throne. But that meant severe consequences, as her act of regicide was one of treason, and required harsh punishment. I thought with Ursa gone, I could focus solely on training Azula to be my heir, forgoing Zuko's ineptitude. But obviously, ignoring this pathetic excuse of a son would not be adequate for my purposes.

I glared at Zuko, who now had a look of concern on his face. Despite this, he was defiantly strong, standing straight and trying to stare the entire military command down. He was at the first seat to my right on this long table, his eyes boring holes into the map of the world spread out across the wooden board. "For your disrespect, I order you to fight an Agni Kai tomorrow, before everyone in the palace!" I instructed him.

Zuko continued his glare at the general he interrupted earlier. Youth clashed head on with experience as my son declared, "I'm not afraid. I will prove that I'm worthy of being in here, and that my idea is worth consideration. I'm ready for this fire duel."

With that, I dismissed my generals, telling them to be in the audience when the fight took place tomorrow. But for Zuko, I had a surprise for him, and it would be one that would test his mettle for sure. While it would be a logical assumption that Zuko ought to fight the general he insulted, he forgot that this was the Fire Lord's war room; in other words, my war room. When he spoke out of turn, he ultimately disrespected me, and to do anything of that sort required strict discipline. For me, this was a great chance to show Zuko what respect really meant, and how much he had to conform to it.

That was where we found ourselves the next day, standing on this flat arena with a huge crowd to our either side. Zuko's look of shock was unacceptable, as fake ignorance was not an excuse for not fighting. "Please, Father. I only had the Fire Nation's best interests at heart," Zuko pleaded, his legs like jelly as he dropped to his knees, "I'm sorry I spoke out of turn!" He kowtowed to me several times, not daring to look up.

The more he begged, the more sickening it got. Frankly, this blubbering was not what I expected from a Fire Prince. In fact, the only Fire Prince that ever performed like that was Iroh, who probably put on a similar show when his son was killed in battle. Yes, my hedonist older brother returned from his mysterious journey and chose not to take the throne, leaving me to rule unopposed. While that was a good thing, it was really a mixed blessing, as it meant Iroh could get close to Zuko, filling his brain with all sorts of mushy nonsense about his life. What did my father ever see in Iroh that made him favour Iroh so much, and neglect such a talented and cunning individual like me?

Turning back to the scene, I approached Zuko, who was curled into a ball of emotional wreck. "You will fight for your honour,"I fumed, "rise and fight!"

"I meant you no disrespect," he responded, his face not even leaving the ground. No Fire Lord in history ever had to bow to anyone, and I would not have my son doing such an act, especially before all the important individuals in this palace. "I am your loyal son," he continued blubbering, "I won't fight you."

I had seen enough, as I must end this fight before it caused me more humiliation. I had always been a believer of discipline, even if it meant injuring people. And for this case, it was necessary. What's more, showing leniency to Zuko right now would mean all those in the crowd could speak out of turn at any time, and then pretend to be obedient and beg for mercy. So for me, this was all about setting an example. I took a glance at the crowd, making sure every eye was on me. Towering over his body, I declared, "You will learn respect, and suffering will be your teacher."

Everything seemed to move in slow motion as I reeled back and created a huge fire fist. I could see Zuko look up, just in time for me to catch the reflections of my fire in his tear-stained cheeks. Whatever hesitation I had in doing this was erased completely, as there was no place for tears in this palace. Emotions were for the feeble, and no son of mine would be displaying weakness in my palace. In one motion, I whipped my arm forward, sending the blast straight into Zuko's face, right near his left eye.

Zuko was blown back several metres, howling and screaming in pain as he tried to cover the scorched area. I ignored the smell of burnt flesh as I turned to the crowd, pointing at my cowering son as I spoke, "By refusing to fight, Zuko has shown shameful weakness, and for that, he will be banished from the Fire Nation. The only way he will be allowed to return is if he does what no Fire Lord has been able to do so far: capture the long-lost air bending Avatar." I finished, stepping away from the arena in disgust.

As I marched out of the room, I could hear the sounds of people shuffling away, most of them probably in shock. There was bound to be some bleeding heart like Iroh who wanted to offer Zuko help, but my decision would be final. It was a good way for Zuko to learn respect, but also to get him out of my sight. Without this weakling in my palace, I could focus on what was most important: winning the war. And if it meant using only Azula as my most trusted lieutenant, then it was a chance I was willing to take.

*****

I stared down the long hallway heading from the door of the throne room straight to my throne, with a lone standing figure looking on hesitantly as I beckoned him. It had been three years since I had exiled my son Zuko, and I truly never expected to see him again. To no one's surprise, Iroh chose to accompany Zuko on his journey, claiming that Zuko required someone to guide and advice him along the way. On any regular day, I would be repulsed by Iroh's overly soppy speech about how he saw Zuko as his new son after losing Lu Ten. But given how I just lost two big threats to my plan, I accepted it.

And after a little while, I had lost faith in Zuko's aimless wandering. I was none-too-pleased by the failed Siege of the North Pole, where Iroh supposedly was an advisor to. Plus, Zuko never managed to track down the Avatar, who I heard was rediscovered somewhere in the South Pole, and that meant the past three years had been a total waste of time. Given the way things went right now, with the war so close to an end, I had no intention of letting those two morons drag things out for longer. That was why I didn't even hesitate in asking my daughter Azula, who had increased her sphere of influence by being around me, to bring those two back to the Fire Nation as prisoners.

But then, something happened in Ba Sing Se, where Azula finally met up with those two that changed everything. I glanced up at the standing figure now marching towards me, and realized that he had changed his mind. While Azula told me that Zuko had initial doubts earlier, he ultimately sided with the Fire Nation. In a fierce battle, the siblings cornered the Avatar in a large underground cavern at Ba Sing Se and defeated him altogether. I was very impressed by this act, and didn't hesitate in requesting him to return where I could meet with him face-to-face.

In true Fire Nation tradition, Zuko got to his knees and kowtowed before me. My original intent to teach him respect seemed to have paid off as he barely did a thing until I addressed him. "You have been away for a long time, and I see the weight of your travels has changed you," I calmly observed, "you have redeemed yourself, my son."

Zuko lifted his head just as I stepped off the throne, through the flames and onto the floor before him. Despite having not seen his face for three years, I could still make out the longing eyes, the tense cheeks, and wavering lips that were so prominent back at that Agni Kai. While I admitted that things did change, it was obvious that Zuko was still quite soft, and would require some training to further toughen up.

Pacing back and forth before him, I officially welcomed him back to the Fire Nation. "I am proud because you and your sister conquered Ba Sing Se. I am proud because when your loyalty is tested, by your treacherous uncle, you did the right thing and captured the traitor." I was told by Azula that Iroh originally tried to convince Zuko against capturing the Avatar. But when Zuko returned to our side, Iroh was no longer a factor. As I spoke, Iroh was in a jail cell, serving a life sentence for treason. It just showed how dangerous Iroh was, as even when retired, he influenced those around him to try usurping my power and creating his own faction against me.

"But I am proudest of all of your most legendary accomplishment. You slayed the Avatar," I declared, stopping just as I reached his back. Azula told me that she held off the Avatar's allies and Iroh, leaving Zuko alone with the air bender. What followed was an epic battle where Zuko threw everything he had at the crafty boy, who escaped Zuko's grasp several times before Zuko shot him down with a huge fire blast. Right there, I knew Zuko's fire bending skills had truly progressed, way different than the clumsy oaf that tried to show off before my father Fire Lord Azulon all those years before.

But Zuko's response to my claim seemed a bit unusual, as hesitance filled his voice when he asked what I heard. I furrowed my brow slightly, as I figured that Zuko would be pleased by my announcement. Perhaps the story wasn't as complete as Azula had originally told it? "Azula told me she was amazed and impressed by your power and ferocity at the moment of truth. She told me you did a really good job." I added.

I could see Zuko still hunched over, almost like he was suspecting something had gone wrong. I couldn't tell what he was feeling, or why he felt that way, but the fact that he took that long to digest my words meant something was up. Nonetheless, I figured it wasn't the right time to deal with it. Given that Zuko would naturally be in a state where he found it difficult to trust people, it was best to let him go. I dismissed him from the throne room, once again telling him how proud I was. While I made a mental note to find out more about this when the situation arose, right now I could just enjoy my time being the proudest father alive. With both children under my control, nothing could stop me.

*****

"First of all, in Ba Sing Se, it was Azula who took down the Avatar, not me." Zuko stated. It was the middle of a solar eclipse, meaning the Fire Nation was under threat due to the phenomenon rendering our fire bending useless. Azula told me that there was an invasion planned by the Avatar's allies, and that the capital city ought to be evacuated completely to prevent any damage. In an effort to beef up security, I hid in this large underground bunker, with only my children and my personal guards knowing of its exact location. Our intent was to wait out the eclipse before repelling the invaders.

But it was Zuko who would surprise me more than the invasion, as he barged in with his swords in tow, demanding that I lend him my ears. I felt it was interesting how he chose the time of an eclipse to discuss this issue with me, especially when he revealed that Azula wasn't being truthful regarding the Ba Sing Se events. "The Avatar survived," Zuko continued, explaining why Azula, the one I trusted most, would lie to me, "in fact, he's probably leading this invasion. He could be on his way here right now."

"Get out!" I roared, pointing at the door. My heart pounded and my muscles all tensed up as I heard of the event. There was no way that two Fire Nation royals could mess up that mission, and should Azula be here with Zuko, I would enact punishment on them both. "Get out of my sight right now if you know what's good for you."

But I was stunned when Zuko drew his swords, declaring that he would not accept my command. "I am going to speak my mind, and you are going to listen," he retorted. I could only fume as he forced me back to my seat. I had no weapon, and thanks to the eclipse, I had no fire bending either; otherwise, Zuko would be burned to a crisp.

"For so long, all I wanted was for you to love me, to accept me. I thought it was my honour that I wanted, but really, I was just trying to please you. You, my father, who banished me, just for talking out of turn," Zuko stated, spitting his every word into my face, "my father, who challenged me, a thirteen-year-old boy, to an Agni Kai. How can you possibly justify a duel with a child?" he demanded, pointing his sword at me.

I had truly heard enough. Zuko still didn't learn his lesson, even after three years of exile. "It was to teach you respect," I hissed through clenched teeth. I wouldn't tolerate this type of defiance, and even when powerless, I must keep him in check.

"It was cruel, and it was wrong!" Zuko yelled, volume and boldness increasing simultaneously. "I learned everything, and I had to learn it on my own." He then recited all the things taught in his school, especially the details regarding our history. It was true that the Fire Nation had the greatest progress during Fire Lord Sozin's reign, and my grandfather did say he wanted to spread our influence to share our wealth with the world. So why did Zuko find this so hard to accept? "People don't see our greatness, they hate us! And we deserve it, because we created an era of fear in the world. If we don't want the world to destroy itself, we need to replace it with an era of peace and kindness."

All my anger seemed to have subsided as I burst out laughing. I couldn't help but think how pathetic that speech was, and how much that act reminded me of a younger version of Iroh. "Your uncle has gotten to you, hasn't he?" I commented amusingly.

"Yes, he has," Zuko retorted defiantly. I could see his pose standing taller and straighter than ever before when he described my brother. "after I leave here today, I'm going to free Uncle Iroh from his prison, and I'm going to beg for his forgiveness. He's the one who's been a real father to me," Zuko decided with conviction. I only smirked as he ranted on, wondering what flop he would create with this stupid move. Taking a deep breath, Zuko made his final point. "But I've come to an even more important decision: I'm going to join the Avatar, and I'm going to help him defeat you."

"Really? Since you're a full-blown traitor now, why wait?" I taunted him. I knew that the time of the eclipse would only last minutes, as the sun would return any time. It would give me to strength to overpower my son, who had always been weaker than Azula or me in bending. Should I get him off track, it might make him lose his guard, giving me a perfect chance to attack. "You've got your swords, so why don't you just do it now?"

"Taking you down is the Avatar's destiny," Zuko corrected me, sounding more smug than ever. Sheathing his swords, he turned to the door, ready to march out. I knew, from that moment on, there was no way he would return to my side.

But there was still one weapon up my sleeve. Zuko would never expect nor resist what I was about to unleash on him. "Don't you want to know what happened to your mother?" I asked slyly, slowly standing up from my chair.

I could see Zuko pause and turn around, his eyes narrowing to darts. "My father, Fire Lord Azulon, commanded me to do the unthinkable," I recalled the details to Zuko as his eyes blazed hotter than our sun, which I felt was about to peak at any second, "and I was going to do it. But your mother found out, and swore she would protect you at any cost." I saw Zuko's face scrunch up, pained by the mention of Ursa. In reality, the story was nothing like that, as I was the one who convinced Ursa that I couldn't do it, letting her take action and ultimately take the fall all by herself.

Taking my time, I continued my story. "She proposed a plan in which I would become Fire Lord, and your life would be spared. Your mother did vicious, treasonous things that night. She knew the consequences and accepted them. For her treason, she was banished." I finished in a flourish, my eyes never leaving Zuko's face as I gauged his emotions. Knowing their strong bond, that was bound to get a reaction from him.

A tear rolled down Zuko's right eye, the unburned one as he sighed in relief, knowing that his mother was alive. For the longest time, I kept what happened that night a secret, not even telling those closest to me Ursa's whereabouts. And now, by telling the truth at this time, it gave me a perfect time to attack. I could feel my fire returning as the eclipse reached its end, giving me a perfect strike. "Now I realize that banishment was far too merciful of a penalty for treason. Your penalty will be far steeper."

In one smooth motion, I summoned several bolts of lightning, feeling electricity sizzle around me as I aimed at my son. Zuko was just like his mother, in the sense that he had a lucky break by getting banished with only half his face intact. Today, I would end it all here, with the death penalty via electrocution. Gathering the power, I shot my arms out, sending the snaking bolts right into Zuko's body.

But while Zuko was blown back, he remained on his feet. I only watched in horror as Zuko absorbed all my energy, channelling it through his body, and aimed it back at me. Everything slowed down as my lightning hurtled back at me, my entire body almost frozen as its velocity reached epic proportions. I barely got a chance to dodge as it slammed into the front steps before my seat, sending my body and the chair flying into the wall. "Argh," I groaned as I was slammed back-first into the rocks.

By the time I peeled myself off the ground, there was nothing but a wall of fire before me. I squinted through the flames caused by the lightning and saw the door wide open, with Zuko nowhere to be seen. Figuring that Zuko was probably headed for the prison adjacent to the palace, I doubted anyone could reach him in time, given the mass chaos that was probably happening outside. But no matter, as sooner or later, my final plan would come to fruition, and I would eliminate our foes once and for all. As I called for the guards, I knew that sooner or later, I had to face the Avatar's group. And when I do, I would make sure neither the Avatar nor my son would be spared.

*****

"There's been a change of plans, Azula," I told my daughter as we met at this Fire Nation dock, close to where the invasion first took place. Surrounding us, all in uniform and standing on guard, were several battalions of Fire Nation's finest troops, ready to take on the final stage of our war. With Sozin's Comet at its peak in the next day, it was the perfect opportunity to finish what my predecessors started.

"I've decided to lead the fleet of airships to Ba Sing Se alone. You will remain here in the Fire Nation," I instructed Azula. The day before the eclipse, I was told by none other than my traitor son Zuko that the Earth Kingdom featured denizens with an amazingly stubborn pride, and they refused to surrender as long as they had hope. Turning to a suggestion from Azula, I decided to start an aerial attack on the kingdom, using enhanced fire bending powers to raze their land to the ground. From the airship base to the Earth kingdom capital, everything would turn into nothing but barren land.

However, I must change things up right now, as I required someone to stay at the Fire Nation to take care of things. While it was decided that Azula would help me lead the airships, I felt it was best that she stayed at the Fire Nation for now. Amidst her protests, I had to exert my authority firmly. "My decision is final." I stated plainly.

"You can't treat me like this," Azula sputtered. Even with my back turned, I could imagine her reaction. Her face was tense, her body would shake, and her tone quivered as she tried pleading her case. It wasn't exactly princess-like behaviour, especially before all these soldiers waiting for new directions from a leader. In fact, I still didn't have the time to speak with Azula regarding how the Avatar survived the original Ba Sing Se attack. So I had to act quickly, and burn up the Earth Kingdom before he returned.

"You can't treat me like Zuko," Azula's voice sliced back into my thoughts once again. Her ranting and whining really grated on my nerve, as I expected my only heir to be better composed than this. I had heard that something happened at her visit to the Boiling Rock that caused her much frustration, but given that she stopped her two so-called friends Mai and Ty Lee from helping a prison escape, why should she be angry? Anyone turning against the Fire Nation was an enemy of the state, even if those people were her friends. "It was my idea to burn everything to the ground. I deserve to be by your side!" She screeched, her voice nearly cutting my ear drums.

Realizing things were getting out of hand, I had to reveal my intentions here. "I've decided to declare you the new Fire Lord," I explained, turning to face her. My original plan was to let Azula take over the Fire Nation domestic commands while I was on my attack, but only deal with crowning her later on. Personally, I still wanted at least one hand near her while she ruled, just to make sure that I was always in control. But if this early announcement would make her calm down and in turn not mess things up, then it was a risk worth taking. "Fire Lord Ozai is no more." I announced to everyone.

The guards looked on as two sages placed a new set of armour on me, one that I had especially designed for this occasion. "Just like the world will be reborn in fire, I shall be reborn as the supreme ruler of the world," I described as the helmet was placed on my head. It was dark red with a gold rim surrounding the opening for my face. My eyes scanned the crowd as the helmet snugly fit around my face, declaring to everyone my new title. "From this moment on, I will be known as the Phoenix King!"

Right on cue, my new flag, one with a burgundy background highlighted by a yellow phoenix emblem in the middle, rose to the air. Guards lining the lane all lifted Fire Nation banners in salute as fire blared from the two poles supporting my new insignia. I sternly watched on as everyone dropped to their knees, kowtowing and submitting themselves to the new supreme ruler. I couldn't have imagined it better as I was about to start my new reign with dramatics and flare.

With trumpets and horns still blaring, I marched into the waiting boats. The airship base where I gathered my fleet was quite a ways away, and I estimated that it would take at least half a day to reach by boat. As I boarded the lead vessel, I gathered all the airship captains, briefing them on how the attack would go. We decided that the fleet of airships would fly in a wedge formation, with the larger lead airship captained by me. By doing so, we would cover more ground, burning up more land as we flew along, carving a direct path straight to Ba Sing Se and blazing everything along the way.

Not a word was spoken as we made our way through the surprisingly tranquil seas. My mind was only on the future as we prepared to end this war. After so many obstacles, so many failures, and the interference of so many individuals, success was finally at hand. Iroh's disappearance after his failed siege at Ba Sing Se, despite how shameful it made our family look given his failure, was actually a blessing in disguise. It allowed me, the best man for the throne, to ascend to power. With my determination and willpower, there was no way we couldn't get the job done.

This was further aided by my own father's cruelty towards me. For some reason, he felt Iroh, being the older son, ought to be favoured and appeased to. That left me, his second-born, with very little to work with. But because he focused so much on Iroh, he neglected to recognize my cunningness and ingenuity, to the point where it was a much better decision to support my rise to Fire Lord instead of that tea-obsessed idiot. When he ordered me to bring him Zuko's dead body, it gave me the perfect chance to usurp power from him. I merely told my wife Ursa, who was never more than a loyal housewife that I had hesitations regarding what happened. By asking Ursa to be involved, it forced her to choose between my father and our son. Knowing her nature, she valued Zuko's safety over my father's. By helping me dispose of Fire Lord Azulon, and with Iroh still absent, it paved the way for me to gain power and ran the Fire Nation my way.

I glanced outside, watching the orange glow resonate throughout the seas as we inched closer to our destination. This reminded me of the fire I sent at Zuko's face when we had the Agni Kai, which was the final step towards cementing my place in history. With Ursa gone, and Iroh joining Zuko on his banishment, there was no one who could truly challenge me. With Azula groomed under my tutelage, carrying out my every order, there was nobody that I couldn't intimidate. The three years that separated then and now were crucial in my final planning stages, as not only did Azula take Ba Sing Se for me, it showed me who I could truly rely on in these times. Zuko, with his sentimental bonds, was bound to turn on us, but Azula stayed loyal even when she was unusually emotional today. That was why, just like how I, the second child of Azulon, was able to take the throne, Azula, my second child, would be taking the throne. Who cared about what those useless first-born children, with their sense of entitlement, had to say?

Finally, after an eternity, the island in which our base was located came into view. The guards outside all lined up and stood in order as I exited my ship. Marching through the rocky terrain, I approached the large command ship, which was twice as long as the other airships and had a golden spiked piece attached to the front. The crew busily prepared for take-off as I strolled around to the edge of the island, overlooking the vast ocean between our base and the final pieces of Earth Kingdom land. The first area in our sights was the Wulong Forest, located just on the edge of the western shoreline of the Earth Kingdom known for its gigantic rock pillars. My robe flapped gently with the wind as I salivated at this golden opportunity, commenting, "It's time for this world to end in fire and for a new world to be born from the ashes."

*****

"Please listen to me. We don't have to fight," the young bald boy pleaded before me. My airship fleet finally reached its destination, and we were about to begin raining fire on the Wulong forest. From my lead ship position, I already launched the first wave of flames when suddenly, my airship took a violent twisting turn, fishtailing sideways as all engines failed. I glanced from my place at a railing jutting from the front of the ship and saw the Avatar, standing defiantly on a pillar of rock and staring me down.

Immediately, I removed my heavy cloak and fire-jetted onto an adjacent pillar, ready to tackle the foes that generations of fire benders failed to locate. But instead of battling me, he thought we could talk it out, insisting that there was no need to fight the war anymore. "You have the power to end it all right here." He declared.

I snickered, wondering who this child thought he was trying to tackle the most powerful fire bending team during the middle of Sozin's Comet. "I have all the power in the world!" I roared, unleashing flames from my hands and mouth. To show him my power, I started off with a wide fire spin, sending flames in every which direction as the heat scorched the rocks beneath me. Knowing his air bending nature, the Avatar was not about to get into a fight easily, which only made this battle much easier.

Before long, I saw a huge slab of rock hurtling towards me, most likely courtesy of one of the Avatar's defensive attacks. But this huge boulder was no match for comet-enhanced fire as I shattered it to bits, feeling the heated debris fly past my face. To no one's surprise, the Avatar was busy hopping from pillar to pillar, trying to avoid me. This forest might be vast, but I had speed to my advantage. Jet-blasting my way down the formation, I relentlessly chased him down, sending blast after blast of fire at him.

By now, the boy tried everything to hold me off, sending rocks from various pillars, water from a nearby waterfall, setting up an air shield; anything imaginable was sent my way. But I caught him off guard as he tried knocking down a series of pillars to block me, dodging away from the rocks just in time to catch the Avatar with his head down. Summoning another fire blast, this time I hit my mark as the Avatar absorbed the full force of that hit, sending him back-first into the rocks below.

As his body crumpled, I landed right next to him. There was a small ledge on this pillar, and I took this opportunity to limit his escape route by rushing at him with a double-handed fire blast. All he could do was wrap the rocks around his body, encasing his whole figure with stones as I continued my flames. With the rocks surrounding his body, he had no way to use his agility, which further gave me the advantage.

Suddenly, the Avatar leaped out of his rocky body and flew into the air, shooting a huge wind blast in my direction. It was a typical air bending attack with little damaging power, which gave me a perfect chance to wind up for a real attack, one that, with the comet, could kill instantly. Feeling the sizzle in my arms, I summoned a bolt of lightning this time, and aimed it straight for the Avatar. Should this one hit him, there was no way he would make it out of this battle alive.

To no one's surprise, the Avatar merely jumped from pillar to pillar, avoiding the lightning as much as possible. Normally, a fire bender could only summon lightning once at a time, mainly due to the amount of energy required to do so. But with the comet, all fire bending had been enhanced, and that meant I had unlimited shots at him. Even as we had to leapfrog from one place to another, there was no doubt in my mind that I would catch him again. Besides, with him playing defence the entire time, he was bound to suffer from fatigue, and that would be perfect for ending it all.

The timing became right when the Avatar somersaulted onto a larger piece, the highest one of all this time with nothing around him. Landing on an adjacent pillar, I mustered all the lightning I could, whipping it directly at the Avatar. He got up just in time to absorb the hit, his body convulsing and his breath shallow. But to my horror, he didn't get electrocuted; rather, he channelled it through his body and aimed his sizzling finger at me. I felt my eyes widen, my body frozen as the boy turned my power against me. My mind raced frantically as I tried finding a possible escape route.

But that was never meant to be as I saw the Avatar's eyebrows furrow, his mind most likely telling him not to do it. Aiming his finger to the skies, he unleashed my lighting, sending it harmlessly into the air. As his body crumpled again, I only snickered. With him showing mercy at such a crucial battle, it was the best thing to ever happen. With my victory gift-wrapped, I sent a fierce fire kick and threw him off the pillar.

I hovered over the coast, scanning the waters as I tried locating the Avatar. I didn't expect him to die off that easily, and I was determined to finish the job. The waves below splashed the coast gently, but the rising and sinking waters revealed the lifeless body of the Avatar. Twisting around, I shot myself towards him, ready to send the final blow. Flying just above the water surface, I felt the water evaporating right at my feet, a line of steam hissing behind me as I chased down the Avatar.

The boy pathetically slipped, landing face-first onto the ground. I could only laugh as I screeched to a halt above him, causing him to create an earthen ball, hiding inside for cover. "You're weak, just like the rest of your people," I taunted him, "they did not deserve to exist in this world. In my world, prepare to join them! Prepare to die!" With that, I slammed two fire fists onto the ball, trying to break through the rocks.

The earthen ball shook and rumbled, but relatively little happened. I figured that the Avatar had braced himself, so much so that it was tougher to break. Taking a few steps back, I unleashed more fire at him, sending waves of fire at the target now propped up off the ground thanks to the flames blowing away the earth around it. "Come on out, Avatar! You can't hide in there forever!" I roared, letting loose another jet of fire.

Finally, the ball of rock was knocked off the pedestal, sending it flying away before slamming into yet another pillar. With the Avatar now pinned, it was only a matter of time before the deal was sealed. I marched up to it, already envisioning the victory parade they would throw in my honour at my capital city when this was all done. A continuous stream of fire shot through my hands at the ball, the fire reaching so high that it nearly matched this pillar for height. I could feel the wall of fire nearly melting the rocks, which would soon leave the Avatar defenceless against my fire. Pulling my right hand back, I generated a small fire bomb, an attack that dealt great damage at short range. Taking a deep breath, I jumped into the air and thrust the fire at the rocks.

Instantly, the rocks crumbled, leaving the Avatar buried in the debris. I could only sneer at the aftermath, as my foe was likely unconscious, ready to be burned to a crisp. "Come on out, little boy," I taunted again, leaning my face in, "you're about to be..."

I never finished that sentence, as a hand shot through the rocks and gripped my beard. My eyes widened in fear as I saw the Avatar with his eyes and arrow tattoos all glowing. Even as I created a fire blade with one hand, he merely brushed it away with ease. Before long, I found myself blasting away from him, my body sailing lifelessly through the air as the Avatar unleashed a large wind blast. By the time I slammed back-first against a different pillar, I could only stare up groggily.

It was the Avatar who was now on the offensive. Hovering above me in a ball of air, I could only watch in fear as he mimicked my earlier move, sending fire out his limbs and mouth, creating a halo of flames around him. This was followed by summoning several pieces of rock, followed by a stream of water. With all four elements surrounding and circling him, I knew the worst had happened: this was the feared Avatar state, where any Avatar could become unstoppable. Knowing there was no way I could win the battle, I had to take off and stalled for time, hoping he would snap out of it soon.

Before long, a combination of air, fire, and rock shot my way, leaving me scrambling as I jet-blasted away from the Avatar. There was no doubt in my mind that he was on the chase as I could feel the pillars behind me collapsing, courtesy of his shots slashing through their foundations. Hoping to stall him more, I tried lowering my current altitude, preferring to zip through the pillars rather than fly above them, making it more difficult for the Avatar to see me. Right now, I was running out of chances and options.

That strategy soon proved fruitless as the Avatar merely collapsed two pillars together, causing me to change direction on the fly. That left me vulnerable to a huge wave of water knocking me right out of the sky, the feat almost unachievable given the sheer distance between the coastline and me. As I shook away the debris from my face and stars in my eyes, I saw the Avatar's ball of air hurtling down from the sky, ready to slam straight into me. Overcoming my nearly numb body, I jetted away just in time.

By now, all my attacks were ineffective against the Avatar, who managed to not only deflect, but retaliated against my every hit. The rocks around me were tossed about like rag dolls in a cyclone as he cut through the formation, shooting down my flames, sending fire, wind and rocks my way, and keeping me evasive manoeuvre all at once. I was hit several times, my body now giving way to fatigue as I could only wonder how this weakling turned the battle around so quickly. My ancestors wiped his race off the world, so how did the last of his kind become the one person that I couldn't beat?

My flaming feet abruptly lost power as I felt a cool liquid wrap itself around my body. I struggled to get free, but to no avail as I realized the Avatar now had me in his grasps. I was rudely thrown onto the top of a nearby pillar, my body in severe pain as I could only moan helplessly. There were probably several broken bones, and bruises up and down my back, but I knew that was the least of my concern right now.

Before long, the Avatar floated above me, opening his mouth to speak in a strange voice that sounded like many people talking at once. With his fume permanent and anger filling his tone, the boy stated, "Fire Lord Ozai, you and your forefathers have devastated the balance of this world," he declared, clenching his fists and binding my hands and feet with rocks, "and now, you shall pay the ultimate price!"

For the first time in this battle, my heart raced nonstop as I realized the end was near. I was about to be killed, my nation would be dishonoured, and my ancestor's legacy all destroyed, all because of this child. I tilted my head to see a drill-like object made of all four elements sailing through the air, whistling down as it neared my chest. I could only close my eyes, waiting for the inevitable to happen.

But it didn't happen, as all I received was a splash of cold water to the face and several rocks dropping harmlessly around me. I opened my eyes hesitantly, just in time to see the Avatar snap out of his powerful state, his tattoos no longer glowing as he stood with his back to me, his head almost dipped in shame. "No, I'm no going to end it like this," he declared solemnly, releasing me from the earthen cuffs.

I struggled to get up, my knees still shaking after that scare. The adrenaline was finally leaving my body as I took my shot at the boy. "Even with all the power in the world, you are still weak." I spat, venom laced through my tone. If he wasn't going to finish the battle, then I was. Mustering all the strength I had left after the ordeal, I made a fire fist and prepared to launch it at the now immobile Avatar.

But that was a decision I soon regretted, as the Avatar kicked up a pillar of rock, trapping my hand and sending the blast into the air. With my right hand now stuck, I tried a second blast with my left hand, but it was the same result. Quickly, the Avatar lowered the two pieces of rock, leaving me in a trapped position again as I blew my face back with an air blast. I could only watch helplessly as he placed a hand on my forehead and another on my chest, all the while taking a deep breath and closing his eyes.

A strange sensation soon took over my body as the energy within me swirled violently. Like a vortex in the ocean, it sucked away whatever strength I had and shot it out of my eyes and mouth. I was completely frozen, not sure what was happening as a similar thing happened with the Avatar. My surroundings shook violently as the two light melded with one another, creating a pillar that reached the skies. It was like my insides were being bended, but there was nothing I could do to stop it. And soon enough, I was overwhelmed by the Avatar, letting the boy drain me of my energy as the beam of light shot into the skies, illuminating the entire world and overshadowing the comet.

It seemed like forever before he released me, both from his hold and the earthen shackles. I tried to swing a couple of fire fists at the Avatar now standing before me, but to no avail. To him, I probably looked like a drunkard stumbling out of a bar after having too much to drink. "What...what did you do to me?" I stuttered, dazed and confused.

"I took away your fire bending," the Avatar stated simply, his voice filled with confidence and his posture more poised than ever, "you can't use it to hurt or threaten anyone else ever again." With that, he turned to face the ocean, lifting his arms up and down in rhythmic motion. I could hear the waves lapping into the forest, followed by the hissing of steam. But for me, the extinguishing of the fires only paralleled the way my career as Fire Lord came to an end: by the actions of this one kid.

*****

And this was where I now found myself, a weak old man with no bending, no title, and in complete disarray. I heard Azula, my hand-picked heir to the throne, lost an Agni Kai to Zuko, and in turn lost the throne. Right now, her condition was no different than mine, as we were both locked away in some dingy cell in the middle of nowhere. And to add further insult to injury, I had to be placed in the same cell that Iroh was in earlier, as if Zuko was trying to duplicate my actions to his "new" father.

The outer gates to my cell soon opened, revealing an individual wearing the same style of robes I wore not even a month ago. It was our nation's new head of state, Fire Lord Zuko, visiting. "I should count myself lucky," I muttered as Zuko's shadow loomed over me, "the new Fire Lord has graced me with his presence in my lowly prison cell."

"You should count yourself lucky that the Avatar spared your life," Zuko retorted, feisty as ever. When Ursa said Zuko never gave up, she wasn't kidding. Given the way he clawed to power, overtaking my personal and the best choice, I realized that the Fire Nation was in for a long haul. "Banishing me was the best thing you could have done for my life," he continued, "it put me on the right path. Perhaps your time in here could do the same for you. But right now, you're going to tell me something."

I titled my head just in time to see Zuko kneel down, getting into the same level as me. "Where is my mother?" he demanded in a no-nonsense tone.

I wasn't surprised that he would ask that question, as Zuko would never give up his sentimental bonds. Even as Fire Lord, he still stuck too heavily to one person or one group of people, letting them cloud his judgment and making him weak. Would the Fire Nation achieve greatness again being led by this weakling? What would become of this once proud and powerful race as it became impure, mainly by interacting with the lowlife Earth Kingdom and Water Tribes? As I lamented over the possibilities of failure, all the while trying to deal with my son's death glare, only one thought remained:

My name is Ozai. That was my story. Those were my rites of passage.

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 15: Iroh, Part 1

*****

Lu Ten's POV

The huge walls of the famed Earth kingdom capital dwarfed our entire battalion, making the most powerful military in the world look insignificant as we stationed at its feet. The Fire Nation had been on its conquest for decades now, and finally we reached the pinnacle of our battle: entering the capital region of the Earth Kingdom. Finally, the Fire Nation might finally achieve its most glorious victory.

"Lu Ten, don't be daydreaming. We'te getting ready to invade!" An older, husky voice called to me. I tilted my head just in time to see the leader of this invasion, a balding man with greying hair, a sharp sideburn, and a small goatee. To me, he was the most cunning strategist, the most skilled fire bender, and one of the most knowledgeable men on nearly every topic in the world. And he was a man I truly respect, one that I was proud to call general, but more importantly, something more.

"I'm coming Dad," I replied, picking up my last weapons. My father, Crown Prince Iroh, was the leader of this invasion. It was his idea to not directly attack the Earth Kingdom, but to slowly chip away at their defences, weakening their morale and resolve until they were ripe for an all-out assault. Dad told me that earth benders were known for their stubborn pride, and weren't willing to give up as long as they had something to cling onto. That was why, for our purpose, we must drain them of their hope.

Turning back to Dad, I saw him finish sipping his hot tea before handing the cup to a servant. If there was one thing Dad loved, it was a good cup of tea. He told me it always helped him concentrate better, letting him pick up on things about our foes that regular troops were unable to. I was amazed at how, despite living in the Fire Nation all his life, Dad was able to learn so much about other cultures, to the point where he could lecture our battalion on them, reminding us to recognize their weaknesses and attack them on it, all the while appreciating their strengths and be prepared to defend against them. With his wisdom in battle and cultures, there wasn't any way we could lose this.

I scurried between several soldiers as we lined up into attack formation. Standing before us, Dad raised a hand in determination. "We have accomplished what no other army had done in the history of the world: we breached the outer wall of Ba Sing Se!" He declared. In unison, the battalion roared in approval, set on finishing the job.

As the voices died down, Dad requested our attention again. "This siege on Ba Sing Se has reached six hundred days, and no matter how stubborn those earth benders may be, their resolve cannot last for long," he continued, "today, we will finally breach their inner wall and enter the city. Today, destiny is our friend, I know it!"

We roared out once more as we got ready to charge in. It was times like these that I realized why Dad was so popular with the troops. Being the true leader that he was, he never hesitated in giving everyone at least one morale-boosting speech every day. That in turn made the soldiers more confident of their abilities, making them more willing to fight for such a fine general. Fitting my helmet snugly around my head, I glanced around at my comrades, ready to tackle the big task ahead. As usual, Dad marched up and down each line, giving people personal encouragement along the way. When he got to me, he merely told me to stay strong. "Nothing makes me prouder than fighting beside my son in the greatest battle the world will ever see," he marvelled, placing a hand on my shoulder.

I nodded, trying to keep my already pumping adrenaline in check. "I will make you proud," I promised him as Dad returned to the front. We stared onward as groups of earth benders could be seen hovering around the base of the inner wall, ready to defend against our attacks. Standing at the front between the two large, waving red banners with a fire insignia, Dad unleashed our battle cry. "For the Fire Nation, attack!"

We all shouted out as our battalion charged at the wall. Immediately we were met with several rocks and boulders, dust spraying all over as the projectiles shot past us and knocking over some troops. This was met by several blasts of fire, lighting up the skies as we met the Earth Kingdom troops head-on. I juggled between shooting fire and handling my spear at the same time, a difficult feat considering that my weapon's movement must match my body's movement when fire bending.

I blocked a flying rock with my spear while spinning around to shoot fire at my opponents, the clashes of blades and whistling of high flying projectiles ringing through my ears as I gazed across the field. I saw Dad at it against several earth benders, and he seemed so effortless, flipping Earth Kingdom troops around as the fire flew gracefully out of him. I had heard that Dad had experience with dragons, as he told me he bested the last two so-called original fire benders, thus earning him the title "Dragon of the West" in the Fire Nation. But to me, there was another reason for that title, as the way he moved on the field, his fire so ferocious yet his skill so natural, that it was like watching a true master at work. It only hardened my resolve on improving my fire bending skill so that one day, should Dad become Fire Lord, he would have an heir worthy of his skill.

"Lu Ten, look out!" Yells from my teammates soon got me on the defensive, as I turned my head just in time to avoid a large chunk of rock falling my way. I could hear several troops either getting crushed by the boulder or thrown to the side due to the huge collision. Amidst the chaos, I could only look around as many around me in the original formation scattered, leaving me pretty much alone with no one nearby. Dad had told me before that earth benders, with their ability to tackle anything head-on, usually had very good aim, meaning anyone left in the middle of nowhere would become prime targets. With my current condition, I might just become flatter than a piece of paper. Anyone cared for mailing me home with the next batch of letters?

Before long, I saw a line of earth benders all lifting boulders from the ground. I knew I only had seconds to make it to the group, where I would have a better chance to defend against this attack. While I was confident in taking on the rocks, the sheer number of projectiles truly worried me. But my worst fear came to fruition as all projectiles shot out at once, heading straight for my location. "Let's hope my training with Dad all these years helped me," I muttered, getting into a stance and trying to hold them off.

Everything moved in slow motion as I unleashed a fiery kick, launching an arc of flames into the air and meeting the rocks head on. I didn't know how many rocks were blocked as a result, and how many flew over my head, but all I knew was that I was met with a dust cloud right as the fire dissipated. Knocked to the ground from the force of the hits, I sputtered and shook my head, hoping to get my bearings. In the distance, I could hear Dad and my comrades shouting for me to come back. I struggled to my feet, still hopeful that I could get to my team in time to regroup and salvage the battle.

Then, from nowhere, I was completely blind-sided by a rock. The bone jarring hit forced me into the air, tossing my body like a rag doll. The period of numbness soon gave way to pain as I was slammed to the ground, cracking and popping heard underneath my amour. A couple of coughs from my mouth ended with blood splats, and that was when I knew my injuries were severe, even possibly life-threatening.

My breathing became more and more ragged as more and more rocks were hurled in my general direction. In my blurred vision, a heavyset man launched several fire blasts and braved the conditions as he came my way. I could feel a strong set of arms around my body as he checked for my injuries. "Lu Ten, my son, you cannot die. You're a very strong warrior, and I'm very proud of you. We have so much we can still accomplish together. Please, no matter what, keep hanging on!" Dad pleaded as he held me close.

But my next breath would be my last, as I soon gave way to unconsciousness. The last image I saw before lapsing was my dad's face, the kind old man and wise general who was respected by all and loved by our family. As I departed the world, I knew not only had I left Dad behind, I also took away a piece of him. The bond I had with Dad was real, and there was nothing anyone could do to ease his pain now.

*****

Zuko's POV

"What a stunning view!" My uncle marvelled as we stood on a balcony of the Western Air Temple. After my cousin Lu Ten died at Ba Sing Se, Uncle Iroh was too heartbroken to continue his siege. He declared that the battle was over, and took his troops home. But for some strange reason, he didn't return with the group, disappearing for weeks on end while everyone wondered where he was. During that time, Fire Lord Azulon, my grandfather, died mysteriously, followed closely by the disappearance of my mother, leaving my father Ozai to ascend to the throne, becoming the new Fire Lord.

As Uncle continued singing praises of the Air Nomads' architecture, I had no time to discuss that issue. "The only view I'm interested in seeing is the Avatar in chains," I spat, the left side of my face still bandaged from the severe burn. A few weeks ago, I had attended a war meeting where I spoke out against one general's plans. Uncle told me not to do it, mainly due to how jealously defensive they could be, but never had I expected my own father challenging me to an Agni Kai for it. When I refused to fight, he burned my face and banished me, forcing me to find the long-lost Avatar before returning.

To no one's surprise, Uncle Iroh decided to join me on the trip. Maybe he felt there was no need to lose another child in the family after losing Lu Ten, but I welcomed his company. When my uncle did return to the Fire Nation after his disappearance, he was completely changed. Given that I had never been close to my father and my sister Azula, I bonded much easier with Uncle Iroh and Lu Ten, and knew them both quite well. In the past, Uncle and Lu Ten were intense individuals who were very dedicated to their work, but after Lu Ten's death Uncle seemed to have lost that fire within him. He retired as a general, became more easygoing than ever, and enjoyed life's pleasures rather than tackled responsibilities. While he still had most soldiers' respect, it felt like Ba Sing Se made my uncle turn softer than a pillow.

"You know, the Avatar hasn't been seen for a hundred years. The chances of finding him here are very slim," Uncle chimed in, cutting into my thoughts. My great-grandfather Sozin, my grandfather Azulon, my own father, and even Uncle Iroh had no success finding this lost individual. But knowing how they weren't doing this to regain honour, I could understand why they didn't see it as a priority. "Right now, you should take some time to heal and rest," he stated, gesturing at my left eye.

But that touched a nerve with me, as I was appalled by how relaxed Uncle was in the face of this great hardship. "What else do I expect to hear from the laziest man in the Fire Nation?" I retorted, glaring at him with my good eye, "The only way to regain my honour is to find the Avatar, so I will!" I turned away from him, no longer wanting to see such a disgrace. Sometimes, I truly wondered why Uncle Iroh even returned to the Fire Nation at all. When Azula taunted Uncle for being a quitter, I tried to defend him, but right now it felt like he didn't want to be defended at all, and took all criticism in stride.

As we entered the temple, hoping to search for clues to the Avatar's whereabouts, I told my uncle that it was my destiny. "If I have to, I will spend every day of the rest of my life hunting the Avatar." I stated, following Uncle as he marvelled at some statues.

As I said this, Uncle Iroh turned from one of the artworks to me. Placing a hand on my shoulder, he told me not to worry about it. "You know, Prince Zuko, destiny is a funny thing. You never know how things are going to work out, but if you keep an open mind, and an open heart, I promise you will find your own destiny someday."

Soon enough, we scoured the temple for clues. There didn't seem to be any evidence showing that the Avatar died during the war, leading me to believe that he was still alive. We would soon visit the other Air Temples, looking through those ruins to see if anything there told us more. During the entire time, Uncle Iroh was laid-back as ever, enjoying the views and complimenting the Air Nomad culture on the way. I knew both Uncle and Lu Ten enjoyed researching other cultures, trying to learn from them. It was a rare trait among Fire Nation people, especially in recent years. Throughout my life, I was told we were superior, and that Great-Grandfather Sozin started the conquest to share the wealth and technology with the world. I personally didn't see the need to investigate how another culture did things. If the Air Nomads were so great, why were they so easily wiped out? Couldn't they even defend themselves, given their bending?

And that was where we found ourselves, going around the world aimlessly for the last almost three years, wondering what all this was for. In my mind, I was still intent on finding my target, but Uncle had pretty much lost sight of this goal. Treating this as more of an extended vacation, all I saw from him was small-talk with the crew and people we ran into. Almost everywhere we went he was finding bargains for souvenirs, especially when it came to investigating the best tea combination. What was he accomplishing by doing that? Was he trying to find the long-lost Avatar by baiting our ship with tea? If that were the case, then maybe he could tell the Avatar, "Why don't you come with us to the Fire Nation as our prisoner? We got nice tea for you." Give me a break!

Today was no different, as we sailed near the South Pole, close to where the Southern Water Tribe was. I was at the bow of the ship, glaring through the massive icebergs while Uncle Iroh sat closely behind, sipping on his warm tea. The cold weather wasn't making things easy, and I could only wonder how Uncle could accept this frigid lifestyle of the lowly water benders. But my train of thought was sliced through by a huge pillar of light. Realizing that something spiritual was probably the cause of this, I immediately grabbed my uncle. "That light came from an incredibly powerful source. It has to be him!" I declared, clenching my fist and teeth simultaneously.

True to his fashion, Uncle dismissed that claim. "It's just a celestial light. We've been down this road before, Prince Zuko," he retorted, his eyes never leaving his game tiles, "I don't want you to get too excited over nothing." I could only yank on whatever little hair I had left on my head. Didn't Uncle take anything seriously?

Ignoring the plump, lazy man, I ordered the helmsman to head straight for the source of the light, knowing full well what it could mean for us. I climbed to the top of the control tower and kept watch, refusing to budge from my spot even when it got dark out. I didn't understand how Uncle could take this attitude towards something as big as redemption. I mean, he was once stripped of his birthright, as he never contested the throne that rightfully belonged to him when my father took over. Why did he feel there was no need to reclaim what was rightfully his? Even when he considered losing Lu Ten, it was still no excuse to shirk from his duties like that. What was he trying to prove?

Before long, I found fatigue setting in, forcing me to unwillingly retire to bed. But I barely got any shut-eye thanks to my concerns for capturing the Avatar. That was why, first thing the next morning, I insisted that Uncle taught me more fire bending techniques. Unlike my sister Azula, who my father branded as a prodigy, I never had the easy way to learn fire bending. Luckily, Lu Ten was always willing to give me pointers, usually under the supervision of Uncle. I always admired how Uncle managed to teach Lu Ten the full strength of fire bending without using any fierce methods, so I truly wished he would at least evaluate me. As we gathered on the deck, with a couple of crew members serving as my sparring partners, I felt Uncle's watchful eyes key in on me.

"Power from fire bending comes from the breath, not the muscle," Uncle's voice echoed off the hull of the ship as I sparred against two crew members at the same time. I truly wondered if this was how he taught Lu Ten, and what my cousin possibly got out of Uncle's meticulous nitpicking. My mind juggled between having to fend off my attackers and wondering whether it was worth requesting Uncle to be my instructor. I knew Father would rather teach Azula than me, so that meant I had no choice, even before my exile. But why did it feel like Uncle was being so picky over every small move I made?

Again and again Uncle made me do the same sequence over and over, all the while emphasizing how energy from within extend through the body and out the fist and feet as fire. After a while, I lost count of how many times we went over that technique, and I was fed up. "Teach me the next set of skills," I demanded, marching right up to Uncle's face, "I'm more than ready." I was willing to bet Uncle refused to proceed with my lessons because he was too lazy to move off his chair. That as why he kept delaying.

"No, you're impatient. You have yet to master your basics!" Uncle scolded, getting up off his chair for the first time since we began. The confounding man even dared to threaten forcing me back to doing breath-control exercises, and that crossed the line with me. It was time I showed him that just because he was my senior didn't mean he could run roughshod over me and forced me to do things against my will.

I unleashed a fire kick at each sparring partner, sending them across the deck. Lowering my fuming face at Uncle Iroh, I spat out my every concern to him. Stating that the Avatar was the last air bender, it meant he could be over a hundred years old. With all that time, he probably mastered all elements already, meaning I would require more than just basics techniques to defeat him. "You will teach me to advanced set!" I barked.

It was an uncompromising stare that Uncle was shooting back at me. But even with his hard-line approach, Uncle finally relented. I too eased my posture, until Uncle told me to wait. "I must finish my roast duck," he insisted, pulling out a bowl from behind his seat. The colour on my faced literally drained away as Uncle munched away at the rice and duck. I could only wonder how Uncle could fight the Avatar, given Uncle was still eating. Maybe Uncle could defeat him by knocking him out with a drumstick!

After a few more matches, I stepped to the top platform and scanned the area with a telescope, hoping I could catch a glimpse of anyone unusual. To no one's surprise, Uncle Iroh went to take a nap, leaving me to do all the hard work. Despite his laziness, I actually did some research of my own before coming here, and I heard stories from crew members that there was a stranded Fire Nation ship in the South Pole, courtesy of an older raid done decades ago. But given each ship had certain booby-traps, anyone still entering them carelessly would set things off. This was to ensure us that the other tribes wouldn't be raiding our supplies and stealing our secrets.

And soon enough, fireworks launched from said ship, whistling through the air before bursting and cracking like bombs. I whipped my telescope to the source of the noise and saw an individual leap out from the ship, sailing effortlessly through the air while carrying another individual clad in blue. "He's quite agile for his old age," I commented just as the crew joined me at the lookout position. Turning to the crew, I ordered them to wake my uncle, as I found the Avatar. "As well as his hiding place," I added, zooming in on a small water bending village.

Ordering the crew to set course for that village, I raced to my room to dress in my armour. Personally, I had no idea where Uncle was, or if he planned to help me with this fight at all. Even though I didn't like his overly casual attitude, I could really use his help right now, as a fully realized Avatar was an individual that I probably couldn't take out alone. It was times like these that I wondered if Uncle cared about not just family, but anything at all. Did he really tag along with me because he cared about me, or was it because he wanted an excuse to enjoy his retirement? Either way, I had a mission to do, and I was determined to regain my honour, with or without Uncle.

*****

Zuko's POV

"You've changed our course for a stupid lotus tile?" I sputtered, my mind in pure shock over what Uncle revealed. I was on the deck of my ship, practicing my fire bending with crew members. I saw the Avatar firsthand, and he was only a boy several years younger than me. Even so, he proved to be a tough opponent, given his agility and almost flawless escape methods. Because of this, I finally heeded Uncle's advice and practiced on mastering my basics before moving onto harder, more advanced techniques.

But this latest course of action made me absolutely flabbergasted, as Uncle Iroh insisted on stopping at a nearby port to pick up a lotus tile. It was a piece in Uncle's favourite game, Pai Sho. In my mind, Uncle was truly outstaying his welcome on my ship with his antics. As if the Avatar getting away, guarded by two members of the Southern Water Tribe wasn't enough, a rival Fire Nation commander named Zhao also found out about my journey, and threatened to capture the Avatar before me as to gain favours from my father. Knowing my honour would be harder to regain now, Uncle chose to let Zhao have the edge by stopping for a game piece? I could only hiss in anger, my hot breath covering the control room in steam. Anyone wanting to lose weight could enter now.

And that was where we found ourselves, scouring the market of this small town on the coast for a stupid game piece. It almost felt like the latest events on my journey meant nothing to Uncle at all. Shortly after the Avatar escaped at the South Pole, we had to dock at a nearby Fire Nation port for repairs. I tried to hide my goals from Zhao at the time, but it became too obvious to the cunning man that I had something large in mind. That ended with a verbal joust and my challenge to him of an Agni Kai. Even though it was one-on-one, I actually enjoyed hearing Uncle give me encouragement.

But the Agni Kai reminded me of one thing: the result of my previous Agni Kai before going against Zhao. That was the one against my father for speaking out of turn in his war room. While everyone was fearful and tried to distance themselves from the event, it was Uncle Iroh who truly took care of me. Uncle was the first to volunteer in accompanying my journey, and it was Uncle who suggested all the connections I tried in locating the Avatar. So, despite his lazy exterior, I actually did feel Uncle starting to become a bigger part of my life. Perhaps, if my task was complete and my honour regained, I would personally thank Uncle for everything he did for me.

But turning back to the current situation, Uncle's antics weren't exactly making me happy. With only musical instruments for the crew's band and other rare trinkets in mind, Uncle scoured every shop at the port, declaring that the only thing better than finding something one looked for was to find one wasn't looking for at a great bargain. As Uncle marvelled at a statue of a jewelled monkey in this dark, ship-like shop, I could only roll my eyes. Maybe Uncle could submit that monkey to my father instead of the Avatar, and hoped he would be impressed by this rarity and restored my honour.

Leaning closer to the counter, I overheard the shopkeeper's conversation with one of his assistants. The assistant declared a water bending girl and a young monk took off with one of their scrolls, and they were having trouble finding those two. Curious, I wondered if that monk was the Avatar. "Did he have an arrow on his head?" I asked, cutting into their talk, "If he does, then I'll be willing to help you find him."

The shopkeeper's eyebrow cocked, wondering what I could offer to them. Taking a deep breath, I offered them a compromise for my services. "In exchange for letting you use my ships and team, I'm willing to help you find those two and get back your scroll." I didn't tell them of the Avatar's identity. After Zhao's incident, I couldn't trust anyone with such a large bounty. Staring at the man with the wide hat, I waited for his response.

After an intense few minutes, the shopkeeper agreed, and showed me his crew. My earlier suspicions were confirmed: this shop was a pirate ship, and the shopkeeper was its captain. They sold loot pillared from elsewhere, and that most likely included that jewelled monkey Uncle was so fond of. Glancing at the large man, who had a grin identical to the one on the monkey, I grabbed him by his sleeve and tugged him out.

As the pirate captain gathered his crew, I ordered the small shuttle from my ship to be deployed. This was a stealthier boat that was shorter and flatter than a traditional ship, and it was meant for ambush or spy missions more than for transport. Beckoning the captain, I asked him to join me on the shuttle while his crew followed closely behind in their larger ship. I told him that we ought to take advantage of the darkness, and stayed close to the coast. "They stole a water bending scroll, right? Then they'll be on the water," I explained, my eyes alternating back and forth between the wooded coastlines.

Luckily for us, we managed to find the girl from the Southern Water Tribe, positioned right at the riverfront trying to practice her water bending as taught to her by that scroll. We immediately disembarked from our ship and captured her, tying her to a nearby tree and threatened her. Dangling her Water Tribe necklace before her face, I demanded to know where she was keeping the Avatar.

To no one's surprise, the water bending girl refused to talk, and the pirates got fed up. Luckily for me, I did manage to pick up a few things from my time with Uncle, and that meant good strategizing and critical thinking. Turning things around on the pirates, I picked up the water bending scroll and lit a fire with my hand. "I wonder how much this is worth," I taunted the captain, waving it dangerously close to my palm.

The pirates all froze in horror, begging me to leave their scroll alone. That only left me with the advantage, as now I could force them to help me find the Avatar. "You'll get this back, and everyone goes home happy." I proposed. Although he probably was using a less aggressive approach, I knew Uncle must have done unorthodox things like this with people he disagreed with before, making this move necessary.

Nonetheless, I truly felt some of his techniques were rubbing off. The pirates had no choice but to follow my orders, scouring the woods for the Avatar and his friend. As I watched from my shuttle, I requested a soldier to send a message to Uncle, informing him of our move. With such big stakes, I figured that he ought to be here to witness this. In a sense, I owed a lot of this victory to Uncle; had it not been for him finding that pirate ship, I would have never known their dilemma. Had it not been for him getting friendly with those guys, I probably wouldn't get to interject into their plans. And had it not been for him telling me some of his past experiences, no matter how boring and confusing his stories were, I probably wouldn't have concocted this plan. For that, I was truly grateful.

I finally had my rendezvous with Uncle in the morning, when the pirates brought the Avatar and the Water Tribe warrior to me. I figured it was probably an easy battle, given that the Water Tribe warrior was not a threat. The first time I fought him at the South Pole, I defeated him with two kicks, not even having to lift my arms at all. Now, he had to face an entire team of pirates in an ambush? There was no chance for him to win. So, with Uncle to my side, I was about to make the swap: the Avatar for the scroll.

But, in one of the most surprising, if not dumbest, moves I had ever heard, the loudmouth Water Tribe warrior declared that it was a bad deal. "Are you really going to hand over the Avatar for a stupid piece of parchment?" he asked in shock.

Sheer pandemonium took over at the pirates reneged on their deal, insisting they could collect a bigger bounty by handing the Avatar to the Fire Lord themselves. Soon, fire balls, smoke bombs, spears, staffs, whatever anybody could get their hands on, flew through the air. As Fire Nation troops and pirates fought in a cloud of smoke, courtesy of one of the pirates' smoke bombs, I was locked in a battle with the captain, who pulled out a long sword. The steel blade screeched through the air at me, leaving me to defend with my reflexes and my fire. I could tell he was skilled, given how effortless his swings and thrusts were. Maybe had I listened more carefully to Uncle's coaching, I might fare better.

My worst fear soon came to fruition as a pirate pulled out a long whip and lashed it at me. In my struggle against the captain, I couldn't dodge the whip smacking on my back, allowing him to hook the water bending scroll right from my pocket. With my hands tied and no one near me, I could only watch as my only bargaining chip was snatched away. Where was Uncle when I needed him the most? He was standing right by me right before the swap took place, so where did he go now?

A tug of my hair plus a soft nudge to my back caught my attention, as that very distinctive voice of Uncle Iroh's sliced into the battle. "Are you so busy fighting that you cannot see your own ship set sale?" He declared, pointing at the pirate ship.

True to his word, there was the Avatar and the water bending girl manipulating the waters to set the ship free. With the Water Tribe warrior at the helm, the pirate ship was slowly drifting away from the shore. But more shocking was that the pirate crew now saw my shuttle as an appropriate pursuit vehicle, and sought to hijack that as well. "Come on, Uncle," I yelled, grabbing his sleeve as the captain hopped on just in time for it to leave. Now I was truly kicking myself for not paying more attention to Uncle.

The only thing I could do was give chase, hoping to get a chance to hop back onto my boat. Hope got slimmer and slimmer until the Avatar turned the pirate ship to its side, letting my shuttle slam straight into it, sending both crafts over a waterfall. "My boat!" I hollered, watching helplessly as the Avatar escaped on his bison. As I tried to catch my breath, I could hear Uncle lumbering up to me. I tilted my head back just in time to see him twitch a little. Perhaps he was suffering from cramps? "What's wrong?" I asked.

Uncle stuck a hand into his sleeve, wiggling it about while speaking hesitantly. "Prince Zuko, you're really going to get a kick out of this," he began sheepishly, "the lotus tile was in my sleeve the whole time!" He announced, pulling out his game piece.

My eyes nearly bulged out from their sockets, completely flabbergasted at what happened. We docked at the port, made a deal with questionable people, got double-crossed by the pirates, lost my ship and the Avatar, and the whole time there was no need to go on this trip at all? My shoulders heaved up and down furiously, not even holding back my anger. Snatching the tile from Uncle's hand, I hurled it over the waterfall, not wanting to see this cursed thing again for the rest of my life.

I barely saw Uncle's surprised expression as I marched back to the port, my face redder than any flame coming out of my crew. Whatever respect I started gaining for Uncle during this adventure, it was all out the door by now.

*****

Zuko's POV

"Prince Zuko," I heard my uncle call from the door. I was in my quarters, the lighting dim and the surroundings cool as the heavyset man stuck his head through the entrance. "the crew wanted me to wish you safe travel," he announced.

The temperature in the room just dropped further as I shot back a dark look. "Good riddance to those traitors," I barked, the lights on the walls flickering as Uncle stepped in. As luck would have it, Zhao, now promoted to admiral, stepped onto my ship on Uncle's "music night" and conscripted my crew for his latest project: an all-out invasion of the Northern Water Tribe. In my mind, I had that place targeted as well, given the Avatar would be there to learn water bending. But Zhao beat me to the punch as he insisted my crew went with his, leaving my ship completely empty and barren.

And here I was, fuming in anger while shivering in the cold alone, with only Uncle's offers of going for a night walk being the only sound bouncing off the hull. I had no idea why Uncle would let the crew go off that easily. He was friends with most crew members, right? Why didn't he work harder to persuade them to stay? Either way, I was very angry at Uncle's nonchalant way of handling the issue. Did I not matter to him anymore? Did my honour not matter to him anymore?

Before long, there was complete silence on the boat, giving me a perfect time to think about the past events. I had come a long way since the incident with the pirates, given Uncle's incompetence and Zhao's relentlessness. That included having me take a secret identity, the Blue Spirit, to infiltrate Zhao's camp to take the Avatar from him. That ironically meant I had to save the Avatar from Zhao, before I could take him as my own captive. That plan, along with countless others, some of which concocted by Uncle, failed, leaving me sitting here stewing in my own juices. It really made me wonder what Uncle did when Zhao boarded my ship, and what his next move would be. Certainly he wouldn't cross over to Zhao's team and leave me all alone, right?

Suddenly, a creaking sound echoing through the halls caught my attention. "Uncle, is that you?" I asked, leaping from my bed and hurrying out my room. Earlier, Zhao took the honour of informing me himself that he would be taking my crew, and we nearly broke into a fistfight in my room. Luckily for Zhao, Uncle intervened; otherwise Zhao would have to go to the North Pole with two black eyes, a broken nose, and several of his teeth missing. Was he trying to sneak back in here to torment me further?

I put myself in full defence mode as I edged down the hallway, my eyes alternated back and forth. My body shifted through light and darkness, my every step lighter than a feather as sounds around me amplified. I tried to peer through the shadows, looking for anything suspicious as I made the way to the control tower. With a higher altitude, I should see the deck better. This was getting more and more unusual as I climbed my way up. Did something happen to Uncle, or was I the subject to an invasion myself?

Just then, a fluttering object outside the control room windows caught my eye. It was green, feathery, and had wings. Its distinctive squawk made me realize what it was: it was the bird belonging to the pirate captain I crossed paths with earlier. My heart raced to unbelievable rates as I realized the pirates must be around, and who knew what they were doing to my ship right now? After the Avatar humiliated them and destroyed their ship (along with my shuttle), I was certain they would seek revenge. Gripping the rails, I glanced down onto the deck, frantically searching for any strangers. Should they get their hands on any important equipment, I would be in big trouble.

But I barely got a second to look as a large fireball engulfed the tower, the wall of orange rushing up to my face. My eyes grew to the size of plates as I tried summoning a fire shield to block the damage, but I knew my fate was sealed. I was soon engulfed by the flames, my flimsy shield doing little to block the flying debris. Soon, piercing pain resonated from various parts of my body, my clothing sliced and my skin oozing with blood as the force of the explosion knocked me overboard. With my body feeling like it had been stabbed by a hundred knives, I plunged into the water below.

The pain on my body significantly intensified as the frigid liquid wrapped around my already weakened body. Muscle after muscle cramped up as my warm blood mixed with the cold water, leaving my in a helpless state as my ship crashed and burned above me. For the first time since after my Agni Kai with my father, I truly felt helpless. "Is anybody there? Help!" I mustered all my strength in hollering.

Flaming debris soon surrounded me as I struggled to kick myself to shore. It was like I was in a semi-paralyzed state, knowing I must move to safety but having no ability in doing so. I truly wondered what it would be like with my journey ending in failure. My only regret other than not regaining my honour was leaving Uncle behind. He already lost a loved one in Lu Ten, and the last thing he wanted was to lose me. I knew sometimes I wondered if he truly cared at all, but either way, he was still a relative. When someone lost a relative, it was usually a sad event for them, right?

Just as I was about to give way to unconsciousness, two strong arms latched onto me and hauled me away from the debris. I turned my head around to see that round face of Uncle's, his eyebrows creasing to epic proportions as his lips quivered. "Prince Zuko, you can't give up yet," he urged me on, "we still have to go to the North Pole."

I barely eked out a smile as Uncle pulled me onto the shore, slipping us into a nearby lodge as my ship collapsed into the sea. Given we had no medic around, Uncle tended to my wounds, his hands poking and prodding various areas while his eyes gauged my expression. "That must have been some reflex you had to dodge so many shots. Your fighting skills must have improved greatly," he commented, "but nothing means more to me than you getting out of that ship alive, Prince Zuko. You mean everything to me."

Hearing that made whatever pain in my body subside, as I realized Uncle did care about me after all. All this time, I thought he was a lazy, hedonistic man whose only worry was when the meals were, when music night was, and what trinkets he could buy at a bargain. But now, it felt like he was willing to forgo all that just to get me to safety. Deep down, I started feeling horrible for all the nasty things I said about him, and I truly wanted him to realize how much this meant to me. "If I had another chance to choose who could go on this redemption journey with me, I would make the same choice again," I whispered, "I wouldn't even hesitate in having you come along."

The only response from Uncle was a hard yank into his body, his arms holding me tight around him. "I was so afraid I would lose you," he muttered, "and I'm glad you're now alright." Holding my shoulders, he inspected me one more time before getting onto more serious business. "I know you're wounded right now, Prince Zuko, but if we still want to go after the Avatar, we have a perfect opportunity in the next few days."

Ignoring the pain, I lifted myself up to hear Uncle more carefully. I could barely see his face in this dark room, with only the moonlight outside illuminating us. But even in limited lighting, I could catch a glimpse of Uncle's serious expression as he explained how Zhao was about to lay siege on the North Pole. Originally, Zhao requested Uncle to be his advisor, but Uncle flatly refused to break his loyalty to me. "I know this bombing had something to do with Zhao, and I know he must be thinking that a weakling like you perished. That's why this is the perfect time to strike," he described, "I will accept his offer to be his advisor, and you can pose as one of his crew. No one will know that you are smuggled to the North Pole with him, and you can capture the Avatar."

I returned Uncle's look, his face stoic as he reminded me of my injuries. It was true that I wouldn't be in top fighting condition, but it was a chance that I had to take. If I made it in there quickly, and captured the Avatar before the water benders knew anything then maybe I had a chance. Taking a deep breath, I answered, "I'm in."

Before long, Uncle went back to the shipwreck and pulled out the necessary supplies. First he bandaged up my wounds, making sure they were cleaned before placing the clothes on them. Next he found an old set of Fire Nation armour, one that surprised me as to how well it fit. He also found a helmet to cover my face, which now sported a few new cuts and bruises to go along with my scar. "Now we're ready to see Zhao," he told me, "just intermingle with the crew while I speak to him. He'll never know it's you."

And that was how I would spend my next few days, wandering around the galley of Zhao's lead ship. There were many new recruits, some of whom were only a few years older than me. The Northern Water Tribe was one of the last remaining strongholds that the Fire Nation had yet to conquer, and assuming Zhao could defeat this lot, his name would go down in history. Personally, Zhao could have all the glory he wanted for this, but my goal was to get the Avatar. And looking back at Uncle's plan, I now knew why he was famous for his craftiness in the Fire Nation military. He was just so efficient at what he did, and it made me wonder if I could ever be like him.

Either way, my time with Uncle on this ship was limited, as by accepting Zhao's offer, he would be with Zhao in the command centre the majority of the time. In fact, Zhao's ship wasn't even near the frontlines, meaning we were quite a distance a way when the initial battles started. Nevertheless, I got a good view on the frontline ships hurling their flaming projectiles at the massive ice wall surrounding the Northern fortress. It was a sight to behold, totally opposite from it southern counterpart.

Nevertheless, it was time for me to take action. With the crew occupied by the siege, they would not notice one of their safety rafts taken as an infiltration vessel. I brought only the barest of necessities with me, with just enough to keep me alive in that frigid castle. If this mission was successful, Uncle would get my undying gratitude. As I was about to disembark, the door behind me creaked open. "You'll need a tightly woven net, or he'll squeeze through the tiniest hole and escape," Uncle's voice commented.

I shook my head, realizing that the last thing I wanted was for Uncle's sometimes confusing idioms to break my concentration. "I don't need your wisdom right now, Uncle," I replied, my mind still set on the task. Locating the Avatar in that fortress would be difficult, and with all those water benders around, I wouldn't be exactly welcomed in.

"I'm sorry," Uncle responded, his voice and tone significantly muted. I knew what he was about to say next, and even though I told him not to say it, he would proceed anyway. "I just nag you because, well, ever since I lost my son," he stuttered, his voice cracking, "I think of you as my own." He concluded, his every word laced with sobs.

Immediately, we ran to each other and held each other in a tight hug. "We'll meet again, Uncle, after I have the Avatar." I informed him. While I understood that Lu Ten was forever in Uncle's heart, I couldn't help but realize how significant that gesture was. As I hoped onto my raft and lowered it from Zhao's ship, I truly considered how I never had a good relationship with my father, as he tended to favour my sister Azula. To him, I was lucky to be born, while Azula was born lucky. I had to claw and struggle my way through life, with my mother commenting that it was my most distinctive trait.

But throughout this taxing journey, who was the one to make my struggle easier to bear? Uncle Iroh. Now, I heard it from his own mouth: he joined me not because he wanted a vacation, but because he loved me like a son. And reflecting on all the things he did for me, I must say the feeling was mutual, as I truly felt Uncle Iroh should now be considered my new father. With that in mind, I was determined not to let him down.

*****

Zuko's POV

"Looks like you did some serious shopping," Uncle commented as he glanced around the cave we called our home for the last little while. The Siege of the North was an utter disaster, as Zhao not only didn't manage to defeat the Northern Water Tribe, but threatened the lives of their most sacred, but mortal, spirits. Uncle Iroh always said the spirits weren't to be tampered with, but Zhao ended up killing one, turning the other into a monster that destroyed our navy. Only when the tribe's princess sacrificed her life did the monster end its spree and everything returned to normal, all of which Uncle observed.

As for the Avatar, I nearly made off with his unconscious body before a blizzard trapped us in a cave. That was when the Avatar woke up, his friends arrived, knocked me out, and they hurried back to the Spirit Oasis. When I regained consciousness, Uncle took me out of the North Pole and into somewhere safe, in a port resort town where he could enjoy a massage. I still didn't have a ship to call my own, meaning my plans to catch the Avatar had to be shelved for now, leaving me with no choice but to stew in my thoughts.

"Do you like your new teapot?" I asked Uncle as he picked up the trinket. It was at the resort when Azula, my sister, came to fetch Uncle and I back to the Fire Nation. Her ship captain let it slip that we were to be taken back as prisoners, which let loose a huge battle where Uncle got us out just before things got totally out of hand. We cut our hair and cemented our status as fugitives, leaving us in the wild with nothing more than items taken from nearby villages for survival. I was sickened by the way those villagers treated Uncle and me, but also with the way that Uncle accepted this humiliating lifestyle. He seemed so ready to cleanse himself of the Fire Nation, and adapted into the Earth Kingdom. Did he not care for his honour? Likewise, what about caring about my honour?

To no one's surprise, Uncle went on one of his tangents again, claiming there was no shame in being down on our luck or something like that. But for me, there was only one thing in my mind. "There's no honour for me without the Avatar," I spat, trying to wipe out all his talk of humility and the simple life, "if not, then there is no hope at all."

"No, Zuko! You must never give in to despair!" Uncle exclaimed, grabbing me by the shoulders. I tried not to look into his eyes, but I could tell that Uncle was extremely concerned by my statement. His eyes were probably wide, his mouth slightly gaping and his face tense as he told me not to surrender to my lowest instant. "In the darkest time, hope is something you give yourself. That is the meaning of inner strength!"

Hearing enough, I flicked Uncle's hand off my shoulder and slipped into the woods, hoping to do some soul-searching. So far, I appreciated Uncle supporting me all this time. With the Siege of the North and how he sneaked me onto Zhao's boat, I truly felt he was not only lending a hand, but because he truly believed he was a part of my journey. He wanted to see me through, given that I was now his surrogate son. He really wanted to see my moment in glory, no matter how remote its chances would be now. It was something I was truly grateful for as I bonded with him.

But I had increasing difficulty with Uncle's attitude. He was fully nonchalant with exile, losing his status as a former general and royalty member. Earlier, he was totally willing to beg for food, and let the lowly peasants walk over him as he sang and danced like a circus animal. It made me wonder if he wanted to return home at all, as he seemed content living life in the Earth Kingdom and intermingling with peasants. Was he even concerned with his life? He was belittled, humiliated, and stripped of his dignity, and he still claimed I had to regain hope? What hope was there when there was nothing left?

But knowing Uncle, I knew his words had some impact on me. Even if he didn't care for hope, I did, and I wanted my honour back. Uncle might be satisfied with this low class lifestyle, but I wasn't joining in. If he wouldn't rejoin my quest to catch the Avatar, then I would do it alone. Uncle was probably too stubborn to admit it, but I would no longer be babied. I was no longer staying clingy, looking to him for answers to my every question. If I wanted my honour back, then the only way was to do it all by myself.

Striding back to the cave, I approached Uncle. My heart was heavy with emotion, because while I was determined to set course for this new phase of my life, I was still very attached to my new fatherly figure. But for now, I must set my emotions aside, and had to proceed. "I thought a lot about what you said," I described to Uncle, "we no longer have anything to gain by traveling together. I have to find my own way."

For I while, there was complete silence. I couldn't read Uncle's expression, as he had his back to me, but I could probably guess what he was like right now. He had his back hunched, and his face was probably creased with anxiety. Uncle was never much for expressing his thoughts, except during tea tasting or bargain hunting, but I knew that he left behind a part of himself with me. And as I picked up my belongings, I also realized that I left behind a part of myself with him. We were forever bonded, and even as we parted ways, we would still be forever in each other's hearts and minds.

As I entered the woods, ready to embark on this new journey, I still hoped one day I could see Uncle again. We might be separated, but I knew how much this individual meant to me, and how much I meant to him. I would never be who I was today without him, and should I restore my honour, I would never want to share that with anyone but him. But for now, my journey had just begun, and for the first time, I had to do it alone.

*****

Toph's POV

"You seem a little too young to travel by yourself," the old man commented dryly as he handed me a cup of tea. It was a rather odd situation, as I was nothing more than a rich girl stuffed up in her overprotective parents' home. The only reason I managed to escape was when the Avatar, an air bender named Aang, visited my house and wanted me to tag along in his journey. To no one's surprise, my parents rejected the offer, claiming that I was blind and weak. That led me to sneak out of the house by myself, and offering to join Aang as his earth bending teacher. It was something that finally made me free.

"And you seem a little too old," I retorted, grabbing the tea out of his hand. If the spat with my parents didn't put me in a terrible enough mood, then the recent fight with Aang's group certainly did. We were being pursued by the Fire Nation in an advanced metallic machine, and I merely suggested Aang's bison was part of the problem. Appa's fur left an easy trail for the Fire Nation to follow. It led to Aang and his sugary water bending teacher Katara to throw me out of their group. But for me, it felt more like I threw them out. I left my parents to enjoy freedom, not to let clueless people boss me around. Packing my bags, I bolted out of there and went off on my own.

And that was where I found myself, bumping into this goofy old man who was alone in the woods. After a quick introduction to each other, he decided we should have some tea. I only knew him for a few minutes, but deep down, I knew what he felt. So typical of people in his generation, he found me weak and frail, and had to do stuff for me. "I know what you're thinking," I began, "I look like I can't handle being by myself. You wouldn't even let me pour my own cup of tea."I turned away, sipping in silence.

But my newfound friend, Iroh, disagreed. "I poured your tea because I wanted to, and for no other reason," he explained, no tinge of anger or frustration in his voice. That almost caught me off-guard, as I never would have expected such calmness from a member of the generation (or for this case, maybe two generations) before me.

Shaking the thought away, it was best that I stayed on topic. Besides, I doubted he knew much about me, so why not tell him what I truly felt? "People see me and think I'm weak. They want to take care of me," I responded. For some reason, it was hard to muster up toughness before Iroh. "but I can take care of myself, by myself," I emphasized.

Again, there was no anger from Iroh as he compared me to his nephew. "There is nothing wrong with letting people who love you help you," he replied, "not that I love you, because I just met you!" He ended with a chuckle.

I couldn't help but let out a laugh of my own. For an old guy, I was starting to like Iroh already. Somehow, being around him made me feel something I never felt before: I had someone who truly listened to me and respected my thoughts without interfering. "So where is your nephew?" I asked, curious to hear what type of boy he was, "Is he lost?"

"Yes, a little bit," Iroh responded. I couldn't tear my attention away from Iroh. It was odd to cross paths with such a fascinating and complex man in a forest, and I had to admit that his stories were almost intriguing. "His life has recently changed, and he's going through very difficult times. He's trying to figure out who he is, and he went away. I know he doesn't want me around right now, but if he needs me, then I'll be there."

That comment truly touched me, as I now realized what it meant to bond with a person. It wasn't about control or dominance, or letting loose whenever one felt like it; it was about understanding people, and gaining their trust and respect. My parents never tried understanding me, and in turn I never tried to gain the trust and respect of Aang's group. Perhaps this tea session with Iroh was helpful after all? "Your nephew is very lucky, even if he doesn't know it." I commented with admiration.

I quickly finished my tea and thanked Iroh for his company. But surprisingly, it was Iroh who was gracious, claiming that it was one of life's most fascinating events to share tea with a total stranger. Before I left, I made sure Iroh knew how much he helped me, and I offered him some advice in return. "About your nephew, maybe you should tell him that you need him too." After all, I could tell based on the way Iroh told me about him that they had a true bond. Perhaps that was a good way to let them re-bond?

By the time I returned to the area where I left the group, it was a disaster. There was fur all over the place, leading away from the river and into the distance. Figuring that those three girls must have caught up to Aang, I realized I had to take action quickly. Using my earth bending to create a wave of soil, I surfed on it through the landscape and returned to where Iroh was, hoping I could convince him to help me. I couldn't really describe who those girls were, given that I never got a chance to touch the ground when they were nearby, but Iroh was extremely concerned after hearing me out. "Take me with you," he suggested, "I think you'll want all the help you could get."

My mind was flustered as we surfed our way down the fields, with Iroh telling me which direct to go, based on how Appa's fur landed. "It ends right there," I heard Iroh's anxious voice told me, "it seems to be some abandoned town."

As we brought ourselves to ground level, I could feel from the vibrations on the ground a huge battle going on. One of the girls, the one my group believed to be the team leader, was battling Aang, Katara and Sokka all at once. Surprisingly, she was holding her own, meaning I had to interfere. Letting Iroh run off, I started my earth bending on the teenage fire bender, throwing her off balance.

That got the girl on the run, sneaking into an alley and to the other side of the ghost town. But we didn't have to pursue too far, as Iroh was waiting around the corner and blocked her progress with his body. From the ground, I could feel another presence by Iroh, this time a teenager around the same age as the girl we were chasing. Perhaps this was the nephew Iroh referred to earlier? Either way, we had a bigger task at hand, as now six people surrounded this fleet-footed girl into a corner. "I'm done," she conceded, "I know when I'm beaten. You got me. A princess surrenders with honour."

That seemed to surprise all of us, as I couldn't feel a single person moving. Iroh was to the far right of our formation, and I could feel from his body posture that his head was tilting back and forth, wondering what we were up to. Somehow, I knew Iroh didn't expect things to go down quietly, and was most likely trying to warn us to be on our guard. It might be the case that one false move could lead us to losing this battle. Sensing Iroh's gesture, I firmly stood my ground, not about to give an inch.

But the final move shocked us as the girl aimed a fire blast at Iroh, zinging him in the abdomen and sending him sprawling. We barely gathered ourselves before all four elements were sent towards the girl, creating a huge plume of smoke. But for me, whether we hit or not wasn't most important. We edged up to the heavyset man, now unmoving on the ground. His nephew knelt beside him, roaring in frustration. I felt from the ground vibrations that Iroh was alright, but not for long if he didn't get medical attention.

But we were in no place to offer anything, even with Katara the healer, as the nephew shot a fire blast at us, ordering us to leave. Seeing the situation, we had no choice but to go silently. While I wanted to give Iroh's nephew a tongue lashing, I held it in. There was no point arguing now, especially in this scenario where his loved one was dying. Moreover, hanging around with Iroh had taught me that sometimes, conflict could be avoided by different ways. This was something I could learn, given how different it was from earth bending, where one must tackle any obstacle head on. I figured Iroh was a man of many stories, and had an appreciation for other cultures that surpassed anyone.

But for now, I had my own journey to go on. I had to start teaching Aang earth bending, and hopefully used this opportunity to see the world more. Maybe, one day, I could be like Iroh, and be able to tell the world of my experiences being immersed in other cultures. I hoped I could see Iroh again, so that I could share these stories with him. Besides, with a tea-maker like that, who would want to go to a tea shop?

[Canada Cowboy]

Avatar: Rites of Passage, an "Avatar: the Last Airbender" fanfic.
Ch. 15: Iroh, Part 2

Note: the entire chapter will be told from Zuko's POV.

*****

"There¡¦s energy all around us, and the energy is both yin and yang.¡¨ Uncle¡¦s words resonated in my mind as we stood on a hillside overlooking a beautiful scene in the Earth Kingdom. It was only a few days after Azula¡¦s attack on Uncle, leaving him burned and wounded. While Uncle was far from a complete recovery, he was at least healthy enough to move around without assistance. But for me, just the fact that he was alive, serving tea and joking around, that was reward enough.

But Uncle and I were both convinced that it was time to go into a bit more detail over bending, especially after what we saw Azula do. By generating lightning back at the dock, and shooting out flames of such ferocity at the ghost town, it was evident that she had mastery over fire bending. Though Uncle probably had the skill to take her on, I just couldn¡¦t rely on him all the time, especially after this injury. Given the sudden reprieve, now was the time to truly discuss the techniques that Uncle researched in the past.

"Only a select few fire benders can separate these energies,¡¨ Uncle continued, explaining how yin, the positive, and yang, the negative, could be used to our advantage in any battle. My mind was still quite flustered, as no one throughout my childhood years had truly discussed these theories with me before. But even as Uncle¡¦s words jumbled together, I could make out some information. The notion that positive and negative were always trying to create a balance could eventually spark a release of the energies, which in result could create a powerful attack like lightning.

I took a step back as Uncle got into position, waving his arms around to harness the energy within. Before long, blue sparks sizzled around his body as electricity soon surrounded him. My jaw dropped in amazement, shocked to see the sheer power that he now had in his hands. Uncle was a truly gifted individual, not only in battle, but also in teaching. He was never one to be impatient, taunting my lack of experience or skill like my sister. And even when approaching a new technique, he made sure to go slow, letting me at least understand the background before proceeding. I never really got much of a chance to attend one of Uncle¡¦s lessons to Lu Ten, having only been a spectator sitting in the distance. But now, to train under the best instructor ever, it was truly an honour.

Uncle relaxed his pose as his lightning bolt flared into the skies, lighting up the surrounding area in a light blue hue. ¡§Remember, once you separate the energy, you do not command it,¡¨ he reminded me, ¡§you are simply its humble guide. Breathe first.¡¨

I inhaled deeply, clearing my mind of any stray thoughts. I only kept the image of Uncle swinging his arms around as I mimicked his every gesture. I didn¡¦t have to be reminded of the many times I tried to show my parents new fire bending techniques, only to fail miserably or be outperformed by Azula. While my mother would encourage me to try harder, my father would only snort and dismiss me, branding me as the useless one. Now, with my mother gone, Uncle was the only one who still appreciated my efforts, and I was determined not to let him down. Increasing my energy, I prepared to let it loose.

What was supposed to be lightning became an explosion, rocking the land before me and sending debris all over. But the worst part was that I didn¡¦t expect this reaction, and that ended up throwing me backwards, slamming rear-first onto the rocky ground. Instantly, an unimaginable amount of pain seared through my body, shaking me to my core as I struggled to stay conscious. Things were not going as planned.

Undaunted, I got up to try it again. I went through each step methodically, hoping to make sure I followed Uncle¡¦s every procedure. But every single time I tried it, the result was the same: a huge explosion that knocked me backwards. Uncle was now away from the scene, taking a seat at the abandoned house we took refuge in, just a few metres away. He didn¡¦t say a single thing to me, but I could tell by his slouched posture and glum face that he was disappointed. Although I hated to admit it, I failed again.

¡§Why can¡¦t I do it? Instead of lightning, it keeps exploding in my face!¡¨ I roared in frustration, ¡§like everything always does,¡¨ I added. Right now, it felt like the entire world was piling onto my misery, not willing to stop until I was completely beaten and broken. Was there really nothing that I could do successfully? Maybe I ought to place a loser sign on my back and sulked in the corner, as at least it wouldn¡¦t be as humiliating.

That was when Uncle marched up to me, and suggested that I must deal with the turmoil inside of me before I could master lightning. ¡§You must let go of your feelings of shame before your anger can go away,¡¨ he described, his posture casual and his tone calm and patient, ¡§true humility is the only antidote to shame.¡¨

I bit my lower lip, realizing I was sincerely humbled by the sheer number of nasty turns in my life recently. Not too many individuals could go from royalty, to banishment, to being a fugitive all in a month. ¡§I have another idea,¡¨ Uncle continued, ¡§I will teach you a fire bending move that even Azula doesn¡¦t know, because I made it up myself.¡¨ He announced proudly as he placed a hand on my shoulder.

I couldn¡¦t help but crack a small smile as Uncle and I sat down onto the sandy ground. Picking up a stick, Uncle drew a few symbols, explaining the significance of each one. ¡§Fire is the element of power,¡¨ he began with our own culture, ¡§the people of the Fire Nation have desire and will, and the energy and drive to achieve what they want.¡¨ He then went on to the other cultures, claiming that earth represented substance, with a persistent and stubborn nature. Air was freedom, and was a relatively peaceful culture. I listened on intently, hoping to cash in on this valuable knowledge. I had never attended any classes on other cultures before, given that throughout my school years, all I had been told was that our nation was the greatest and the rest were inferior. So, for such a seasoned man who immersed himself in other cultures for so long, I was grateful Uncle was willing to share this knowledge with me.

But my eyes focused harder when Uncle got to water, which he described as an element of change. Water benders could adapt to any environment that surrounded them, and tended to change together as a group. ¡§It is important to draw wisdom from many difference places. If you only take it from one place, then you become rigid and stale. Understanding others would help you become whole,¡¨ he lectured me.

Hearing that, I couldn¡¦t help but compare Uncle¡¦s lecture to the Avatar. Was it because of the requirements to learn all four elements that made the Avatar so strong? But Uncle soon addressed my point, as he told me I ought to think like the Avatar. ¡§It can make you more powerful too. You see, the technique I¡¦m about to teach you is one I learned by studying the water benders,¡¨ he revealed with a twinkle in his eye.

My mind raced with excitement as we got up and into a slightly crouched stance. Now I truly realized why keeping an open mind was so important, as we could find out more about other cultures that we could adapt into our own systems. Whatever trust I lost in Uncle when I first left him was regained instantly as he went through the basic steps with me, asking me to follow his moves as he instructed me on energy flow. ¡§A water bender lets their defence become their offence, turning their opponents¡¦ energy against them. I learned a way to do this with lightning.¡¨

I looked on intently, my eyes never leaving Uncle¡¦s hands as he pointed out various parts of his body that were crucial in the successful execution of this move. ¡§If you let the energy in your own body flow, the lightning will follow it,¡¨ he spoke while gesturing at once. I saw him point one hand in the air, claiming that energy must go into the fingertip, through the arm and shoulder, and ended in the abdomen. ¡§The stomach is called the sea of chi. In my case, it¡¦s a vast ocean of chi!¡¨ He exclaimed with a laugh.

I gave a little grin, surprised that Uncle could joke around even in these times. While I was still bitter about how easily he accepted life as a lowly beggar, part of me was impressed at how quick he turned it around. I still didn¡¦t completely buy his speech about how I had to make chances out of nothing even when the entire world was against me, but at least I was willing to see things from his perspective. Focusing back on Uncle, he showed me how, through his stomach, he could direct the lightning into his other arm and into the opposite direction. ¡§You must not let the lightning pass through your heart, because the damage then could be deadly,¡¨ he warned me.

"Well, looks like that¡¦s one activity the kids shouldn¡¦t try at home,¡¨ I thought to myself. Despite the sarcastic reaction, I was amazed that Uncle could actually garner all his experiences and come up with a technique all by himself. It was truly unbelievable, and perhaps it was the much-needed medicine I was lacking for now. Even in my three years of exile, I never truly appreciated the different lands I visited. In Uncle, who had been to all sorts of places and took in all sorts of sights, I now knew what an amazing individual he was. All that time, and even now, I was blinded by my bitterness to accept the different things that other cultures had to offer.

But Uncle, he enjoyed every second of it, interacting with others and trying to help me along the way. Maybe he was just like me in the past, where his determination to bring pride to the Fire Nation superseded everything else. But for today, he behaved like the very man I respected: wise and knowledgeable, friendly and affable, stern but patient, and a person I truly looked up to. He had always said that his experiences in the Earth Kingdom, particularly during the war, changed him. Perhaps this was what he meant?

And for the next few hours, we stood near the edge of the cliff just swaying back and forth, our arms moving in unison and our fingers alternating the direction to which they pointed. There wasn¡¦t much progress in terms of advancing the technique, but it was the time with Uncle that I treasured the most. Not only did my respect for him return, so did some of my hope that we would get out of this mess. Somehow, I knew Uncle could come through with something, given his vast knowledge. Maybe he had something else up his sleeve that I wasn¡¦t aware of yet? I couldn¡¦t say for sure, but for now, I was intent to master this technique so that I could fight another day.

*****

"So, the Blue Spirit,¡¨ Uncle¡¦s familiar voice echoed through the walls of this dark, damp chamber underneath Lake Laogai, a body of water just outside Ba Sing Se. It was the most unlikely of situations, but we managed to get ourselves into the capital of the Earth Kingdom via a secret society Uncle was a member of. Believe it or not, it was his Pai Sho tiles that led the way, and I felt a strange sense of irony in the sense that an item of such little importance in my eyes became our saviour.

But while Uncle was enjoying life as a tea server in Ba Sing Se, my mind was still on my honour. I knew the Avatar was on the loose after that battle in the deserted town, and it didn¡¦t help that Uncle was shot by Azula. But either way, Uncle¡¦s method of using a lotus tile to save us was truly remarkable, and I was (yet again) grateful for what he did. But for now, I had a perfect chance to take the initiative, as in this secret chamber I found the Avatar¡¦s Sky Bison, and could use it as leverage against the air bending boy.

"I wonder who could be behind that mask,¡¨ Uncle continued his inquisitive yet sarcastic interrogation. I could only sigh as I realized my cover was blown. I found it so ironic that Uncle was at the very city where he lost his honour, but yet he was in no hurry to regain it. Whereas for me, the only reason I was in Ba Sing Se was because I already lost my honour, and now was a chance to regain it. What was Uncle possibly thinking with such a nonchalant attitude? Did he care more about his tea shop than my honour?

With the Avatar¡¦s bison still grunting and stomping behind me, I pulled off my mask. ¡§What are you doing here?¡¨ I asked in defeat. Sometimes, there was no hiding from Uncle. His strong bond to me meant he could read my every move, which didn¡¦t bode well for me, since I intended this bison kidnapping to be a secret mission.

"I was just about to ask you the same thing,¡¨ Uncle replied, his tone stern and serious, ¡§what do you plan to do now that you¡¦ve found the Avatar¡¦s bison? Keep it locked in our new apartment? Should I go put on a pot of tea for him?¡¨ The echoes of his voice off the walls signalled to me that he was none-too-impressed by my action, and only served to belittle me more. Couldn¡¦t I do anything I wanted and with my methods?

Taking a deep breath, I explained my plan to Uncle, insisting that we must get the bison out of the lake first. But before I moved on to another sentence, Uncle cut me off. ¡§And then what?¡¨ he bellowed, the angriest I had heard him since I first journeyed with him, ¡§you never think these things through. This is exactly what happened when you captured the Avatar at the North Pole. You had him, and then you had nowhere to go! If his friends hadn¡¦t found you, you would have frozen to death!¡¨

"I know my own destiny, Uncle!¡¨ I retorted. Even though I had to stay strong to my goals, I found my position weakening by the second. Uncle had a point: there were several mistakes made at the North Pole. I simply wasn¡¦t ready for the elements last time, and even now, I wasn¡¦t sure if my plan would succeed. Should I just listen to Uncle and abandon the plan? So how would regaining my honour play a role here then?

But Uncle would soon answer that question for me. ¡§Is it your own destiny, or is it a destiny someone else has tried to force on you?¡¨ he demanded. I tried to look away, but the emphasis in his voice became louder and clearer as the argument went on. ¡§I¡¦m begging you, Prince Zuko. It¡¦s time for you to look inward, and begin asking yourself the big question: who are you, and what do you want?¡¨ He concluded with authority.

Suddenly, my mind couldn¡¦t handle more of Uncle¡¦s rants. In frustration, I threw my swords to the ground and let out a cry of anxiety, my voice ringing through the room as thoughts mercilessly bombarded my mind. I didn¡¦t want to give up my journey of redemption, especially when I was so close to my goal several times now. But given how Uncle had pretty much accepted his fate, and was convincing me all along that a simpler life wasn¡¦t out of the question, could I truly abandon the one who accompanied me all this time? I knew Uncle would never be convinced to return to the Fire Nation with me, but I also didn¡¦t feel right to just take off without him. Was there no other way?

Finally, I picked up the strength to reach for my swords again. ¡§You¡¦re right, Uncle,¡¨ I conceded, ¡§Maybe there is another way to go about my life.¡¨ I moved up to the bison, eyeing the six chains that trapped its every leg. Taking another deep breath, I told Uncle, ¡§I¡¦m going to free the bison, and hope that the Avatar can find him.¡¨

Not a word was spoken as I used my swords to undo all the clamps and locks on the bison¡¦s feet. But even without looking, I could sense Uncle relax completely, his mind finally at ease as I chose to stay with him in Ba Sing Se. Maybe it was because I was cowardly, or maybe because I felt it wasn¡¦t worth it, but whatever the case, I felt my bond with Uncle was the most important thing right now. For the first time in three years, I could feel I could call some place home, away from the life that required me to wander the world aimlessly. But most importantly, I could truly live my life with the one person I truly admired: Uncle Iroh. As I undid the last shackle, I watched as the majestic animal took off for its freedom, paralleling the situation I was in right now. Perhaps, with this last act, I could finally achieve my own sense of freedom.

As Uncle and I climbed out from the manhole that I originally sneaked in from, I felt some weight lifted off my shoulders. At the very least, I didn¡¦t have to live my life in secret, and I knew this signified the beginning of a new age for me. As my uncle assured me that I did the right thing, I held the Blue Spirit mask in my hands one last time. This was the identity I took as I crossed the Earth Kingdom, having to loot and pillage all the villagers around us in order to survive. But now, as this part of the journey ended, another one would begin, and I was more than happy to move on. Taking one last look at it, I cast it into the lake, letting it sink into the abyss as I shed this painful memory from my mind.

*****

"Uncle, I don¡¦t understand,¡¨ I raised my concern as I had my rendezvous with my surrogate father in this underground chamber beneath the Earth Kingdom royal palace. After my incident with the bison, I went through a painful few days, rendered bedridden and running a continuous fever. The details were blurry, but I recalled Uncle telling me that this was the beginning of a big transformation within me. It was to test my entire make-up as a person, challenging my beliefs and forcing me to face my destiny.

And true to his word, it was an experience that left some vivid images in my mind, even though I only had spotty memories of it. I saw a scene where I was the new Fire Lord surrounded by two dragons that gave me conflicting advice, and another one where I woke up with a shaved head and blue arrow tattoos, resembling the very Avatar that I sought to capture. It was a confusing few moments, but by the time I recovered, I told Uncle I was ready to start a new life with him. In my mind, here was not just a new chance for our lives, but it also allowed my uncle and me to move on from the painful years that we had in the Fire Nation.

"What are you doing with the Avatar?¡¨ I demanded, pointing at the bald boy standing across from us. Our tea shop opened for less than a week, and already we had an invitation from the Earth King to serve him tea. We were originally waiting for him in his private dining quarters when suddenly, we were surrounded by Dai Li agents, led by none other than my manipulative sister Azula. While Uncle proposed escaping, I insisted on staying back to fight Azula, only to have the coward turn tail and sent the Dai Li on me. After a few hits, I was thrown into this underground dungeon, surrounded by bright green crystals with only the Avatar¡¦s water bending teacher as my companion and cellmate.

"Saving you, that¡¦s what,¡¨ the Avatar curtly retorted, looking over the shoulder of the taller girl dressed in blue. Had it not been for Uncle blocking me, I would pound that kid to a pulp. If his girlfriend¡¦s rants about how I destroyed her family weren¡¦t enough to test my patience, then this cocky shrimp¡¦s attitude was. I surely wondered how the Avatar could bend with a couple of these crystals shoved up his nostrils.

But Uncle prevented any damage from being done, claiming that we ought to have a talk. ¡§Go help out your other friends,¡¨ he instructed our two foes, ¡§we¡¦ll catch up to you.¡¨ I could only grit my teeth as Uncle allowed them to leave. Why did Uncle join up with them? What was he trying to prove here?

Turning to me, Uncle offered his advice. ¡§You¡¦re not the man you used to be, Zuko. You are stronger and wiser and freer than you have ever been,¡¨ his words echoed off the rocky walls while the green reflections of the crystals paralleled the green and brown Earth Kingdom clothing that Uncle and I now sported, ¡§and now you have come to the crossroads of your destiny.¡¨ He concluded with emphasis. Somehow, I could tell this was a lecture like no other I had received from him before.

I glanced over at the heavyset man, realizing that my trust and faith in him now weighed heavier than ever before. We now faced a new life, but it seemed like our old life didn¡¦t want to go without a fight. Sure it was tempting to join Uncle in Ba Sing Se and worked in our tea shop, but with Azula on our doorsteps and the Avatar roaming in the vicinity, could I truly give them up for good? ¡§It¡¦s time for you to choose. It¡¦s time for you to choose good,¡¨ Uncle insisted, his tone gentle but firm.

Just as I considered his words, a series of crystals shot up from the ground, trapping Uncle in a complex maze while I looked on. In the distance, two Dai LI agents slid down from the opening, followed by my sister. ¡§I expected this kind of treachery from Uncle, but Zuko,¡¨ Azula stated, slowly stepping towards me, ¡§Prince Zuko, you¡¦re a lot of things, but you¡¦re not a traitor, are you?¡¨ she questioned, her eyes thinning to darts.

I tried not to let her words influence me, realizing that she was probably up to her old tricks again. ¡§Release him immediately,¡¨ I hissed, getting into a fighter stance. While she had a life-long grudge against me, it wasn¡¦t fair that she brought Uncle into this. In my mind, Uncle had been the most generous and caring individual for us both, second only to our mother Ursa. So, to see Azula take Uncle as a hostage just to intimidate me, this was absolutely unacceptable, and I was willing to fight to the death to protect him.

"It¡¦s not too late for you, Zuko,¡¨ Azula continued, her tone nonchalant as ever. I knew she was up to something, but I couldn¡¦t say what. Glancing around, she went on to discuss how this was another opportunity for me. ¡§You can still redeem yourself.¡¨

"The kind of redemption she offers is not for you,¡¨ Uncle chimed in from behind me. Even without saying anything, I knew what Uncle was trying to tell me. Azula was up to her old tricks again, and I ought to be extra careful when dealing with her.

But Azula brushed Uncle aside, stating that her plans transcended the Fire Nation. ¡§I¡¦ve plotted every move of this day, this glorious day in Fire Nation history, and the only way we win is by fighting together,¡¨ she exclaimed, ¡§At the end of this day, you will have your honour back. You¡¦ll have Father¡¦s love. You¡¦ll have everything you want!¡¨ In my mind, while part of me still felt she was setting a trap, the offer felt too good to reject. Those were the things I had always wanted, so why not reach out for them now?

But Uncle¡¦s voice snapped me back to reality. ¡§Zuko, I am begging you. Look into your heart and see what it is that you truly want.¡¨ I glanced back at the man who went through these experiences with me, and realized that to go with Azula would mean abandoning him. Even with my honour on the line, it was Uncle, not Azula or my father, who was doing all the hard work to help me. Uncle was the one who became a fugitive with me, and Uncle was the one who worked so hard to let us regain at least a bit of our dignity. Could I really make the choice to cast him aside and go with Azula?

As Azula marched off, claiming I was free to choose, I couldn¡¦t help but think about that weird experience I had. I was in the Fire Lord¡¦s seat, with two dragons curled up on the pillars to my either side. The blue dragon spoke in Azula¡¦s voice, her tempting tone enough to lull my security away. But on the other side, the red dragon sounded like Uncle, telling me to stay alert and trying to fend off the blue dragon. Was that some type of precursor to this event? In the dream sequence, the blue dragon supposedly defeated the red one, so did that mean Uncle would lose this battle?

As image after image swamped my mind, one word stuck out in the end: life. It was a matter of what type of life I chose to lead, and what type of life would be in store for me based on each choice. While I might enjoy an easy, relaxed life as a tea server, I realized the enormous potential behind going back to the Fire Nation with my honour restored. As the Fire Prince, I could probably help Uncle open ten tea shops, and ordered that only Uncle¡¦s brands of tea be served at our palace. Besides, Uncle had always said his greatest military failure was at Ba Sing Se, so why not let Uncle get a second shot at the walled city? Maybe this time, he would return a hero by catching the Avatar with me.

Without a second thought, I shed the outer layer of clothing and raced after Azula, not even bothering to listen to Uncle¡¦s calls from the previous chamber. I wasn¡¦t doing it just for me, but for Uncle as well. The next chamber, much wider and brighter than the last, greeted me with a battle scene, where my sister stood between the Avatar and Katara in a stare-down. Unleashing a fire bomb of my own, I blasted the area between them, getting all their attention as I edged up to the Avatar. Seeing a twisted look of fear on the bald boy¡¦s face, I unleashed a series of fire punches, putting him on the defensive.

Before long, the Avatar was on the run, leaping onto pillars and ledges while I tried to pull him down with a series of fire whips. It didn¡¦t matter what Azula and Katara were doing, nor did I see any of these obstacles as an issue. What was more important now was to defeat this group and returned to the Fire Nation as heroes, not just for me, but also for Uncle Iroh. Out of all of us here, he was the one most deserving of that status, even more deserving than me. There was no way in my mind that anyone of his history should be shunned like that, especially with all his dedication and achievements for our nation. Add all the love and respect he showed me, and I had to repay him somehow.

We soon found ourselves on the defensive as the Avatar held me back with a huge boulder drop while Katara wrapped water around Azula¡¦s limbs, causing her to teeter. We decided to switch position and have my sister go after the air bender while I tackled Katara. Water and fire whips sliced across the battleground. ¡§I can¡¦t lose, not without redeeming Uncle,¡¨ I urged myself on, parrying and jousting with the water bender. I tried to include some of Uncle¡¦s techniques in my fight, realizing that a water bender would use defence as their offence. So far, I hadn¡¦t done anything fiery, opting to focus on smooth and slower attacks. But It actually worked, as Katara couldn¡¦t do anything that penetrated past me. Deep down, a part of me really wanted Uncle to see me battle here.

We finally got our much desired help when the Dai Li rushed into the room, knocking the Avatar off from his spot and sending the bald boy sprawling to the ground. With that settled, it let Azula and I gang up on Katara, knocking the rhythm out of her water whips and sending her flying as well. Soon, Dai Li agents covered the entire chamber, outnumbering them at least fifty to two. Sensing there was no way to fight, the boy crumpled to the ground, creating a green crystal tent to cover himself. I could only cock my eyebrow at this move, trying to remember what Uncle told me about air benders. They tended to avoid conflict, giving up material goods to live a free life. So was that what Uncle referred to? By encasing himself in a tent, the Avatar was going to step away from the fight? In that case, he might as well surrender himself to us then!

But what followed was a truly stunning sight. The Avatar broke out of the green tent, his body hovering in a brilliant pillar of white light. Pure energy resonated through this room, leaving me in stunned silence. Uncle told me that the Avatar, when combining all four elements together, was a fearsome force, and seeing this alone was enough to shock me. It was so dangerous, yet serene; powerful, yet peaceful. It made me, for just one moment, forget that I was fighting this individual, and let me pause to absorb this scene. Uncle told me that I ought to take in more different sights and sounds to make me a more enlightened person, so maybe this was something I ought to do now?

But the scene was soon shattered as Azula sent a blast of lightning at the Avatar, piercing the boy right through his body. Now lifeless, the limp body of the Avatar sailed down from the ceiling, with nothing but rocks underneath to break his fall. For a while, I couldn¡¦t move a muscle, as I realized that Azula had just wounded, if not killed, the most powerful being in the world. While it would pretty much guarantee us good words from Father, I really didn¡¦t know what to think. Uncle had said before that spiritual beings were not to be reckoned with, so what implications would this have for us?

I barely got time to consider that option as a huge wave swamped us, dispersing our crowd as Katara rushed to the Avatar¡¦s aide. She picked up the unconscious boy, a helpless look on her face as Azula and I regrouped. We had to finish the job, given how far we came. Uncle and I would return as heroes, I knew it.

Suddenly, a sea of fire rushed past us, cutting us off from our targets. I turned my head to the source and, to my horror, it was Uncle Iroh! Unleashing a barrage of fire from his fists, he urged Katara to leave with the Avatar immediately. ¡§I¡¦ll them off as long as I can!¡¨ He shouted amidst a hailstorm of fire balls, keeping even the Dai Li at bay.

If I stunned by the Avatar being shot, then I was truly appalled by Uncle¡¦s latest move. Didn¡¦t he realize what was going on? Why was he undoing my good work? There was nothing I could do as I stood paralyzed, not knowing what to say as the Dai Li shot up crystals and pinned Uncle in place. I tried to gauge Uncle¡¦s expression, and his face said it all. Dipping his eyes, he tilted away from me, his lips pursed into a fume. Without a doubt, I knew he was extremely ashamed of me, and didn¡¦t want to have anything to do with my latest achievement, no matter how great it was.

For the rest of the day, I was in complete silence, not knowing what to think. I had what I wanted, with my honour in sight, but it was at a great expense. I had to burn the very bridge that brought me here, turning the one relative I loved the most into a prisoner rather than a hero. ¡§I betrayed Uncle,¡¨ I muttered.

"No, he betrayed you,¡¨ Azula pointed out, claiming that Uncle had a chance to choose our side, but defended the Avatar instead. Even then, something about the case made it not feel right. Was Uncle truly nothing but a pawn to me? Could I truly cast him aside all because he no longer shared my goals? Even though he was now truly a traitor, did that justify my actions in abandoning him like that?

"No, it can¡¦t be,¡¨ I murmured, stepping away from Azula. I couldn¡¦t have done the wrong thing, because I had the right intention. I wanted Uncle to regain glory with me, and it was him who chose to cast me aside. Determined to set things right, I made a note to cut all ties with this person, at least for the time being. If he didn¡¦t see it as a goal worth pursuing, then he might as well say this nephew of his wasn¡¦t worth it either.

*****

"You brought this on yourself, you know,¡¨ I stared into the dark cell before me, my eyes squinting at the back of the shadowed figure hunched over at the far wall. It had been over a week since my glorious return to the Fire Nation, where my sister and I were feted as heroes. Father now restored my honour, I was respected by staff and servants alike in the palace, and I now started dating my childhood friend Mai. For now, I felt like life couldn¡¦t be better, and nothing could drag me down.

But soon, my actions at Ba Sing Se caught up to me, as the man I decided to cut all ties with soon appeared in my thoughts like an apparition. Uncle was returned to the Fire Nation as a traitor, and was sentenced to life imprisonment. While Dad was proud of how I sided with the nation by turning on Uncle, it ate away at my mind that Uncle chose not to join my quest, almost like he did it just to rebel against me. Even when I had his interests at heart, how could he refuse my offer?

And that was where I found myself, sneaking out of the palace in the middle of the night and visiting Uncle Iroh at his cell. I made sure the night-shift guards kept my visit a secret, as not to spread the news of my presence. Deep down, Uncle was still on my mind, as I had to figure out what he was up to. ¡§We could have returned together,¡¨ I scolded the seated figure with his back towards me, ¡§you could have been a hero!¡¨

Surprisingly, there was no response from the usually talkative man. I knew Uncle often had weird proverbs and other wisdom during times like this, so to get the silent treatment from him was quite alarming. ¡§You have no right to judge me. I did what I had to do in Ba Sing Se, and you¡¦re a fool for not joining me.¡¨ I insisted.

Again, no response from the heavyset man. Was he trying to play mind games with me? What was he trying to prove by not addressing my points? Maybe this was part of his plan all along, knowing that I vowed to cut ties with him, but realizing that I was the first to crack and returned begging to him. Finally, my frustration took over as I grabbed the nearby stool and threw it against the wall, burning it to a crisp with a fire punch. ¡§You¡¦re a crazy old man,¡¨ I shouted, my voice echoing off the dark, damp walls, ¡§and if you weren¡¦t in jail, you¡¦d be sleeping in the gutter!¡¨

I stormed out in a huff, not wanting to deal with this disgusting individual for another second. If he felt it was alright to spend the rest of his life branded as a traitor and a prisoner, then that was his prerogative. One reason I went after the Avatar in Ba Sing Se was because I cared about Uncle too much to leave him out of the loop, and wanted to use this chance to bring us both back to the Fire Nation with our honour restored. But even in the face of life imprisonment, this former Fire Nation crown prince and general was willing to go with that. Didn¡¦t he have any dignity inside?

For the next few days, I tried my best to take my mind off Uncle, realizing that it was nothing more than his plan to make me feel guilty. Instead, I focused my energy on Mai, who I had bonded with during this time. Unlike Uncle, Mai truly appreciated what I was all about, and accepted my actions without question. As we enjoyed our picnic at the edge of the capital caldera, my mind was finally at ease from all that turmoil.

But then, Azula had to ruin the moment, claiming that she found out about my visits with Uncle. While she claimed to be looking out for me by warning me not to see him, it brought back a host of memories that pushed my legacy in question. What if the Avatar didn¡¦t die in Ba Sing Se? What if Father continued to have doubts about what happened? Azula told me she gave me the credit for slaying the last air bender, but what if that was a trap to get me in trouble? Suddenly, confusion swept my mind.

Believe it or not, I ended up returning to the very man I berated earlier, realizing that he was the only one I trusted with this conundrum. So, in the dead of the night, I returned to the same prison cell and approached him. And in my attempt to make nice, I brought him some dinner. ¡§I admit it, I have everything I¡¦ve always wanted, but it¡¦s not at all how I thought it would be,¡¨ I explained, sliding the box of komodo chicken into the cell, ¡§the truth is, I want your advice. I think the Avatar¡¦s still alive. I know he¡¦s out there, and I¡¦m losing my mind!¡¨ I exclaimed, grabbing onto the bars.

Again, Uncle refused to respond, forcing me to beg him for help. ¡§I¡¦m so confused, I want your help!¡¨ I pleaded, hoping he would turn around. I never expected it coming, but now I regretted threatening to severe all ties with him. Maybe had I not gone that route, he might still wish to speak with me? He knew how important he was to me, so why did he have to ignore me, despite the Ba Sing Se incident?

Soon, I had enough of him milking my guilt. ¡§Forget it, I¡¦ll solve this myself. Waste away in here for all you want!¡¨ I yelled, storming out of the cell in a hurry. Right now, I had to find someone who was willing to take on a secret mission for me, one that I had to accomplish before things got too far out of hand.

I ended hiring a strange individual with a third eye tattoo, who I heard had unusual fire bending abilities that could cause great damage. I also heard that he could carry through his missions with stealth and great efficiency, making him the best choice for hunting the Avatar. ¡§I want you to find the Avatar and end him,¡¨ I muttered, handing him a bag of coins, which the goateed man took into his metallic hand without a word.

The next few days were quite uneasy for me, as I had to juggle my Fire Prince duties all the while worrying over whether the Avatar would pop up again. It didn¡¦t help that I was sent on a forced vacation with Azula, Mai and Ty Lee, but overall it gave me some closure. Ember Island allowed me to come to terms with my past, and let me know that at least one person, Mai, was with me on this entire journey. So, even though I had some reservations in my mind, I felt confident enough to carry on with life.

But Uncle¡¦s actions still weighed on my mind, as I just couldn¡¦t come to terms as to how quickly he disregarded the bond that formed between us during our exile. As I told him many times already, I did what I did at Ba Sing Se for both our interests. Never in my mind had I considered taking actions that threatened his well-being. And even when I tried to reconcile with him, bringing him some palace food as opposed to making him eat prison food, he still rejected me. I wasn¡¦t convinced that I meant nothing to him, and that he no longer saw a bond with me. But after the last few incidents, I was no longer sure of that. Whatever Uncle had in mind, it most likely didn¡¦t involve me.

*****

"You sent this, didn¡¦t you?¡¨ I demanded, waving the note outside Uncle¡¦s prison cell. Just when I was getting back into a routine for my life, this bombshell of a note was dropped off mysteriously outside my bedroom door one night. There was no information on the sender or who it was really addressed to. In fact, all it said was that I must figure out the death of my great-grandfather in order to discovery my true destiny.

And what a wild goose chase that led to, as I sneaked out of my room in at night, visiting the Dragon Tooth Catacombs, where the Fire Nation royals were entombed. Inside the chamber of my great-grandfather Sozin, I scoured through pages of documents outlining every detail of his long life and reign as the Fire Lord. From his history with Avatar Roku to his initial ambitions for the war, there was no single piece of information that I could use to clarify my confusion. In fact, all the dates and details only reminded me of how boring history class was in school. If making me sit through another boring history lecture was Uncle¡¦s way of torturing me, then I would say he succeeded here.

"I found the secret history, which by the way, should be renamed the history that most people already know!¡¨ I yelled, shoving the note into my cloak in disgust. As usual, the old man didn¡¦t face me, but at least I could see the side of his face rather than the back of his head. Maybe, with a couple more dirty tricks like this one, he would think we would be even, and started facing me more. ¡§He was still alive in the end!¡¨ I added, pointing out Fire Lord Sozin still directed the war even after the Air Nomad Genocide.

Finally, in what seemed like an eternity, Uncle lifted his head to face me. I could barely say anything, my anger starting to subside as I truly saw the face of the man who took care of me. It was smudged and caked with dust and dirt, with strands of loose hair draping over his temples. For a second, I was almost too shocked to speak, as I never imagined Uncle to be in this bad shape. For a while, I truly realized the damage I did to him, and even somewhat regretted my actions.

But it was his words that shocked me the most. ¡§You have more than one great-grandfather, Prince Zuko. Sozin was your father¡¦s grandfather,¡¨ he explained, his body now turned to face me completely. Despite the dimness, his posture was straighter and taller than ever, almost like we spoke as equals even though he was a prisoner while I was currently heir to the throne, ¡§your mother¡¦s grandfather was Avatar Roku.¡¨

It was like the whole wall at Ba Sing Se had collapsed onto me as Uncle unveiled this shocking news. ¡§Understanding the struggle between your two great-grandfathers can help you better understand the battle within yourself,¡¨ he continued as I dropped to my knees, too stunned to even react, ¡§evil and good are always at war inside you, Zuko. What happened generations ago, can be resolved now, by you! Because of your legacy, you alone can cleanse the sins of our family and the Fire Nation!¡¨ He declared.

My eyebrows curled to impossible shapes, wondering why Uncle now assigned the task of restoring balance to the world to me, rather than the very Avatar that he tried to save in Ba Sing Se. As I looked on, I could only imagine what Uncle was thinking: his generation, with the death of Lu Ten (thus ending Uncle¡¦s bloodline) and the sibling rivalry between Uncle and my father, pretty much left the Fire Nation in a mess. Despite our preference for order, there was certainly none as a power struggle ensued. And with Azula being unpredictable and manipulative as ever, I now saw why Uncle approached me: he saw me as the one to regain the nation¡¦s hope again.

Before I left, Uncle handed me a headpiece, supposedly the same one Avatar Roku wore when he was still alive. He didn¡¦t say anymore to me, only bidding me a good night¡¦s rest as I left his prison cell. I still had reservations about how I would proceed with this new information, as I wasn¡¦t exactly in the best position to change things up. Last war meeting was a private affair between my father and his closest advisors, hence the unexpected vacation to Ember Island with Azula, Mai and Ty Lee.

Plus, there was no telling that any of Uncle¡¦s words held any weight anyway. My father was already planning for an end to the war, and that would bring a great victory to the Fire Nation. Whatever uncertainty or dishonour that was brought upon by ancestors would be rectified then, as the Fire Nation at its peak would be a force to be reckoned with. Surely I could wait until then, after the nation was no longer completely wrapped in a war and I had gained some power, before I raised the issues with Dad, right?

But how wrong could I be, as I was invited to attend the next war meeting, just days before a supposed solar eclipse. My father wanted one final meeting to fine-tune all the details for the end of the war. Even though I behaved perfectly, avoiding the last war meeting disaster, I could tell something was up when he asked me for my opinion. Since I was amongst the Earth Kingdom commoners, he asked me to describe what I felt would be the best way to defeat the Earth Kingdom. It was Uncle¡¦s advice to me at my previous war meeting to keep my mouth shut that got me in trouble, so wasn¡¦t it ironic that Dad now welcomed my words? Hopefully this wouldn¡¦t end with another burn to the face.

Shortly after I told everyone that the Earth Kingdom¡¦s stubborn pride meant the people would refuse to concede as long as they had hope, my father and Azula came up with the most vicious and ruthless plan I had ever heard of. Claiming that they had to cut short any hope, the Fire Nation airship fleet would be flown over Earth Kingdom lands where elite fire benders would then raze everything to the ground. I sat in stunned silence as my father explained the plan to the generals, realizing that my Uncle¡¦s words were right on. This wasn¡¦t a war we were fighting, it was mass genocide. To turn every piece of land from the Wulong Forest to Ba Sing Se into ash was unacceptable to me. No wonder the world hated us right now, with all these disgusting acts that reduced people¡¦s lives into nothing. That was when I realized that whatever action required to regain the Fire Nation¡¦s glory and to protect the people of the world must be initiated right now.

I decided to make my move on the day of the solar eclipse, just when the entire capital city would be evacuated. Azula heard that the Avatar¡¦s group planned an invasion on that day, so the best strategy was to lay low, wait out the eclipse, before launching our full-scale attack on them. While everyone rushed into large underground bunkers, I was at the palace, making my final preparations. I gathered all my essentials, along with my two swords, and prepared to head out. ¡§I¡¦m going to set things right,¡¨ I decided.

As I entered the bunkers, I thought about how I would confront my father and speak my mind to him, telling him I would no longer conform to his ways and would join the Avatar. But most importantly, I would free Uncle from his prison and apologized to him for my actions. Uncle Iroh was the one who taught me to embrace the world, and he was the one who tried to pull me to the right path when I was lost and confused in my period of exile. So even if I didn¡¦t do it for my ancestors or my nation, then at the very least I had to do it for Uncle. Taking a deep breath, I ventured into the abyss below, my mind filled with uncertainty as I started my journey of rectification.

*****

To be continued...

[Canada Cowboy]

Continued from above post...

*****

Despite this being a breezeless summer night, I felt anything but calm and warm as I crouched outside the large tent. My journey of redemption had been anything but uneventful, as I ended up taking a war balloon to chase after the Avatar¡¦s group. My status as a traitor and fugitive was pretty much confirmed when I faced off against my father, who tried to shoot me down with lightning. I managed to save myself by using the very technique Uncle taught me, and redirected the blast right back at him. While my nerves were still shaking as I hurried out, I couldn¡¦t help but feel a great sense of pride as I didn¡¦t let my uncle down. After all that he taught me, the very least I could do was honour this move that he created, something that I vowed never to forget.

But getting acceptance from Uncle again would be the most difficult part, even more difficult than getting acceptance from the Avatar¡¦s group. While their blind earth bender, Toph, seemed willing to include me into their group, the rest of the team was adamant in keeping me out. It was only after I tried to ward off the very assassin I hired to hunt them down that they finally welcomed me to the group.

"Are you okay?¡¨ I heard a female voice ask from behind me. I lifted my head to see Katara, the water bending girl, hovering above me. It was kind of ironic that she was the one to approach me, as she was the most dead-set throwing me out of the group. The Avatar, Aang, started warming up to me, with the first true test of our bond coming on a trip to the Sun Warriors to learn fire bending from two dragons. He was followed by Sokka, Katara¡¦s brother, who requested my help in breaking his father out of prison. But Katara, she only truly accepted me when I brought her face-to-face with the former leader of the Sea Ravens, the man who killed her mother. Thankfully, she managed to find some closure from that incident, allowing her to truly release her hatred of fire benders.

"My uncle hates me, and I know it,¡¨ I glumly responded. It was just days before Sozin¡¦s Comet arrived, and Aang had to take on my father in order to end the war. But for some strange reason, he disappeared from our group in the middle of the night. Even when we tried tracing his scent, it didn¡¦t work. So the next best thing was to track down my uncle, who could provide the best wisdom for now. ¡§He loved me and supported me in every way he could, and I still turned against him. How can I even face him?¡¨

"Zuko, you¡¦re sorry for what you did, right?¡¨ Katara asked. Her words struck hard into my heart, as I realized how truly ashamed I was of my actions. I truly wanted to tell Uncle how much he meant to me, and how wrong it was for me to abandon him. ¡§If you are, then he¡¦ll forgive you. He will.¡¨ Katara assured me.

Taking a deep breath, I slowly made my way into the tent. This camp was actually set up by the Order of the White Lotus, a group of elderly but skilled and wise warriors that transcended borders, united by a common goal: seeking wisdom from philosophy, beauty, and truth. I actually had some experience with them before, as they were the ones who smuggled Uncle and me into Ba Sing Se when we were fugitives, all thanks to Uncle¡¦s lotus tile. From what the members told me, my uncle was the leader of the group, colloquially addressed as the Grand Lotus. But for me, it didn¡¦t matter how many high ranks he held, as there was only one title that I wished he would regain: Zuko¡¦s uncle. It might not mean anything to the world, but it meant everything to me. So was he willing to let that be bestowed on him once again? ¡§Uncle,¡¨ I began, my voice weak and hoarse.

Only a series of snores greeted me as a heavyset man snoozed away at the bed. If Uncle had a better way of showing he was still himself, this was it. The snoring sounds brought me back to my time in exile, when Uncle and I would be stuck together on a ship or some Fire Nation camp, and his room was usually right next to mine. Even with the doors closed, I still heard him through the walls, reminding me who truly accompanied me through those years. Back then, when the slumber ended, I awoke each morning to light-hearted jokes and confusing philosophies. Now, I doubted I would get any more than a snort. Kind of fitting, I guessed, given how I showed the world what a loser pig I was by betraying Uncle. ¡§It¡¦s too late to apologize,¡¨ I thought, ¡§it¡¦s too late.¡¨

I could only sit before his bed, letting the thoughts eat away at my mind as his every inhale and exhale counted down to my impending doom. While Uncle slept without any worry, I was a nervous wreck, as I was still wondering what would happen when he woke up and saw my face. Would he shun me the way I shunned him? Perhaps I didn¡¦t do a good enough job in the past of convincing him how important he was to me, and now he wouldn¡¦t reciprocate that feeling. How about the fact that he mentioned to me, several times, that I was like his surrogate son after Lu Ten died? Maybe that thought was still stuffed in the deepest part of his mind, and there were hopes that it would return?

I could feel the tent warming up as the sun¡¦s rays seeped through the opening behind me and under the fabric of the tent. My eyes tilted around nervously, realizing that I didn¡¦t sleep at all, but didn¡¦t have the courage to do so. Uncle could be seen stirring, meaning judgment time had arrived. Uncle finally lifted his body from the bed, shaking his head a couple of times before pausing. That was when my whole body froze up, as he knew I was here the whole night, and was probably none-too-impressed by it.

To no one¡¦s surprise, Uncle whipped his back around, refusing to face me. I could only let my emotions conquer me as I addressed him. ¡§Uncle, I know you must have mixed feelings about seeing me, but I want you to know, I am so, so sorry, Uncle.¡¨ Warm tears flooded my face as I poured my heart out, knowing full well that I couldn¡¦t move on with this shame bottled in me. The fluid clouded my eyes fully, impairing my vision as I continued, ¡§I¡¦m so sorry and ashamed of what I did. I don¡¦t know how I can make it up to you¡K¡¨ I blubbered, almost at a loss for words as tears flooded the floor below.

But I couldn¡¦t continue as I was violently jerked from my position and into a huge bear hug, with a pair of strong arms putting the squeeze on me. I opened my eyes and felt Uncle there, holding me tight in this embrace. I was hit by a second wave of emotions, this time containing shock, relief, and happiness all at once. ¡§How could you forgive me so easily? I thought you would be furious with me!¡¨ I stuttered, not knowing what to say.

Uncle¡¦s response told me everything, as his voice was just as hoarse as mine. Filled with emotions and tears of his own, Uncle explained that he had never been angry with me. ¡§I was sad because I was afraid you¡¦d lost your way,¡¨ he informed me, finally letting me go. Holding my face, he got a good look at me, and also showed me the joyful expression of his own as he continued, ¡§But you found it again, and you did it by yourself too. And I am so happy you found your way here, back to me.¡¨

Both of us put on a smile as we embraced one more time. ¡§It wasn¡¦t that hard, Uncle. You have a pretty strong scent.¡¨ I told him how I tried using his old smelly sandal to track him, which ended up being the first joke we shared since our reunion. How I missed those moments, and was I ever happy that it was now regained.

I brought him outside, where Aang¡¦s group waited eagerly for me. Every single one of them had a huge smile on their faces as they finally witnessed the long-awaited reunion. After some congratulations and well-wishes on our reconciliation, we gathered for breakfast to discuss our next move. Realizing that a fight against my father was all but inevitable, I insisted that Uncle Iroh be the one to battle him. ¡§We need you to come with us,¡¨ I insisted, my knuckles turning white as I squeezed my chopsticks to death.

"No, Zuko. It won¡¦t turn out well,¡¨ Uncle replied, claiming that it would only resemble a fierce sibling rivalry in which power-hungry brothers killed each other just to seize power. ¡§The only way for this war to end peacefully, is for the Avatar to defeat the Fire Lord,¡¨ he concluded in that calm demeanour that I missed listening to so much.

Nodding my head, I realized why he would choose such a method. My Uncle had never truly been a cruel and violent person, despite his vast experience as a fighter. Add the fact that he was close to the spirits and I understood why Uncle wanted Aang to do the job. But Uncle was a former crown prince, so perhaps he could become the new Fire Lord when this was over? ¡§Then would you come to take your rightful place?¡¨ I asked.

Again, Uncle refused, claiming that new blood was necessary to renew the Fire Nation and let fire benders regain their honour in the world. ¡§It must be an idealist with a pure heart and unquestionable honour,¡¨ he stated, ¡§It has to be you, Zuko.¡¨

I could only stutter as several pairs of eyes turned to me. From my left to right, I saw Toph, Sokka, the Kyoshi Warrior Suki, and Katara all eagerly waiting for my answer to Uncle¡¦s offer. Did they truly believe I could be the one to help Aang restore balance to the world? ¡§But I¡¦ve made so many mistakes,¡¨ I pointed out, feeling increasingly uneasy.

Then Uncle said what I thought I would never expect him to say, even with his undying support through the years. ¡§You struggled, you suffered, but you have always followed your own path,¡¨ he explained. Just when I thought Uncle couldn¡¦t be more motivating, he pulled off the surprise of my life as inspiration pooled in his eyes. ¡§You restored your own honour, and only you can restore the honour of the Fire Nation.¡¨

I bit my lips, not sure what to make of this. I appreciated everything Uncle told me, especially the amount of faith he placed on me. But I was still only getting used to having him back, and now I must venture onto yet another journey? This time, it was likely that I would have to go alone, as Uncle was intent not to mix too many old ideas in with my fresher ones, so what if I wasn¡¦t ready? And even if I could end the war, what must I do to face my people within the Fire Nation, many of whom might be confused by the turn of events? ¡§I¡¦ll try, Uncle,¡¨ I responded, my voice barely above a murmur.

While I pondered over my options, it was decided by our group that Katara and I would head to the Fire Nation capital to face off against Azula. From what I recalled, my father was supposed to lead a fleet of airships to burn down the Earth Kingdom, so that meant Azula was bound to be in the Fire Nation palace. While Toph, Sokka, and Suki went after the air fleet, Katara and I would challenge Azula, leaving Uncle with the Order of the White Louts, who would then tackle Ba Sing Se. ¡§When I was a boy, I had a vision that I would one day take Ba Sing Se. Only now do I see that my destiny is to take it back from the Fire Nation so that the Earth Kingdom can be free again,¡¨ Uncle stated.

With that, an Eel Hound was brought forth for Sokka¡¦s team to head to the airship base, while Katara and I would fly on Aang¡¦s Sky Bison to the Fire Nation capital. Even though I knew Azula could very well overpower me, I brimmed with confidence after hearing Uncle¡¦s words. Perhaps a new age was about to come, and it was time that we took destiny into our own hands, rather than let things be dictated to us and having us whine about our outcomes. As we gathered one last time before we departed, Uncle gave us his final blessing. ¡§Today, destiny is our friend, I know it.¡¨ He proclaimed.

As we left the camp, I could only think of all the encouragement Uncle gave me through the years, and how much they meant to me. But it was here that I also realized one thing: I meant a lot to Uncle as well. For him to give up his throne, his ideals, and even his place in the Fire Nation hierarchy all for me, that showed how much faith he had in my abilities. Even with my flaws, he always saw me as the one to restore our nation¡¦s honour. So now I realized the stakes were even higher, as I couldn¡¦t possibly let the man who taught me everything down. Even with him living out the rest of his life as a tea shop owner in Ba Sing Se, he was still a man that I trusted, respected, and loved. And for that, there was no way I could dishonour the effort he put into bringing me up.

*****

"And that¡¦s how I broke out of prison,¡¨ Uncle concluded as we finished setting up the final tables. The final battle, which took place on two fronts, was a victory for our side. Aang told me that he was with a giant Lion Turtle the entire time we were looking for him, and the beast dropped him off at the Wulong Forest just in time for the airship fleet to arrive. The Lion Turtle managed to teach Aang an ancient technique that allowed him to strip my father of his bending without killing him, therefore meeting Aang¡¦s goal of not taking a life. I had to admit that I was amazed at that story, given how Lion Turtles were only mentioned in legends. I swore that if I had time, I was research this a bit more.

But mirroring Aang, I also had my successful battle against Azula. Despite not being able to redirect her lightning completely, Katara managed to make enough moves against Azula to chain her down, preventing any more damage from being done. Now, with my father in prison and Azula in an asylum, I was crowned Fire Lord. During my coronation, I told the world that I promised Uncle I would restore the honour of the Fire Nation. ¡§But with the Avatar¡¦s help, we can get the world back on the right path,¡¨ I recalled saying, ¡§and begin a new era of love, peace, and hope.¡¨

As I prepared tea cups for our special guests, Uncle pulled out his horn, another item that I sorely missed. During my exile, I thought Uncle¡¦s music nights on the boat were pointless and boring, but it was only after my lonely return to the Fire Nation that I changed my mind. Sometimes, it was the simple pleasures that meant the most. Being in the company of friends and family, talking to a person that you trusted and respected, and just basking in the warmth and comfort of those who appreciated you in return, these were things that no money and power could grant you. When Uncle and I finally patched things up, I also believed this point was quite significant between Uncle and me.

And as our guests, which consisted of Aang and Katara, Sokka and Suki, Toph, and my girlfriend Mai, began arriving, I truly realzied why Uncle preferred this lifestyle. While I had much responsibility ahead of me, starting with the first meeting between a Fire Lord and an Earth King (Kuei, who recently returned to the throne after some time in exile) in decades, I must remember to enjoy the simple pleasures in life, especially if I wanted my reign to be a successful one. Perhaps it was somewhat fitting that I would base my method after Uncle¡¦s, as he was the Fire Lord that never was. Maybe, by fulfilling my promise to Uncle, I was also extending his legacy, and incorporating it into a larger one to call my own? As I watched him perform his music to my friends, only one thought crossed my mind¡K

This is Iroh. That was his story. Those were his rites of passage.